TOSHIBA Portable Printer

B-EP Series
External Equipment Interface Specification

First Edition: September 19, 2008

Second Edition: May 11, 2009
 MODIFICATION HISTORY
EAA-02465 EXTERNAL EQUIPMENT INTERFACE SPECIFICATION

Modified
Date Description
Pages
Sep. 19, 2008 – Newly published.
May 11, 2009 2-2 2.3 WEIGHT and 2.5 HEAD SPECIFICATION:
Values were changed.
3-4 to 7, 45, 3.2.3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL:
46, 48, 49 3.5.2 NOTES WHEN SENDING A COMMAND:
(including Ir packet error) was added to Command syntax error.
3-40, 41, The following sections were added:
42, 51, 53, 3.2.9/3.3.1/3.4.1/3.5.3/3.6.1/3.7.4/3.8.4
74, 77 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO
POWER SAVE MODE
3-43 3.5 RS-232C INTERFACE:
Received buffer was changed from 64K bytes to 512K bytes.
3-76 3.8.3.1 INFRASTRUCTURE MODE (ESS):
3.8.3.2 ADHOC MODE (IBSS):
Time-related description was added.
4-6 to 25 The following sections were added:
4.2.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND
4.2.3.1 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND
4.2.3.2 BARCODE/2-D CODE FORMAT COMMAND
4.2.3.3 GRAPHIC COMMAND
4.2.3.4 PC SAVE COMMAND
4-29 to 42 The following sections were added:
4.3.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND
4.3.3.1 COMMAND PROCESSING
4.3.3.2 FORM STORE COMMAND
4.3.3.3 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND
4-47 to 51 The following sections were added:
4.4.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND
4.4.3.1 PAGE MODE PROCESSING
4-56 to 60 The following sections were added:
4.5.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND
4.5.3.1 PAGE MODE PROCESSING
5-1, 2, 5.1/6.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION:
6-1, 2 Descriptions were changed.
5-7, 6-6 5.3.1/6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND:
Paper thickness was added to the lists.
5-14 to 16 5.4.1 PRINT START POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND:
[Explanation] (5) Descriptions were added.
[Explanation] under (5) was deleted.
[Strip position fine adjustment] Figures were changed when the label-to-label
gap is 3 mm. Figures were added when the gap is 7 mm.
(up to V1.0C) was added.
[Notes] (6), (7) and (8) were added.

<1>
 Modified
Date Description
Pages
May 11, 2009 5-18, 19, 5.4.2/7.4.3/10.7.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND:
(Continued) 7-10, 11, [Term] Terms were added to [d]:
10-11, 12 3: Print quality oriented, 5: Auto2
[Explanation] (6) Descriptions were added.
5-33 5.6.2 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND:
Point counts were added for Gothic725 Black.
5-41 5.6.2 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND:
[Explanation] (10), (11) Descriptions were added.
5-141 5.7.1 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND:
The max. number of characters was changed from 64 to 63.
5-164 5.8.1 ISSUE COMMAND:
[Explanation] (4) Status response-related description was deleted.
5-167 5.8.2 FEED COMMAND:
[Notes] (4) Description was added.
5-191 5.12.3 SAVED DATA READ COMMAND:
[Notes] (6) Descriptions were added.
5-192 5.13.1 HEAD BROKEN DOTS CHECK COMMAND:
[Explanation] (2), (3) and (4) Descriptions were added.
5-193 5.13.2 MESSAGE DISPLAY COMMAND:
[Notes] (2) A 'head' was changed to a 'cover.'
5-196, 6-73, 5.14.1 RESET COMMAND:
7-42 6.12.1/7.9.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND:
[Notes] (3) USB interface-related descriptions were deleted.
5-198, 199, 5.15.1/6.13.1/7.10.1/8.11.3/10.9.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND:
201, 5.12.2/6.13.2/7.10.2/8.11.4
6-57, 58, RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND:
75, 76, 79, 6.6.1 DATA PRINT COMMAND:
7-43, 44, (including Ir packet error) was added to Command syntax error.
46,
8-88, 89,
91,
10-16, 17,
19, 20
5-204, 205 5.15.3/6.13.3/7.10.3/8.11.5/10.9.2
6-82, 83, MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND:
7-49, Spaces („) are added to the lists.
8-94, 95,
10-22
6-12, 13 6.4.1 PRINT START POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND:
[Explanation] (10) Descriptions were added.
[Notes] Terms were added to (3), (7) and (8) were added.
6-14, 15 6.4.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND:
[Term] Terms were added to [d]:
3: Print quality oriented, 5: Auto2
[Explanation] (7) Descriptions were added.
6-57 6.6.1 DATA PRINT COMMAND:
[Explanation] (12) Status response-related description was deleted.
6-67 6.9.1 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND:
[Term] The max. number of dots was changed.

<2>
 Modified
Date Description
Pages
May 11, 2009 7-24 7-5-10 NO. OF COLUMNS (STRINGS) COMMAND:
(Continued) The number of columns was represented in hex.
8-67 8.10.47 BARCODE PRINT COMMAND:
[Explanation] "NO." was changed to "No."
8-87 8.11.2 RESET COMMAND:
[Notes] (2) and (3) were deleted.
9-2 9.2.1 COMMAND SYNTAX ERROR:
e was added.
9-6 The following section was added:
9.5 CHARGING ERROR
9-10 9-11 STATUS VALUES:
'Bluetooth Initialization error' values were corrected in the list.
9-10, 12 9-11 STATUS VALUES:
'Ir packet error' items were added to the list.
9-12 9-11 STATUS VALUES:
'Wait for battery recovery' values were corrected in the list.
9-13 9-11 STATUS VALUES:
Description was corrected and note was deleted.
10-4, 5 10.6.2 MODE SELECT COMMAND:
[Explanation] (3) ESC/POS was added.
[Notes] (2) Terms were corrected.
10-8 to 10 10.7.1 PRINT START POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND:
[Explanation] (5) Descriptions were changed.
[Strip position fine adjustment] Figures were changed when the label-to-label
gap is 3 mm. Figures were added when the gap is 7 mm.
[Notes] Terms were added to (3), (6), (7) and (8) were added.
10-14 10.8.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND:
[Explanation] (3) Descriptions were changed.
[Notes] (1) and (2) were added.
10-26 10.10.4 INTERVAL/WINDOW SETTING AT THE INQUIRY/PAGE:
[Explanation] (5) was added.
11-11, 13, 11.11.3 DETAIL STATUS:
15, 17, 18 11.12 LCD MESSAGES AND LED INDICATIONS:
11.14 LCD MESSAGES IN DIFFERENT LANGUAGES:
Ir PACKET ERROR items were added to the lists.
12-1 The following section was added:
12.2.1 UTF-8 CHARACTER CODE
12-9 to 12 12.3 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE,
COURIER, GOTHIC725 Black:
(15) UTF-8 was added.
12-16 12.4 PRESENTATION:
(8) UTF-8 was added.
12-20 12.5 OCR-A:
(8) UTF-8 was added.
12-24 12.6 OCR-B:
(7) UTF-8 was added.

<3>
 Modified
Date Description
Pages
May 11, 2009 12-25 to 32 The following sections were added:
(Continued) 12-7 STANDARD CHARACTER (in Japan)/KANJI (16 x 16) (in Japan)/
KANJI (24 x 24)(in Japan)
12-8 STANDARD CHARACTER (outside Japan)
12-9 CHINESE CHARACTER (24 x 24) (outside Japan)
12-10 KOREAN CHARACTER (24 x 24) (outside Japan)
12-33, 34 12.11 BOLD CHARACTER:
12.12 PRICE CHARACTER 1/ PRICE CHARACTER 2
The following items were added:
(1) Other than UTF-8
(2) UTF-8
12-35, 43, 12.13 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1:
44 The font type 'K' was added.
(3) UTF-8 was added.
12-45 12.14 PRICE FONT 1, 2, 3:
(1) 'All types of character codes' were changed to 'Other than UTF-8.'
(2) UTF-8 was added.
13-1, 13-2 KANJI CODE:
14-1, 14-2 CHINESE CODE:
15-1 15-2 KOREAN CODE:
UTF-8-related descriptions were added.
13-1 The following section was added:
13.3 RESTRICTIONS ON DISCLOSURE OF SPECIFICATIONS
Contents In accordance with the changes above, page numbers were changed.

<4>
 TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page

1. SCOPE/GENERAL DESCRIPTION ..............................................................................................................1-1

1.1 SCOPE ....................................................................................................................................................1-1

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................1-1

1.2.1 SPECIFICATION ORGANIZATION ................................................................................................1-1

2. OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS .................................................................................................................2-1

2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................2-1

2.2 DIMENSION ............................................................................................................................................2-2

2.3 WEIGHT ..................................................................................................................................................2-2

2.4 PRINTING METHOD ...............................................................................................................................2-2

2.5 HEAD SPECIFICATION ..........................................................................................................................2-2

2.6 PRINT SPEED ........................................................................................................................................2-2

2.7 PRINT MODE ..........................................................................................................................................2-2

2.8 FONT TYPE ............................................................................................................................................2-3

2.8.1 BIT MAP FONT ...............................................................................................................................2-3

2.8.2 OUTLINE FONT ..............................................................................................................................2-4

2.9 TYPE OF BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE ................................................................................2-4

2.9.1 BARCODE ......................................................................................................................................2-4

2.9.2 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE ..........................................................................................................2-4

2.10 FORMAT STORAGE ...............................................................................................................................2-4

2.11 GRAPHIC STORAGE..............................................................................................................................2-4

2.12 WRITABLE CHARACTER STORAGE ....................................................................................................2-5

2.13 INTERFACE ............................................................................................................................................2-5

2.14 POWER SOURCE...................................................................................................................................2-5

2.15 SWITCH ..................................................................................................................................................2-5

2.16 SENSOR .................................................................................................................................................2-5

2.17 LED .........................................................................................................................................................2-5

2.18 LCD .........................................................................................................................................................2-6

2.19 SPEAKER ...............................................................................................................................................2-6

2.20 ISSUE MODE ..........................................................................................................................................2-6

2.21 PAPER ....................................................................................................................................................2-6

2.22 CUT .........................................................................................................................................................2-7

2.23 BROKEN HEAD DOTS CHECK FUNCTION ..........................................................................................2-7

2.24 STATUS TRANSMISSION ......................................................................................................................2-7

2.25 AUTO LABEL POSITIONING FUNCTION ..............................................................................................2-7

i
 Page

2.26 STATUS PRINTING ................................................................................................................................2-7

2.27 CONTINUOUS PRINTING FUNCTION ...................................................................................................2-7

2.28 STRIP ISSUE ..........................................................................................................................................2-8

3. INTERFACE..................................................................................................................................................3-1

3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................3-1

3.2 IrDA INTERFACE (TEC Protocol) ...........................................................................................................3-2

3.2.1 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PHYSICAL LAYER AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD ..........3-2

3.2.2 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL ...............................................................................................................3-3

3.2.3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL ..........................................................................................................3-3

3.2.4 HOW TO SEND THE DATA PRINT COMMAND WHICH CANNOT BE INCLUDED IN ONE

PACKET IN THE LABEL MODE ...................................................................................................3-11

3.2.5 CONNECTION SEQUENCE EXAMPLE ( LABEL MODE) ............................................................3-12

3.2.6 CONNECTION SEQUENCE EXAMPLE (TPCL, RECEIPT OR ESC/POS MODE) ......................3-32

3.2.7 PRINTER STATE TRANSITION (LABEL MODE) .........................................................................3-38

3.2.8 PRINTER STATE TRANSITION (TPCL, RECEIPT OR ESC/POS MODE) ..................................3-39

3.2.9 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE .3-40

3.3 IrDA (IrCOMM) INTERFACE .................................................................................................................3-41

3.3.1 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE .3-41

3.4 IrDA (IrOBEX) INTERFACE ..................................................................................................................3-42

3.4.1 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE .3-42

3.5 RS-232C INTERFACE ..........................................................................................................................3-43

3.5.1 TRANSMISSION CONTROL (XON/XOFF PROTOCOL) .............................................................3-43

3.5.2 NOTES WHEN SENDING A COMMAND .....................................................................................3-44

3.5.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE .3-51

3.6 USB INTERFACE ..................................................................................................................................3-52

3.6.1 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE .3-53

3.7 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE ...................................................................................................................3-54

3.7.1 OUTLINED SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................................................3-54

3.7.2 BLUETOOTH DEVICE ADDRESS (BD ADDRESS) .....................................................................3-55

3.7.3 STANDARD COMMUNICATION SEQUENCE OF BLUETOOTH INTERFACE ...........................3-56

3.8 WIRELESS LAN INTERFACE ...............................................................................................................3-75

3.8.1 OUTLINED SPECIFICATIONS .....................................................................................................3-75

3.8.2 MAC ADDRESS ............................................................................................................................3-76

3.8.3 CONNECTION SEQUENCE .........................................................................................................3-76

3.8.4 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE .3-77

ii
 Page

4. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE......................................................................................................................4-1

4.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................4-1

4.2 TPCL MODE ...........................................................................................................................................4-2

4.2.1 INITIAL SETTING ...........................................................................................................................4-2

4.2.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION ...........................................................................................................4-4

4.2.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND ........................................................................4-6

4.3 LABEL MODE .......................................................................................................................................4-26

4.3.1 INITIAL SETTING .........................................................................................................................4-26

4.3.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION .........................................................................................................4-28

4.3.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND ......................................................................4-29

4.4 RECEIPT MODE ...................................................................................................................................4-43

4.4.1 INITIAL SETTING .........................................................................................................................4-43

4.4.2 RECEIPT ISSUE OPERATION.....................................................................................................4-44

4.4.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND ......................................................................4-47

4.5 ESC/POS MODE ...................................................................................................................................4-52

4.5.1 INITIAL SETTING .........................................................................................................................4-52

4.5.2 RECEIPT ISSUE OPERATION.....................................................................................................4-53

4.5.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND ......................................................................4-56

5. TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) .............................................................................................5-1

5.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................5-1

5.2 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS.....................................................................................................................5-3

5.2.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND ..........................................................................................5-3

5.2.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE ..........................................................................................................5-3

5.2.3 PRECAUTIONS ..............................................................................................................................5-3

5.3 COMMANDS RELATED TO SETTING ...................................................................................................5-4

5.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND [ESC] D ..........................5-4

5.3.2 PRINTER ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID .......................5-10

5.3.3 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M ........................5-11

5.4 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................................5-13

5.4.1 PRINT START POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX ......................5-13

5.4.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY ......................5-18

5.4.3 STRIP SENSOR ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AH ......................5-21

5.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO CLEAR .....................................................................................................5-22

5.5.1 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND [ESC] C ........................5-22

5.5.2 CLEAR AREA COMMAND [ESC] XR ......................5-23

iii
 Page

5.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO DRAWING FORMAT ...............................................................................5-25

5.6.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] LC ......................5-25

5.6.2 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PC ......................5-32

5.6.3 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PV ......................5-49

5.6.4 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] XB ......................5-67

(WPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, EAN128, Customer Barcode, POSTNET, RM4SCC, KIX CODE)

5.6.5 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] XB ......................5-82

(MSI, Interleaved 2 of 5, CODE39, NW7, Industrial 2 of 5, MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC)

5.6.6 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND (GS1 Databar) [ESC] XB ......................5-92

5.6.7 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Data Matrix) [ESC] XB ....................5-102

5.6.8 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (PDF417) [ESC] XB ....................5-112

5.6.9 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MicroPDF417) [ESC] XB ....................5-119

5.6.10 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (QR Code) [ESC] XB ....................5-127

5.6.11 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MaxiCode) [ESC] XB ....................5-135

5.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO PRINT DATA .........................................................................................5-141

5.7.1 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RC ....................5-141

5.7.2 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RV ....................5-146

5.7.3 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE DATA COMMAND [ESC] RB ....................5-149

(Any codes other than MaxiCode)

5.7.4 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE DATA COMMAND (MaxiCode) [ESC] RB ....................5-160

5.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO ISSUE AND FEED .................................................................................5-162

5.8.1 ISSUE COMMAND [ESC] XS ....................5-162

5.8.2 FEED COMMAND [ESC] T .......................5-166

5.8.3 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND [ESC] XF ....................5-168

5.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO FORMAT ...............................................................................................5-170

5.9.1 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1 .....................5-170

5.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO WRITABLE CHARACTERS ...................................................................5-171

5.10.1 2-BYTE WRITABLE CHARACTER CODE RANGE COMMAND [ESC] XE ....................5-171

5.10.2 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND [ESC] XD ....................5-173

5.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO GRAPHICS ............................................................................................5-181

5.11.1 GRAPHIC COMMAND [ESC] SG ....................5-181

5.12 COMMANDS RELATED TO PC COMMAND SAVING .......................................................................5-188

5.12.1 SAVE START COMMAND [ESC] XO ....................5-188

5.12.2 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND [ESC] XP ....................5-190

5.12.3 SAVED DATA READ COMMAND [ESC] XQ ....................5-191

5.13 COMMANDS RELATED TO CHECK ..................................................................................................5-192

5.13.1 HEAD BROKEN DOTS CHECK COMMAND [ESC] HD ....................5-192

iv
 Page

5.13.2 MESSAGE DISPLAY COMMAND [ESC] XJ .....................5-193

5.14 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL .............................................................................................5-195

5.14.1 RESET COMMAND [ESC] WR ...................5-195

5.14.2 BATCH RESET COMMAND [ESC] Z0 (ZERO) ............5-196

5.15 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS ................................................................................................5-197

5.15.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WS, [ESC] FM, [ESC] v .......5-197

5.15.2 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WB ...................5-200

5.15.3 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX ...................5-203

5.15.4 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WV ...................5-206

5.16 COMMANDS RELATED TO BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LAN .....................................................5-208

5.16.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT ......................5-208

5.16.2 BLUETOOTH RELATED PARAMETER ACUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WT ...................5-209

6. LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) ................................................................................................6-1

6.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................6-1

6.2 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS.....................................................................................................................6-3

6.2.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND ..........................................................................................6-3

6.2.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE ..........................................................................................................6-3

6.2.3 PRECAUTIONS ..............................................................................................................................6-3

6.3 COMMANDS RELATED TO SETTING ...................................................................................................6-4

6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND [ESC] D ..........................6-4

6.3.2 PRINTER ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID .........................6-7

6.3.3 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M ..........................6-8

6.4 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................................6-11

6.4.1 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX ......................6-11

6.4.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY ......................6-14

6.4.3 STRIP SENSOR THRESHOLD VALUE SET COMMAND [ESC] AZ ......................6-16

6.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO DRAWING FORMAT ...............................................................................6-17

6.5.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] LC ......................6-17

6.5.2 BIT MAP FONT FIELD COMMAND [ESC] PC ......................6-19

6.5.3 OUTLINE FONT FIELD COMMAND [ESC] PV ......................6-25

6.5.4 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MSI, ITF, CODE39, NW7) [ESC] XB ......................6-34

6.5.5 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (JAN8/EAN8, JAN13/EAN13) [ESC] XB ......................6-36

6.5.6 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (EAN128, UCC/EAN128) [ESC] XB ......................6-37

6.5.7 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (CODE128) [ESC] XB ......................6-38

6.5.8 BAR CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Customer Barcode) [ESC] XB ......................6-40

v
 Page

6.5.9 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (PDF417) [ESC] XB ......................6-41

6.5.10 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (QR Code) [ESC] XB ......................6-44

6.5.11 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Data Matrix) [ESC] XB ......................6-46

6.5.12 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MircoPDF417) [ESC] XB ......................6-48

6.5.13 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Maxicode) [ESC] XB ......................6-49

6.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO ISSUE AND FEED ...................................................................................6-55

6.6.1 DATA PRINT COMMAND X ...................................6-55

6.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO FORMAT .................................................................................................6-62

6.7.1 FLASH MEMORY STORAGE AREA FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1 .......................6-62

6.7.2 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND [ESC] XF ......................6-63

6.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO WRITABLE CHARACTERS .....................................................................6-65

6.8.1 WRITABLE CHARACTER DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] XD ......................6-65

6.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO GRAPHICS ..............................................................................................6-67

6.9.1 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] SG ......................6-67

6.9.2 GRAPHIC FIELD COMMAND [ESC] N ........................6-69

6.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO PC COMMAND SAVING .........................................................................6-70

6.10.1 FORM STORE START COMMAND [ESC] XO ......................6-70

6.10.2 FORM STORE TERMINATE COMMAND [ESC] XP ......................6-71

6.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO CHECK ....................................................................................................6-72

6.11.1 MESSAGE DISPLAY COMMAND [ESC] XJ .......................6-72

6.12 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL ...............................................................................................6-73

6.12.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] WR, [ESC] @ .....6-73

(zero)
6.12.2 BATCH RESET COMMAND [ESC] Z0 ................6-74
6.13 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS ..................................................................................................6-75

6.13.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS, [ESC] v .........6-75

6.13.2 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WB .....................6-78

6.13.3 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX .....................6-81

6.13.4 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WV .....................6-84

6.14 COMMANDS RELATED TO BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LAN .......................................................6-86

6.14.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT ........................6-86

6.14.2 BLUETOOTH RELATED PARAMETER ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WT .....................6-87

7. RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS) .............................................................................................7-1

7.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................7-1

7.2 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS.....................................................................................................................7-2

7.2.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND ..........................................................................................7-2

vi
 Page

7.2.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE ..........................................................................................................7-2

7.2.3 PRECAUTIONS ..............................................................................................................................7-3

7.3 COMMANDS RELATED TO SETTING ...................................................................................................7-4

7.3.1 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M ..........................7-4

7.3.2 PRINTER ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID .........................7-7

7.4 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT .................................................................................7-8

7.4.1 LINE FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] 3 ...........................7-8

7.4.2 PRINT POSITION ALIGN COMMAND [ESC] a ...........................7-9

7.4.3 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY ......................7-10

7.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO DRAWING FORMAT ...............................................................................7-12

7.5.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] L .........................7-12

7.5.2 FONT TYPE COMMAND [ESC] K .........................7-14

7.5.3 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] KV ......................7-15

7.5.4 BAR CODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE PRINT COMMAND [GS] k ...........................7-16

7.5.5 CHARACTER MAGNIFICATION COMMAND [ESC] ! ..........................7-18

7.5.6 BARCODE HORIZONTAL SIZE COMMAND [GS] w ...........................7-19

7.5.7 BARCODE HEIGHT COMMAND [GS] h ...........................7-21

7.5.8 NUMERALS UNDER BARS COMMAND [GS] Hn .........................7-22

7.5.9 SECURITY LEVEL COMMAND [GS] s ...........................7-23

7.5.10 NO. OF COLUMNS (STRINGS) COMMAND [GS] c ...........................7-24

7.5.11 PRINT WIDTH COMMAND [ESC] W ........................7-25

7.5.12 HORIZONTAL PRINT POSITION COMMAND [ESC] H ........................7-26

7.5.13 HORIZONTAL OFFSET POSITION COMMAND [ESC] O ........................7-28

7.5.14 CHARACTER ROTATE COMMAND [ESC] R ........................7-30

7.5.15 ERROR CORRECTION LEVEL SET COMMAND [GS] q ...........................7-31

7.5.16 QR CODE MODEL SET COMMAND [GS] r ............................7-32

7.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO ISSUE AND FEED ...................................................................................7-33

7.6.1 PRINT LINE FEED COMMAND [LF] ...............................7-33

7.6.2 BACK FEED OMISSION COMMAND [ESC] B .........................7-34

7.6.3 PAGE MODE SELECT COMMAND [GS] C ...........................7-35

7.6.4 PAGE MODE PRINT COMMAND [FF] ...............................7-36

7.6.5 PAGE MODE CANCEL COMMAND [CAN] ............................7-37

7.7 COMMANDS RELATED FORMAT .......................................................................................................7-38

7.7.1 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1 .......................7-38

7.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO GRAPHICS ..............................................................................................7-39

7.8.1 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] SG ......................7-39

vii
 Page

7.8.2 GRAPHIC PRINT COMMAND [GS] / ............................7-41

7.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL ...............................................................................................7-42

7.9.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] @, [ESC] WR .....7-42

7.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS ..................................................................................................7-43

7.10.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] v, [ [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS .......7-43

7.10.2 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WB .....................7-45

7.10.3 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX .....................7-48

7.10.4 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WV .....................7-50

7.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LAN .......................................................7-52

7.11.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT ........................7-52

7.11.2 BLUETOOTH RELATED PARAMETER ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WT .....................7-53

7.12 COMMANDS RELATED TO MACRO SETTING ...................................................................................7-54

7.12.1 MACRO DEFINITION COMMAND [GS] : ............................7-54

7.12.2 MACRO EXECUTE COMMAND [GS] ^ <Data> [NUL] .....7-55

7.13 EXAMPLES ...........................................................................................................................................7-56

7.13.1 EXAMPLES OF USING COMMANDS ......................................................7-56

8. ESC/POS (INTERFACE COMMANDS) ........................................................................................................8-1

8.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................8-1

8.2 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS.....................................................................................................................8-2

8.2.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND ..........................................................................................8-2

8.2.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE ..........................................................................................................8-2

8.2.3 PRECAUTIONS ..............................................................................................................................8-3

8.3 FONT SPECIFICATIONS ........................................................................................................................8-3

8.4 EXTERNAL (CUSTOM) CHARACTERS SPECIFICATIONS ..................................................................8-3

8.5 INPUT DATA BUFFER ............................................................................................................................8-3

8.6 VALUE SPECIFIED BY EACH COMMAND ............................................................................................8-4

8.7 EXPANSION OF PRINT DATA IN PRINT AREA ....................................................................................8-5

8.8 EXAMPLE OF RECEIPT PRINTER PRINT LAYOUT (B-EP2D) .............................................................8-6

8.9 EXCEPTION HANDLING ........................................................................................................................8-7

8.9.1 UNDEFINED CODE ........................................................................................................................8-7

8.9.2 UNDEFINED COMMAND ...............................................................................................................8-7

8.9.3 SETTING OUT OF DEFINED RANGE ...........................................................................................8-7

8.10 ESC/POS COMMANDS ..........................................................................................................................8-8

8.10.1 HORIZONTAL TAB COMMAND [HT].................................8-8

8.10.2 LINE FEED COMMAND [LF] .................................8-9

viii
 Page

8.10.3 PAGE MODE PRINT COMMAND [FF] ...............................8-10

8.10.4 PAGE MODE CANCEL COMMAND [CAN] ............................8-11

8.10.5 PAGE MODE COLLECTIVE PRINT COMMAND [ESC] [FF] .....................8-12

8.10.6 SPACING SET COMMAND [ESC] [SP] ....................8-13

8.10.7 PRINT MODE ALL SET COMMAND [ESC] ! ..........................8-14

8.10.8 DOWNLOADED CHARACTER (WRITABLE CHARACTER) SET COMMAND

[ESC] % ........................8-16

8.10.9 DOWNLOADED CHARACTER (WRITABLE CHARACTER) DEFINE COMMAND

[ESC] & .........................8-17

8.10.10 BIT IMAGE MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] * ..........................8-20

8.10.11 UNDERLINING SET COMMAND [ESC] - ..........................8-23

8.10.12 DOWNLOADED CHARACTER ERASE COMMAND [ESC] ? .........................8-24

8.10.13 30-DOT LINE FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] 2 .........................8-25

8.10.14 MINIMUM DOTS FOR LINE FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] 3 .........................8-26

8.10.15 PRINTER SELECT/DESELECT COMMAND [ESC] = .........................8-27

8.10.16 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] @ .......................8-28

8.10.17 HORIZONTAL TAB POSITIONS SET COMMAND [ESC] D ........................8-30

8.10.18 BOLD PRINTING SET COMMAND [ESC] E .........................8-32

8.10.19 DOUBLE PRINTING SET COMMAND [ESC] G ........................8-33

8.10.20 FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] J .........................8-34

8.10.21 SWITCHING TO PAGE MODE COMMAND [ESC] L .........................8-35

8.10.22 INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SELECT COMMAND [ESC] R ........................8-36

8.10.23 SWITCHING TO STANDARD MODE COMMAND [ESC] S .........................8-38

8.10.24 PAGE MODE PRINT DIRECTION SET COMMAND [ESC] T .........................8-39

8.10.25 CHARACTER ROTATION SET COMMAND [ESC] V .........................8-40

8.10.26 PAGE MODE PRINT AREA SET COMMAND [ESC] W ........................8-41

8.10.27 JUSTIFICATION COMMAND [ESC] a .........................8-43

8.10.28 PANEL KEY (FEED KEY) SET COMMAND [ESC] c5 .......................8-44

8.10.29 PAPER FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] d .........................8-45

8.10.30 CODE PAGE NO. SELECT COMMAND [ESC] t ..........................8-46

8.10.31 INVERTED PRINTING SET COMMAND [ESC] { ..........................8-47

8.10.32 ABSOLUTE POSITION SET COMMAND [ESC] $ .........................8-48

8.10.33 RELATIVE POSITION SET COMMAND [ESC] \ ..........................8-49

8.10.34 CHINESE CHARACTER PRINT MODE ALL SET COMMAND [FS] ! .............................8-50

8.10.35 CHINESE CHARACTER MODE SET COMMAND [FS] & ...........................8-51

8.10.36 CHINESE CHARACTER UNDERLINING SET COMMAND [FS] -.............................8-52

ix
 Page

8.10.37 CHINESE CHARACTER MODE CANCEL COMMAND [FS] . .............................8-53

8.10.38 WRITABLE CHARACTER OF CHINESE CHARACTER DEFINE COMMAND

[FS] 2 ............................8-54

8.10.39 CHINESE CHARACTER CODE SYSTEM SET COMMAND [FS] C ...........................8-56

8.10.40 CHINESE CHARACTER SPACING SET COMMAND [FS] S ...........................8-58

8.10.41 CHINESE CHARACTER MAGNIFICATION SET COMMAND [FS] W ..........................8-60

8.10.42 PAGE MODE ABSOLUTE POSITION SET COMMAND [GS] $ ...........................8-61

8.10.43 REVERSE CHARACTER SET COMMAND [GS] B ...........................8-62

8.10.44 ID TRANSMISSION COMMAND [GS] I ............................8-63

8.10.45 PAGE MODE RELATIVE POSITION IN VERTICAL DIRECTION SET COMMAND

[GS] \ ............................8-64

8.10.47 BARCODE PRINT COMMAND [GS] k ...........................8-65

8.10.48 APPENDIX: BARCODE ................................................................................................................8-69

8.10.49 BARCODE HORIZONTAL SIZE COMMAND [GS] w ...........................8-72

8.10.50 BARCODE HEIGHT COMMAND [GS] h ...........................8-74

8.10.51 NUMERALS UNDER BARS COMMAND [GS] H ...........................8-75

8.10.52 PRINT AREA WIDTH SET COMMAND [GS] W ..........................8-76

8.10.53 DOWNLOADED BIT IMAGE DEFINE COMMAND [GS] * ............................8-77

8.10.54 DOWNLOADED BIT IMAGE PRINT MODE SET COMMAND [GS] / ............................8-79

8.10.55 MACRO DEFINITION START/END COMMAND [GS] : ............................8-80

8.10.56 MACRO EXECUTE COMMAND [GS] ^............................8-81

8.10.58 LEFT MARGIN SET COMMAND [GS] L ...........................8-82

8.10.59 CHARACTER SIZE SET COMMAND [GS] ! ............................8-83

8.11 TEC ORIGINAL COMMANDS ...............................................................................................................8-84

8.11.1 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M ........................8-84

8.11.2 RESET COMMAND [ESC] WR .....................8-87

8.11.3 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] v, [ [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS .......8-88

8.11.4 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WB .....................8-90

8.11.5 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX .....................8-93

8.11.6 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT ........................8-96

8.11.7 BLUETOOTH RELATED PARAMETER ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WT .....................8-97

9. ERROR PROCESSING ................................................................................................................................9-1

9.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ......................................................................................................................9-1

9.2 COMMUNICATION ERRORS .................................................................................................................9-2

9.2.1 COMMAND SYNTAX ERROR ........................................................................................................9-2

x
 Page

9.2.2 HARDWARE ERROR .....................................................................................................................9-2

9.3 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING......................................................................................................9-3

9.3.1 PAPER JAM / LABEL END / NORMAL END + LABEL END...........................................................9-3

9.3.2 BROKEN HEAD DOTS ERROR .....................................................................................................9-5

9.3.3 THERMAL HEAD EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURE ...........................................................................9-5

9.3.4 COVER OPEN ERROR ..................................................................................................................9-5

9.4 BATTERY ERROR ..................................................................................................................................9-6

9.4.1 LOW BATTERY ..............................................................................................................................9-6

9.4.2 ABNORMAL HIGH VOLTAGE ........................................................................................................9-6

9.4.3 ABNORMAL BATTERY TEMPERATURE ......................................................................................9-6

9.5 CHARGING ERROR ...............................................................................................................................9-6

9.6 BLUETOOTH SETTING ERROR ............................................................................................................9-6

9.7 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES .......................................9-6

9.7.1 WRITE ERROR ..............................................................................................................................9-6

9.7.2 FORMAT ERROR ...........................................................................................................................9-6

9.7.3 MEMORY FULL ..............................................................................................................................9-6

9.8 SYSTEM ERRORS .................................................................................................................................9-7

9.8.1 ADDRESS ERROR .........................................................................................................................9-7

9.8.2 GENERAL INVALID COMMAND EXCEPTION ..............................................................................9-7

9.8.3 SLOT INVALID EXCEPTION ..........................................................................................................9-7

9.8.4 PCB IDENTIFICATION ERROR .....................................................................................................9-7

9.8.5 THERMAL HEAD IDENTIFICATION ERROR.................................................................................9-7

9.9 OPERATIONS WHEN AN ERROR OCCURS .........................................................................................9-8

9.10 OPERATIONS AFTER AN ERROR IS CLEARED ..................................................................................9-8

9.10.1 LABEL MODE .................................................................................................................................9-8

9.10.2 RECEIPT MODE .............................................................................................................................9-8

9.10.3 RECEIPT1 MODE OR ESC/POS MODE ........................................................................................9-8

9.10.4 TPCL MODE ...................................................................................................................................9-8

9.11 STATUS VALUES ...................................................................................................................................9-9

10. SYSTEM MODE..........................................................................................................................................10-1

10.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................10-1

10.2 STARTING THE PRINTER IN SYSTEM MODE ...................................................................................10-1

10.3 COMMUNICATIONS CONDITIONS .....................................................................................................10-1

10.4 LIMITATIONS IN SYSTEM MODE ........................................................................................................10-1

10.5 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS...................................................................................................................10-2

xi
 Page

10.5.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND ........................................................................................10-2

10.5.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE ........................................................................................................10-2

10.5.3 PRECAUTIONS ............................................................................................................................10-2

10.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO SETTING .................................................................................................10-3

10.6.1 ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID .......................10-3

10.6.2 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M ........................10-4

10.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT ...............................................................................10-7

10.7.1 POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX ......................10-7

10.7.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY ....................10-11

10.7.3 STRIP SENSOR THRESHOLD VALUE SET COMMAND [ESC] AH, [ESC] AZ ...10-13

10.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL .............................................................................................10-14

10.8.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] WR, [ESC] @ ...10-14

10.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS ................................................................................................10-15

10.9.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS, [ESC] v .......10-15

10.9.2 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX ...................10-21

10.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LAN .....................................................10-23

10.10.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT ......................10-23

10.10.2 BLUETOOTH DEVICE NICKNAME SETTING [ESC] BN ....................10-24

10.10.3 INQUIRY RESPONSE TIME SETTING COMMAND [ESC] BZ ....................10-25

10.10.4 INTERVAL/WINDOW SETTING AT THE INQUIRY/PAGE [ESC] BQ ....................10-26

10.10.5 BONDING SETTING COMMAND [ESC] BP ....................10-27

10.10.6 BONDING TABLE DELETION COMMAND [ESC] BE ....................10-29

10.10.7 SECURITY SETTING COMMAND [ESC] BS ....................10-30

10.10.8 BLUETOOTH RELATED PARAMETER ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WT ...................10-31

10.11 SETUP MODE .....................................................................................................................................10-33

10.11.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................10-33

10.11.2 HOW TO ENTER INTO SETUP MODE ....................................................10-33

10.11.3 AUTO POWER-OFF FUNCTION DURING SETTING ....................................................10-33

10.11.4 HOW TO CHECK EACH SETUP MODE ....................................................10-33

10.11.5 OTHER ....................................................10-33

11. OTHER FUNCTIONS..................................................................................................................................11-1

11.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................11-1

11.2 REPRINT FUNCTION ...........................................................................................................................11-2

11.2.1 LABEL MODE ...............................................................................................................................11-2

11.2.2 RECEIPT OR ESC/POS MODE ...................................................................................................11-2

xii
 Page

11.2.3 TPCL MODE .................................................................................................................................11-2

11.2.4 TPCL1 MODE ...............................................................................................................................11-2

11.3 POWER SAVE MODE...........................................................................................................................11-2

11.4 AUTOMATIC LABEL PRINT POSITIONING .........................................................................................11-3

11.4.1 LABEL MODE, TPCL MODE ........................................................................................................11-3

11.4.2 RECEIPT MODE ...........................................................................................................................11-3

11.5 CONTINUOUS PRINTING FUNCTION .................................................................................................11-3

11.5.1 LABEL MODE, RECEIPT MODE (Mode = 1) ...............................................................................11-3

11.5.2 RECEIPT1 MODE (Mode = 2), TPCL MODE (Mode = A), TPCL1 MODE (Mode = B), ESC/POS

MODE (Mode = 4) .........................................................................................................................11-3

11.6 AUTOMATIC LABEL PRINT POSITIONING AT POWER ON TIME .....................................................11-3

11.6.1 DESTINED FOR JAPAN ...............................................................................................................11-3

11.6.2 DESTINED OVERSEAS ...............................................................................................................11-3

11.7 BD ADDRESS PRINTING FUNCTION..................................................................................................11-3

11.8 WIRELESS LAN PARAMETER SETTINGS PRINTING FUNCTION ....................................................11-4

11.9 STRIP ISSUE MODE ............................................................................................................................11-4

11.11 STATUS ................................................................................................................................................11-5

11.11.1 FUNCTIONS .................................................................................................................................11-5

11.11.2 STATUS FORMAT ........................................................................................................................11-7

11.11.3 DETAIL STATUS ........................................................................................................................11-10

11.12 LCD MESSAGES AND LED INDICATIONS ........................................................................................11-14

11.13 LIST OF CHARING ERROR NO. AND DETAILS ................................................................................11-16

11.14 LCD MESSAGES IN DIFFERENT LANGUAGES ...............................................................................11-17

12. CHARACTER CODE TABLE .....................................................................................................................12-1

12.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................12-1

12.2 CHARACTER CODE .............................................................................................................................12-1

12.2.1 UTF-8 CHARACTER CODE .........................................................................................................12-1

12.3 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER, GOTHIC725 Black12-2

12.4 PRESENTATION ................................................................................................................................12-13

12.5 OCR-A .................................................................................................................................................12-17

12.6 OCR-B .................................................................................................................................................12-21

12.7 STANDARD CHARACTER (in Japan)/KANJI (16 x 16) (in Japan)/KANJI (24 x 24)(in Japan) ............12-25

12.8 STANDARD CHARACTER (outside Japan) ........................................................................................12-27

12.9 CHINESE CHARACTER (24 x 24) (outside Japan).............................................................................12-29

12-10 KOREAN CHARACTER (24 x 24) (outside Japan) .............................................................................12-31

12.11 BOLD CHARACTER ...........................................................................................................................12-33

xiii
 Page

12.12 PRICE CHARACTER 1/PRICE CHARACTER 2 .................................................................................12-34

12.13 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 .......................................................................................................................12-35

12.14 PRICE FONT 1, 2, 3 ............................................................................................................................12-45

13. KANJI CODE TABLE .................................................................................................................................13-1

13.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................13-1

13.2 KANJI CODE .........................................................................................................................................13-1

13.3 RESTRICTIONS ON DISCLOSURE OF SPECIFICATIONS ................................................................13-1

13.4 KANJI (16 x 16, 24 x 24, 32 x 32) ..........................................................................................................13-2

13.5 16 x 16 KANJI CODE TABLE ................................................................................................................13-3

13.5.1 CHARACTERS INCLUDING SYMBOLS OTHER THAN KANJI (8140H to 83FCH) .....................13-3

13.5.2 EXTENDED CHARACTER, LEVEL 1 (8740H to 89AFH) .............................................................13-5

13.5.3 LEVEL 2 (9890H to 99BFH) ........................................................................................................13-12

13.5.4 WRITABLE CHARACTER AREA (EDC0H to F0FCH) ................................................................13-24

13.5.5 WRITABLE CHARACTER AREA (FF40H to FFFCH) .................................................................13-26

13.6 24 x 24 KANJI CODE TABLE ..............................................................................................................13-27

13.6.1 CHARACTERS INCLUDING SYMBOLS OTHER THAN KANJI (8140H to 83FCH) ...................13-27

13.6.2 EXTENDED CHARACTER, LEVEL 1 (8740H to 89AFH) ...........................................................13-29

13.6.3 LEVEL 2 (9890H to 99BFH) ........................................................................................................13-36

13.6.4 NEC-SELECTED IBM EXTENDED CHARACTER (EAB0H to EDBFH) .....................................13-47

13.6.5 NEC-SELECTED IBM EXTENDED CHARACTER, WRITABLE CHARACTER AREA ...............13-48

(EDC0H to F0FCH)

13.6.6 IBM EXTENDED CHARACTER (FA40H to FCFCH) ..................................................................13-49

13.6.7 WRITABLE CHARACTER AREA (FF40H to FFFCH) .................................................................13-50

13.7 32 x 32 KANJI CODE TABLE ..............................................................................................................13-51

13.7.1 CHARACTERS INCLUDING SYMBOLS OTHER THAN KANJI (8140H to 83FCH) ...................13-51

13.7.2 EXTENDED CHARACTER, LEVEL 1 (8740H to 89AFH) ...........................................................13-53

13.7.3 LEVEL 2 (9890H to 99BFH) ........................................................................................................13-60

13.7.4 WRITABLE CHARACTER AREA (EDC0H to F0FCH) ................................................................13-72

14. CHINESE CODE TABLE ............................................................................................................................14-1

14.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................14-1

14.2 CHINESE CODE ...................................................................................................................................14-1

14.3 GB18030 (two-byte code) ...................................................................................................................14-2

14.4 GB18030 (four-byte code) ................................................................................................................14-18

xiv
 Page

15. KOREAN CODE TABLE ............................................................................................................................15-1

15.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................15-1

15.2 KOREAN CODE ....................................................................................................................................15-1

15.3 TWO-BYTE CHARACTER ....................................................................................................................15-2

16. BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE ......................................................................................16-1

16.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION ....................................................................................................................16-1

16.2 JAN8/EAN8, JAN13/EAN13, UPC-E, UPC-A, UCC/EAN128, EAN128, Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF), MSI,

Industrial 2 of 5, RSS-14, RSS-14 Stacked, RSS-14 Stacked Omni-directional, RSS Limited, EAN13 + 2

digits, EAN13 + 5 digits, UPC-E + 2 digits, UPC-E + 5 digits, EAN8 + 2 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits, UPC-A +

2 digits, UPC-A + 5 digits.......................................................................................................................16-2

16.3 CUSTOMER BARCODE .......................................................................................................................16-3

16.4 POSTNET .............................................................................................................................................16-4

16.5 RM4SCC ...............................................................................................................................................16-4

16.6 KIX CODE .............................................................................................................................................16-5

16.7 CODE39 (Standard) ..............................................................................................................................16-6

16.8 CODE39 (Full ASCII)) ...........................................................................................................................16-7

16.9 NW-7 .....................................................................................................................................................16-8

16.10 CODE93 ................................................................................................................................................16-9

16.11 CODE128 ............................................................................................................................................16-10

16.11.1 TRANSFER CODE .....................................................................................................................16-10

16.11.2 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE CONTROL CODE DATA .................................................................16-10

16.11.3 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE SPECIAL CODES ............................................................................16-10

16.11.4 DESIGNATION OF START CODE .............................................................................................16-10

16.11.5 VALUE CODE TABLE.................................................................................................................16-11

16.11.6 RSS EXPANDED, RSS EXPANDED STACKED ........................................................................16-12

16.12 DATA MATRIX ....................................................................................................................................16-13

16.12.1 FORMAT ID ................................................................................................................................16-13

16.12.2 TRANSFER CODE .....................................................................................................................16-13

16.12.3 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE CONTROL CODE DATA .................................................................16-13

16.12.4 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE SPECIAL CODES ............................................................................16-13

16.12.5 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE KANJI CODES .................................................................................16-13

16.13 PDF417, MicroPDF417 .......................................................................................................................16-14

16.13.1 MODE/CODE ..............................................................................................................................16-14

16.13.2 TRANSFER CODE .....................................................................................................................16-15

16.13.3 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE CONTROL CODE DATA .................................................................16-15

xv
 Page

16.13.4 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE SPECIAL CODES ............................................................................16-15

16.13.5 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE KANJI CODES .................................................................................16-15

16.14 QR CODE ............................................................................................................................................16-16

16.14.1 MODE SELECTION ....................................................................................................................16-16

16.14.2 TRANSFER CODE .....................................................................................................................16-17

16.14.3 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE CONTROL CODE DATA .................................................................16-18

16.14.4 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE SPECIAL CODES ............................................................................16-18

16.14.5 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE KANJI CODES .................................................................................16-18

16.15 MAXICODE .........................................................................................................................................16-19

16.15.1 When the MaxiCode specification is set to “TYPE1: Compatible with the current version” in the

system mode: ..............................................................................................................................16-20

16.15.2 When the MaxiCode specification is set to “TYPE2: Special specification” in the system mode:

....................................................................................................................................................16-21

16.16 DRAWING OF BARCODE DATA ........................................................................................................16-22

16.17 AUTOMATIC ADDITION OF START/STOP CODES ..........................................................................16-44

xvi
 CHAPTER 1 SCOPE/GENERAL DESCRIPTION
B-EP Series

1. SCOPE/GENERAL DESCRIPTION

1.1 SCOPE
This specification applies to the software that is used with the “B-EP series” portable printer.

1.2 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The external equipment interface connects a printer to the host computer through the IrDA, RS-232C,
Bluetooth○R , wireless LAN or USB interface for storing forms, or issuing labels or receipts. This
specification describes how to use the external equipment interface.
The specification is organized as below. Refer to each chapter according to your needs.

1.2.1 SPECIFICATION ORGANIZATION

Chapter 1: SCOPE/GENERAL DESCRIPTION

Chapter 2: OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS
Chapter 3: INTERFACE
Chapter 4: TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
Chapter 5: TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
Chapter 6: LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
Chapter 7: RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
Chapter 8: ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
Chapter 9: ERROR PROCESSING
Chapter 10: SYSTEM MODE
Chapter 11: OTHER FUNCTIONS
Chapter 12: CHARACTER CODE TABLE
Chapter 13: KANJI CODE TABLE
Chapter 14: CHINESE CODE TABLE
Chapter 15: KOREAN CODE TABLE
Chapter 16: BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE

Bluetooth is a registered trademark owned by Bluetooth SIG. Inc. and used by TOSHIBA TEC
CORPORATION under license.
Company names and products in this document are the trademarks or registered trademarks of each
company.

1-1
 CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS
B-EP Series

2. OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS
2.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This chapter describes the outline of specifications – modes, which the printer has. For more details,
refer to the appropriate chapter.
„ [TPCL (TEC Printer Command Language) mode]
The printer draws data according to the format information and print data sent from the host, and
issues labels according to the Issue Command.
„ [LABEL mode]
The label format information, graphic data, or writable character data sent from the host, is
previously stored in flash ROM as an initial setting. The printer links the print data sent through its
interface to the format data or writable character data in flash ROM, then draws and issues.
„ [RECEIPT mode]
The printer draws and issues according to the data or commands sent from the host.
„ [ESC/POS mode]
The printer draws and issues according to the data or commands sent from the host.
„ [SYSTEM mode]
In this mode, self-test printing, slant line printing and settings/changing of internal parameters are
performed.

2-1
 CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS
B-EP Series

2.2 DIMENSION
B-EP2DL 88.0 (W) x 119.0 (L) x 65.0 (D)
B-EP4DL 150.0 (W) x 145.0 (L) x 75.0 (D)
* Excluding the projecting parts.

2.3 WEIGHT
B-EP2DL

B-EP2DL-GH20-QM-R Approx. 475 g

B-EP2DL-GH30-QM-R Approx. 480 g
B-EP2DL-GH40-QM-R Approx. 480 g
B-EP4DL
B-EP4DL-GH20-QM-R Approx. 855 g
B-EP4DL-GH30-QM-R Approx. 860 g
B-EP4DL-GH40-QM-R Approx. 865 g
* Including a battery, excluding paper

2.4 PRINTING METHOD

Direct thermal

2.5 HEAD SPECIFICATION

B-EP2DL 8 dots/mm
B-EP4DL 8 dots/mm

2.6 PRINT SPEED

Approx. 12.5 mm/sec to Approx. 105 mm/sec
(at 25°C when using the battery designated and paper recommended by Toshiba TEC)

2.7 PRINT MODE

• LABEL mode
• RECEIPT mode
• TPCL mode
• ESC/POS mode
* ESC/POSTM is a registered trademark of Seiko Epson Corporation.

2-2
 CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS
B-EP Series

2.8 FONT TYPE

2.8.1 BIT MAP FONT

Standard character/Characters under bars 12 × 24 dots

(alphanumeric, Kana, symbol)
Bold character 48 × 96 dots
(numeric, symbol, space)
Price Font 1 16 × 40 dots
(numeric, symbol, space)
Price Font 2 32 × 48 dots
(numeric, symbol, space)
Times Roman (Medium) 12 point
Times Roman (Medium) 15 point
Times Roman (Bold) 15 point
Times Roman (Bold) 18 point
Times Roman (Bold) 21 point
Times Roman (Italic) 18 point
Helvetica (Medium) 9 point
Helvetica (Medium) 15 point
Helvetica (Medium) 18 point
Helvetica (Bold) 18 point
Helvetica (Bold) 21 point
Helvetica (Italic) 18 point
Presentation (Bold) 27 point
Letter Gothic (Medium) 14.3 point
Prestige Elite (Medium) 10.5 point
Prestige Elite (Bold) 15 point
Courier (Medium) 15 point
Courier (Bold) 18 point
OCR-A 12 point
OCR-B 12 point
GOTHIC725 Black 6 point
Kanji/writable character (Gothic type) 16 × 16 dots *1
Kanji/writable character (Gothic type) 24 × 24 dots *1
Kanji/writable character (Ming type) 32 × 32 dots *1
Chinese 24 x 24 dots
Korean 24 x 24 dots *1
* Some fonts cannot be printed depending on the print mode.
*1 These fonts are downloaded in the DBCS (Double Byte Character Set) area to be supported.
The Kanji character is supported in Japan only.
The Korean character is supported in Republic of Korea only.

2-3
 CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS
B-EP Series

2.8.2 OUTLINE FONT

• TEC Font 1 (Not proportional)

• TEC Font 1 (Proportional)
• Price Font 1, 2, 3 (Outline)

* Not only normal but also italic fonts are supported.

2.9 TYPE OF BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE

2.9.1 BARCODE

• JAN8/EAN8
• JAN13/EAN13
• UPC-A
• UPC-E
• Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
• CODEBAR (NW-7)
• CODE39
• CODE93
• CODE128/EAN128
• MSI
• Industrial 2 of 5
• MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC
• GS1 Databar
(Omnidirectional/Stacked/Stacked/Omnidirectional/Limited/Expanded/Expanded Stacked)
• Customer barcode
• POSTNET
• RM4SCC
• KIX CODE

* Some barcodes cannot be printed depending on the print mode.

2.9.2 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE

• QR code
• PDF417
• Data Matrix
• MaxiCode
• MicroPDF417
* Some two-dimensional codes cannot be printed depending on the print mode.

2.10 FORMAT STORAGE

LABEL mode ......... Max. 20 types
TPCL mode ........... Max. 99 types

2.11 GRAPHIC STORAGE

Two graphic data can be stored (in the LABEL or RECEIPT mode).

2-4
 CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS
B-EP Series

2.12 WRITABLE CHARACTER STORAGE

LABEL mode ......... 24 × 24 dots: 50 characters
TPCL mode ........... Free size: 224 characters x 40 types
16 × 16 dots: 188 characters
24 × 24 dots: 188 characters
32 x 32 dots: 188 characters

2.13 INTERFACE
• IrDA V1.2 (IrCOMM, IrOBEX, TEC Protocol)
• RS-232C
• Bluetooth V1.2 (Class 2)
• Wireless LAN (802.11b/g)
• USB V2.0

2.14 POWER SOURCE

Type: Lithium-ion battery
Voltage:
B-EP2DL B-EP4DL
Voltage 7.4 V 14.8 V
2600 mAh 2600 mAh

Charging method: Charge only the battery using the battery charger.

2.15 SWITCH
POWER switch
FEED switch
PAUSE switch

2.16 SENSOR
Cover open sensor
Transmissive sensor
Reflective sensor
Strip issue path detection sensor
Head temperature sensor (-15 ºC to 70 ºC)
Ambient temperature sensor (-15 ºC to 70 ºC)
Strip wait label detection sensor

2.17 LED
Red
Orange
Green

2-5
 CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS
B-EP Series

2.18 LCD
Mark + (5 x 7 dots) x 16 characters

2.19 SPEAKER
On-board beeper
Volume adjustment function

2.20 ISSUE MODE

Strip issue (with label present sensor)
Batch issue

2.21 PAPER
B-EP2DL B-EP4DL
Label width 13 to 55 mm 47 to 112 mm
Label-to-label gap 3 to 7 mm 3 to 7 mm
Black mark length 3 to 7 mm 3 to 7 mm
Backing paper width 16 to 58 mm 50 to 115 mm
Receipt paper width 16 to 58 mm 50 to 115 mm

2-6
 CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS
B-EP Series

2.22 CUT
Manual cut using the tear bar

2.23 BROKEN HEAD DOTS CHECK FUNCTION

When the printer is turned ON, or the cover is closed, the program will check for broken head dots
according to the setting. If broken head dots are detected, a broken head dot error will occur.
Printing can be still performed according to the setting, even after a broken head dot error occurred.

2.24 STATUS TRANSMISSION

The printer sends a status when:
• The host requests status transmission.
• The printer receives a command, while it is in an error state.
• Automatic status transmission in the Issue Command has already been designated.

2.25 AUTO LABEL POSITIONING FUNCTION

When the cover is closed after replacing the label paper according to the setting, the label is
automatically fed to the first print position.
However, when the RECEIPT mode or ESC/POS mode is selected or no sensor is designated, a
first print position feed is not performed.

2.26 STATUS PRINTING

Pressing the POWER key while holding down the FEED key allows the printer (for service
technicians and system administrators) to enter the SYSTEM mode.
Pressing the POWER key while holding down the PAUSE key allows the printer (for general users)
to enter the SYSTEM mode.
When a menu is selected, the result of the printer’s state will be printed.

2.27 CONTINUOUS PRINTING FUNCTION

When the RECEIPT mode (Mode = 2), TPCL mode (Mode = A), TPCL mode (Mode = B) or
ESC/POS mode (Mode = 4) is selected, after an error state (label end, cover open error, or a paper
jam) is cleared, the printer automatically continues printing the received data. After paper is
replaced, the error is cleared by closing the cover. Then, the printer automatically continues
printing. When the cover is closed, if the printer has run out of the paper, the printer neither clears
the error nor continues printing. It remains in the error state.

2-7
 CHAPTER 2 OUTLINE OF SPECIFICATIONS
B-EP Series

2.28 STRIP ISSUE

When the LABEL mode (mode = 0), TPCL mode (mode =A) or TPCL1 mode (mode = B) is selected,
the specified number of labels are printed. Note that a next print job is not performed until the
printed label is removed from the strip shaft.

2-8
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3. INTERFACE

3.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes details regarding the interfaces between the host and the printer. The printer
configurations are as follows:
• IrDA + USB + RS-232C model
• IrDA + USB + Bluetooth model
• IrDA + USB + Wireless LAN model

The interfaces between Bluetooth and wireless LAN can be optionally upgraded:
• RS-232C Æ Bluetooth
• RS-232C or Bluetooth Æ Wireless LAN
• RS-232C Æ RS-232C + Bluetooth
• RS-232C Æ RS-232C + Wireless LAN
• Bluetooth Æ Wireless LAN

IrDA supports the following three protocols. Each of them is independently described on later pages.
• TEC Protocol
• IrCOMM (9-WIRE)
• IrOBEX

The printer interface is automatically switched between IrDA and RS-232C/Bluetooth/wireless LAN on
the following conditions:

• IrDA + USB + RS-232C model

When the RS-232C cable is connected to the printer, the printer interface will be switched to the
RS-232C interface. When the RS-232C cable is disconnected, the interface will be switched to
IrDA.
• IrDA + USB + Bluetooth model or IrDA + USB + Wireless LAN model
Usually, IrDA interface is standing by for communications. When data is sent from Bluetooth
interface or wireless LAN interface, the printer interface is automatically switched to the appropriate
interface.
When the printer enters the power save mode after the termination of a communication by
Bluetooth or wireless LAN interface (when five minutes have passed after the termination), the
printer interface will return to IrDA.
If data is sent to the printer by Bluetooth or wireless LAN interface during the communication by
IrDA, the printer interface will be automatically switched to Bluetooth or wireless LAN, and
consequently the communication by IrDA cannot be made successfully.
Notes
When the RS-232C is used for communications, the RS-232C cable must be connected
to the printer before the power is turned on.

3-1
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.2 IrDA INTERFACE (TEC Protocol)

In IrDA standard, only IrDA-SIR of the physical layer should be used. For the data link layer, original
simplified protocol should be provided.

3.2.1 SPECIFICATIONS FOR PHYSICAL LAYER AND TRANSMISSION CONTROL METHOD

Transport layer

IrLMP Simplified protocol

IrLAP

IrDA-SIR IrDA-SIR

IrDA V1.2 (Low Power) standard B-EP

: parts are required.

(1) Specifications

Item Specifications
Normal mode
Physical layer Conforming to IrDA-SIR V1.2 (Low Power)
standard
Transfer rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps *1
Communication distance within 0.2 m *2
Peak wave length of 850 to 900 nm
emitted light
Communicable angle within ±15°
Ambient illuminance 1000 lx or less
(fluorescent lamp and incandescent lamp)
Emissive power Min 3.6 mW/Sr (θh, θv ≤ ±15°)
2
Min. photo sensibility Min 9 µW/cm (θh, θv ≤ ±15°)

*1: Values for the normal mode are dependent on the communication protocol settings.
*2: The communication distance may become shorter than 0.2 m, depending on the host’s
performance.

3-2
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.2.2 INPUT/OUTPUT SIGNAL

• RD (Host → Printer)
A data signal which the printer receives from the host.
Logic 1 is Low level, while logic 0 is High level.
It is in a Low state when no transmission is in progress.
• SD (Printer → Host)
A data signal which the printer sends to the host.
Logic 1 is Low level, while logic 0 is High level.
It is in a Low state when no transmission is in progress.

3.2.3 TRANSMISSION CONTROL

The host performs transmission control with a NAK (15H)/ACK (06H), which means the printer is
ready, a link request PAD (FFH), and a command packet.
c Link request (Host → Printer)
The host should send a link request PAD (FFH) in order to link to the printer. The link
request PAD should be intermittently sent until the printer is linked and enters a ready state.
d Printer ready (Printer → Host)
When the printer detects the link request PAD from the host and enters a ready state for
receiving the command packet, the printer sends a NAK within 40 msec. When an error such
as CRC occurs, the printer sends a NAK.

NAK
15H

The printer sends an ACK, when the printer properly receives the command packet and enters
a ready state for receiving the next data, or when the data is stored into flash ROM.

ACK
06H

e End of link (Host → Printer)

When there is no packet to be sent, the host sends an EOT to end the link.

EOT
04H

f Turnaround time
The printer should send a NAK/ACK/status packet after 5 msec. from when a PAD/command
packet has been received.
g Time out
Host: Time out due to waiting for a NAK after a PAD is sent................................ 50 msec.
Time out due to waiting for an ACK after a command is sent ..................... 200 msec.
Printer: Time out due to waiting for a command after a NAK is sent ....................... 1 sec.
Time out due to waiting for an EOT or a command after an ACK is sent ... 1 sec.
Time out due to waiting for an EOT after the status is sent ........................ 1 sec.
h Status packet (Printer → Host)
If the printer enters an error state when the command is sent from the host, or when status
transmission is requested, the printer sends a status.

3-3
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

NOTE: The data error is checked by CRC. However, noise included in sent/received data
may cause misprinting. (Though CRC check is carried out in 16 bits, there is a
possibility that the data including noise matches 16 bits of CRC check.)

[LABEL, RECEIPT or ESC/POS mode]

Data to be sent
STX Printer ID Version No. of each form Printer status Battery status CRC
02H xxH xxH V01 V02 ··········· V20 xxH xxH xxH xxH

Range of CRC calculation

• Printer ID ......... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)
• Version No. of each form (00H to 09H)
V01 ............... Version of form No. 1 (1-byte hex data)
V02 ............... Version of form No. 2 (1-byte hex data)

V20 ............... Version of form No. 20 (1-byte hex data)

• Printer status ... Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data.
00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Operating
0CH: Communication error * In the RECEIPT mode or for RS-232C connection only
0DH: Normal end + Label end
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
0FH: Wait for strip * In the LABEL mode only
10H: Normal issue end
14H: Pause state
19H: Ambient temperature error
32H: Abnormal battery temperature
33H: Battery excessive temperature
37H: Charging error
(38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed)
Response status for automatic status transmission
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
45H: Wait for battery recovery
46H: Wait for head temperature reduction
47H: Wait for motor temperature reduction
55H: Writable character/PC command save mode
NOTE: 0DH (Normal issue end + Label end) is a state when the printer runs out of
labels, after a label is issued.

3-4
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• Status in the compatible mode for the B-SP series

00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature (including ambient temperature error,
abnormal battery temperature, and battery excessive temperature)
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Operating (including wait for strip, pause state, writable character/PC command
save mode, wait for battery recovery, wait for head temperature reduction, and wait
for motor temperature reduction)
0CH: Communication error * In the RECEIPT mode or for RS-232C connection only
0DH: Normal end + Label end
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
10H: Normal issue end
37H: Charging error
(38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed)
Response status for automatic status transmission
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
• Battery status .. The battery charge status is indicated in 5 levels.
(B-EP2DL)
01H: 7.2 V or less (Print failure)
02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 1 to 30)
03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 30 to 150)
04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 150 to 300)
05H: 8.0 V to 8.4 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 300 or more)
(B-EP4DL)
01H: 14.0 V or less (Print failure)
02H: 14.1 V to 14.6 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 1 to 30)
03H: 14.7 V to 15.2 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 30 to 150)
04H: 15.3 V to 15.9 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 150 to 300)
05H: 16.0 V to 16.8 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 300 or more)

NOTE: The remaining number of printable labels may vary according to the contents to
be printed and the ambient environment.
• CRC ................ 2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High)

3-5
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

[TPCL mode]
Data to be sent

STX Printer ID Status Remaining No. of labels CRC

02H xxH xxH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH xxH xxH

Range of CRC calculation

• Printer ID ......... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)
• Status .............. Detailed status is indicated in 2-byte data.
“00”: Normal state
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating
“04”: Pause state
“05”: Wait for strip
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken head dots error
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature
“19”: Ambient temperature error
“32”: Abnormal battery temperature
“33”: Battery excessive temperature
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
(“38”: Bluetooth setting successfully completed) Response status for automatic status
transmission
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
(“40”: Normal issue end) Response status for automatic status transmission
(“41”: Normal feed end) Response status for automatic status transmission
“45”: Wait for battery recovery
“46”: Wait for head temperature reduction
“47”: Wait for motor temperature reduction
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state
“55”: Writable character/PC command save mode

3-6
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• Detailed status in the compatible mode for the B-SP series

“00”: Normal state
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating (including wait for strip, pause state, wait for battery recovery, wait for
head temperature reduction, wait for motor temperature reduction, and writable
character/PC command save mode)
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken head dots error
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature (including ambient temperature error, battery
abnormal temperature, and battery excessive temperature)
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
(“38”: Bluetooth setting successfully completed) Response status for automatic status
transmission
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
(“40”: Normal issue end) Response status for automatic status transmission
(“41”: Normal feed end) Response status for automatic status transmission
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state
• Status type ...... Indicated in 1-byte data
“1”: Status Request Command
“2”: Automatic status transmission
• Remaining No. of labels .... Indicated in 4-byte data
“0000” to “9999”
• CRC ................ 2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High)

3-7
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

i Command packet in the LABEL mode (Host → Printer)

Length is designated in 1 byte:
STX Printer ID Length Command CRC
02H xxH xxH xxH xxH xxH

Range of the length

Length is designated in 2 bytes:
STX Printer ID Length Command CRC
02H xxH xxH 00H xxH xxH xxH xxH

Range of the length

Range of CRC calculation

• Printer ID ......... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)
• Length ............. Hex data indicating the number of bytes of command data
• When the length is designated in 1 byte: 1 byte
01H to FFH
• When the length is designated in 2 bytes: 3 bytes
The first 1 byte is fixed at 00H.
Designate the length using the remaining 2 bytes.
(in order from Low to High): 0001 H to 0FFFH
• CRC ................ 2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High)

* Between the start and the termination of storing the form, a packet including several commands
can be sent. However, the command data should not be included in two packets. For other
commands, one packet should include only one command.
* For all commands except the Graphic Data Store Command, data included in several packets
should not be sent. The Data Print Command can also send data included in several packets
if it is sent using the format on the next page.

3-8
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

* Multiple packet format for including the Data Print Command in several packets
(Host → Printer)
Length is designated in 1 byte:
STX Printer ID Length Mode Flag Command & Data CRC
02H xxH xxH xxH Y xxH xxH xxH

Range of the length

Length is designated in 2 bytes:

STX Printer ID Length Mode Flag Command & Data CRC
02H xxH xxH 00H xxH xxH Y xxH xxH xxH

Range of the length

Range of CRC calculation

• Printer ID ......... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)
• Length ............. Hex data indicating the number of bytes of command data
• When the length is designated in 1 byte: 1 byte
01H to FFH
• When the length is designated in 2 bytes: 3 bytes
The first 1 byte is fixed at 00H.
Designate the length using the remaining 2 bytes.
(in order from Low to High): 0001 H to 0FFFH

NOTE: Up to 4 KB per one packet can be sent. However, total data

amount from the first block to the final block must be 60 KB or
less.
• Mode ............... Fixed at “Y”
• Flag ................. Flag indicating the block No. or the final block flag for the receipt issue
(1 byte)

Block No. (0 to 7F)

Final block flag 0: Final
1: Not final
• CRC ................ 2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High)

3-9
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

j Command packet in the TPCL, RECEIPT or ESC/POS mode (Host → Printer)

Length is designated in 1 byte:
STX Printer ID Length Mode Flag Command & Data CRC
02H xxH xxH xxH Y xxH xxH xxH

Range of the length

Length is designated in 2 bytes:

STX Printer ID Length Mode Flag Command & Data CRC
02H xxH xxH 00H xxH xxH Y xxH xxH xxH

Range of the length

Range of CRC calculation

• Printer ID ......... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)
• Length ............. Hex data indicating the number of bytes of command data
• When the length is designated in 1 byte: 1 byte
01H to FFH
• When the length is designated in 2 bytes: 3 bytes
The first 1 byte is fixed at 00H.
Designate the length using the remaining 2 bytes.
(in order from Low to High): 0001 H to 0FFFH

NOTE: Up to 4 KB per one packet can be sent. However, total data

amount from the first block to the final block must be 60 KB or
less.
• Mode ............... Fixed at “Y” (indicating the RECEIPT mode)
• Flag ................. Flag indicating the block No. or the final block flag for the receipt issue
(1 byte)

Block No. (0 to 7F)

Final block flag 0: Final
1: Not final
• CRC ................ 2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High)

* For the Status Request Command, the Mode Select Command, Reset Command, Receive
Buffer Remaining Capacity Request Command, and Printer Option Retrieve Command, one
packet should include only one command.

k Turnaround time
The printer should send a NAK/ACK/status packet after 5 msec. from when a PAD/command
packet has been received.

3-10
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.2.4 HOW TO SEND THE DATA PRINT COMMAND WHICH CANNOT BE INCLUDED IN ONE
PACKET IN THE LABEL MODE

When the Data Print Command in the LABEL mode cannot be included in one packet (256 bytes
or more in 1-byte length designation, 4096 bytes or more in 2-byte length designation), it can be
included in several packets by using the multiple packet format for the Data Print Command,
described on page 3-7.
Conditions: Data length for the Bit Map Font Field Command, the Outline Font Field Command,
and the Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Format Command, should be fixed at “00”.
For the JIS 8 and Shift JIS Kanji codes only.
(Example) To include the Data Print Command below into several packets:
X [01H] [01H] [01]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]

Command packet 1
[STX] [00H] [00H] [DEH] Y [80H] X [01H] [01H] [01H]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
[CRC] [CRC]

Command packet 2
[STX] [00H] [00H] [DAH] Y [01H]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF] ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [LF]
[CRC] [CRC]

3-11
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.2.5 CONNECTION SEQUENCE EXAMPLE (LABEL MODE)

< Normal transmission >

• When one packet is sent.

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted A link request is detected.

PAD
every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of command process
Within 1 sec. EOT

End of data storage or an issue

ACK ACK for the command process end is

transmitted.

3-12
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• ID set command (normal transmission)

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted A link request is detected.

PAD
every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of data process
Within 1 sec. EOT

End of data storage

ACK ACK for the command process end is

transmitted.

*1: Explanation of a command packet (when the length is designated in 1 byte.)

To send [ESC] ID; [03H] [51H] [LF] [NUL].
[02H] [00H][00H] [08H] [1BH]ID;[03H][51H][0AH][00H] [F7H][8AH]
CRC
Command
Length
Printer ID
STX

3-13
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• ID set command (erroneous transmission)

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted A link request is detected.

PAD
every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet (*1) Erroneous data reception of CRC (CRC
NG) In case of a CRC error caused by
receiving erroneous data due to noise of
ambient light, etc.

NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Resend command packet (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of data process
Within 1 sec. EOT

End of data storage

ACK ACK for the command process end is

transmitted.

*1: Explanation of a command packet (when the length is designated in 1 byte.)

To send [ESC] ID; [03H] [51H] [LF] [NUL].
[02H] [00H][00H] [08H] [1BH]ID;[03H][51H][0AH][00H] [F7H][8AH]
CRC
Command
Length
Printer ID
STX

3-14
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• Initialize command (normal transmission)

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted A link request is detected.

PAD
every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of command process
Within 1 sec. EOT

End of data storage

ACK ACK for the command process end is

transmitted.

*1: Explanation of a command packet (when the length is designated in 1 byte.)

To send [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL].
[02H] [00H][00H] [05H] [1BH]WR[0AH][00H] [44H][2DH]
CRC
Command
Length
Printer ID
STX

3-15
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• Initialize command (erroneous transmission)

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted A link request is detected.

PAD
every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet (*1) Erroneous data reception of CRC (CRC
NG) In case of a CRC error caused by
receiving erroneous data due to noise
of ambient light, etc.

NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Resend command packet (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of command process
Within 1 sec. EOT

End of data storage

ACK ACK for the command process end is

transmitted.

*1: Explanation of a command packet (when the length is designated in 1 byte.)

To send [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL].
[02H] [00H][00H] [05H] [1BH]WR[0AH][00H] [44H][2DH]
CRC
Command
Length
Printer ID
STX

3-16
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• Print density fine adjust command (normal transmission)

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted A link request is detected.

PAD
every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of data entry
Within 1 sec. EOT

End of data storage

ACK ACK for the command process end is

transmitted.

*1: Explanation of a command packet (when the length is designated in 1 byte.)

To send [ESC] AY; +00, 1, 1 [LF] [NUL].
[02H] [00H][00H] [0DH] [1BH]AY;+00,1,1[0AH][00H] [6DH][67H]
CRC
Command
Length
Printer ID
STX

The above sequence is also applied to the print position fine adjust command and the strip sensor
adjust command.
Explanation of each command packet (when the length is designated in 1 byte) is shown below.
Print position fine adjust command
To send [ESC] AX; +000 [LF] [NUL].
[02H] [00H] [00H] [0DH] [1BH] AX; 000 [0AH] [00H] [AAH] [44H]

Strip sensor adjust command

To send [ESC] AZ; 0 [LF] [NUL].
[02H] [00H] [00H] [0DH] [1BH] AZ; 0 [0AH] [00H] [34H] [F4H]

3-17
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• Print density fine adjust command (erroneous transmission)

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted A link request is detected.

PAD
every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet (*1) Erroneous data reception of CRC (CRC
NG) In case of a CRC error caused by
receiving erroneous data due to noise
of ambient light, etc.

NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Resend command packet (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of data entry
Within 1 sec. EOT

End of data storage

ACK ACK for the command process end is

transmitted.

*1: Explanation of a command packet (when the length is designated in 1 byte.)

To send [ESC] AY; +00, 1, 1 [LF] [NUL].
[02H] [00H][00H] [0DH] [1BH]AY;+00,1,1[0AH][00H] [6DH][67H]
CRC
Command
Length
Printer ID
STX

The above sequence is also applied to the print position fine adjust command and the strip sensor
adjust command.
Explanation of each command packet (when the length is designated in 1 byte) is shown below.
Print position fine adjust command
To send [ESC] AX; +000 [LF] [NUL].
[02H] [00H] [00H] [0DH] [1BH] AX; +000 [0AH] [00H] [AAH] [44H]

Strip sensor adjust command

To send [ESC] AZ; 0 [LF] [NUL].
[02H] [00H] [00H] [0DH] [1BH] AZ; 0 [0AH] [00H] [34H] [F4H]

3-18
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• When several packets are sent (for storing a form or graphics, or printing data).

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted

PAD A link request is detected.
every 50 msec. if the printer
A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of command process

Within 1 sec. EOT

End of data
storage/issue
ACK ACK for the command process end is
transmitted.

3-19
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• When several packets are sent (for storing a form or graphics, or printing data).
(For storing a form by sending packets, each of them is including a command.)

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted

PAD A link request is detected.
every 50 msec. if the printer
A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet 1 (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet 2 (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Command packets 3 to 10

Within 1 sec. Command packet 11 (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of command process

Within 1 sec. EOT

End of data storage/issue

ACK ACK for the command process end is

transmitted.

*1: Explanation of command packets (when the length is designated in 1 byte.)

Command packet 1
[02H] [00H][00H] [0AH] [1BH]X0;01,1[0AH][00H] [E7H][24H]
CRC
Command
Length
Printer ID
STX

Command packet 2
[02H][00H][00H][12H][1BH]D0630,0480,0600[0AH][00H][7BH][D1H]

Command packet 3
[02H][00H][00H][0DH][1BH]AY;+00,1,1[0AH][00H][6DH][67H]

Command packet 4
[02H][00H][00H][0AH][1BH]AX;+000[0AH][00H][AAH][44H]

Command packet 5
[02H][00H][00H][29H][1BH]PV01;0050,0250,0030,0030,A,00,B,00,1,0[0AH][00H][BBH][EEH]

3-20
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

Command packet 6
[02H][00H][00H][26H][1BH]PC02;0150,0100,4,4,A,00,B,00,1,0,P0[0AH][00H][D3H][00H]

Command packet 7
[02H][00H][00H][26H][1BH]PC03;0050,0200,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0,P0[0AH][00H][F0H][F7H]

Command packet 8
[02H][00H][00H][2CH][1BH]XB04;0250,0350,0,3,02,0,0080,020,1,00,1,0[0AH][00H][76H][6CH]

Command packet 9
[02H][00H][00H][1DH][1BH]LC;0010,0010,0470,0500,1,3[0AH][00H][11H][E5H]

Command packet 10
[02H][00H][00H][10H][1BH]N;1,0050,0350[0AH][00H][EBH][46H]

Command packet 11
[02H][00H][00H][05H][1BH]XP[0AH][00H][05H][2AH]

3-21
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• When several packets are sent (for storing a form or graphics, or printing data).
(For storing a form by sending packets, each of them is including several commands.)

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted

PAD A link request is detected.
every 50 msec. if the printer
A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet 1 (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet 2 (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Within 1 sec. EOT Start of command process

End of data storage/issue

ACK ACK for the command process end is
transmitted.

*1: Example of command packets for storing the form, each of them is including several commands
(when the length is designated in 1 byte.)
Command packet 1
[02H][00H][00H][F1H]
[1BH]XO;01,1[0AH][00H]
[1BH]D0630,0480,0600[0AH][00H]
[1BH]AY;+00,1,1[0AH][00H]
[1BH]AX;+000[0AH][00H]
[1BH]PV01;0050,0250,0030,0030,A,00,B,00,1,0[0AH][00H]
[1BH]PC02;0150,0100,4,4,A,00,B,00,1,0,P0[0AH][00H]
[1BH]PC03,0050,0200,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0,P0[0AH][00H]
[1BH]XB04,0250,0350,0,3,02,0,0080,020,1,00,1,0[0AH][00H]
[1BH]LC;0010,0010,0470,0500,1,3[0AH][00H]
[9BH][EAH]

Command packet 2
[02H][00H][00H][15H]
[1BH]N;1,0050,0350[0AH][00H]
[1BH]XP[0AH][00H]
[AAH][5FH]

3-22
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• When several packets are sent (for storing a form or graphics, or printing data)
(For storing graphics by sending packets, each of them is including several commands.)

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted

PAD A link request is detected.
every 50 msec. if the printer
A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet 1 (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet 2 (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Within 1 sec. EOT Start of command process

End of data storage/issue

ACK ACK for the command process end is
transmitted.

*1: Example of command packets for storing graphics (when the length is designated in 1 byte.)
Command packet 1
[02H][00H][00H][FFH]
[1BH]SG;1,0050,0050,[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][2CH][BDH]

3-23
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

Command packet 2
[02H][00H][00H][71H][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH][FFH]
[FFH][FFH][FFH][0AH][00H][7AH][1FH]

3-24
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• When the Status Request Command is sent.

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted

PAD A link request is detected.
every 50 msec. if the printer
A link is established
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Status request command packet (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

Status packet Status transmission

Within 1 sec. EOT

• When the host is started up, the host should send the Status Request Command to acquire the
printer ID.
• When the printer ID in the command packet is set to “0”, this command is acceptable for all
printers.
• For the wireless LAN model or Bluetooth model:
After a specified time (5 seconds except for IrDA) has passed since the end of data transmission
and reception, data from other interface can be received. Data received from another interface
before the specified time has passed will be discarded.
When data is received from another interface during data transmission and reception with the
IrDA interface, the printer interface will be automatically switched to the one from which the data
has been received. In this case, the IrDA communication will fail.

3-25
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

Example of a command packet is shown below.

Since the status request command packet mode cannot identify the issue mode which is currently
set in the printer, either of command packets below can be sent.

*1: When the status request command packet is FM command.

(The command packet in the LABEL mode, of which length is designated in 1 byte)
[02H] [00H][00H] [05H] [1BH]FM[0AH][00H] [0CH][3DH]
CRC
Command
Length
Printer ID
STX

(The command packet in the RECEIPT mode, of which length is designated in 1 byte)
[02H] [00H][00H] [07H] [59H] [00H] [1BH]FM[0AH][00H] [78H][66H]
CRC
Command
Flag
Mode
Length
Printer ID
STX

3-26
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• When the Mode Select Command is sent.

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted A link request is detected.

PAD
every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Mode select command packet (*1) Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of mode selection process
Within 1 sec. EOT

End of mode selection process

ACK ACK for the command process end
is transmitted.

• When an EOT or other command data is not sent, after the mode select command packet is sent,
the printer sends an ACK in 1 second after the mode select process is completed.

*1: Example of command in a command packet is shown below.

Since the mode select command packet mode cannot identify the issue mode currently set in
the printer, either of command packets below can be sent.

1 When a command packet includes mode select command (mode = 0)

(The command packet in the LABEL mode, of which length is designated in 1 byte)
[02H] [00H][00H] [06H] [1BH]M;0[0AH][00H] [D0H][CCH]
CRC
Command
Length
Printer ID
STX

2 When a command packet includes mode select command (mode = 1)

(The command packet in the LABEL mode, of which length is designated in 1 byte)
[02H][00H][00H][06H][1BH]M;1[0AH][00H][FFH][96H]

3-27
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3 When a command packet includes mode select command (mode = A)

(The command packet in the LABEL mode, of which length is designated in 1 byte)
[02H][00H][00H][06H][1BH]M;A[0AH][00H][D4H][16H]

4 When a command packet includes mode select command (mode = 0)

(The command packet in the RECEIPT mode, of which length is designated in 1 byte)
[02H] [00H][00H] [08H] [59H] [00H] [1BH]M;0[0AH][00H] [6EH][C7H]
CRC
Command
Flag
Mode
Length
Printer ID
STX

5 When a command packet includes mode select command (mode = 1)

(The command packet in the RECEIPT mode, of which length is designated in 1 byte)
[02H][00H][00H][08H][59H][00H][1BH]M;1[0AH][00H][B2H][9DH]

6 When a command packet includes mode select command (mode = A)

(The command packet in the RECEIPT mode, of which length is designated in 1 byte)
[02H][00H][00H][08H][59H][00H][1BH]M;A[0AH][00H][6AH][1DH]

3-28
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

<Error transmission>
• When an error occurs during communication.

Host Printer

Time out

PAD/Command packet

NAK/ACK/Status packet When a command packet or an

EOT cannot be received within 1
sec. after a NAK, an ACK, or a
status packet is sent, the link is
terminated. However, when a
CRC error, a framing error, or an
overrun error occurs within 1
sec., the timer is reset.

CRC error

Command packet

When a CRC error occurs in the

NAK
received command, the printer
sends a NAK after the command
packet is received.

Framing error, overrun error

EOT/Command packet

When the reception of an EOT

NAK
or a command packet results in
a framing error or an overrun
error, a NAK is sent at that time.

3-29
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• When the communication is made during an error state.

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted

every 50 msec. if the printer PAD A link request is detected.
sends no NAK. A link is established

NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet Normal reception (CRC OK)

Status packet If the printer is in an error state, it returns

a status packet, and not an ACK.
Within 1 sec. EOT
Error is cleared.

The command is not processed.

• When the Status Request Command is sent during an error state.

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted

PAD A link request is detected.
every 50 msec. if the printer
A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Status request command packet Normal reception (CRC OK)

Status packet Regardless of a normal or error

state, the printer returns a status
packet when receiving the Status
Request Command.
Within 1 sec. EOT Error is cleared.

3-30
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• When an error occurs while the command is being processed.

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted PAD A link request is detected.

every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.

Within 1 sec. Command packet Normal reception (CRC OK)

ACK Within 200 msec.

Start of command process
Within 1 sec. EOT

An error occurs.
The process ends abnormally.
Therefore, an ACK is not sent.

Time out
Host: Time out due to waiting for a NAK after a PAD is sent ..............50 msec.
(After time out, a PAD should be sent repeatedly.)
Time out due to waiting for an ACK after a command is sent....200 msec.
NOTE: The process time for issuing a label or storing data into flash ROM varies
according to the contents to be processed. Therefore, time out waiting for an
ACK is not set.
Printer: Time out due to waiting for a command after a NAK is sent .......................... 1 sec.
Time out due to waiting for an EOT or a command after an ACK is sent ...... 1 sec.
Time out due to waiting for an EOT after the status is sent ........................... 1 sec.

3-31
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.2.6 CONNECTION SEQUENCE EXAMPLE (TPCL, RECEIPT OR ESC/POS MODE)

The transmission control is basically the same as in the LABEL mode. Below is an example of
the setting method for the flag of each command packet.

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted PAD A link request is detected.

every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.
Command packet STX ID ID Length Y 80H Command & Data CRC CRC Normal reception (CRC OK)
(Within 1 sec.)
ACK Within 200 msec.
Command packet STX ID ID Length Y 81H Command & Data CRC CRC Normal reception (CRC OK)
(Within 1 sec.)
ACK Within 200 msec.
Command packet STX ID ID Length Y 02H Command & Data CRC CRC Normal reception (CRC OK)
(Within 1 sec.)
ACK Within 200 msec.
Start of command process
Within 1 sec. EOT
End of command process
ACK ACK for the command process
end is transmitted.

3-32
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

* Flag description:
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Block No. (0 to 7F)

Final block flag 0: Final

1: Not final

* After each packet is checked by CRC, the packets which pass the check are stored. When the
final block is received normally, an issue is started.
* 128 block Nos. can be set from 0 to 7F. (However, if the packet length is designated in 2
bytes, total data amount of all blocks must be 60 KB or less. Therefore, a maximum of 128
block Nos. may not be able to be set.) When 128 block Nos. (or 60 KB) are not enough,
terminate the command transmission, and issue the receipt. After issuing the receipt, the
remainder can be sent. If the next command packet is sent during an issue, it is discarded
without being processed.
* The block Nos. must be consecutive, starting from 0 (in ascending order). If the block Nos. are
not consecutive, starting from 0 in ascending order, a command syntax error occurs. If the
same block No. is received again before the final block is received, the block is discarded
without being stored.
* For the final block, the most significant bit must be cleared to 0. The printer starts an issue
after the final block is received. Therefore, if this setting is not made, the printer does not start
printing.

3-33
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

[TPCL mode]

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted PAD A link request is detected.

every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.
Command packet STX ID ID Length Y 80H Command & Data CRC CRC Normal reception (CRC OK)
(Within 1 sec.) (*1)
ACK Within 200 msec.
Command packet STX ID ID Length Y 81H Command & Data CRC CRC Normal reception (CRC OK)
(Within 1 sec.) (*1)
ACK Within 200 msec.
Command packet STX ID ID Length Y 02H Command & Data CRC CRC Normal reception (CRC OK)
(Within 1 sec.) (*1)
ACK Within 200 msec.
Start of command process
Within 1 sec. EOT
End of command process
ACK ACK for the command process
end is transmitted.

*1: Example of command packets is shown below.

(When the length is designated in 1 byte and the printer ID of the command packet is 1.)

Command packet 1
[02H][00H][01H][FFH][59H][80H]
{D0630,0480,0600|}
{AX;+000,+000,+00|}
{AY;+00,1,1|}
{T20C10|}
{C|}
{LC;0030,0030,0450,0550,1,5|}
{LC;0030,0300,0450,0300,0,5|}
{LC;0250,0300,0250,0550,0,5|}
{PC01;0050,0110,2,2,A,+00,00,B,+0000000000,P1|}
{PC02;0050,0200,1,1,A,+00,00,B,+000000
[B6H][B7H]

3-34
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

Command packet 2
[02H][00H][01H][FFH][59H][81H]
0000,P1|}
{PV03;0050,0260,0030,0030,A,+000,00,B,M0,+0000000000,Z00,P1|}
{XB04;0050,0380,0,3,02,0,0040,+0000000000,020,1,00|}
{XB05;0290,0380,Q,11,03,01,0,C033033|}
{RC01;Sample|}
{RC02;BITMAPFONT|}
{RV03;OUTLINEFONT|}
{RB04;1234567|}
{RB05;12345
[B8H][4BH]

Command packet 3
[02H][00H][01H][29H][59H][02H]
6789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234|}
{XS;I,0001,0002C1001|}
[D1H][67H]

3-35
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

[RECEIPT or ESC/POS mode]

Host Printer

A link request is transmitted PAD A link request is detected.

every 50 msec. if the printer A link is established.
sends no NAK.
NAK Within 40 msec.
Command packet STX ID ID Length Y 80H Command & Data CRC CRC Normal reception (CRC OK)
(Within 1 sec.) (*1)
ACK Within 200 msec.
Command packet STX ID ID Length Y 81H Command & Data CRC CRC Normal reception (CRC OK)
(Within 1 sec.) (*1)
ACK Within 200 msec.
Command packet STX ID ID Length Y 02H Command & Data CRC CRC Normal reception (CRC OK)
(Within 1 sec.) (*1)
ACK Within 200 msec.
Start of command process
Within 1 sec. EOT
End of command process
ACK ACK for the command process
end is transmitted.

*1: Example of command packets (in the RECEIPT mode) is shown below.
(When the length is designated in 1 byte and the printer ID of the command packet is 849.)

Command packet 1
[02H][03H][51H][FFH][59H][80H]
[1BH]W384[1BH]H000[1BH]3
[1BH]a1[1BH]![30H][1BH]O+010[1BH]L3360[0AH][1BH]KCSample[0AH][0AH][1BH]!
[00H][1BH]a0[1BH]KABITMAPFONT[0AH][1BH]![30H][1BH]KABITMAPFONT[0AH]
[1BH]![60H][1BH]KABITMAPFONT[0AH][0AH][1DH]w[02H][1DH]hp[1DH]H1
[1BH]O+000[1DH]k3*1234567890*[00H][0AH][0AH][0AH][1BH]O+100[1BH]L1210[0AH]
[1BH]![00H][1BH]a1[1DH]:12345678901234567890[0AH]12345678901234567890[0AH]
12345678901234567890[0AH]12345678901234567890[0AH]12345678
[25H][5DH]

Command packet 2
[02H][03H][51H][FFH][59H]
901234567890[0AH]12345678901234567890[0AH]12345678901234567890[0AH]12345
678901234567890[0AH]12345678901234567890[0AH]12345678901234567890[0AH]1234
56789012345678[0AH]#############[1DH]:[0AH][1DH]~ABCDEFGHIJKLM[00H][0AH]
[0AH][1BH]a[30H][1BH]KVA030030OUTLINEFONT[0AH][1BH]KVB030030OUTLINEFONT[0AH]
[0AH][1DH]w[04H][1DH]hh[1DH]qM[1DH]r1[1DH]kT1234567890[00H][0AH]
[0AH][1DH]w[03H][1DH]h[03H][1DH]s[00H][1DH]c[01H][1DH]kP
[02H][93H]

Command packet 3
[02H][03H][51H][55H][59H][02H]
123456789012345678901234567890123456789012345678901234567890[00H]

3-36
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

[0AH][0AH][1BH]O+010[1BH]L3360[0AH][0AH][0AH]
[C3H][97H]

3-37
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.2.7 PRINTER STATE TRANSITION (LABEL MODE)

Printer state transition

Event Issue
Command End of issue Status Request Syntax error,
Ensuring link reception Command EOT reception Time out CRC error Storage error,
Store reception Error during
Command End of storage issuing
State reception
Wait state for NAK — — — — — — —
the link transmission
S1 → S2
Wait state for a — Normal — Normal End of link NAK
command after ACK Status transmission
the NAK transmission transmission
transmission Command
S2 analysis
→ S3 → S3
Error — Error
Status Status
transmission transmission

→ S4 → S4 → S1 → S1 → S2 → S1
Wait state for a — ACK EOT has been Status Store End of link NAK
command/EOT transmission received transmission Command (NOTE 2) transmission
after the ACK Command ACK Start of storage
transmission analysis transmission process
S3 (NOTE 1) → S3
Issue
Command
ACK
transmission if
the issue is
completed.
→ S1 (NOTE 1)
EOT has not → S1
been received If the issue is
not completed
→ S3
Status Request
Command
→ S3 → S3 → S3 → S1 → S1 → S2 → S1
Wait state for — Status — Status Clear of error End of link —
an EOT after transmission transmission
the status
transmission
S4 → S4 → S4 → S1 → S1 → S1

NOTES: 1. Only when the ACK transmission for the process end is specified by the Data Print
Command, an ACK is sent after an issue is completed.
2. An ACK for the command process end is also sent, when the time out occurs during the
wait state for an EOT.

Host state transition

Event CRC error Activation of
Status Time out
NAK reception ACK reception Framing error transmission to
reception (NOTE 1)
State Overrun error the printer
Wait state for a Command —
NAK for the link transmission
request
S1 → S2 → S1 → S1 → S1 → S1
Wait state for Command Middle block Final block EOT —
an ACK/status retransmission Command EOT transmission
after the transmission transmission
command → S3
transmission or
S2 → S2 → S2 → S4 → S4 → S4 → S4
Wait state for — —
an ACK after
the EOT
transmission
S3 → S4 → S4 → S4 → S4
Key entry mode — —

S4 → S4 → S4 → S4 → S1

NOTE: The retry count is arbitrarily determined by the host.

3-38
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.2.8 PRINTER STATE TRANSITION (TPCL, RECEIPT OR ESC/POS MODE)

Printer state transition

Event Status
Reception of Reception of
Request EOT Framing error Syntax error
Ensuring link the middle the final block End of issue Time out CRC error
Command reception Overrun error Error during
block packet packet issuing
State reception
Wait state for NAK — — — — — — — — —
the link transmission
S1 → S2
Wait state for a — Normal Normal — Normal End of link NAK NAK
packet after the ACK ACK Status transmission transmission
NAK transmission transmission transmission
transmission Command
S2 analysis
→ S3 → S3 → S3
Error Error — Error
Status Status Status
transmission transmission transmission

→ S4 → S4 → S4 → S1 → S1 → S2 → S2 → S1
Wait state for a — ACK ACK EOT has Status Normal End of link NAK NAK
packet/EOT transmission transmission been transmission command (NOTE 1) transmission transmission
after the ACK Command received. ACK
transmission analysis transmission
S3 ACK if the issue is
transmission completed.
→ S1
If the issue is
not completed
→ S1 → S3
EOT has not Status
been received request

→ S3 → S3 → S3 → S3 → S1 → S1 → S2 → S2 → S1
Wait state for — Status Status — Status Clear of error End of link — Timer reset
an EOT after transmission transmission transmission
the status
transmission
S4 → S4 → S4 → S4 → S1 → S1 → S4 → S1

NOTE: An ACK for the command process end is also sent, when the time out occurs during the wait
state for an EOT.

Host state transition

Event CRC error Activation of
Status Time out
NAK reception ACK reception Framing error transmission to
reception (NOTE 1)
State Overrun error the printer
Wait state for a Command —
NAK of the link transmission
request
S1 → S2 → S1 → S1 → S1 → S1
Wait state for Packet Middle block Final block EOT —
an ACK/status retransmission Packet EOT transmission
after the transmission transmission
command → S3
transmission or
S2 → S2 → S2 → S4 → S4 → S4 → S4
Wait state for — —
an ACK after
the EOT
transmission
S3 → S4 → S4 → S4 → S4
Key entry mode — —

S4 → S4 → S4 → S4 → S1

NOTE: The retry count is arbitrarily determined by the host.

3-39
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.2.9 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE

When data is divided into multiple blocks in IrDA: TEC Protocol and received, the printer discards
previously received data and goes into a wait state to receive data from the first block if reception
is stopped and a timeout occurs (power save mode).
During single block, the printer discards partially received data and goes into a wait state to
receive data from the first "STX" if reception is stopped and a timeout occurs (power save mode),
because the reception mode changes to the "STX reception wait state."

3-40
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.3 IrDA (IrCOMM) INTERFACE

The protocol for IrComm specifications is provided.

Application layer

IrComm

Tiny TP

IrLMP

IrLAP

IrDA-SIR

IrDA V1.2 (Low Power) standard

parts are required.

Item Specifications
Communication mode Physical layer conforming to IrDA-SIR V1.2 (Low
Power) standard
Transfer speed 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps *1
Communication distance within 0.2 m *2
Peak wave length of 850 to 900 nm
emitted light
Communication angle within ±15°
Ambient illuminance 1000 lx or less
(fluorescent lamp and incandescent lamp)
Emissive power Min 3.6 mW/Sr (θh, θv ≤ ±15°)
Min. photo sensibility Min 9 µW/cm2 (θh, θv ≤ ±15°)

*1: Values are dependent on the communication protocol settings.

*2: The communication distance may become shorter than 0.2 m, depending on the host’s
performance.

Device nickname: 2-inch/203-dpi model .........B-EP2DL-G

4-inch/203-dpi model .........B-EP4DL-G
Service name (Class name): IrDA: IrCOMM
Min. turnaround time: 1 msec
Link termination threshold time: 12 sec

3.3.1 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE

Data is left in the received buffer until reception is stopped and a timeout occurs (power save
mode) because the received buffer has not been initialized.

3-41
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.4 IrDA (IrOBEX) INTERFACE

The protocol for IrOBEX specifications is provided.

Application layer

IrOBEX

Tiny TP (PTTP1)

IrLMP (LMP3)

IrLAP

IrDA-SIR

IrDA V1.2 (Low Power) standard

parts are required.

Item Specifications
Communication mode Physical layer conforming to IrDA-SIR V1.2 (Low
Power) standard
Transfer speed 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps *1
Communication distance within 0.2 m *2
Peak wave length of 850 to 900 nm
emitted light
Communication angle within ±15°
Ambient illuminance 1000 lx or less
(fluorescent lamp and incandescent lamp)
Emissive power Min 3.6 mW/Sr (θh, θv ≤ ±15°)
Min. photo sensibility Min 9 µW/cm2 (θh, θv ≤ ±15°)

*1: Values are dependent on the communication protocol settings.

*2: The communication distance may become shorter than 0.2 m, depending on the host’s
performance.

Device nickname: 2-inch/203-dpi model .........B-EP2DL-G

4-inch/203-dpi model .........B-EP4DL-G
Service name (Class name): IrDA: IrOBEX
Min. turnaround time: 1 msec
Link termination threshold time: 12 sec

3.4.1 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE

Data is left in the received buffer until reception is stopped and a timeout occurs (power save
mode) because the received buffer has not been initialized.

3-42
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.5 RS-232C INTERFACE

Item Specifications
Normal mode
Communication mode Start-stop synchronization mode
Communication direction Transmission/reception (Full duplex)
Transmission rate 9600, 19200, 38400, 57600, 115200 bps *1
Start bit 1 bit
Stop bit 1 bit
Data length 8 bits
Parity None/Even (depending on the setting)
Error detection *2 Overrun error
Framing error
Parity error
Received buffer 512K bytes

*1: Values are dependent on the communication protocol settings.

*2: Error detection is available in the RECEIPT mode only.

3.5.1 TRANSMISSION CONTROL (XON/XOFF PROTOCOL)

• The printer sends an XOFF code (13H) to the host, when the blank positions in the receive
buffer become 10Kbytes or less.
• The printer sends an XON code (11H) to the host, when the blank positions in the receive buffer
become 256Kbytes or more.
• When there are no blank positions in the receive buffer, the printer discards the received data
which exceeds the receive buffer capacity without storing it in the buffer, and the buffer full error
occurs. (After detecting the XOFF code, the host must stop transmission before the printer
receive buffer becomes full.)

3-43
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.5.2 NOTES WHEN SENDING A COMMAND

• In the LABEL mode, when any of the commands below are sent, the host should send the next
command after receiving the process end status. If the host sends the next command before
receiving the process end status, the printer may discard it without receiving.
• Print Density Fine Adjust Command (If it is not stored in the form)
• Print Position Fine Adjust Command (If it is not stored in the form)
• Form Store Terminate Command
• Graphic Data Store Command
• Printer ID Set Command
• Flash Memory Storage Area Format Command
• Writable Character Data Store Command
• Status Request Command
• Mode Select Command
• Strip Sensor Adjust Command
• Data Print Command
* When automatic status transmission is not specified by the Data Print Command, the
issue end status is not sent. Therefore, check the printer status by transmitting the
Status Request Command. When the printer status is idling, the next command
should be sent.
• In the TPCL mode, when the automatic status response is selected, the host sends a response
when receiving an error, print end, or feed end status.
• In the RECEIPT mode, the host sends a status when receiving an error status, though there is
no automatic status response selection. To the print end and feed end statuses, the host does
not return any status.
• In the ESC/POS mode, the automatic status response cannot be selected. To the print end
and feed end statuses, the host does not return any status. (A response is made with the
Status Request Command only.)

3-44
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• Contents of the status

[LABEL, RECEIPT or ESC/POS mode]

Data to be sent (Fixed at 5 bytes)
STX Printer ID Printer status Battery status
02H xxH xxH xxH xxH

• Printer ID ......... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)
• Printer status ... Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data.
00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Operating
0CH: Communication error * In the RECEIPT mode or for RS-232C connection only
0DH: Normal end + Label end (See NOTE.)
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
0FH: Wait for strip * In the LABEL mode only
10H: Normal issue end
14H: Pause state
19H: Ambient temperature error
32H: Abnormal battery temperature
33H: Battery excessive temperature
37H: Charging error
38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
45H: Wait for battery recovery
46H: Wait for head temperature reduction
47H: Wait for motor temperature reduction
55H: Writable character/PC command save mode
NOTE: In the LABEL mode, this is a state when the printer runs out of labels, after the
effective print length is printed. In the RECEIPT mode, this status is returned
to the host, when the printer runs out of labels, after a receipt is issued.

3-45
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• Status in the compatible mode for the B-SP series

00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature (including ambient temperature error,
abnormal battery temperature, and battery excessive temperature)
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Operating (including wait for strip, pause state, writable character/PC command
save mode, wait for battery recovery, wait for head temperature reduction, and wait
for motor temperature reduction)
0CH: Communication error * In the RECEIPT mode or for RS-232C connection only
0DH: Normal end + Label end
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
10H: Normal issue end
37H: Charging error
38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)

3-46
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• Battery status .. The battery charge status is indicated in 5 levels.

(B-EP2DL)
01H: 7.2 V or less (Print failure)
02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 1 to 30)
03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 30 to 150)
04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 150 to 300)
05H: 8.0 V to 8.4 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 300 or more)
(B-EP4DL)
01H: 14.0 V or less (Print failure)
02H: 14.1 V to 14.6 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 1 to 30)
03H: 14.7 V to 15.2 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 30 to 150)
04H: 15.3 V to 15.9 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 150 to 300)
05H: 16.0 V to 16.8 V (remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 300 or more)
* The remaining number of printable labels may vary according to the contents to be
printed and the ambient environment.

3-47
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

[TPCL mode]
Data to be sent

SOH STX Status Remaining No. of labels ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

• Detailed status is indicated in 2-byte data.

“00”: Normal state
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating
“04”: Pause state
“05”: Wait for strip
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken head dots error
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature
“19”: Ambient temperature error
“32”: Abnormal battery temperature
“33”: Battery excessive temperature
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
“38”: Bluetooth setting successfully completed
(→ No response with Status Request Command)
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
(“40”: Normal issue end) Response status for automatic status transmission
(“41”: Normal feed end) Response status for automatic status transmission
“45”: Wait for battery recovery
“46”: Wait for head temperature reduction
“47”: Wait for motor temperature reduction
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state
“55”: Writable character/PC command save mode

3-48
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• Detailed status in the compatible mode for the B-SP series

“00”: Normal state
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating (Including wait for strip, pause state, wait for battery recovery, wait for
head temperature reduction, wait for motor temperature reduction, and writable
character/PC command save mode)
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end (including)
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken head dots error
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature (Including ambient temperature error,
abnormal battery temperature, and battery excessive temperature)
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
“38”: Bluetooth setting successfully completed
(→ No response with Status Request Command)
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
(“40”: Normal issue end) Response status for automatic status transmission
(“41”: Normal feed end) Response status for automatic status transmission
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state
• Status type ...... Indicated in 1-byte data
“1”: Status Request Command
“2”: Automatic status transmission
• Remaining No. of labels .... Indicated in 4-byte data
“0000” to “9999”
• CR/LF .............. Indicated in 2-byte data

3-49
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

(1) Connector pin diagram and signal description

Pin No. Signal name Function Signal direction

1 SG Ground line for all data and control signals. –
2 (without the noise filter)
3 RXD Line for data which the host sends to the printer. ← Host
Logic “1” is a “Low” level, while logic “0” is a “High”
level.
It is in a “Low (Mark)” state when no transmission is in
progress.
In power save mode, it should be in a “Low (Mark)”
state. If it is in a “High” state, the printer cannot be
returned to the normal state from the power save
mode by opening/closing the cover, or pressing the
[POWER] switch or the [FEED] switch.
4 TXD Line for data which the printer sends to the host. Printer →
Logic “1” is a “Low” level, while logic “0” is a “High”
level. It is in a “Low (Mark)” state when no
transmission is in progress. It is in a high impedance
state in power save mode.
5 CTS N/A –
6 RTS N/A –
7 TEST The signal is connected with SG. –
8 N.C –

(2) Wire connection diagram

[Host] [Printer]

GND 5 1 SG
RXD 2 2 SG
TXD 3 3 RXD
CTS 8 4 TXD
RTS 7 5 CTS
DCD 1 6 RTS
DTR 4 7 TEST
DSR 6 8 N.C
RI 9

3-50
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

(3) Interface circuit

• Input circuit

TTL/CMOS
RXD LOGIC LEVEL

RS-232C LEVEL

• Output circuit

TTL/CMOS
LOGIC LEVEL
TXD

RS-232C LEVEL
Signal levels
Input voltage H .... +2.4 V to +25 V
L..... -25 V to -0.6 V
Output voltage H .... Min. +5.0 V Typ +5.4 V
L..... Min. -5.0 V Typ -5.4 V

(4) Connector used for the communication cable

• For the printer
Manufacturer: HOSHIDEN
Model name: TCP8685 or equivalent
• For the host
Manufacturer: DDK
Model name: 17JE-13090-02-D8C or equivalent

3.5.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE

Data is left in the received buffer until reception is stopped and a timeout occurs (power save
mode) because the received buffer has not been initialized.

3-51
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.6 USB INTERFACE

(1) Supported standard : Complying with USB Standard Rev. 2.0
(2) Supported transfer type : Control transfer and bulk transfer
(3) Transfer rate : Full-speed (12 Mbps)
(4) Transfer control method : A status with the receive buffer remaining capacity data shown
below is returned against the lead request just after [ESC] WB [LF]
[NUL].
The host uses it to transfer data without making the receive buffer
full.
• Receive Buffer Free Space Status
Commonly used in all modes (TPCL, TPCL1, LABEL, RECEIPT, RECEIPT1, or ESC/POS)
Status after [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] (23 bytes)

SOH 01H
Header of the status block
STX 02H
3XH Printer status
Status
3XH * Details are described later.
33H This indicates a status with free space of the
Status type
receive buffer included.
3XH
3XH Remaining print count
Remaining count
3XH “0000” (0 label/tag) to “9999”(9999 labels/tags)
3XH
32H Total number of bytes of this status block
Length
33H "23" (23 bytes)
3XH
Free space of the receive buffer
3XH
Free space of “00000” (0K byte) to “00512” (512K bytes)
3XH
receive buffer However, the maximum value should be equal
3XH
to the receive buffer capacity.
3XH
30H
30H
Receive buffer Receive buffer capacity
35H
capacity “00512”(512K bytes)
31H
32H
CR 0DH
Footer of the status block
LF 0AH

3-52
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.6.1 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE

Data is left in the received buffer until reception is stopped and a timeout occurs (power save
mode) because the received buffer has not been initialized.

3-53
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.7 BLUETOOTH INTERFACE

3.7.1 OUTLINED SPECIFICATIONS

Item Specifications
Communication method Bluetooth V1.2 (with logo certification)
Supported profile Serial port profile
Communication class Class 2
Communication distance 3 m/360°
Service name Serial Port Profile 1
Device nickname Programmable
Factory default setting: TOSHIBA TEC BT
Flow control Credit based flow control
Operation mode Slave mode
PIN code Available
Receive buffer Dynamic allocation
Link break time out 20 sec.
Inquiry control Programmable
Factory default setting: • Response is made at anytime.
SR mode and timer setting SR mode: R2 *
value at page/inquiry scanning The timer is programmable.
Factory default setting: Scan interval = 1.28 sec.
Scan window = 22.5 msec.
Device class Major Device Class = Imaging
Minor Device Class = Printer
* Although the SR mode of the printer is R2, that of the host is not necessarily R2.
Connectivity depends on the situation. When the clock of the host is already synchronized
with the printer (for example, after an inquiry is made or a connection has been once
established after a power on), the highest connectivity is obtained by setting R2 in the SR
mode of the host. When the host’s clock is not synchronized with the printer, the
connectivity will become the best when SR mode of the host is set to R0.

3-54
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.7.2 BLUETOOTH DEVICE ADDRESS (BD ADDRESS)

As long as the Bluetooth interface has been installed on the printer, when the printer is turned
ON, it prints the Bluetooth device address.
[Character]
The BD address is printed on the self-test result in the SYSTEM mode.
[Barcode]
Various parameters are printed by holding down the [POWER] switch (for 3 seconds or more
after a message “ON LINE” is displayed on the LCD) at a power ON time.
For details, see the Key Operation Specifications.

3-55
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.7.3 STANDARD COMMUNICATION SEQUENCE OF BLUETOOTH INTERFACE

When Bluetooth interface is used, and if a connection between the host and the printer is
disconnected right after a data transmission, the transmitted data may not be properly sent to the
printer.
This should be avoided by performing one of the following methods on the application program.
(1) Disconnecting the Bluetooth connection between the host and the printer after the host
receives an end of job status from the printer and confirms the completion of the job.

(2) Waiting for the minimum of 100 msec. after a data transmission to the printer before
disconnecting the Bluetooth connection.

(3) Maintaining the Bluetooth connection while a series of print jobs are performed on the
application, and disconnecting the connection by key operations when exiting the print job.

As the completion of printer operations can be confirmed, method (1) or (3) is recommended.

3-56
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

Method (1): Disconnecting a Bluetooth connection between the host and the printer after the completion
of a print job is confirmed.

Basically, use the automatic status transmission function (this function is enabled as the factory default.)
to confirm the statuses sent from the printer after printing or storing data.
This method enables confirming whether a print job is properly performed on the application. Also, an
error, such as a paper end or a paper jam, on the printer can be detected by the application.
c LABEL mode (Storing forms, writable characters, or graphics)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
d Status sent in response to the status status prior
One of the following request command. to data
commands: storage
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH
- [ESC]v
Make sure that the printer is
in idle state.
e Save start command through
Save terminate command, Bit
map writable character
command, or Graphic command

- [ESC]XO;01,1[LF][NUL] e Status indicating a normal termination of data

through storage (when an automatic status transmission is
[ESC]XP[LF][NUL] enabled.)
Data
- [ESC]XD;. . . [LF][NUL] STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level storage
- [ESC]SG;. . . [LF][NUL] 02H xxHxxH 10H xxH

Normal termination
A status request
command does not Note: The automatic status transmission function
needs to be enabled in advance.
need to be sent.
Regarding how to enable this function (enabled as the
factory default.), refer to the [ESC] X command.
fRequest for a disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the
disconnection of the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-57
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

d LABEL mode (Issue)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior to Confirmation
a data transmission.)
of the printer
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status status prior
commands: request command. to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL]
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH

Make sure that the printer is

e Data print command in idle state.
[ESC]X01H01H01H. . .
[LF][NUL] Issue

01H: Transmissive sensor

11H: Reflective sensor
21H: No sensor e Status indicating a normal termination of a label
Note: Automatic status issue
transmission is enabled.
STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
02H xxHxxH 10H xxH Waiting time
A status request
command does not Normal termination until the end
need to be sent. of a print job

fRequest for a disconnection

of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the
disconnection of the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-58
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

e RECEIPT mode (Storing graphics)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status status prior
commands: request command. to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL]
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH
Make sure that the printer is
in idle state.
e Graphic command

[ESC]SG; . . . [LF][NUL]
e Status indicating a normal termination of data
storage Data
storage
STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
02H xxHxxH 10H xxH

Normal termination
fRequest for a disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-59
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

f RECEIPT mode (Issue)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status status prior
commands: request command. to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL]
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH
Make sure that the printer is
e Print data in idle state.

Print data including a line

feed command [LF]
Issue

f Status request command

f Status sent in response to the status
E.g.) [ESC]v request command.

STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level

After a printer status is received, a
transmission of the next status request 02H xxHxxH 0BH xxH
command should be paused for the min. of
20 msec. Usually, the interval is The printer is in operation.
approximately 200 msec.
Since a response to a status request
command may be delayed depending on
the radio state, wait a response with
approx. 1-second timeout.

gStatus request command

Waiting
E.g.) [ESC]v g Status sent in response to the status request time until
command. the end of a
print job
Repeat until the STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
printer enters the 02H xxHxxH 0BH xxH
normal state (00H).
The printer is in operation.
hStatus request command

E.g.) [ESC]v h Status sent in response to the status request

command.

STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level

02H xxHxxH 00H xxH

Make sure that the printer is

in idle state
iRequest for a disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection
iResponse to the request for the disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-60
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

g TPCL mode (Storing writable characters, PC save)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status status prior
commands: request command. to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
- [ESC]v 01H 02H 30H30HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Make sure that the printer is in

eBit map writable character idle state.
command or Save start
command
- [ESC]XD . . . [LF][NUL] Data
- [ESC]XO . . . [LF][NUL] storage
to [ESC]XP[LF][NUL]

f Status request command

E.g.) [ESC]FM[0A][00] f Status sent in response to the status

request command.

After a printer status is received, a SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
transmission of the next status request 01H 02H 30H32HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
command should be paused for the
min. of 20 msec. Usually, the interval
The printer is in operation.
is approximately 200 msec.
Since a response to a status request
command may be delayed depending
on the radio state, wait a response with
approx. 1-second timeout.

g Status request command

Waiting
E.g.) [ESC]FM[0A][00] g Status sent in response to the status time until
request command. the end of a
print job
Repeat until the printer SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
enters the normal state 01H 02H 30H32HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
(30H30H).
The printer is in operation.
h Status request command

E.g.) [ESC]FM[0A][00] h Status sent in response to the status request

command.

SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 30H30HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Make sure that the printer is in

idle state.
iRequest for a disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection
iResponse to the request for the disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-61
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

h TPCL mode (Issue)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status status prior
commands: request command. to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
- [ESC]v 01H 02H 30H30HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

The printer is in operation.

e Label size set command to
Issue command

E.g.) Issue
[ESC]XS;I,0001,0002C1011
[LF][NUL] eStatus indicating a normal termination of issue

Status response is
enabled.
SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
Waiting
01H 02H 34H30HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
A status request time until
command does not the end of
Normal termination
need to be sent. a print job

fRequest for a disconnection

of the Bluetooth connection fResponse to the request for the disconnection of
the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-62
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

Method (2): Waiting for the minimum of 100 msec. after a data transmission to the printer before
disconnecting the Bluetooth connection.

In the case that a method to confirm an end of job status, as described in Method (1), is not applicable, a
minimum of 100 msec. should be provided between the last data transmission and a disconnection of
Bluetooth connection to avoid an erroneous data transmission via Bluetooth.
The above mentioned 100 msec. is supposed to be counted up from the termination of a data
transmission via Bluetooth (radio wave).
Some hosts may store the transmission data of the application in the buffer in the driver, then send them
to the printer. In this case, care must be taken that there is time lag between the timing when the
application writes data into the output function and when the data transmission is actually completed.
Thus, the time which is required to complete a data transmission should be added to 100 msec.

c LABEL mode (Storing forms, writable characters, or graphics)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status status prior
commands: request command. to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH

e Save start command through Make sure that the printer is

Save terminate command, Bit in idle state.
map writable character
command, or Graphic command

- [ESC]XO;01,1[LF][NUL] Data
through storage
[ESC]XP[LF][NUL] Min. 100 msec. Provide 100 msec. or more wait time
- [ESC]XD;. . . [LF][NUL] after the termination of data
- [ESC]SG;. . . [LF][NUL] transmission via Bluetooth.

fRequest for a disconnection

of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the disconnection of
the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-63
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

d LABEL mode (Issue)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status status prior
commands: request command. to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH

Make sure that the printer is

e Data print command
in idle state.
[ESC]X01H01H01H
[LF][NUL]

01H: Transmissive sensor Issue

11H: Reflective sensor
21H: No sensor Min. 100msec. Provide 100 msec. or more wait
Note: Automatic status time after the termination of data
transmission is enabled. transmission via Bluetooth.

fRequest for a disconnection

of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the disconnection of
the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-64
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

e RECEIPT mode (Storing graphics)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status status prior
commands: request command. to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL]
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH

Make sure that the printer is

e Graphic command in idle state.
[ESC]SG; . . . [LF][NUL]

Data
Min. 100msec. Provide 100 msec. or more wait storage
time after the termination of data
transmission via Bluetooth.
fRequest for a disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the
disconnection of the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-65
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

f RECEIPT mode (Issue)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status status prior
commands: request command. to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH

Make sure that the printer is

e Print data
in idle state.
Print data including a line
feed command [LF]
Issue
Min. 100msec. Provide 100 msec. or more wait
time after the termination of data
transmission via Bluetooth.
fRequest for a disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-66
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

g TPCL mode (Storing writable characters, PC save)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
d Status sent in response to the status
One of the following request command. status prior
commands: to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
- [ESC]v 01H 02H 30H30HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Make sure that the printer is in

eBit map writable character idle state.
command or Save start
command
- [ESC]XD . . . [LF][NUL] Data
- [ESC]XO . . . [LF][NUL] storage
to [ESC]XP[LF][NUL] Min. 100msec.
Provide 100 msec. or more wait
time after the termination of data
fRequest for a disconnection transmission via Bluetooth.
of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-67
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

h TPCL mode (Issue)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior
to a data transmission.) Confirmation
of the printer
d Status sent in response to the status
One of the following status prior
request command.
commands: to data
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] storage
SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL]
- [ESC]v 01H 02H 30H30HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

The printer is in operation.

e Label size set command to
Issue command

E.g.) Issue
[ESC]XS;I,0001,0002C1011
[LF][NUL] Min. 100msec.
Status response is Provide 100 msec. or more wait
enabled. time after the termination of data
transmission via Bluetooth.
fRequest for a disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-68
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

Method (3): Disconnecting the Bluetooth connection by key operations when exiting a series of print jobs.

This method improves the printing throughput of the application, as no procedures are required for
establishing Bluetooth connection each time a printing occurs, which takes about 1 to 3 seconds
(depending on the radio state.)
Also, maintaining the connection enables an error, such as a paper end or a paper jam, on the printer to
be detected by the application. However, when more than one host shares one printer at the same time,
this method is not applicable because the printer supports one-to-one connection only.
After a series of print jobs is terminated, Bluetooth connection is supposed to be disconnected at the
timing of returning to the main menu by key operations. In this case, a minimum of 100 msec. should be
given after all data are completely sent to the printer prior to the disconnection of Bluetooth connection.

c LABEL mode (Storing forms, writable characters, or graphics)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection

d Status request command

(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior to
a data transmission.) Confirmation
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status of the printer
commands: request command. status prior
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL] to data
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level storage
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH

Make sure that the printer is

e Save start command through in idle state.
Save terminate command, Bit
map writable character
command, or Graphic command

- [ESC]XO;01,1[LF][NUL]
through
Data
[ESC]XP[LF][NUL]
storage
- [ESC]XD;. . . [LF][NUL]
- [ESC]SG;. . . [LF][NUL]
STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
02H xxHxxH 10H xxH

Repeat when there is a Normal termination

next data storage job.

fRequest for a disconnection

of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the disconnection of
Finish the data storage operation and the Bluetooth connection
return to Main Menu or another screen.

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-69
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

d LABEL mode (Issue)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection

d Status request command

(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior to Confirmation
a data transmission.) +C25 of the printer
status prior
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status to data
commands: request command. storage
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL]
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH

e Data print command Make sure that the printer is

[ESC]X01H01H01H in idle state.
[LF][NUL]
Issue
01H: Transmissive sensor
11H: Reflective sensor
21H: No sensor
Note: Automatic status e Status indicating a normal termination of data
transmission is enabled. storage

STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level Waiting time

A status request 02H xxHxxH 10H xxH until the end
command does not of a print job
need to be sent. Normal termination

Repeat when there is a

next print job.

fRequest for a disconnection

of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the disconnection of
Finish the data storage operation and the Bluetooth connection
return to Main Menu or another screen.

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-70
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

e RECEIPT mode (Storing graphics)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection

d Status request command

(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status Confirmation
is required to be confirmed prior to
of the printer
a data transmission.)
status prior
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status to data
commands: request command. storage
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL]
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH

Make sure that the printer

is in idle state.
e Graphic command

[ESC]SG; . . . [LF][NUL] e Status indicating a normal termination of data

storage (when an automatic status transmission is
enabled.) Data
STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level storage
02H xxHxxH 10H xxH

Repeat when there is a Normal termination

next print job.

fRequest for a disconnection

of the Bluetooth connection
fResponse to the request for the disconnection of
Finish the data storage operation and the Bluetooth connection
return to Main Menu or another screen.

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3-71
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

f RECEIPT mode (Issue)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection

d Status request command

(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior Confirmation
to a data transmission.) of the printer
status prior
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status to data
commands: request command. storage
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL]
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
- [ESC]v 02H xxHxxH 00H xxH

e Print data Make sure that the printer is

in idle state.
Print data including a line
feed command [LF]
Issue

f Status request command

E.g.) [ESC]v

f Status sent in response to the status

After a printer status is received, a request command.
transmission of the next status
request command should be paused STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level
for the min. of 20 msec. Usually, 02H xxHxxH 0BH xxH
the interval is approximately 200
msec. The printer is in operation.
Since a response to a status request
command may be delayed
depending on the radio state, wait a
response with approx. 1-second
timeout.
Waiting
g Status request command
time until
E.g.) [ESC]v g Status sent in response to the status request the end of a
command. print job

Repeat until the STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level

printer enters the 02H xxHxxH 0BH xxH
normal state (00H).
The printer is in operation.
h Status request command

E.g.) [ESC]v h Status sent in response to the status request

command.

STX Printer ID Printer status Battery level

02H xxHxxH 00H xxH
Repeat when there is a
next print job. Make sure that the printer is
in idle state
iRequest for a disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection
iResponse to the request for the disconnection
Finish the data storage operation and of the Bluetooth connection
return to Main Menu or another screen.

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

3-72
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.
g TPCL mode (Storing writable characters, PC save)
Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection

d Status request command

(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior to Confirmation
a data transmission.) of the printer
status prior
One of the following
d Status sent in response to the status to data
commands:
request command. storage
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL]
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
- [ESC]v 01H 02H 30H30HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Make sure that the printer is in

eBit map writable character idle state.
command or Save start
command
- [ESC]XD . . . [LF][NUL] Data
- [ESC]XO . . . [LF][NUL] storage
to [ESC]XP[LF][NUL]

f Status request command

E.g.) [ESC]FM[0A][00] f Status sent in response to the status

request command.

After a printer status is received, a SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
transmission of the next status 01H 02H 30H32HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
request command should be paused
for the min. of 20 msec. Usually, the The printer is in operation.
interval is approximately 200 msec.
Since a response to a status request
command may be delayed depending
on the radio state, wait a response
with approx. 1-second timeout.

g Status request command Waiting

time until
E.g.) [ESC]FM[0A][00] g Status sent in response to the status the end of a
request command. print job

Repeat until the printer SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
enters the normal state 01H 02H 30H32HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
(30H30H)
The printer is in operation.
h Status request command

E.g.) [ESC]FM[0A][00] h Status sent in response to the status request

command.
SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
01H 02H 30H30HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
Repeat when there is a
next print job. Make sure that the printer is in
idle state.
iRequest for a disconnection
of the Bluetooth connection
iResponse to the request for the
Finish the data storage operation and
disconnection of the Bluetooth connection
return to Main Menu or another screen.

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:

3-73
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.
h TPCL mode (Issue)

Host Printer
c Request for a Bluetooth
connection
c Response to the request for a Bluetooth
connection
d Status request command
(Usually, a status request
command is not necessary to be
sent. However, send this
command when the printer status
is required to be confirmed prior Confirmation
to a data transmission.) of the printer
status prior
One of the following d Status sent in response to the status to data
commands: request command. storage
- [ESC]FM[LF][NUL]
- [ESC]WS[LF][NUL] SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF
- [ESC]v 01H 02H 30H30HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

The printer is in operation.

e Label size set command to
Issue command

E.g.) Issue
[ESC]XS;I,0001,0002C1011
[LF][NUL] eStatus indicating a normal termination of issue
(After a normal termination of an issue, a status is
Status response is
automatically sent.)
enabled.
SOH STX Status Unprinted count ETX EOT CR LF Waiting
A status request
time until
command does not 01H 02H 34H30HxxH 3xH3xH3xH3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH
the end of
need to be sent.
Normal termination a print job
Repeat when there is
a next print job.

fRequest for a disconnection

of the Bluetooth connection fResponse to the request for the
disconnection of the Bluetooth connection
Finish the data storage operation and
return to Main Menu or another screen.

* The printer status can also be confirmed with the following command:
• [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
Note that the contents of the status vary, which deserves special attention.

3.7.4 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE

Data is left in the received buffer until reception is stopped and a timeout occurs (power save
mode) because the received buffer has not been initialized.

3-74
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.8 WIRELESS LAN INTERFACE

3.8.1 OUTLINED SPECIFICATIONS

Supported standard IEEE 802.11b/g

Communication distance 100 m/360° (Depending on conditions)

Physical layer 802.11b/g

Data link layer CSMA/CA
Network layer IP, ICMP, ARP
Client protocol
Transport layer TCP, UDP
SOCKET, LPR, SNMP agent
Application layer
DHCP client, Web server, WINS client
Flow control TCP/IP flow control
Antenna Built-in
Parameter setting Via USB
Parameter status monitoring Via HTTP

3-75
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.8.2 MAC ADDRESS

When the wireless LAN module has been installed on the printer, the printer prints the MAC
address and wireless LAN module’s parameter settings.
[MAC address]
The MAC address is printed on the self-test result in the SYSTEM mode.
[Parameter settings]
Various parameters are printed by holding down the [POWER] switch (for 3 seconds or more
after a message “ON LINE” is displayed on the LCD) at a power ON time.
For details, see the Key Operation Specifications.

3.8.3 CONNECTION SEQUENCE

For the printer connection setting, the connection sequence varies according to the wireless
mode.
3.8.3.1 INFRASTRUCTURE MODE (ESS)

The printer performs active scanning for all the channels that it supports at a power ON
time. When receiving a valid active scanning response from the access point, the
printer enters the connection state.
The channel set at the access point is used.
The printer out of the connection state repeats active scanning every 40 seconds until it
enters the connection state.
If the printer comes into a situation where it cannot receive the beacon from the access
point for a specified period of time after the connection due to weaker radio signals or
other factors, the printer goes out of the connection state. In this case, just as at a
power ON time, the printer waits for 40 seconds and then performs active scanning every
40 seconds until it becomes connected again. This operation continues at maximum for
two hours.
If Supplicant is used, the 802.1x authentication is performed when the printer shifts from
the out-of-connection state to the connection state.

3.8.3.2 ADHOC MODE (IBSS)

The printer performs active scanning for all the channels that it supports at a power ON
time. When receiving a valid active scanning response from the IBSS creator, the
printer connects to the network as a joiner. The channel set at the IBSS creator is used.
If the printer can receive no valid active scanning response after active scanning for all
the channels for approximately 3.5 seconds, the printer becomes the IBSS creator and
creates own BSS for the channel specified for the printer.

3-76
 CHAPTER 3 INTERFACE
B-EP Series

3.8.4 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA WHEN THE PRINTER GOES INTO POWER SAVE MODE

Data is left in the received buffer until reception is stopped and a timeout occurs (power save
mode) because the received buffer has not been initialized.

3-77
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4. TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
4.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
This section describes details regarding the transmission sequence between the host and the printer.

4-1
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.2 TPCL MODE

4.2.1 INITIAL SETTING

Writable characters, logo, and PC interface commands must be stored, before the label issue
operation.
(1) Storing writable characters and logos

Power ON

No
<New>
Yes
(Add/change)
[ESC] J1: Formats flash memory.
Format Command

Bit Map Writable [ESC] XD: Stores writable characters or a

Character Command logo on flash memory.

No Completion of storing
all characters
Yes

z Storing PC interface commands

z Label issue operation

NOTES: (1) The storage of writable characters or logos is only performed if it is required.
(2) When the Format Command is not sent before storing a writable character or a
logo with the same number as the already stored writable character or logo,
memory will be used with each storing.
(3) Performing other operations (storing PC interface commands and label issue
operation) after storing writable characters or logos automatically clears the
image buffer.
(4) If the storage operation is not continued after storing writable characters or logos,
the printer enters the on-line mode (label issue operation) after approx. 1.6
seconds. At the same time, the image buffer is automatically cleared.

4-2
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) Storing PC interface commands

Power ON or
After linking to each interface

Mode Select Command [ESC] M: Changes the print mode.

No
<New>
(Add/change) Yes

Format Command [ESC] J1: Formats flash memory.

[ESC] XO: Declares the start of saving PC interface

Save Start Command
commands.

Label Size Set Command [ESC] D: Sets the label size.

Position Fine Adjust Command [ESC] AX: Adjusts the print position.

Print Density Fine Adjust

[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density/separation setting.
Command

Image Buffer Clear Command [ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.

Line Format Command [ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.

Bit Map Font Format Command [ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.

Outline Font Format Command [ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.

Barcode/2-D Code Format Command [ESC] XB: Sets the barcode/2-D code format.

Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC: Draws data of the bit map font.

[ESC] XP: Declares the termination of saving PC

Save Terminate Command
interface commands.
No Completion of
all storing
Yes

z Storing writable characters or logos

z Label issue operation
NOTES: (1) The storage of PC commands is only performed if it is required.
(2) When the Format Command is not sent before storing the PC interface command
with the same number as the already stored PC command, memory will be used
with each storing.
(3) Performing other operations (storing PC interface commands and label issue
operation) after storing writable characters or logos automatically clears the
image buffer.

(4) Select commands to be stored as the occasion arises.

4-3
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.2.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION

An example of the label issue operation is described below.

(1) Where the Saved Data Read Command is not used:
Power ON or
After linking to each interface

Mode Select Command [ESC] M: Changes the print mode.

Place paper

Label Size Set Command [ESC] D: Sets the label size.

Position Fine Adjust Command [ESC] AX: Adjusts the feed length.

Print Density Fine

[ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density/separation setting.
Adjust Command

[ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it

Feed Command
with the first print position.

Image Buffer Clear Command [ESC] C: Clears the image buffer.

Line Format Command [ESC] LC: Sets the line format and draws it.

Bit Map Font Format Command [ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.

Outline Font Format Command [ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.

Barcode/2-D Code Format Command [ESC] XB: Sets the barcode/2-D code format.

Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.

Outline Font Data Command [ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.

Barcode/2-D Code Data Command [ESC] RB: Draws barcode/2-D code data.

Issue Command [ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.

Yes
<Change data issue>
No
Yes
<Format change>
No
Yes
<Label change>
No
Power OFF

NOTES: (1) The Label Size Set Command must be sent.

(2) After the power is turned off then on, the Bit Map Font Format Command, the
Outline Font Format Command, and the Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Format
Command should be sent as the occasion arises, because they are not protected
in memory.

4-4
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) Where the Saved Data Read Command is used:

Power ON or
After linking to each interface

Place paper

Saved Data Read Command [ESC] XQ: Reads the label format stored in flash
memory.

Feed Command [ESC] T: Feeds one sheet of paper and aligns it

with the first print position.

Bit Map Font Data Command [ESC] RC: Draws bit map font data.

Outline Font Data Command [ESC] RV: Draws outline font data.

Barcode/2-D Code Data Command [ESC] RB: Draws barcode/2-D code data.

Issue Command [ESC] XS: Issues (prints) the label.

Yes
<Changed data issue>
No
Yes
<Label change>
No

Power OFF

NOTES: (1) The Feed Command can be omitted if the same sheet is used before Power OFF
and after Power ON.
(2) The Saved Data Read Command can be omitted after the power is turned OFF
and then ON if the command is set as [Automatic read after Power ON: Enabled].
(3) When XML data is used:
The XML format can be used for transmitting print data to the printer.
(*) For details, see the XML Specifications.

4-5
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.2.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND

4.2.3.1 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND

If communication is interrupted while the Bit Map Font Format Command is running and no
subsequent data is transmitted in the next transmission, a command error occurs. If
communication is interrupted by the command separator, printing is available when the print data
is retransmitted from the beginning in the next transmission.
[Command transmission and print results (Examples)]
(1) When transmitting print data for two labels as usual,

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 1st label data
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0001|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 2nd label data
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0002|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

Print result: c and d as shown below are printed in a row.

c 2 inch 0001

d 2 inch 0002

4-6
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) When interrupting communication while the 2nd label command is running, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 1st label data
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0001|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|}
{PC00;0030,0050,
2nd label data
Interrupts communication while the
command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0002|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

Print result: c as shown below is printed after the 1st transmission, and d as shown below
is printed after the 2nd transmission.

c 2 inch 0001

d 2 inch 0002

4-7
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(3) When interrupting communication with the 2nd label command separator, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 1st label data
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0001|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|}
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|} 2nd label data

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
{RC00;2inch 0002|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

Print result: c as shown below is printed after the 1st transmission, and d as shown below
is printed after the 2nd transmission.

c 2 inch 0001

d 2 inch 0002

4-8
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(4) When interrupting communication while the 2nd label command is running, and then
retransmitting the 2nd label data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 1st label data
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0001|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|} 2nd label data (underway)
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|}
{PC00;0030,0050,

Interrupts communication while the

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits the 2nd label from the

beginning.
{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 2nd label data
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0002|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

Print result: c as shown below is printed after the 1st transmission, and a command error
occurs after the 2nd transmission.

c 2 inch 0001

4-9
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(5) When interrupting communication with the 2nd label command separator, and then
retransmitting the 2nd label data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 1st label data
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0001|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|} 2nd label data (underway)
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|}
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits the 2nd label from the

beginning.
{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 2nd label data
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0002|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

Print result: c as shown below is printed after the 1st transmission, and d as shown below
is printed after the 2nd transmission.

c 2 inch 0001

d 2 inch 0002

4-10
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.2.3.2 BARCODE/2-D CODE FORMAT COMMAND

As in the case of the Bit Map Font Format Command, if communication is interrupted while the
Barcode/2-D Code Format Command is running and no subsequent data is transmitted in the
next transmission, a command error occurs.
If communication is interrupted by the command separator, printing is available when the print
data is retransmitted from the beginning in the next transmission.
[Command transmission and print results (Examples)]
(1) When transmitting print data for two labels as usual,

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0230,0480,0200|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 1st label data
{XB00;0200,0050,0,3,02,0,0050,+0000000000,020,1,00|}
{RB00;0000001|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0230,0480,0200|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 2nd label data
{XB00;0200,0050,0,3,02,0,0050,+0000000000,020,1,00|}
{RB00;0000002|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

Print result: The 1st label data and 2nd label data are printed in a row.

4-11
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) When interrupting communication while the 2nd label command is running, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0230,0480,0200|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 1st label data
{XB00;0200,0050,0,3,02,0,0050,+0000000000,020,1,00|}
{RB00;0000001|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0230,0480,0200|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 2nd label data
{XB00;0200,0050,0,3,02,0,0050,+0

Interrupts communication while the

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
000000000,020,1,00|}
{RB00;0000002|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

Print result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and the 2nd label data is
printed after the 2nd transmission.

4-12
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(3) When interrupting communication with the 2nd label command separator, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0230,0480,0200|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 1st label data
{XB00;0200,0050,0,3,02,0,0050,+0000000000,020,1,00|}
{RB00;0000001|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0230,0480,0200|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|}
{XB00;0200,0050,0,3,02,0,0050,+0000000000,020,1,00|} 2nd label data

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

Transmits subsequent
2nd transmission: data.

{RB00;0000002|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

Print result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and the 2nd label data is
printed after the 2nd transmission.

4-13
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(4) When interrupting communication while the 2nd label command is running, and then
retransmitting the 2nd label data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 1st label data
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0001|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|} 2nd label data (underway
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|}
{XB00;0200,0050,0,3,02,0,0050,+0

Interrupts communication while the

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits the 2nd label from the

beginning.
{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0230,0480,0200|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 2nd label data
{XB00;0200,0050,0,3,02,0,0050,+0000000000,020,1,00|}
{RB00;0000002|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

Print result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and a command error
occurs after the 2nd transmission.

4-14
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(5) When interrupting communication with the 2nd label command separator, and then
retransmitting the 2nd label data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 1st label data
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}
{RC00;2inch 0001|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0130,0480,0100|}
{C|} 2nd label data (underway)
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|}
{PC00;0030,0050,2,1,a,00,B,+0000000000|}

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits the 2nd label from the

beginning.
{AY;+00,1,3|}
{D0230,0480,0200|}
{C|}
{LC;0010,0010,0470,0060,1,2|} 2nd label data
{XB00;0200,0050,0,3,02,0,0050,+0000000000,020,1,00|}
{RB00;0000002|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2011|}

Print result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and the 2nd label data is
printed after the 2nd transmission.

4-15
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.2.3.3 GRAPHIC COMMAND

When transmission is cancelled while graphic data is transmitted from the application, the data
cannot be properly printed because data subsequently transmitted is recognized as a graphic
command unless the graphic data has been transmitted before the transmission is cancelled.
If communication is interrupted while graphic data is transmitted, it is necessary to transmit
graphic data for the number of bytes that was not transmitted as dummy data, turn off and on the
power of the printer, or reset the printer.
[Command transmission and print results (Examples)]
* Descriptions are provided without graphic data omitted.
(1) When transmitting print data for two labels as usual,

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00] 1st label data
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00] 2nd label data
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

Print result: The 1st label data and 2nd label data are printed in a row.

4-16
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) When interrupting communication while the 2nd label command is running, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00] 1st label data
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00] 2nd label data

Interrupts communication while the

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
[00][00] ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

Print result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and the 2nd label data is
printed after the 2nd transmission.

4-17
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(3) When interrupting communication with the 2nd label command separator, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00] 1st label data
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00]
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|} 2nd label data
Interrupts communication with the
command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

Print result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and the 2nd label data is
printed after the 2nd transmission.

4-18
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(4) When interrupting communication while the 2nd label command is running, and then
retransmitting the 2nd label data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00] 1st label data
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|} 2nd label data (underway
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00]

Interrupts communication while the

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits the 2nd label from

the beginning.
{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00] 2nd label data
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

Print result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and a command error
occurs after the 2nd transmission. (data reception continues until the number of
bytes specified by the graphic data in the initial transmission is obtained. Then,
a command error occurs when the end code of the command is checked.)

4-19
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(5) When interrupting communication with the 2nd label command separator, and then
retransmitting the 2nd label data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00] 1st label data
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|} 2nd label data (underway)
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00]
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

Transmits the 1st label from the

2nd transmission: beginning.

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00] 1st label data
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

{D0821,0458,0801|}
{C|}
{SG;0161,0339,0096,0300,2,BM[D6][10][00][00][00] 2nd label data
‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ ‚ [FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C2001|}

Print result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and the 1st label data
and 2nd label data are printed after the 2nd transmission (3 labels in total).

4-20
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.2.3.4 PC SAVE COMMAND

When transmission is cancelled while PC saved data is transmitted from the application, the data
may not be properly stored because data subsequently transmitted is saved on the PC unless the
PC saved data has been transmitted before the transmission is cancelled.
If communication is interrupted while PC saved data is stored, it is necessary to issue the PC
Save Terminate Command, turn off and on the power of the printer, or reset the printer.
[Command transmission and storage results (Examples)]
(1) When transmitting PC saved data as usual,

{XO;25,S0,1|}
{D1430,0480,1400|}
{C|}
{LC;0000,0000,0050,0000,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0001,0050,0001,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0002,0050,0002,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0003,0050,0003,0,1|} 1st label data
{LC;0000,0004,0050,0004,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0005,0050,0005,0,1|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C1001|}
{XP|}
{XQ;25,S0,1,L|}

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

4-21
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) When interrupting communication while the PC Save Command is running, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

{XO;25,S0,1|}
{D1430,0480,1400|}
{C|}
{LC;0000,0000,0050,0000,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0001,0050,0001,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0002,0050,0002,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0003,0050,0003,0,1|}
{LC;0000,000

Interrupts communication while the 1st label data

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
4,0050,0004,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0005,0050,0005,0,1|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C1001|}
{XP|}
{XQ;25,S0,1,L|}

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

4-22
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(3) When interrupting communication with the PC Save Command separator, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

{XO;25,S0,1|}
{D1430,0480,1400|}
{C|}
{LC;0000,0000,0050,0000,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0001,0050,0001,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0002,0050,0002,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0003,0050,0003,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0004,0050,0004,0,1|} 1st label data

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
{LC;0000,0005,0050,0005,0,1|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C1001|}
{XP|}
{XQ;25,S0,1,L|}

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

4-23
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(4) When interrupting communication while the PC Save Command is running, and then
retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

{XO;25,S0,1|}
{D1430,0480,1400|}
{C|}
{LC;0000,0000,0050,0000,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0001,0050,0001,0,1|} 1st label data
{LC;0000,0002,0050,0002,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0003,0050,0003,0,1|}
{LC;0000,000

Interrupts communication while the

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits data from the

beginning.
{XO;25,S0,1|}
{D1430,0480,1400|}
{C|}
{LC;0000,0000,0050,0000,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0001,0050,0001,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0002,0050,0002,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0003,0050,0003,0,1|} 1st label data (retransmission)
{LC;0000,0004,0050,0004,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0005,0050,0005,0,1|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C1001|}
{XP|}
{XQ;25,S0,1,L|}

Storage result: Data is properly stored, however, when it is read, a command error occurs.

4-24
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(5) When interrupting communication with the PC Save Command separator, and then
retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

{XO;25,S0,1|}
{D1430,0480,1400|}
{C|}
{LC;0000,0000,0050,0000,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0001,0050,0001,0,1|} 1st label data
{LC;0000,0002,0050,0002,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0003,0050,0003,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0004,0050,0004,0,1|}

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

Transmits data from the beginning.

2nd transmission:

{XO;25,S0,1|}
{D1430,0480,1400|}
{C|}
{LC;0000,0000,0050,0000,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0001,0050,0001,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0002,0050,0002,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0003,0050,0003,0,1|} 1st label data (retransmission)
{LC;0000,0004,0050,0004,0,1|}
{LC;0000,0005,0050,0005,0,1|}
{XS;I,0001,0000C1001|}
{XP|}
{XQ;25,S0,1,L|}

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

4-25
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.3 LABEL MODE

4.3.1 INITIAL SETTING

Start

Mode Select Command [ESC] M: Changes the mode to the LABEL mode as
required.
No
< Completion of mode selection > Check to see if the mode has been changed by the
Yes status request.
Status Request Command [ESC] FM: Checks the printer state by the status
request.

Form Store Start Command [ESC] XO: Declares the start of form storage.

Label Size Set Command [ESC] D: Sets the label size.

Print Density Fine Adjust Command [ESC] AY: Adjusts the print density as required.

Print Position Fine Adjust Command [ESC] AX: Adjusts the print position as required.

Outline Font Field Command [ESC] PV: Sets the outline font format.

Bit Map Font Field Command [ESC] PC: Sets the bit map font format.

Barcode/2-D Code Format Command [ESC] XB: Sets the barcode/2-D code format.

Line Format Command [ESC] LC: Sets the line format.

Graphic Field Command [ESC] N: Sets the graphic field format.

Form Store Terminate Command [ESC] XP: Declares the termination of form storage.
No
< Completion of form storage >
Yes Check to see if the form storage has been completed
No by the status request.
< Completion of all form storage >
Yes

Graphic Data Store Command [ESC] SG: Stores the graphic data.

No Check to see if storage of the graphic data has been

< Completion of storing graphic data >
completed by the status request.
Yes

Writable Character Data Store Command [ESC] XD: Stores the writable character data.

No
< Completion of storing writable characters > Check to see if storage of the writable character data
Yes has been completed by the status request.
End

4-26
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

NOTES: (1) Previously assign the form to be stored to each form No., and store it. Store
writable character data and graphic data as required.
(2) When a command such as the above is sent, be sure to confirm that the process
is completed, before the next command is sent.

4-27
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.3.2 LABEL ISSUE OPERATION

Host Printer

Start Start

Data is received.
Data Print Command

NG
< Data is checked. >
OK
Batch
< Batch/Strip issue >
Strip

Printing Printing

No The status of The status of

< Normal end >
Yes
issue end is sent. issue end is sent.

To the next command Yes

< Completion >
No
No Is the [FEED]
switch pressed? Press the
Yes [FEED] switch.

Printing Printing

NOTES: (1) In the batch issue mode, the printer issues the designated number of labels. If
the labels are short because one failed to attach, issue labels again by pressing
the [FEED] switch (according to the parameter in the Data Print Command).
(2) If the B-SP series compatible mode is validly set with key operations in the strip
issue mode, the printer issues only one label in spite of the designation. Issue
the required number of labels by pressing the [FEED] switch.
(*) For the details of the B-SP series compatible mode, see the Key Operation
Specifications.

4-28
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.3.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND

4.3.3.1 COMMAND PROCESSING

If communication is interrupted while a command is running and no subsequent data is

transmitted in the next transmission, a command error occurs.
[Command transmission and storage results (Examples)]
(1) When interrupting communication while the 2nd label command is running, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00] 1st label data
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]
Interrupts communication while the
command is running.

Transmits subsequent
2nd transmission:
data.
[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00] 2nd label data
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

Storage result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and the 2nd label data is
printed after the 2nd transmission.

4-29
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) When interrupting communication with the 2nd label command separator, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00] 1st label data
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00] 2nd label data (underway)
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00] 2nd label data
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

Storage result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and the 2nd label data is
printed after the 2nd transmission.

4-30
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(3) When interrupting communication while the 3rd label command is running, and then
retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00] 1st label data
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00] 2nd label data (underway)
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,
Interrupts communication while
the command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits data from the

beginning.
[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00] 1st label data
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00] 2nd label data
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

Storage result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and a command error
occurs after the 2nd transmission.

4-31
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(4) When interrupting communication with the 2nd label command separator, and then
retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00] 1st label data
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00] 2nd label data (underway)
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits data from the

beginning.
[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00] 1st label data
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00] 2nd label data
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

Storage result: The 1st label data is printed after the 1st transmission, and the 1st label data
and 2nd label data are printed after the 2nd transmission (3 labels in total).

4-32
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.3.3.2 FORM STORE COMMAND

When transmission is cancelled while form storage data is transmitted from the application, the
data may not be properly stored because data subsequently transmitted is stored in the form
unless the Form Store Terminate Command is issued before the transmission is cancelled.
If communication is interrupted while form storage data is transmitted, it is necessary to issue the
Form Store Terminate Command, turn off and on the power of the printer, or reset the printer.
[Command transmission and storage results (Examples)]
(1) When transmitting form storage data as usual,

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00] 1st label data
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0180,0250,0180,1,6[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

4-33
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) When interrupting communication while the Form Store Command is running, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,

Interrupts communication while the 1st label data

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0180,0250,0180,1,6[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

4-34
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(3) When interrupting communication with the Form Store Command separator, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,,0120,1,4[0A][00]

Interrupts communication with the 1st label data

command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0180,0250,0180,1,6[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

4-35
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(4) When interrupting communication while the Form Store Command is running, and then
retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00] 1st label data (underway)
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,

Interrupts communication while

the command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits data from the

beginning.
[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00] 1st label data (retransmission)
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0180,0250,0180,1,6[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

Storage result: Data is properly stored, however, when it is read, a command error occurs.

4-36
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(5) When interrupting communication with the Form Store Command separator, and
retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00] 1st label data (underway)
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits data from the

beginning.
[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]AY;+00,1[0A][00]
[1B]AX;+000[0A][00]
[1B]D0450,0480,0420[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0030,0250,0030,1,1[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0060,0250,0060,1,2[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0090,0250,0090,1,3[0A][00] 1st label data (retransmission)
[1B]LC;0050,0120,0250,0120,1,4[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0150,0250,0150,1,5[0A][00]
[1B]LC;0050,0180,0250,0180,1,6[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01][00]

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

However, if the data retransmitted is different from the one first transmitted, the
printed output may be incomplete.

4-37
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.3.3.3 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND

When transmission is cancelled while graphic data is transmitted from the application, the data
cannot be properly stored because data subsequently transmitted is recognized as a graphic
command unless the graphic data has been transmitted before the transmission is cancelled.
If communication is interrupted while graphic data is transmitted, it is necessary to transmit
graphic data for the number of bytes that was not transmitted as dummy data, turn off and on the
power of the printer, or reset the printer.
[Command transmission and storage results (Examples)]
(1) When transmitting graphic storage data as usual,

[1B][53][47][3B][31][2C][30][30][34][30][2C][30][30][34][30]
[2C][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF] 1st label data
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][0A][00][0D][0A]
[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]D0630,0480,0600[0A][00]
[1B]PC00;0030,0050,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0[0A][00]
[1B]PC00;0030,0350,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0[0A][00]
[1B]N;1,0150,0100[0A][00]
[1B]N;2,0150,0400[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01]Graphic Data No. 1[0A]
Graphic Data No. 2[0A][00]

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

4-38
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) When interrupting communication while the Graphic Data Store Command is running, and
then transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

[1B][53][47][3B][31][2C][30][30][34][30][2C][30][30][34][30]
[2C][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF],

Interrupts communication while the

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF] 1st label data
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][0A][00][0D][0A]
[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]D0630,0480,0600[0A][00]
[1B]PC00;0030,0050,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0[0A][00]
[1B]PC00;0030,0350,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0[0A][00]
[1B]N;1,0150,0100[0A][00]
[1B]N;2,0150,0400[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01]Graphic Data No. 1[0A]
Graphic Data No. 2[0A][00]

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

4-39
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(3) When interrupting communication with the Graphic Data Store Command separator, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:
[1B][53][47][3B][31][2C][30][30][34][30][2C][30][30][34][30]
[2C][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][0A][00][0D][0A]

Interrupts communication with the 1st label data

command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]D0630,0480,0600[0A][00]
[1B]PC00;0030,0050,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0[0A][00]
[1B]PC00;0030,0350,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0[0A][00]
[1B]N;1,0150,0100[0A][00]
[1B]N;2,0150,0400[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01]Graphic Data No. 1[0A]
Graphic Data No. 2[0A][00]

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

4-40
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(4) When interrupting communication while the Graphic Data Store Command is running, and
then retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

[1B][53][47][3B][31][2C][30][30][34][30][2C][30][30][34][30]
[2C][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF] 1st label data
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF] (underway)
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]

Interrupts communication while

the command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits data from the

beginning.
[1B][53][47][3B][31][2C][30][30][34][30][2C][30][30][34][30]
[2C][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][0A][00][0D][0A] 1st label data
[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00] (retransmission
[1B]D0630,0480,0600[0A][00] )
[1B]PC00;0030,0050,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0[0A][00]
[1B]PC00;0030,0350,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0[0A][00]
[1B]N;1,0150,0100[0A][00]
[1B]N;2,0150,0400[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01]Graphic Data No. 1[0A]
Graphic Data No. 2[0A][00]

Storage result: Data is properly stored, however, when it is read, a command error occurs.

4-41
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(5) When interrupting communication with the Graphic Store Command separator, and
retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

[1B][53][47][3B][31][2C][30][30][34][30][2C][30][30][34][30]
[2C][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF] 1st label data
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF] (underway)
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][0A][00][0D][0A]

Interrupts communication with the

command separator.

2nd transmission: Transmits data from the

beginning.
[1B][53][47][3B][31][2C][30][30][34][30][2C][30][30][34][30]
[2C][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF] 1st label data
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF] (retransmission
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF] )
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF]
[FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][FF][0A][00][0D][0A]
[1B]XO;01,1[0A][00]
[1B]D0630,0480,0600[0A][00]
[1B]PC00;0030,0050,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0[0A][00]
[1B]PC00;0030,0350,2,2,A,00,B,00,1,0[0A][00]
[1B]N;1,0150,0100[0A][00]
[1B]N;2,0150,0400[0A][00]
[1B]XP[0A][00]
[1B]X[01][21][01]Graphic Data No. 1[0A]
Graphic Data No. 2[0A][00]

Storage result: Data is properly stored.

However, if the data retransmitted is different from the one first transmitted, the
printed output may be incomplete.

4-42
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.4 RECEIPT MODE

4.4.1 INITIAL SETTING

Start

Mode Select Command [ESC] M: Changes the mode to the LABEL mode.

No
<Completion of mode selection>
Yes

Writable Character Data Store Command [ESC] XD: Stores the writable character data.

No
< Completion of storing >
Yes

Graphic Data Store Command [ESC] SG: Stores the graphic data.

No
< Completion of storing >
Yes

Mode Select Command [ESC] M: Changes the mode to the RECEIPT mode.

No
< Completion of mode selection >
Yes

End

NOTES: (1) To store the writable character data, the mode should be changed to the LABEL
mode. After storing is finished, the mode should be returned to the RECEIPT
mode.
(2) When a command such as the above is sent, be sure to confirm that the process
is completed, before the next command is sent.
(3) The graphic data store command is registerable even after changing the mode to
the RECEIPT mode.

4-43
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.4.2 RECEIPT ISSUE OPERATION

4.4.2.1 STANDARD MODE

Host Printer

Start Start

Command & Data

Data is received.
for a receipt issue

Printing

Status Request Command Data is received.

No
< Normal end > A status is sent.
Yes

Command & Data

Data is received.
for a receipt issue

Printing

Status Request Command Data is received.

No
< Normal end > A status is sent.
Yes

No Is the [FEED]
switch pressed?
Yes

20-mm feed

4-44
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.4.2.2 PAGE MODE

Host Printer

Start Start

Page Mode Switch The page mode is started.

Command

Command & Data Data is received.

for a receipt issue
Printing
Page Mode Print Command

Standard mode

Status Request Command Data is received.

No
< Normal end > A status is sent.
Yes

Page Mode Switch The page mode is started.

Command

Command & Data Data is received.

for a receipt issue

Page Mode Print Command Printing

Status Request Command Data is received.

No
< Normal end > A status is sent.
Yes

No Is the [FEED]
switch pressed?
Yes

20-mm feed

4-45
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

NOTES: (1) In the RECEIPT mode, the status of issue end is not automatically sent. Before
the next receipt is issued, whether or not the sent data is issued normally should
be confirmed by sending the Status Request Command. When a receipt is not
issued due to an error, the data should be sent again.
(2) In the RECEIPT mode, when the [FEED] switch is pressed, a 20-mm feed is
performed.
(3) In the RECEIPT mode, the issue count cannot be set. If the batch/strip issue
mode is set, it does not become effective.

4-46
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.4.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND

4.4.3.1 PAGE MODE PROCESSING

If communication is interrupted while data is transmitted from the application and no subsequent
data is transmitted in the next transmission, a command error occurs. When transmission is
cancelled while data is transmitted in page mode, the data may not be properly stored because
data subsequently transmitted is processed in page mode unless the Page Mode Terminate
Command [FF] or Page Mode Cancel Command [CAN] is issued before the transmission is
cancelled. If communication is interrupted while data is transmitted in page mode, it is necessary
to issue the Page Mode Terminate (Print) Command or Page Mode Cancel Command, turn off
and on the power of the printer, or reset the printer.
However, please note that when the Page Mode Terminate (Print) Command is issued, all
previous data is erased.
[Command transmission and print results (Examples)]
(1) When transmitting data in page mode as usual,

[GS]C
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]
[FF]

Print result: Data is properly printed (as shown below).

DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]

4-47
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) When interrupting communication while the Page Mode Command is running, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

[GS]C
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF] 1st label data

Interrupts communication while the

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
DATA006[LF]
[FF]

Print result: Data is properly printed (as shown below).

DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]

4-48
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(3) When interrupting communication while the Page Mode Command is running, and then
retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

[GS]C
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data (underway)
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]

Interrupts communication while

the command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits data from the

beginning.
[GS]C
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data (retransmission)
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]
[FF]

Print result: Data is printed but the printed output does not look correct (as shown below).

DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st transmitted data
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
2nd transmitted data
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]

4-49
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(4) When interrupting communication while the Page Mode Command is running, issuing the
Cancel Command during retransmission and then retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

[GS]C
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data (underway)
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]

Interrupts communication while

the command is running.

2nd transmission: Issues the Cancel Command and

transmits data from the beginning.
[CAN]
[GS]C
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data (retransmission)
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]
[FF]

Print result: Data is properly printed (as shown below).

DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]

4-50
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(5) When interrupting communication while the Page Mode Command is running, issuing the
Page Mode Print Command during retransmission and then retransmitting data from the
beginning,
1st transmission:

[GS]C
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data (underway)
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]

Interrupts communication while

the command is running.

Issues the Page Mode Print Command

2nd transmission:
and transmits data from the beginning.
[FF]
[GS]C
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data (retransmission)
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]
[FF]

Print result: Data is properly printed (as shown below).

1st label:
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
2nd label:
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]

4-51
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.5 ESC/POS MODE

4.5.1 INITIAL SETTING

Start

Downloaded Character (Writable [ESC] &: Defines the downloaded character data.
Character) Data Define Command

No
< Completion of setting >
Yes

Writable Chinese Character Pattern Data [ESC] 2: Defines the writable Chinese character
Define Command pattern data.

No
< Completion of setting >
Yes

Downloaded Bit Image Data [ESC] SG: Defines the downloaded bit image data.
Define Command

No
< Completion of setting >
Yes

Normal processing

4-52
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.5.2 RECEIPT ISSUE OPERATION

4.5.2.1 STANDARD MODE

Host Printer

Start Start

Command & Data

Data is received.
for a receipt issue

Printing

Status Request Command Data is received.

No
< Normal end > A status is sent.
Yes

Command & Data

Data is received.
for a receipt issue

Printing

Status Request Command Data is received.

No
< Normal end > A status is sent.
Yes

No Is the [FEED]
switch pressed?
Yes

20-mm feed

4-53
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.5.2.2 PAGE MODE

Host Printer

Start Start

Page Mode Switch The page mode is started.

Command

Command & Data Data is received.

for a receipt issue
Printing
Page Mode Print Command

Standard mode

Status Request Command Data is received.

No
< Normal end > A status is sent.
Yes

Page Mode Switch The page mode is started.

Command

Command & Data Data is received.

for a receipt issue

Page Mode Print Command Printing

Status Request Command Data is received.

No
< Normal end > A status is sent.
Yes

No Is the [FEED]
switch pressed?
Yes

20-mm feed

4-54
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

NOTES: (1) In the ESC/POS mode, the status of issue end is not automatically sent. Before
the next receipt is issued, whether or not the sent data is issued normally should
be confirmed by sending the Status Request Command. When a receipt is not
issued due to an error, the data should be sent again.
(2) In the ESC/POS mode, when the [FEED] switch is pressed, a 20-mm feed is
performed.
(3) In the ESC/POS mode, the issue count cannot be set. If the batch/strip issue
mode is set, it does not become effective.

4-55
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

4.5.3 HANDLING OF RECEIVED DATA BY COMMAND

4.5.3.1 PAGE MODE PROCESSING

If communication is interrupted while data is transmitted from the application and no subsequent
data is transmitted in the next transmission, a command error occurs. When transmission is
cancelled while data is transmitted in page mode, the data may not be properly stored because
data subsequently transmitted is processed in page mode unless the Page Mode Terminate
Command [FF] or Page Mode Cancel Command [CAN] is issued before the transmission is
cancelled. If communication is interrupted while data is transmitted in page mode, it is necessary
to issue the Page Mode Terminate (Print) Command or Page Mode Cancel Command, turn off
and on the power of the printer, or reset the printer.
However, please note that when the Page Mode Terminate (Print) Command is issued, all
previous data is erased.
[Command transmission and print results (Examples)]
(1) When transmitting data in page mode as usual,

[ESC]L
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]
[FF]

Print result: Data is properly printed (as shown below).

DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]

4-56
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(2) When interrupting communication while the Page Mode Command is running, and then
transmitting subsequent data,
1st transmission:

[ESC]L
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF] 1st label data

Interrupts communication while the

command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits subsequent

data.
DATA006[LF]
[FF]

Print result: Data is properly printed (as shown below).

DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]

4-57
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(3) When interrupting communication while the Page Mode Command is running, and then
retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

[ESC]L
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]

Interrupts communication while

the command is running.

2nd transmission: Transmits data from the

beginning.
[ESC]L
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]
[FF]

Print result: Data is printed but the printed output does not look correct (as shown below).

DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st transmitted data
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
2nd transmitted data
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]

4-58
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(4) When interrupting communication while the Page Mode Command is running, issuing the
Cancel Command during retransmission and then retransmitting data from the beginning,
1st transmission:

[ESC]L
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data (underway)
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]

Interrupts communication while

the command is running.

2nd transmission: Issues the Cancel Command and

transmits data from the beginning.
[CAN]
[ESC]L
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data (retransmission)
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]
[FF]

Print result: Data is properly printed (as shown below).

DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]

4-59
 CHAPTER 4 TRANSMISSION SEQUENCE
B-EP Series

(5) When interrupting communication while the Page Mode Command is running, issuing the
Page Mode Print Command during retransmission and then retransmitting data from the
beginning,
1st transmission:

[ESC]L
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data (underway)
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]

Interrupts communication while

the command is running.

Issues the Page Mode Print Command

2nd transmission:
and transmits data from the beginning.
[FF]
[ESC]L
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF] 1st label data (retransmission)
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]
[FF]

Print result: Data is properly printed (as shown below).

1st label:
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
2nd label:
DATA001[LF]
DATA002[LF]
DATA003[LF]
DATA004[LF]
DATA005[LF]
DATA006[LF]

4-60
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5. TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)

5.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes details regarding the interface commands for the TPCL mode of the print
mode.
<<Up to V1.0C>>
There are three issue types, “Batch issue,” “Strip issue” and “Linerless issue.” In batch issues, a
back feed is performed before printing, regardless of the selected sensor type. No back feed is
performed even in batch issue mode if there is no data to be printed within 9.3 mm from the top of the
effective print length.
In strip and linerless issue modes, no back feed is performed.

<<V1.0E or later>>
There are three issue types, “Batch issue,” “Strip issue” and “Linerless issue.”

In batch issue mode when the type of sensor is designated, whether or not to perform a back feed
under the following conditions:
Back feed restriction setting in the
SYSTEM mode or in the Setup
Command
ON OFF
Performs no back Performs a back
Label pitch of less than 20.0 mm
feed feed
Label pitch of 20.0 mm or more but less than 24.0 Performs no back Performs a back
mm and effective print length of less than 15.0 mm feed feed
Label pitch of 20.0 mm or more but less than 24.0 Performs a back Performs a back
mm and effective print length of 15.0 mm or more feed feed
Performs a back Performs a back
Label pitch of 24.0 mm or more
feed feed
Feeding by the FEED key or in the Feed Performs no back Performs no back
Command feed (*1) feed (*1)
*1 However, when the label pitch length is equal to the distance between the head and sensor (11.5
mm) or less, a back feed is performed.
No back feed is performed even though the back feed conditions are satisfied if there is no data to be
printed within 9.3 mm from the top of the effective print length.

In batch and linerless issue modes when the type of sensor is not designated, a back feed operation is
specified depending on the back feed restriction setting in the SYSTEM mode or in the Setup
Command.
When the back feed restriction setting is on and the label pitch or effective print length conforms to the
condition not to perform a back feed, a label located between the head and cutter at the first printing
subsequent to an issue (one or multiple labels) cannot be printed because no back feed is performed.
This waste can be prevented by switching the stop position in the SYSTEM mode from "CUT" to
"HEAD." However, it is necessary to press the FEED key and move a label to the cut position to take
it out because the label is not stopped at the cut position after printing has been completed.

5-1
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

In strip issue mode when the strip issue back feed setting is on and the strip position fine adjustment is
set to – (negative), a back feed is performed because the print start position is misaligned. However,
for labels whose label-to-label gap is 5 mm or more, no back feed is performed because the print start
position is not misaligned.

<<Common in all versions>>

When printing is performed under the following conditions, the print position is misaligned:
In batch issues, use and issue labels shorter than 11.5 mm between the head and sensor, without
setting or by omitting to set a back feed parameter of the print position fine adjust command in LABEL
mode. Then, switch the mode to TPCL mode and issue labels. As a result, the print position of the
second label is misaligned. When labels shorter than the distance between the head and sensor are
used, before LABEL mode is switched to TPCL mode, the gap between the first label and second
label has passed through the sensor before the first label is printed. Therefore, the third and later
labels are printed at the proper position.
Either of the language types, Kanji, Chinese and Korean, can be implemented. Any font other than
the on-board fonts is selectable.

5-2
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.2 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS

5.2.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND

ESC Command & Data LF NUL

z The length from [ESC] to [LF] [NUL] must be as specified by each command.
z There are the following two kinds of control codes:
c ESC (1BH), LF (0AH), NUL (00H)
d { (7BH), | (7CH), } (7DH)

5.2.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE

Function Describes the outline of the function of the command.

Format Shows the format of the command.
The format designation method should conform to the following rules:
z Each set of small letters (such as aa, bbbb) indicates a parameter item.
z Parenthesized items may be omitted.
z “---” indicates the repetition of an item.
z Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be transmitted
in practice.
z Other symbols must always be inserted at designated positions before being
transmitted.
Term Explains the term(s) used in the format.
* “0 to 999” described in the entry range indicates that up to 3-digit variable-length
entry is allowed. (Entry of “001” or “009” is also possible.) “000 to 999” indicates
that the entry must be fixed at 3 digits.

I/F Indicates the interface that the command functions. All interfaces are available
when not described.
Explanation Explains the command in detail.

Note Supplementary explanation of the command.

Refer to Related commands
Examples Explains the command examples.

[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]

The above corresponds to the transfer of the following:
1B 54 32 30 43 33 30 0A 00
[ESC] T 2 0 C 3 0 [LF] [NUL]

5.2.3 PRECAUTIONS

The commands and parameters described in this specification must always be used. If any
command or parameter other than those covered in this specification is used, the printer’s
operation will not be guaranteed. When a command is transmitted in the SYSTEM mode, no
operation is performed. However, only the reset command is operable.

5-3
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.3 COMMANDS RELATED TO SETTING

5.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND [ESC] D

Function Sets the size of a label or tag paper.

Format [ESC] Daaaa, bbbb, cccc (, dddd) [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Pitch length of the label or tag

4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
4 digits: 0100 (10.0 mm) to 9999 (999.9 mm)
5 digits: 00100 (10.0 mm) to 09999 (999.9 mm)
bbbb: Effective print width
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
0100 (10.0 mm) to 1057 (105.7 mm)
cccc: Effective print length
4 and 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
4 digits: 0070 (7.0 mm) to 9970 (997.0 mm)
5 digits: 00070 (7.0 mm) to 09970 (997.0 mm)
dddd: Reserved area (Omissible)
Fixed at 4 digits 0300 to 1120

The size varies according to the type of thermal head.

B-EP2DL-GHxx B-EP4DL-GHxx
Label pitch/tag pitch 10 x 999.9 mm 10 x 999.9 mm
Effective print width 48.0 mm 104.0 mm
Effective print length 997.0 mm 997.0 mm

Explanation

(1) When the value exceeds the maximum value, it should be changed to the maximum
value. When the effective print width exceeds the maximum width of each thermal head,
it should be changed to the maximum width of the thermal head.
(2) When the value is the minimum value or less, it should be changed to the minimum value.
(3) The reserved area is not checked. However, only the values within the above range
should be applied.
(4) In the compatible mode for the B-SP series, the effective print width is fixed at 48.0 mm.

5-4
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is off

<Top first printing>

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

0 X 0 X

Y Y
Origin of Origin of
coordinates Effective print width coordinates Effective print width
(0, 0) (0, 0)

2.5 mm 1.0 mm 2.5 mm 1.0 mm

Effective Effective
print length Label print length Tag
pitch pitch

Black mark
Backing paper (Printed on the
back of receipt)
Label

[Label] [Receipt with black marks]

<Bottom first printing>

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Effective print width Effective print width

Tag Effective Effective

Tag
pitch print length print length
pitch

1.0 mm 1.0 mm 2.5 mm

2.5 mm
Backing paper
Origin of Origin of
coordinates Black mark coordinates
Label
(0, 0) (Printed on the (0, 0)
[Label] Y back of receipt) [Receipt with black marks] Y

X 0 X 0

5-5
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on

* Top first printing only

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

0 X 0 X

Y Y
Origin of Origin of
coordinates Effective print width coordinates Effective print width
(0, 0) (0, 0)

4.5 mm 3.0 mm 4.5 mm 3.0 mm

Effective Effective
print length Label print length Tag
pitch pitch

Black mark
Backing paper (Printed on the
back of receipt)
Label

[Label] [Receipt with black marks]

5-6
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Programmable value range by the software

[mm]

B-EP2DL B-EP4DL
Model
203 dpi 203 dpi

Mode Batch Strip Batch Strip

Item
Thermal head dot density 8 dots/mm 8 dots/mm
Thermal head width 48.0 mm 104.0 mm
Max. 10.0 13.0 10.0 13.0
Label
Min. 999.9 67.0 999.9 67.0
Pitch
Max. 10.0 - 10.0 -
Tag
Min. 999.9 - 999.9 -
Max. 7.0 10.0 7.0 10.0
Label length
Min. 997.0 60.0 997.0 60.0
Backing Max. 16.0 50.0
paper Min. 58.0 115.0
Paper length
Max. 16.0 - 50.0 -
Tag
Min. 58.0 - 115.0 -
Max. 13.0 47.0
Label width
Min. 55.0 112.0
Max. 3.0 3.0
Label-to-label gap
Min. 7.0 7.0
Max. 3.0 3.0
Black mark length
Min. 7.0 7.0
Max. 10.0 10.0
Effective print width
Min. 48.0 104.0
Max. 7.0 10.0 7.0 10.0
Label
Effective print Min. 997.0 60.0 997.0 60.0
length Max. 7.0 - 7.0 -
Tag
Min. 997.0 - 997.0 -
Slow-up/down Slow up 1.0 1.0
interval Slow down 1.0 1.0
Label 100 µm to 120 µm
Paper thickness Tag 120 µm
Receipt 65 µm to 75 µm
Max. effective print length for on-
997.0 499.0
the-fly issuing

5-7
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) When the label size or type of sensor is changed, the Label Size Set Command must first
be transmitted.
(2) The label pitch length is backed up in memory (retained even if the power is turned off).
(3) After sending the Label Size Set Command, one sheet of paper must be fed by the Feed
Command ([ESC] T), to align the paper with the first print position prior to printing.
(4) The origin of drawing coordinates is determined according to the parameters of the Label
Size Set Command as shown in Figure 4.
Refer to PRINT POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND for the print stop position in strip
issues.
(5) Printing cannot be performed in the slow up (1 mm) and slow down (1 mm) areas.
Consequently, [A: Label, tag pitch] – [H: Effective print length] ≥ 2 mm must be assumed.
(6) The origin of drawing coordinates and the print stop position (print head position when
printing stops) are adjustable by the Fine Adjust Commands and according to the fine
adjustment value settings in the SYSTEM mode.
(7) When label paper is used to align the top first and bottom first print positions, (Effective
print length = Label pitch – Gap – 2 mm (slow up (1 mm), slow down (1 mm) areas)
should be specified.
(8) The parameters should be as shown in the figure and table. When any parameter or
paper out of the range is specified, printing is not properly performed or an error occurs.
(9) When a gap or a black mark cannot be detected within less than 150% of the label pitch
length, it is assumed to be a paper jam error.
(10) Even if a gap or a black mark is detected within less than 90% of the effective print length
specified by the Label Size Set Command, it is ignored.
(11) Where the effective print length is specified within the “max. effective print length for on-
the-fly issuing,” non-stop batch printing is possible even if the data to be printed is
different from each other because printing and drawing of the next label are processed at
the same time. [On-the fly issue]
However, printing may stop every label depending on the volume of drawing data.
(12) After transmitting this command, the image buffer must be cleared using the Image Buffer
Clear Command.
(13) When the print position is changed or the gap between the labels is not 3 mm, the Print
Position Fine Adjust Command should be used as required. (When the gap between the
labels is 3 mm, the standard print start position is 1 mm from the top of the label. = When
the compatible mode for the B-SP series is off.)
(When the gap between the labels is 3 mm, the standard print start position is 3 mm from
the top of the label. = When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on.)

5-8
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples (1) Label

[ESC] D0518, 0760, 0468, 0820 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] T20C40 [LF] [NUL]

Effective print area

51.8 mm 46.8 mm Label

Backing paper

76.0 mm

82.0 mm

(2) Tag

[ESC ]D0772, 0996, 0722 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] T10C40 [LF] [NUL]

Effective print area

77.2 mm
72.2 mm
Tag

Black mark
(Printed on the
back of receipt)

99.6 mm

Refer to • Image Buffer Clear Command ([ESC]C)

5-9
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.3.2 PRINTER ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID

Function Sets the ID for the printer.

Format [ESC] ID ; aa(,b) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Printer ID (2-byte hex data)

0000H to FFFFH

b: Reserved area (Omissible)

Fixed at 0.

Explanation
(1) The printer ID is the information required for the host, such as IrDA: TEC Protocol, to
identify each printer.
(2) When any value other than 0 is specified in the reserved area, an error occurs.
Notes

(1) The set printer ID is backed up in memory (retained even if the Reset Command ([ESC]
WR) is executed or the power is turned off).
(2) The last 5 digits of the printer’s serial number have been set as the printer ID, at the time
of shipment from the factory.
(3) In IrDA: TEC Protocol, the printer checks the set ID against the ID in the received
command packet. If they do not match, the printer discards the command packet.
However, when the ID in the command packet is “0,” the printer accepts the command
packet without checking the set IDs.
Example
To set “03H 51H” as the ID of the printer:
[ESC] ID; [03H] [51H] [LF] [NUL]
In this case, the printer ID in status printing is “00849.”

5-10
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.3.3 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M

Function Changes the print mode.

Format [ESC] M; a (,b) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Print mode designation

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Print mode (Bit 0 to Bit 6 * See Table 1.)

Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB
0: Not performed
1: Performed
* Table 1 Print mode

HEX Mode How to deal with the received data after an error is cleared
30H LABEL Discards
31H RECEIPT Discards
32H RECEIPT1 Continues printing
34H ESC/POS Continues printing
41H TPCL Continues printing
42H TPCL1 Continues printing
b: Print position detection feed (Omissible. If omitted, the print position detection
feed is not performed.)
0: When the mode change from RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS to LABEL,
TPCL or TPCL1 is requested, a print position detection feed is not performed
after the mode is changed.
1: When the mode change from RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS to LABEL,
TPCL or TPCL1 is requested, a print position detection feed is performed after
the mode is changed.
Explanation
(1) There are 4 types of the print mode: “LABEL,” “RECEIPT,” “TPCL” and “ESC/POS.”
(2) “Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM” or USB is the function for the specifications
which do not allow the printer to spontaneously send the status through IrDA; IrCOMM or
USB. This function enables the printer to forcefully send the status to the host, if the link
between the printer and the host is established. However, if the link between the printer
and the host is not established upon the status transmission, the printer cannot send the
status. Therefore, the status is discarded. (In the next connection to the host, the
printer does not send the status to the host.)
(3) The sensor is not used in the RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode. When sensor
detectable paper is used for receipts and labels, print position detection feed cannot be
done in the LABEL, TPCL or TPCL1 mode. By setting the print position detection feed
parameter to 1, print position detection feed is carried out after the mode is changed to
LABEL, TPCL or TPCL1.
(4) In the TPCL1 mode, it is possible to re-print the last print data by pressing the FEED
button.

5-11
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) The print mode designation (the specified print mode and the automatic status response
in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB) is backed up in memory (retained even if the power is turned
off).
(2) The factory default is “TPCL mode” and “Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or
USB is not performed.” (The IrDA protocol is “IrCOMM.”)
(3) When the print mode is changed, the type of sensor is automatically changed.
LABEL mode (0): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
TPCL mode (A): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
TPCL1 mode (B): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
RECEIPT mode (1): No sensor is designated.
RECEIPT1 mode (2): No sensor is designated.
ESC/POS mode (4): No sensor is designated.
(4) If the RECEIPT or ESC/POS mode is selected or no sensor is designated in the LABEL or
TPCL mode, an initial feed is not performed when the cover is closed (when the key
operation or Set Command ([ESC]ZM03) is used to enable the print position detection
feed setting after closing the cover.)
(5) When the mode change is finished, the printer sends the normal end status or an ACK to
the host. However, when the mode is changed to the TPCL mode, the printer does not
send the status. In IrDA: IrCOMM or USB, only when bit 7 of the print mode designation
is set to “1,” the printer sends the status.
(6) The print mode can be changed by the printer itself. However, since the setting for the
automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB cannot be changed, the setting
remains as the same.
(7) The print position detection feed is performed according to the conditions, such as, label
pitch, fine adjustment, and sensor selection, which were set in the LABEL or TPCL mode
before the printer is operated in the RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode. If no
sensor is selected, the print position detection feed will not be performed.
(8) After performing a print position detection feed, the printer does not send a process end
status. If an error occurs during the print position detection feed, the print position
detection feed is performed after the error is cleared by using the PAUSE key (when the
key operation or Set Command ([ESC]ZM03) is used to enable the print position detection
feed setting after closing the cover.)
(9) When changing the print mode by the printer itself, the print position detection feed
parameter cannot be set.
(10) When the mode select command is designated with the print position detection feed at the
end of a print data issued in the RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode, and if an error occurs
while printing, the printing will restart after the error is cleared and then, the print mode will
be changed to the LABEL or TPCL mode and a print position detection feed is performed.
When the print position detection feed is omitted, the print mode will not be changed to
the LABEL or TPCL mode. (The mode select command is discarded.)
(11) When the LABEL or TPCL mode is selected in the mode select command and the print
position detection feed parameter is set 0 (not performed), and if an error occurs while the
printer issues in the RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode, the print mode is changed to the
LABEL or TPCL mode after the error is cleared. (The mode select command is
executed.)

5-12
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.4 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT

5.4.1 PRINT START POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX

Function Adjusts the feed value so that the label will be shifted forward or backward from the
automatically positioned print start position.

Format [ESC] AX; abbb, cddd, eff (, ghhh) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates the direction of the print position, forward or backward, in which a
fine adjustment is to be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
bbb: Fine adjustment value for print position
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
c: Indicates the direction of the strip position, forward or backward, in which a
fine adjustment is to be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
ddd: Fine adjustment value for strip position
000 to 030 (in 0.1 mm units)
* In - (Forward) a fine adjustment is to be made between 000 and 020.
e: Reserved area
Fixed at +.
ff: Reserved area
Fixed at 00.
g: Reserved area (Omissible)
hhh: Reserved area (Omissible)
[Compatible mode for the B-SP series]
a: Indicates the direction of the print position, forward or backward, in which a
fine adjustment is to be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
bbb: Fine adjustment value for print position
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
c: Reserved area
Fixed at +.
ddd: Reserved area
Fixed at 000.
e: Reserved area
Fixed at +.
ff: Reserved area
Fixed at 00.

5-13
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

g: Reserved area (Omissible)

hhh: Reserved area (Omissible)

Explanation
(1) When the parameter “a” is set to any value other than “+” or “-,“ a command error occurs.
(2) If any value out of the above range is specified for the fine adjustment value for print
position, a command error occurs.
(3) When any value above + 10.5 mm (- 1 mm distance between the head and sensor) is
specified for the fine adjustment value for print position, it should be changed to + 10.5
mm before printing.
(4) The reserved area is not checked.
(5) The fine adjustment value for strip position is valid only when “the compatible mode for
the B-SP series” is turned off (disabled) in the SYSTEM mode. When the parameter “a”
is set to any value other than “+” or “-,“ a command error occurs. When the parameter
“a” is set to any value other than “+” or “-,“ a command error occurs. When the
“compatible mode for the B-SP series” is turned on (enabled), the value is ignored.

[Print position (feed value) fine adjustment]

(To finely adjust the print position so that it shifts backward or forward)

One label

± 0.0 mm

Print start position

One label

+ 3.0 mm

Print start position

One label

- 3.0 mm

Print start position

Paper feed direction

5-14
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Strip position fine adjustment]

When the label-to-label gap is 3 mm,

± 0.0 mm
▼

+ 3.0 mm
▼

- 2.0 mm
▼
* Refer to Notes (7).

When the label-to-label gap is 7 mm,

± 0.0 mm
▼

+ 3.0 mm
▼

- 2.0 mm
▼

• In strip issue mode, a label is stopped at the position

2.35 mm
where the distance between the leading edge of the strip
shaft and the trailing edge of the label is 2.35 mm,
regardless of the label-to-label gap.
▼ 3 mm to 7mm However, only when the fine adjustment value for print
position is not selected (up to V1.0C).

• When the stop position is not proper, it should be adjusted

using the strip position fine adjustment function.

5-15
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) The fine adjustment values are backed up in memory (retained even if the power is turned
off).
(2) The factory default value is 0.0 mm.
(3) The fine adjustment values (print position, strip position) changed by the Print Position
Fine Adjust Command in the LABEL mode, are also effective in the TPCL mode.
(4) When print position and strip position fine adjustment is selected in the SYSTEM mode
(through key operations on the printer), the fine adjustment value is a sum of the value in
the fine adjustment command and the system mode fine adjustment value.
Note that the maximum fine adjustment value is as follows:
Print position fine adjustment: ± 50.0 mm
Strip position fine adjustment: - 2.0 mm to + 3.0 mm
When the sum of the values exceeds ± 50.0 mm, the fine adjustment value for print
position should be changed to ± 50.0 mm before printing.
When the sum of the values exceeds + 3.0 mm in the positive direction or falls below –
2.0 mm in the negative direction, the fine adjustment value for strip position should be
changed to + 3.0 mm or – 2.0 mm before printing.
(5) The fine adjustment for strip position is effective only in strip issues.
(6) The fine adjustment value for strip position up to V1.0C is valid only when the fine
adjustment value for print position is not selected (fine adjustment value = 0).
(7) The fine adjustment value for strip position is selected in the negative direction, a label is
stopped backward against the print start position. However, the print start position is
misaligned by the set value because no back feed is performed in strip issue mode.
(When the label-to-label gap is less than 5 mm) * Refer to the arrows for – 2.0 mm when
the label-to-label gap is 3 mm in P.5-15.
(8) When the label pitch length is 20.0 mm or more but less than 24.0 mm and the effective
print length is 15.0 mm or more or the label pitch length is 24.0 mm or more, a back feed
is performed before printing.

5-16
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples
Strip issue

1.0 mm 3.0 mm

z
Fine adjust the strip
ABC position by +2.0 mm.
z
Fine adjust the print ABC
position by +1.0 mm.
1.0 mm

Paper feed [ESC] AX; +010, +020, +00 [LF] [NUL]

direction [ESC] T20D40 [LF] [NUL]

5-17
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.4.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY

Function Adjusts the print density which was automatically set.

Format [ESC] AY ; abb, c (, d) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density

+: Increase (darker)
-: Decrease (lighter)

bb: Fine adjustment value for print density

00 to 30 (in units of 1 step)
c: Print mode
0: Reserved
1: Direct thermal
d: Head output division designation
(Omissible. If omitted, the backed up setting in memory is used.)
2-inch head width
0: Auto (Divided by 2 or 3)
1: Reserved (If specified, auto (Divided by 2 or 3))
2: Fixed at Divided by 3
3: Auto1 (Not divided/Divided by 2 or 3)/Print quality oriented
4: Reserved (If specified, fixed at Divided by 3)
5: Auto2 (Not divided/Divided by 2 or 3)/Print speed oriented
(supported in V1.0E or later)

4-inch head width

0: Auto (Divided by 2, 3 or 6)
1: Reserved (If specified, auto (Divided by 2, 3 or 6))
2: Reserved (If specified, auto (Divided by 2, 3 or 6))
3: Auto1 (Not divided/Divided by 2, 3 or 6)
4: Fixed at Divided by 6

5-18
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) The standard density is finely adjusted to increase or decrease.
(2) When any fine adjustment value for print density out of the range is set, a command error
occurs.
(3) If the print mode is set to any value other than “1: Direct thermal,” it should be changed to
“1."
(4) The default value for the head output division designation is “3: Auto1 (Not divided,
Divided by 2 or 3)” when the 2-inch print head is used and “3: Auto1 (Not divided, Divided
by 2, 3 or 6)” when the 4-inch print head is used.
(5) When “0: Auto” is designated for the 2-inch print head, “Divided by 3” or “Divided by 2” is
automatically selected for every line according to the print ratio. The width of half a dot
may not be printed on the line when switching between “Divided by 2” and “Divided by 3.”
Therefore, do not designate “0: Auto” when a serial barcode is printed.
(6) When “3: Auto1” or “5: Auto2” is designated for the 2-inch print head, “Not divided,”
“Divided by 3” or “Divided by 2” is automatically selected for every line according to the
print ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line when switching among
“Not divided,” “Divided by 2” and “Divided by 3.” Therefore, do not designate “3: Auto1”
or “5: Auto2” when a serial barcode is printed.
The difference between Auto1 and Auto2 is while Auto1 is print quality oriented, Auto2 is
print speed oriented. Auto2 is designated to increase the print speed although the print
is slightly faded.
(7) When “0: Auto” is designated for the 4-inch print head, “Divided by 6,” “Divided by 3” or
“Divided by 2” is automatically selected for every line according to the print ratio. The
width of half a dot may not be printed on the line when switching among “Divided by 2,”
“Divided by 3” and “Divided by 6.” Therefore, do not designate “0: Auto” when a serial
barcode is printed.
(8) When “3: Auto1” is designated for the 4-inch print head, “Not divided,” “Divided by 6,”
“Divided by 3” or “Divided by 2” is automatically selected for every line according to the
print ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line when switching among
“Not divided,” “Divided by 2” and “Divided by 3” and “Divided by 6.” Therefore, do not
designate “3: Auto1” when a serial barcode is printed.

5-19
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) The set fine adjustment value for print density and the head output division designation
are backed up in memory (retained even if the power is turned off).
(2) The fine adjustment values changed by the Print Density Fine Adjust Command in the
TPCL mode, are also effective in the LABEL, RECEIPT or ESC/POS mode.
(3) When the head output division designation is omitted, the backed up value in memory is
used.
(4) When print density fine adjustment is selected in the SYSTEM mode (through key
operations on the printer), the fine adjustment value is a sum of the value in the fine
adjustment command and the system mode fine adjustment value. Note that the
maximum fine adjustment value is ± 30.0 mm
Examples
To set the density to - 2:
[ESC] AY; -02, 1 [LF] [NUL]
To set the density to + 3:
[ESC] AY; +03, 1 [LF] [NUL]

5-20
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.4.3 STRIP SENSOR ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AH

Function Sets the sensor threshold value to switch the mode between strip and batch.

Format [ESC] AH; a [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Setting
0: Operation in conformance with the strip sensor
1: Operation in conformance with the strip sensor
2: Fixed at the batch mode
3: Fixed at the strip mode
4: Reserved

Notes
(1) The set parameter is backed up and kept until a parameter is set using this command.
When the power is turned on, the backed up value is retrieved and set
(2) “0: Operation in conformance with the strip sensor” has been set as the default at the time
of shipment from the factory.
(3) When either “2: Fixed at the batch mode” or “3: Fixed at the strip mode” for parameter “a,”
is selected, the printer operates in the specified mode, without automatically switching
between the batch and strip modes.
(4) When “4: Reserved” for parameter “a” is selected, this command is ignored.

5-21
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO CLEAR

5.5.1 IMAGE BUFFER CLEAR COMMAND [ESC] C

Function Clears the image buffer for drawing characters, lines, barcodes, and graphics.

Format [ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

Explanation
(1) After changing the label size using the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D), the image
buffer must be cleared using this command.
(Unless this command is transmitted, the data drawn before changing the label size
remains in the image buffer.)
(2) The increment/decrement designation is effective until the Image Buffer Clear Command
is transmitted.
(3) The link field designation is effective until the Image Buffer Clear Command is
transmitted.
Examples
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C41 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC000; 0080, 0065, 1, 1, A, +00, 00, B, J0000, M0, +0000000000, Z00, P1 [LF]
[NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0250, 0150, 1, 1, G, +00, 00, B, J0000, M0, +0000000000, Z00, P1 [LF]
[NUL]
[ESC] RC000; ABC [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; DEF [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C1000 [LF] [NUL]

5-22
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.5.2 CLEAR AREA COMMAND [ESC] XR

Function Clears the designated area or reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated
area in the drawing area.

Format [ESC] XR; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: X-coordinate of the designated area start point

Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)

bbbb: Y-coordinate of the designated area start point

4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: X-coordinate of the designated area end point
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: Y-coordinate of the designated area end point
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
e: Type of how to clear
A: Clears the contents in the designated area to zeros.
B: Reverses the white/black dot pattern in the designated area.

Explanation

Backing paper

Label

End point

Effective
print length
Start point

Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective
print width
Y

Paper feed direction

0
X

5-23
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed.
(2) The result is the same even if the start point is set to the upper right and the end point is
set to the lower left, respectively.
(3) The start and end point coordinates of the designated area must be set within the
effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
(4) Only numerals are available in the coordinate input area.
(5) When any type other than A and B is selected for how to clear, an error occurs.
(6) If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing may
become poor, or the printer may reset. When “Reverses the white/black dot pattern in
the designated area” is selected for how to clear and the black dot pattern is increased,
be careful about the print ratio.
Examples
Start point of
Origin (0, 0)
designated area

Effective print area

10.0 mm

58.5 mm Designated area

End point of designated area

34.5 mm

76.2 mm

[ESC] XR; 0345, 0100, 0762, 0585, A [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-24
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO DRAWING FORMAT

5.6.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] LC

Function Sets the line format and draws the line.

Format [ESC] LC; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, f (, ggg) [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: X-coordinate of the start point

Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
bbbb: Y-coordinate of the start point
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: X-coordinate of the end point
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: Y-coordinate of the end point
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
e: Type of line
0: Line (horizontal, vertical)
1: Rectangle
2: Line with dots skipped (horizontal line, vertical line)
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
(If specified, it is processed as “0.”)
3: Rectangle with dots skipped
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
(If specified, it is processed as “1.”)
4: Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “1.”)
5: Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “0.”)
6: Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “1.”)

f: No. of line width dots

1 to 9 or 01 to 99 (in 0.1 mm units)
ggg: Radius of rounded corners of a rectangle
(Omissible. If omitted, the chamfering process for rectangle corners is not
performed.)
Fixed at 3 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series

Explanation
(1) When the set values for the X- and Y- coordinates of the start point and X- and Y-
coordinates of the end point are not within the image (frame) buffer, the line is not drawn.
(2) When the type of line is set to any value other than the range from 0 to 6, a command
error occurs.
(3) When the number of line width dots is set to “0,” a command error occurs.
(4) The reserved parameter (omissible) is not performed.
(5) If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing may
become poor, or the printer may be reset. When a horizontal line is printed, be careful
about the print ratio.

5-25
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Backing paper Backing paper

Label Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)

Start point End

Effective point Effective
print length print length
Start
End point
point

Origin of
Effective Effective coordinates
0 X print width print width (0, 0)
Y

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y 0
X

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

5-26
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Line]

(1) Horizontal line (In the case of |Y2 - Y1| = 0)

(X1,Y1) (X2,Y2)

Line width

(2) Vertical line (In the case of |X2 - X1| = 0)

(X1,Y1)

(X2,Y2)
Line width

(3) Slant line A ( |X2 - X1| ≤ |Y2 - Y1| ) (4) Slant line B ( |X2 - X1| > |Y2 - Y1| )

(X1,Y1) (X1,Y1) (X1,Y1)

Line width
(X2,Y2)

(X2,Y2)

(X2,Y2) (X2,Y2) (X1,Y1) Line width

Line width Line width

[Rectangle]

(1) Radius of rounded corners = 000, or parameter is omitted

(X1,Y1) (X2,Y2)

Line width Line width

(X2,Y2) (X1,Y1)

Line width Line width

5-27
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(2) Radius of rounded corners ≠ 000

(X1,Y1) Line width

Radius

(X2,Y2)
Line width

5-28
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Line with some dots skipped]

(1) Horizontal line

(X1,Y1) (X2,Y2)

Line width + 1 dot

Dots are skipped at the top and bottom areas only, which means that the thicker the
line width is, the thicker the middle area of the line is.

(2) Vertical line

(X1,Y1)

(X2,Y2)
Line width + 1 dot

Dots are skipped at the leftmost and rightmost areas only, which means that the
thicker the line width is, the thicker the middle area of the line is.

[Rectangle]

(1) Radius of rounded corners = 000, or parameter is omitted

Line width + 1 dot

(X1,Y1)

(X2,Y2)

Line width + 1 dot

Dots are skipped at the top, bottom, leftmost and rightmost areas only, which means
that the thicker the line width is, the thicker the middle area of the line is.

5-29
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(2) Rounded corners of a rectangle ≠ 000

(X1,Y1) Line width + 1 dot

Radius

Line width + 1 dot (X2,Y2)

Notes
(1) In line designation, a horizontal line, vertical line, or slant line A or B is drawn according to
the start and end point coordinates. However, in the case of the compatible mode for the
B-SP series, when the coordinates which make a slanted line are specified, a rectangle is
drawn.
(2) The result is the same even if the start and end point coordinates are reversed.
(3) The start and end point coordinates must be set so that the result of line drawing will be
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command
([ESC] D).
(4) Designation of the radius of the rounded corner is effective only when the type of line is
set to 1 (rectangle) or 3 (rectangle with dots skipped). When the type of line is set to 0 or
2, designation of the radius is ignored.
(5) When the type of line is set to 1 or 3 and the radius of the rounded corner is set to 000 or
omitted, a normal rectangle is drawn.
(6) On the following condition, a circle is supposed to be drawn:

| X2 - X1 | | Y2 - Y1 |
= ≤ [Radius of rounded corners]
2 2

(7) Only numerals are available in the coordinate input area.

5-30
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Example
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

5.0 mm

28.0 mm
0.4 mm

20.0 mm 0.4 mm

30.5 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] LC; 0200, 0050, 0305, 0050, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] LC; 0200, 0050, 0200, 0280, 0, 4 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-31
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6.2 BIT MAP FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PC

Function Sets the format indicating where and how the bit map font is to be printed on a label.

Format c [ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)
(, Zpp) (, Pq) (= rrr ------ rrr) [LF] [NUL]

d [ESC] PCaaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff (, ghh), ii, j (, Jkkll) (, Mm) (, noooooooooo)

(,Zpp) (,Pq) (; ss1, ss2, ss3, ------ , ss20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa: Character string number

000 to 199 (two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable.)
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of character string
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Character horizontal magnification
1 to 9 (in magnifications)
* Two-digit designation enables the magnifications in 0.5 units.
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications)
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 to 1.
(06 ~ 0.9: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications)
dd
Designation in 0.5 magnifications: 0 or 5
(5 to 9 , up to 1 magnification)
Designation in magnifications: 0 to 9

e: Character vertical magnification

1 to 9 (in magnifications)
* Two-digit designation enables the magnifications in 0.5 units.
(05 ~ 95: 0.5 to 9.5 magnifications)
The magnification can be designated in 0.1 units between 0.5 to 1.
(06 ~ 09: 0.6 to 0.9 magnifications).
ee
Designation in 0.5 magnification units: 0 or 5
(5 to 9, up to 1 magnification)
Designation in magnifications: 0 to 9
ff: Type of font 203-dpi print head
A: Times Roman (Medium) 12 points
B: Times Roman (Medium) 15 points
C: Times Roman (Bold) 15 points
D: Times Roman (Bold) 18 points
E: Times Roman (Bold) 21 points
F: Times Roman (Italic) 18 points
G: Helvetica (Medium) 9 points
H: Helvetica (Medium) 15 points
I: Helvetica (Medium) 18 points
J: Helvetica (Bold) 18 points
K: Helvetica (Bold) 21 points
L: Helvetica (Italic) 18 points

5-32
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

M: Presentation (Bold) 27 points

N: Letter Gothic (Medium) 14.3 points
O: Prestige Elite (Medium) 10.5 points
P: Prestige Elite (Bold) 15 points
Q: Courier (Medium) 15 points
R: Courier (Bold) 18 points
S: OCR-A 12 points
T: OCR-B 12 points
U (a): Kanji (16 × 16 dots) Writable character 41
V (a): Kanji (24 × 24 dots) Writable character 42
W (a): Reserved
a: Standard character (12 × 24 dots)
b: Bold character (48 × 96 dots)
c: Reserved)
d: Price Font 1 (16 × 40 dots)
e: Price Font 2 (32 × 48 dots)
f: Reserved
g: Reserved
h: Reserved
i: Reserved
j: Reserved
k: Reserved
l: Reserved
m: Reserved
n: Reserved
o: Gothic725 Black 6 points
p: Reserved
q: Gothic725 Black 6 points
r: Chinese (24 × 24 dots) Writable character 42
s: Korean (24 × 24 dots) Writable character 42
t: Reserved
u: Reserved
v: Reserved
w: Kanji (Ming type) (32 × 32 dots) Writable character 43
01 (a): Writable character 1 (1 × 1 dot to 720 × 720 dots)
Ú
40 (a): Writable character 40 (1 × 1 dot to 720 × 720 dots)
51 (a): 2-byte code set writable character (1 × 1 dot to 720 × 720 dots)
52 (a): Reserved
Ú
55 (a): Reserved
a: Reserved area 0 to 2 (Omissible)
* The following fonts are proportional.
A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, o, q
ghh: Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
hh: No. of space dots between characters

5-33
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

00 to 99 (in units of dots)

ii: Rotational angles of a character and character string
00: 0° (char.) 0° (char.-string)
11: 90° (char.) 90° (char.-string)
22: 180° (char.) 180° (char.-string)
33: 270° (char.) 270° (char.-string)
01: 0° (char.) 90° (char.-string)
12: 90° (char.) 180° (char.-string)
23: 180° (char.) 270° (char.-string) Font types: U, V, r and w only
30: 270° (char.) 0° (char.-string)
j: Character attribution
B: Black character
W (aabb): Reverse character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the horizontal direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the vertical direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
F (aabb): Boxed character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the box in the horizontal
direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the box in the vertical
direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
(If specified, it is processed as “B.”)
C (aa): Strike-through character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of a strike-through in
the horizontal direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
(If specified, it is processed as “B.”)
* Descriptions in parentheses are omissible.
(If omitted, it is character magnification (horizontal or vertical magnifications,
whichever is larger) × 6 dots.)
Jkkll: Bold character designation
(Omissible. If omitted, this process is not performed.)
kk: No. of horizontal shift dots
00 to 16 (in units of dots)
ll: No. of vertical shift dots
00 to 16 (in units of dots)
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series

5-34
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Mm: Type of check digits to be attached

(Omissible. If omitted, no check digit is drawn.)
m: Type of check digit
0: Modulus 10 (draws data and check digit.)
1: Modulus 43 (draws data and check digit.)
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws check digit only.)
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
noooooooooo: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, increment/decrement is not performed.)
n: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
-: Decrement

oooooooooo: Skip value

0000000000 to 9999999999
Zpp: Zero suppress (Omissible. If omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
pp: No. of digits after zero suppression
00 to 20
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
Pq: Alignment (Omissible. If omitted, the alignment is set to the left.)
q: Designates the character position
1: Left
2: Center
3: Right
4aaaa: Justification
aaaa: Character string in the X direction
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
5aaaabbbcc: Automatic line feed
aaaa: Character string in the X direction
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
bbb: Line feed spacing
010 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
cc: No. of lines
01 to 99
rrr ------ rrr: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
ss1, ss2, ss3 ------ , ss20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

5-35
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Character string number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RC), the format designated by the character
string number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper Backing paper

Origin of
coordinates Label Label
(0, 0)

Sample
Effective Effective Print origin
print length print length of coordinates
Print origin
of coordinates

Origin of
coordinates
Effective print Y Effective print
X (0, 0)
0 width width

X 0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
Y

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the character drawing result will be
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

(3) Horizontal magnification and vertical magnification

Vertical
magnification Horizontal
magnification

Horizontal Vertical
magnification magnification

5-36
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Relationship between drawing coordinates and magnification]

Char. height ×
Vertical
magnification

Char.
Enlarge
height
Point of
origin

Left offset Char. width Char. Width ×

Point of Point of Point of
Horizontal magnification
origin of
origin origin of
Horizontal spacing/ next char.
(Horizontal spacing/proportional spacing) next char.
proportional spacing × Horizontal magnification

(4) Type of font

A: Times Roman
B: Times Roman
C: Times Roman
D: Times Roman
E: Times Roman

F: Times Roman
G: Helvetica
H: Helvetica

I: Helvetica
J: Helvetica
K: Helvetica
L: Helvetica

M: Presentation

N: Letter Gothic
O: Prestige Elite
P: Prestige Elite
Q: Courier
R: Courier
S: OCR-A
T: OCR-B
q: Gothic 725 Black
r: Chinese (24 x 24 dots)
s: Korean (24 x 24 dots)

5-37
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Chinese CG is required to print the character type: r.

Korean CG is required to print the character type: s.
When any character type of 52 to 55 is specified, it is invalid. However, an error does not
occur, instead a blank is printed.
If any character type out of the range is specified, a command error occurs.

(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space

If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots between
characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal spacing/proportional
spacing determined for each character. If character-to-character space is specified,
drawing will take place according to the value obtained by adding the character
spacing/proportional spacing to the specified value.

Point of
origin
Point of origin of
next char.

(Horizontal spacing/proportional No. of fine adjust space dots

spacing) × Horizontal magnification between characters

5-38
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) Rotational angles of a character and character string

Sample

Origin

0° (00) 90° (11) 180° (22) 270° (33)

5-39
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(7) Selection of character attribution

No. of dots in the
horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B A B vertical direction

Black characters Reverse characters

No. of dots in the No. of dots in the

horizontal direction horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B vertical direction A B
Boxed characters Stroked out characters

If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing may
become poor, or the printer may be reset. When “Reverse character” is selected for
how to clear and the black dot pattern is increased, be careful about the print ratio.

(8) Bold character designation

0° 90°

Horizontally Vertically Vertically/ Horizontally Vertically Vertically/

bold bold horizontally
bold bold horizontally
bold
bold

(9) Check digit to be attached

When Modulus 10 or Modulus 43 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated
and attached to the data row for drawing. In case of Modulus 10, when the data includes
any data other than numerals, drawing is not performed. In case of Modulus 43, when
the data includes any data other than CODE39, drawing is not performed, either.
When DBP Modulus 10 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated and only the
check digit is drawn. When the data includes any data other than numerals, drawing is
not performed.
When the font type is U, V, r, s or w, the check digit cannot be designated.
(Even if it is designated, it is ignored.)
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.

5-40
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(10) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
When the font type is U, V, r, s, w or a (for JA type only), increment/decrement cannot be
designated.
(Even if it is designated, it is ignored.)
Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999
INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

Letters and numerals for increment/decrement

For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are
possible. Only the numerals are selected and calculated for
incrementing/decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the
data.

Example of increment/decrement calculation

Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A

INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A

(11) Zero suppression

No. of digits after zero
0 1 2 2 3 4 5
suppression
Data 0000 0000 0000 0A12 0123 0123 0123
Print 0000 0 00 A12 123 0123 0123
Zero(s) in a data row is replaced with a space(s) from the upper digits, according to the
designated number of digits. However, if the number of digits after zero suppression is
greater than the data row, the data row will be drawn without performing zero suppression.
Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be
drawn.
When the font type is U, V, r, s w or a (for JA type only), zero suppression is not
designated.
(Even if it is designated, it is ignored.)

5-41
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(12) Alignment
No. of dots of character string
area in the X direction

Designated origin Left Center Right J u s t i

Automatic line feed

Line feed spacing Automatic line feed No. of lines
Automatic line feed

If characters are not placed on one line when justification and automatic line feed are
designated, the following steps are performed.
Decrease the value of the character-to-character space. When characters are not placed
on one line even if the value is set to 0, return the value to its default, and then reduce the
horizontal magnification for a character by 0.5. If characters are still not placed on one
line, repeatedly decrease the value of the character-to-character space, and then reduce
the horizontal magnification. When characters are not placed on one line if the character
magnification is set to 0.5 and the character-to-character space is set to 0, the field is not
drawn.
When Rotational angles of a character and character string is set to 01, 12, 23 or 30, the
designation of center, right, justification and automatic line feed is ignored.

(13) Data string to be printed

Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol “=.”
Up to 255 digits of characters can be printed. However, when the font type is U, V, r, s, w
or 51, the maximum number of characters is 127. When it is r as a 4-byte code, the
maximum number of characters is 64.
When the number of characters exceeds the maximum number of digits, the excess data
will be discarded.
For the character code table, refer to the character code table mentioned later.

5-42
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(14) Link field No.

The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.”
After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
If the link field exceeds 20 fields, an error occurs.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.

[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RC; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

5-43
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes

(1) The check digit attachment, increment/decrement and zero suppression are performed
according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no drawing will
take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced with a space(s) as a result of zero suppression, but
the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which increment/decrement has been designated can be drawn. If the
total of bit map font, outline font and barcode increment/decrement fields exceeds 32,
drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excessive field. The field
to be incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer
Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Example]
1) Format Command (Incrementing character string No. 001 (+1))
2) Format Command (No incrementing character string No. 002)
3) Format Command (Incrementing character string No. 003 (+2))
4) Image Buffer Clear Command
5) Data Command (Character string No. 001 “0001”)
6) Data Command (Character string No. 002 “AB-”)
7) Data Command (Character string No. 003 “0100”)
8) Issue Command (2 labels)

0001

AB-0100

0002

AB-0102

9) Issue Command (1 label)

0003

AB-0104

10) Image Buffer Clear Command

11) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “00000”)
12) Issue Command (1 label)

00000

5-44
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(3) The Bit Map Font Format Command may be connected to the Outline Font Format
Command when transmitted.
[ESC] P C001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data differs for every label, the field of the drawing data for the previous
label is automatically cleared using the character string number, then the next drawing
data is printed. Therefore, the character string number should be designated so that they
differ according to the drawing fields.
Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same character
string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command should be sent
alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same character string
number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.)
(5) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same
character string No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can be also cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(6) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.
(7) When the (reserved) area for the font type is designated, the bit map font format is not
specified.
(8) In the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series, the reserved area is not checked.
(9) For character sets from 41 to 43, a character code consisting of 1 byte is stored.
However, when the character code is read, F0H is added to the upper digit or FFH is
added to the upper digit with Chinese characters installed, and consists of 2 bytes. In this
case, up to 188 characters can be stored per character set.

Refer to • Bit Map Font Data Command ([ESC] RC)

• Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
• Barcode Format Command ([ESC] XB)

5-45
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples
Origin (0, 0)

(1)

12.5 Effective print area

mm
30.0
mm
Sample

55.0
mm
ABCD

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, A, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-46
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-47
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(3)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

12.5
mm
30.0
mm

20.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, W, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, W, 01, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000; AB [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; AB [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-48
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6.3 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] PV

Function Sets the format to indicate where and how the outline font is to be printed.

Format c [ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm)
(, Znn) (, Po) (, lpp) (, Qoooo, Rpp) (= qqq ------ qqq) [LF] [NUL]

d [ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f (, ghhh), ii, j (, Mk) (, lmmmmmmmmmm)
(,Znn) (,Po) (, lpp) (, Qoooo, Rpp) (; rr1, rr2, rr3, ------ , rr20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Character string number

00 to 99
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of character string
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of character string
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: Width of the character
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
eeee: Height of the character
0020 to 0850 (in 0.1 mm units)
f: Type of font
A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold])
B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold], proportional)
E: Print front 1
F: Price font 2
G: Price font 3
K: Reserved
C, D, H, I, J: Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “B.”)
ghhh: Fine adjustment of character-to-character space
(Omissible. If omitted, space is adjusted according to the designated font.)
g: Designates whether to increase or decrease the character-to-character
space.
+: Increase
-: Decrease
hhh: No. of space dots between characters
000 to 512 (in units of dots)
ii: Rotational angles of a character and character string
00: 0° (char.) 0° (char.-string)
11: 90° (char.) 90° (char.-string)
22: 180° (char.) 180° (char.-string)
33: 270° (char.) 270° (char.-string)

5-49
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

j: Character attribution
B: Black character
W (aabb): Reverse character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the horizontal direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the end of the black
background in the vertical direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
F (aabb): Boxed character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the box in the horizontal
direction
bb: No. of dots from the character string to the box in the vertical
direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
bb: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
(If specified, it is processed as “B.”)
C (aa): Strike-through character
aa: No. of dots from the character string to the end of a strike-through in
the horizontal direction
aa: 01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
(If specified, it is processed as “B.”)
* Parenthesized descriptions are omissible. (If omitted, it is character size (the
character width or height, whichever is greater) ÷ 8 dots.)
Mk: Type of the check digit to be attached
(Omissible. If omitted, no check digit is drawn.)
k: Type of check digit
0: Modulus 10 (Draws data and check digit.)
1: Modulus 43 (Draws data and check digit.)
2: DBP Modulus 10 (Draws check digit only.)
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
lmmmmmmmmmm: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, increment/decrement is not performed.)
l: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
-: Decrement
mmmmmmmmmm: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
Znn: Zero suppress (Omissible. If omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
pp: No. of digits after zero suppression
00 to 20
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series

5-50
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Po: Alignment (Omissible. If omitted, the alignment is set to the left.)

o: Designates the character position.
1: Left
2: Center
3: Right
4aaaa: Justification
aaaa: Character string in the X direction
0050 to 1040 (in 0.1 mm units)
* 4 is reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series.
(If specified, it is processed as “1.”)
Ipp: Italic (Omissible. If omitted, the italic is not applied. Only TEC FONT1 is
supported)
pp: Angle of the italic
00 to 45 (in units of degrees)
Qoooo: Character string width (Omissible. If omitted, it is 0000.)
0000 to 1600 (in 0.1 mm units)
Rpp: No. of character string digits
(Omissible. If omitted, it is 00.)
00 to 99
qqq ------ qqq: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 255 digits
rr1, rr2, rr3 ------ , rr20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

5-51
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Character string number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RV), the format designated by the character
string number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper Backing

paper
Origin of Label
coordinates Label
(0, 0) Print origin of
coordinates

Sample
Effective Effective
print length print length

Origin of
Print origin of
coordinates
coordinates
(0, 0)
Effective Effective
X print width print width
0
Y
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction
Y
0
X

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the character drawing result will be
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

(3) Character width and character height

Char.
height Char.
height

Char.
width

Char. Standard size Char. width

height (256 × 256 dots)

Char.
width

5-52
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(4) Type of font

A: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold])

B: TEC FONT1 (Helvetica [bold], proportional)

E: Price Font 1 (POP Font)

F: Price Font 2 (POP Font)

5-53
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

G: Price Font 3 (POP Font)

(5) Fine adjustment of character-to-character space

If no character-to-character space is specified or the number of space dots between
characters is 0, drawing will take place according to the horizontal spacing/proportional
spacing determined for each character.
If character-to-character space is specified, drawing will take place according to the value
obtained by adding the character spacing/proportional spacing to the specified value.
When justify is selected for the alignment, the character-to-character space setting is
invalid.
(The horizontal spacing/proportional spacing is increased or decreased depending on the
character size.)

ABC

A B C

5-54
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) Rotational angles of a character and character string

Sample

Origin

0° (00) 90° (11) 180° (22) 270° (33)

(7) Selection of character attribution No. of dots in the

horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B A B vertical direction

Black characters Reverse characters

No. of dots in the No. of dots in the

horizontal direction horizontal direction

No. of dots in the

A B vertical direction A B
Boxed characters Stroked out characters

If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing may
become poor, or the printer may be reset. When Reverse character is selected for how
to clear and the black dot pattern is increased, be careful about the print ratio.

(8) Check digit to be attached

When Modulus 10 or Modulus 43 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated
and attached to the data row for drawing. In case of Modulus 10, when the data includes
any data other than numerals, drawing is not performed. In case of Modulus 43, when
the data includes any data other than CODE39, drawing is not performed, either.
When DBP Modulus 10 is selected, the check digit of a data row is calculated and only the
check digit is drawn. When the data includes any data other than numerals, drawing is
not performed.
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.

5-55
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(9) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.

Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999

INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

Letters and numerals for increment/decrement

For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are
possible. Only the numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/
decrementing, and then are returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation

Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A

INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A

(10) Zero suppression

No. of digits after zero
0 1 2 2 3 4 5
suppression
Data 0000 0000 0000 0A12 0123 0123 0123
Print 0000 0 00 A12 123 0123 0123
Zero(s) in a data row is replaced with a space(s) from the upper digits, according to the
designated number of digits. However, if the number of digits after zero suppression is
greater than the data row, the data row will be drawn without performing zero suppression.
Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row will not be
drawn.

(11) Alignment Character string length in the

X direction (in 0.1 mm units)

Origin Left Center Right J u s t i

If characters are not placed on one line when justification is designated, the width is
calculated automatically. When the width is less than the limit value (2 mm) for the
outline font, that field will not be drawn. (The same previous field will not be drawn.)

5-56
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(12) Italic designation

This designation allows italic printing. However, it is available only when TEC FONT1 is
selected for the type of font.

(13) Character string width and number of character string digits

Usually, one character size is determined by the character width and height. When the
character string width and number of character string digits are specified, the character
width will be automatically changed when printed. If the following conditions are satisfied,
however, these parameter settings become ineffective, and the characters are printed in
normal size.

• Conditions of ineffectiveness
(1) These parameters are omitted.
(2) The character string width is set to “0”.
(3) No. of print data ≥ No. of specified character string digits
• Conditions that these parameters become effective are described on the following
pages.

5-57
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

c When one field width < specified character string width

(Space between characters = 0, Specified character string digits = 6)
■ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted.
1 field width (140 dots) A

A B C D One character width (35 dots)

Specified character string width (200 dots)

A = Specified character string width – 1 field width = 200 dots – 140 dots = 60 dots
B = A/Data length = 60 dots/4 = 15 dots
One character width = 1 character width + B = 35 dots + 15 dots = 50 dots

■ Print image when the parameter setting is specified.

One character width (50 dots)

A B C D

Specified character string width (200 dots)

* When the number of print data is 6 digits or more, the condition of ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied.
In this case, the characters are printed in normal width.

d When one field width < specified character string width

(Space between characters ≥ 0, Specified character string digits = 5)
■ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted.
1 field width (155 dots) A

Space between characters (5 dots)

A B C D One character width (35 dots)

Specified character string width (200 dots)

A = Specified character string width – 1 field width = 200 dots – 155 dots = 45 dots
B = A/Data length = 45 dots/4 ≈ 11 dots
One character width = 1 character width + B = 35 dots + 11 dots = 46 dots

■ Print image when the parameter setting is specified.

One character width (46 dots) Space between characters (5 dots)

A B C D

Specified character string width (199 dots)

* When the number of print data is 5 digits or more, the condition of ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied.
In this case, the characters are printed in normal width.

5-58
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

e When one field width < specified character string width

(Space between characters < 0, Specified character string digits = 8)
■ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted.
1 field width (125 dots) A

One character width (35 dots)

A B C D Space between characters (-5 dots)

Specified character string width (200 dots)

Corrected space between characters = ((Specified character string digits – data length)
( x 0.5 + 1) x Space between characters = -15 dots
A = Specified character string width – (1 character width x Data length
+ (corrected space between characters x (Data length – 1))
= 200 dots – 95 dots = 105 dots
B = A/Data length = 105 dots/4 ≈ 26 dots (rounded down)
One character width = 1 character width + B = 35 dots + 26 dots = 61 dots
* The minimum. corrected space between characters is - 99 dots.
* The calculated one character width is doubled when doubled or more from the original one
character width.

■ Print image when the parameter setting is specified.

One character width (61 dots)

Space between characters (-15 dots)

A B C D

Specified character string width (199 dots)

* When the number of print data is 8 digits or more, the condition of ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied.
In this case, the characters are printed in normal width.

5-59
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

f When one field width ≥ specified character string width

(Space between characters ≥ 0, Specified character string digits = 6)
■ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted.

1 field width (215 dots)

One character width (50 dots) Space between characters (5 dots)

A B C D

Specified character string width (120 dots) A

A = 1 field width – Specified character string width = 215 dots – 120 dots = 95 dots
B = A/Data length = 95 dots/4 ≈ 24 dots (rounded up)
One character width = 1 character width – B=50 dots – 24 dots = 26 dots

■ Print image when the parameter setting is specified.

Space between characters (5 dots)

A B C D One character width (26 dots)

Specified character string width (120 dots)

* When the number of print data is 6 digits or more, the condition of ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied.
In this case, the characters are printed in normal width.

5-60
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

g When one field width ≥ specified character string width

(Space between characters < 0, Specified character string digits = 5)
■ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted.

1 field width (185 dots)

One character width (50 dots)

Space between characters (-15 dots)

A B C D

Specified character string width (120 dots) A

A = 1 field width – Specified character string width = 185 dots – 120 dots = 65 dots
B = A/Data length = 65 dots/4 = 17 dots (rounded up)
One character width = 1 character width – B = 50 dots – 17 dots = 33 dots

■ Print image when the parameter setting is specified.

One character width (33 dots)

A B C D Space between characters (-5 dots)

Specified character string width (117 dots)

* When the number of print data is 5 digits or more, the condition of ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied.
In this case, the characters are printed in normal width.

5-61
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(14) Data string to be printed

Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.”
Up to 255 digits can be printed.
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum number of characters, the excess data
will be discarded.
For the character code table, refer to the character code table mentioned later.

(15) Link field No.

The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.”
After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
If the link field exceeds 20 fields, an error occurs.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.

[Format Command]
[ESC] PV01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PV02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PV03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PV04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PV05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PV06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ........................ ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating the link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RV; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

5-62
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) The check digit attachment, increment/decrement and zero suppression are performed
according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no drawing will
take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced by a space(s) as a result of zero suppression, but
the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which increment/decrement has been designated can be drawn. If the
total bit map font, outline font and barcode increment/decrement fields exceeds 32,
drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excessive field. The field
to be incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer
Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Examples]
1) Format Command (Incrementing character string No. 01 (+1))
2) Format Command (No incrementing character string No. 02)
3) Format Command (Incrementing character string No. 03 (+2))
4) Image Buffer Clear Command
5) Data Command (Character string No. 01 “0001”)
6) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “AB-”)
7) Data Command (Character string No. 03 “0100”)
8) Issue Command (2 labels)

0001

AB-0100

0002

AB-0102

9) Issue Command (1 label)

0003

AB-0104

10) Image Buffer Clear Command

11) Data Command (Character string No. 02 “00000”)
12) Issue Command (1 label)

00000

5-63
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(3) The Outline Font Format Command may be connected to the Bit Map Font Format
Command when transmitted.
[ESC] PC001; 0100, 0150, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C002; 0350, 0180, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF]
C005; 0200, 0300, 25, 2, C, +05, 00, B, +0000000001 [LF]
V01; 0500, 0400, 0100, 0100, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data differs for every label, the field of the drawing data for the
previous label is automatically cleared using the character string number, then the next
drawing data is printed. Therefore, the character string number should be designated so
that they differ according to the drawing fields.
(5) Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same character
string number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command should be sent
alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same character string
number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.)
(6) When characters overlap due to the character-to-character space fine adjustment, the
outline font is not painted properly. Program the fine adjustment value so that
characters will not overlap. Also, when drawings such as lines or characters are
positioned over the outline font area, the outline font is not painted properly. For font
types A, B and K, the fine adjustment value should be set so that other drawings do not
overlap the area in which the outline font is to be drawn. For font types E, F and G, the
fine adjustment value should be set so that other drawings do not overlap the area of the
designated character width and height.
(7) The link field designation can be cleared by omitting the link field designation using the
same character string No. and reformatting data.
The link field designation can also be cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(8) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.
(9) In the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series, the reserved area is not checked.

Refer to • Outline Font Data Command ([ESC] RV)

• Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)
• Barcode Format Command ([ESC] XB)

5-64
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples

Origin (0, 0)

(1)

12.5 Effective print area

mm
30.0
mm
Sample

55.0
mm
ABCD

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PV00; 0200, 0300, 0080, 0080, B, 00, B=ABCD [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-65
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(2)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

Paper feed direction

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV; S [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-66
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6.4 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] XB

~ In the case of WPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128, EAN128, Customer Barcode,

POSTNET, RM4SCC, KIX CODE

Function Sets the format to indicate where and how the barcode is to be printed and how it is to
be printed.
(WPC is the generic name for barcodes of JAN, EAN and UPC.)

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)
(= sss ------ sss) [LF] [NUL]

d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, ooo, p, qq)

(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Barcode number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of barcode
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of barcode
Compatible mode for the B-SP Compatible mode for the B-SP
series: OFF series: ON
0: JAN8, EAN8
5: JAN13, EAN13
6: UPC-E
7: EAN-13 + 2digits
8: EAN-13 + 5digits
9: CODE128 (with auto code selection)
A: CODE128 (without auto code selection)
C: CODE93
G: UPC-E + 2 digits
H: UPC-E + 5 digits
I: EAN-8 + 2 digits
J: EAN-8 + 5 digits
K: UPC-A
L: UPC-A + 2 digits
M: UPC-A + 5 digits
N: UCC/EAN128 N: EAN128
R: Customer barcode (Postal code for Japan)
S: Highest priority customer barcode (Postal code for Japan)
U: POSTNET (Postal code for U.S.A.)
V: RM4SCC (ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE) (Postal code for U.K.)
W: KIX CODE (Postal code for Belgium)

5-67
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

e: Type of check digit

1: Without attaching check digit
2: Check digit check
WPC Modulus 10
CODE93 Modulus 47
CODE128 PSEUDO 103
3: Check digit auto attachment (1)
WPC Modulus 10
CODE93 Modulus 47
CODE128 PSEUDO 103
UCC/EAN128 or EAN128 PSEUDO 103
Customer barcode Special check digit
POSTNET Special check digit
RM4SCC Special check digit
4: Check digit auto attachment (2)
WPC Modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits
5: Check digit auto attachment (3)
WPC Modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits
Note: For the Customer barcode, POSTNET and RM4SCC, only “3: Check
digit auto attachment (1)” is effective.
ff: 1-module width
01 to 15 (in units of dots)
k: Rotational angle of barcode
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll: Height of the barcode
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
For the Customer barcode, POSTNE and RM4SCC along with KIX CODE,
the height of the long bar is specified.
mnnnnnnnnnn: Increment and decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, increment/decrement is not performed.)
m: Designates whether to increment or decrement.
+: Increment
-: Decrement
nnnnnnnnn: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
ooo: Length of WPC guard bar
(Omissible. If omitted, the guard bar is not extended.)
000 to 100 (in 0.1 mm units)
p: Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars
(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)
0: Non-print
1: Print

5-68
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

qq: No. of digits after zero suppression

(Omissible. If omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
00 to 20
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits.
However, the number of digits varies according to the type of barcode.

tt1, tt2, tt3 ------ , tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)

01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

* Omissible parameters (such as “Increment/decrement,” “Selection of print or non-

print of numerals under bars” and “No. of digits after zero suppression”) cannot be set
when the Customer barcode, POSTNET, RM4SCC or KIX CODE is selected.
* WPC is the generic name for barcodes of JAN, EAN and UPC.
* In the above descriptions, “Customer barcode” includes the highest priority customer
barcode.
* When the key operation is used to enable the compatible mode for the B-SP series,
EAN128 is printed. When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is disabled,
UCC/EAN128 is printed.

5-69
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Barcode number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the barcode
is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of Label Label
coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Effective Effective
print print
length length Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
X Effective Effective coordinates
0
print width Y print width (0, 0)

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the barcode drawing result will be
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
(3) Type of barcode
0: JAN8, EAN8 5: JAN13, EAN13

6: UPC-E 7: EAN13 + 2 digits

8: EAN13 + 5 digits 9: A: CODE128

C: CODE93 G: UPC-E + 2 digits

5-70
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

H: UPC-E + 5 digits I: EAN8 + 2 digits

J: EAN8 + 5 digits K: UPC-A

L: UPC-A + 2 digits M: UPC-A + 5 digits

N: UCC/EAN128 N: EAN128

R: Customer barcode S: Highest priority customer barcode

U: POSTNET V: RM4SCC

W: KIX code

(4) Type of check digit

When no check digit is attached, a barcode of the data row will be drawn.
In the case of the check digit check, when each check digit check is performed according
to the type of barcode and results in normal, a barcode will be drawn. If the check digit
is not proper, the barcode will not be drawn.
When the check digit is automatically attached, each check digit is attached according to
the type of barcode when a barcode is drawn.
If the type of barcode is CODE93, CODE128 (with auto code selection), or UCC/EAN128
or EAN128, the check digit will always be attached regardless of the designation of the
type of check digit.
If the type of barcode is JAN, EAN or UPC, the designation of no check digit attachment
automatically assumes the check digit check.
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.

5-71
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(5) Bar width, space width, and character-to-character space

Designate the bar, space and character-to-character space widths according to the type
of barcode. Note that the proper value differs according to the rotational angle of
barcode, type, number of digits, print speed, paper used, etc. Examples of such
designations are listed below.
In the case of JAN, EAN, UPC, CODE93, CODE128, UCC/EAN128 or EAN128, the width
of 2 to 6 modules is automatically calculated by designating a 1-module width.

[Example of setting]
203-dpi print head (1 dot = 1/8 mm)

1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules

Type of barcode
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
JAN, EAN, UPC 3 6 9 12 - -
CODE93 2 4 6 8 - -
CODE128, 2 4 6 8 - -
UCC/EAN128,
EAN128

Values to be set in ff: “1-module width” To be automatically calculated based

on the value set in ff: “1-module width”

[Customer barcode]

1-module width

5-72
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) Rotational angle of barcode

Point of origin

*
5
1
2

4
* 1 2 3 4 5 *

3
3
4

2
5

1
*
*
0° 90° 180° 270°

(7) Barcode height

Height

Height

[Postal code]

Height

5-73
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(8) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
When CODE128 (without auto code selection) is used, the number of the start code
(CODE A, CODE B and CODE C) digits is regarded as 2.
Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999
INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

Letters and numerals for increment/decrement

For CODE93 and CODE128, even if a data string other than numerals are included in the
data, increment/decrement is performed. However, if any code which does not exist in
each barcode table is contained in the data, increment/decrement is not performed.
For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are possible.
Only the numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/decrementing, and then
are returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation
Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A

Increment/decrement of data including the special codes of CODE128

Increment/decrement calculation starts from the lowest digit in the data strings. If the
data string to be calculated is numeric and the next (upper) digit is “>,” this data is a
special code (underlined digits shown in the table below). In such case, these two digits
are skipped, and the next digit is calculated.
Example of increment/decrement calculation of CODE128
Initial value 00000 00 > 08 0A > 08 0A9 > 08
INC/DEC +1 +1 +1 +1
1st label 00000 00 > 08 0A > 08 0A9 > 08
2nd label 00001 00 > 09 0A > 09 0A9 > 09
3rd label 00002 01 > 00 1A > 00 1A0 > 00
4th label 00003 01 > 01 1A > 01 1A0 > 01
5th label 00004 01 > 02 1A > 02 1A0 > 02

5-74
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(9) Length of guard bar

The length of guard bar is valid only when the type of barcode is WPC.
It is ignored in all other cases.

Height of barcode

Length of guard bar

(10) Numerals under bars

Numerals are/are not provided under bars according to the parameter for print/non print
of numerals under bars. The numerals under bars to be printed vary according to the
type of barcode.
The font of numerals under bars is OCR-B. These numerals are enlarged or reduced
only horizontally according to the width of the barcode. When they are drawn vertically,
no enlargement or reduction is applied.

[Drawing positions of numerals under bars]

c JAN and EAN
(Example) EAN13 + 2 digits

(Example) EAN8

5-75
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

d UPC
(Example) UPC-A + 2 digits

(Example) UPC-E

e Barcodes other than JAN, EAN and UPC

(Example) CODE39

(Example) UCC/EAN128 or EAN128

5-76
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(11) Zero suppression

No. of digits after zero
0 1 2 2 3 4 5
suppression
Data 0000 0000 0000 0A12 0123 0123 0123
Print 0000 0 00 A12 123 0123 0123

Zero(s) in a data row is replaced with a space(s) from the upper digits, according to the
designated number of digits. However, if the number of digits after zero suppression is
greater than the data row, the data row will be drawn without performing zero
suppression. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data
row will not be drawn.
When the print data including start/stop codes are sent, the start/stop codes are also
counted as a digit each.
When the barcode type is JAN, EAN, UPC, UCC/EAN 128 or EAN128, the data will be
drawn without performing zero suppression.
(12) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.”
The maximum number of digits to be printed varies according to the type of barcode.
For codes, refer to the barcode table mentioned later.
(13) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.”
After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.
[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

5-77
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

5-78
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) The check digit attachment, increment/decrement and zero suppression are performed
according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no drawing will
take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced with a space(s) as a result of zero suppression, but
the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which increment/decrement has been designated can be drawn. If the
total of bit map font, outline font and barcode increment/decrement fields exceeds 32,
drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excessive field. The field
to be incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer
Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Example]
1) Format Command (Incrementing barcode No. 01 (+1))
2) Format Command (Incrementing barcode No. 02 (+2))
3) Image Buffer Clear Command
4) Data Command (Barcode No. 01 “0001”)
5) Data Command (Barcode No. 02 “0100”)
6) Issue Command (2 labels)

(0001)

(0100)

(0002)

(0102)

7) Issue Command (1 label)

(0003)

(0104)

8) Image Buffer Clear Command

9) Data Command (Barcode No. 02 “3000”)
10) Issue Command (1 label)

(3000)

5-79
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(3) More than one Barcode Format Command can be connected when transmitted.
[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the barcode number, then the
next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the barcode number which differs according to
the drawing fields should be designated.
(5) Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same barcode
number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command should be sent
alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same barcode number
are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.)
(6) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same
barcode No. and reformatting data. The link field designation can be also cleared by the
Image Buffer Clear Command.
(7) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

Refer to • Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

• Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
• Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)

5-80
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples

Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

15.0
mm
55.0
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm 15.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 9, 3, 02, 0, 0150, +0000000000, 010, 0, 00 = 12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-81
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6.5 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] XB

~ In the case of MSI, Interleaved 2 of 5, CODE39, NW7, Industrial 2 of 5, MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)
(= sss ------ sss) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll (, mnnnnnnnnnn, p, qq) (, r)
(; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Barcode number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of barcode
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of barcode
1: MSI
2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
3: CODE39 (standard)
4: NW7
B: CODE39 (full ASCII)
O: Industrial 2 of 5
a: MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC
e: Type of check digit
1: Without attaching check digit
2: Check digit check
CODE39 Modulus 43
MSI IBM modulus 10
ITF Modulus 10
Industrial 2 of 5 Modulus check character
MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC Modulus check character
3: Check digit automatic attachment (1)
CODE39 Modulus 43
MSI IBM modulus 10
ITF Modulus 10
Industrial 2 of 5 Modulus check character
MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC Modulus check character
4: Check digit automatic attachment (2)
MSI IBM modulus 10 + IBM modulus 10
ITF DBP Modulus 10
5: Check digit automatic attachment (3)
MSI IBM modulus 11 + IBM modulus 10
ff: Narrow bar width
01 to 99 (in units of dots)
gg: Narrow space width
01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, designate an element-to-element space.

5-82
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

hh: Wide bar width

01 to 99 (in units of dots)
ii: Wide space width
01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* In the case of industrial 2 of 5, the value is fixed at 00.
jj: Character-to-character space width
01 to 99 (in units of dots)
* In the case of MSI and ITF, the character-to-character space width is fixed at
00.
k: Rotational angle of barcode
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll: Height of barcode
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
mnnnnnnnnnn: Increment/decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, increment/decrement is not performed.)
m: Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
nnnnnnnnnn: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
p: Selection of print or non-print of numerals under bars
(Omissible. If omitted, the numerals under the bars are not printed.)
0: Non-print
1: Print
qq: No. of digits after zero suppression
(Omissible. If omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
00 to 20
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
r: Designates the attachment of start/stop code
(Omissible. If omitted, the start/stop code is automatically attached.)
T: Attachment of start code only
P: Attachment of stop code only
N: Start/stop code unattached
sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 126 digits.
However, the number of digits varies according to the type of barcode.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

5-83
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Barcode number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the barcode
is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of Label Label
coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Effective Effective
print print
length length Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
X Effective Effective coordinates
0
print width Y print width (0, 0)

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the barcode drawing result will be within the
effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

(3) Type of barcode

1: MSI 2: Interleaved 2 of 5

3: CODE39 (standard) 4: NW7

B: CODE39 (Full ASCII)

O: Industrial 2 of 5 a: Matrix 2 of 5 for NEC

5-84
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(4) Type of check digit

When no check digit is attached, a barcode of the data row will be drawn.
In the case of the check digit check, when each check digit check is performed according
to the type of barcode and results in normal, a barcode will be drawn. If the check digit
is not proper, the barcode will not be drawn.
When the check digit is automatically attached, each check digit is attached according to
the type of barcode when a barcode is drawn.
* DBP Modulus 10 is Modulus 10 for Deutsche Bundespost Postdienst only.
(5) Bar width, space width, and character-to-character space
Designate the bar, space, and character-to-character space widths according to the type
of barcode. Note that the designated proper value differs according to the rotational
angle of barcode, type, number of digits, print speed, paper used, etc. Examples of such
designations are listed below.
When NW7 is used, transmission of the space character assumes a space equals to ‘a
narrow space ×12 dots’. In this case, the space is max. 255 dots.
[Example of setting]
203-dpi print head (1 dot = 1/8 mm)

Narrow Wide Character-to-

Type of barcode
Bar Space Bar Space character space
MSI 2 2 6 6 0
ITF 2 2 6 6 0
CODE39 2 2 6 6 2
NW7 2 2 6 6 2
Industrial 2 of 5 2 2 6 0 2
MATRIX 2 of 5 2 2 6 6 2

5-85
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) Rotational angle of barcode

Point of origin

*
5
1
2

4
* 1 2 3 4 5 *

3
3
4

2
5

1
*
*
0° 90° 180° 270°
(7) Barcode height

Height

Height

(8) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999
INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

Letters and numerals for increment/decrement

For CODE39 (standard), CODE39 (full ASCII) and NW-7, even if a data string other than
numerals are included in the data, increment/decrement is performed. However, if any
code which does not exist in each barcode table is contained in the data,
increment/decrement is not performed.
For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are possible.
Only the numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/decrementing, and then
are returned to the previous position to draw the data.

5-86
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Example of increment/decrement calculation

Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A

(9) Numerals under bars

Numerals are/are not provided under bars according to the parameter for print/non print
of numerals under bars. The numerals under bars to be printed vary according to the
type of barcode.
The font of numerals under bars is OCR-B. These numerals are enlarged or reduced
only horizontally according to the width of the barcode. When they are drawn vertically,
no enlargement or reduction is applied.
[Drawing positions of numerals under bars]
CODE39

(10) Zero suppression

No. of digits after zero
0 1 2 2 3 4 5
suppression
Data 0000 0000 0000 0A12 0123 0123 0123
Print 0000 0 00 A12 123 0123 0123

Zero(s) in a data row is replaced with a space(s) from the upper digits, according to the
designated number of digits. However, if the number of digits after zero suppression is
greater than the data row, the data row will be drawn without performing zero
suppression. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data
row will not be drawn.
When the print data including start/stop codes are sent, the start/stop codes are also
counted as a digit each.
(11) Start/stop code
This parameter is effective only when the type of barcode is CODE39 and NW7.
When the parameter is designated, whether or not the stop code and the start code are
attached to the print data to be sent is not checked.
When the parameter is omitted in the case of CODE39 and NW7, a start/stop code will be
attached. The code to be added is “*” in the case of CODE39, and “a” in the case of
NW7.
For details, refer to “AUTOMATIC ADDITION OF START/STOP CODES.”

5-87
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(12) Data string to be printed

Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.”
The maximum number of digits to be printed varies according to the type of barcode.
For codes, refer to the barcode table mentioned later.
(13) Link field No.
The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.”
After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.

[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

5-88
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) The check digit attachment, increment/decrement and zero suppression are performed
according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no drawing will
take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced with a space(s) as a result of zero suppression, but
the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which increment/decrement has been designated can be drawn. If the
total of bit map font, outline font and barcode increment/decrement fields exceeds 32,
drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excessive field. The field
to be incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer
Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Example]
1) Format Command (Incrementing barcode No. 01 (+1))
2) Format Command (Incrementing barcode No. 02 (+2))
3) Image Buffer Clear Command
4) Data Command (Barcode No. 01 “0001”)
5) Data Command (Barcode No. 02 “0100”)
6) Issue Command (2 labels)

(0001)

(0100)

(0002)

(0102)

7) Issue Command (1 label)

(0003)

(0104)

8) Image Buffer Clear Command

9) Data Command (Barcode No. 02 “3000”)
10) Issue Command (1 label)

(3000)

5-89
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(3) More than one Barcode Format Command can be connected when transmitted.
[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the barcode number, then the
next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the barcode number which differs according to
the drawing fields should be designated.
(5) Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same barcode
number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command should be sent
alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same barcode number
are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.)
(6) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same
barcode No. and reformatting data. The link field designation can be also cleared by the
Image Buffer Clear Command.
(7) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.
(8) In the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series, the reserved area is not checked.

Refer to • Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

• Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
• Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)

5-90
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples

Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

15.0
mm
55.0
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm 15.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 = 12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-91
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6.6 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] XB

~ In the case of GS1 Databar

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh (, ijjjjjjjjjj, kk) (= sss ------ sss) [LF] [NUL]
d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh (, ijjjjjjjjjj, kk) (; tt1, tt2, tt3, ------, tt20) [LF]
[NUL]

Term aa: Barcode number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of barcode
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of barcode
b: GS1 Databar family
e: Version (Type of GS1 Databer)
1: GS1 Databar Omni-directional
2: GS1 Databar Stacked
3: GS1 Databar Stacked Omni-directional
4: GS1 Databar Limited
5: GS1 Databar Expanded
6: GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked
ff: 1-module width
01 to 15 (in units of dots)
g: Rotational angle of barcode
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
hhhh: Height of the barcode
0000 to 1000 (in 0.1 mm units)
ijjjjjjjjjj: Increment/decrement
(Omissible. If omitted, increment/decrement is not performed.)
i: Indicates whether to increment or decrement
+: Increment
-: Decrement
jjjjjjjjjj: Skip value
0000000000 to 9999999999
kk: No. of digits after zero suppression
(Omissible. If omitted, zero suppression is not performed.)
00 to 20
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series

5-92
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

sss ------ sss: Data string to be printed (Omissible)

Max. 126 digits.
However, the number of digits varies according to the type of barcode.
tt1, tt2, tt3, ------. tt20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
Explanation
(1) Barcode number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the barcode
is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates
Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of Label Label
coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Effective Effective
print print
length length Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
X Effective Effective coordinates
0
print width Y print width (0, 0)

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the barcode drawing result will be
within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

5-93
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(3) Type of barcode (Detailed version types)

1: GS1 Databar Omni-directional

2: GS1 Databar Stacked

3: GS1 Databar Stacked Omni-directional

4: GS1 Databar Limited

5: GS1 Databar Expanded

6: GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked

5-94
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(4) Bar width, space width, and character-to-character space

Designate the bar, space, and character-to-character space widths according to the type
of barcode. Note that the designated proper value differs according to the rotational
angle of barcode, type, number of digits, print speed, paper used, etc. Examples of such
designations are listed below.
The width of 2 to 4 modules is automatically calculated by designating a 1-module width.
[Example of setting]
203-dpi print head (1 dot = 1/8 mm)

1 module 2 module 3 module 4 module

Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
2 4 6 8
3 6 9 12

(5) Rotational angle of barcode

Point of origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

5-95
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) Barcode height

[GS1 Databar Omni-directional]

Height

[GS1 Databar Stacked]

Height (The height of the bottom row is 7/5 of the specified height.)

[GS1 Databar Stacked Omni-directional]

Height (The height of the upper barcode and the lower barcode are equal.)

[GS1 Databar Limited]

Height

[GS1 Databar Expanded]

Height

[GS1 Databar Expanded Stacked]

When the barcode height is set to 0000, a barcode (including guard bars) and numerals
under bars are not drawn. However, the barcode printed on the previous label is
cleared.

5-96
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(7) Increment/decrement
Printing is performed while the data is incremented or decremented every time a label is
issued. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data row
will not be drawn.
Initial value 0000 0000 0000 0000 999999
INC/DEC +10 +10 +10 +10 +1
Not
Zero suppression 5 3 0 3
designated
1st label 0000 0000 000 0000 999999
2nd label 0010 0010 010 0010 000
3rd label 0020 0020 020 0020 001
4th label 0030 0030 030 0030 002
5th label 0040 0040 040 0040 003

Letters and numerals for increment/decrement

For the data string, up to 40 digits (including letters, numerals, and symbols) are possible.
Only the numerals are selected and calculated for incrementing/decrementing, and then
are returned to the previous position to draw the data.
Example of increment/decrement calculation
Initial value 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
INC/DEC +1 +1 +3 -3
1st label 00000 A0A0A 7A8/9 A2A0A
2nd label 00001 A0A1A 7A9/2 A1A7A
3rd label 00002 A0A2A 7A9/5 A1A4A
4th label 00003 A0A3A 7A9/8 A1A1A
5th label 00004 A0A4A 8A0/1 A0A8A

(8) Zero suppression

No. of digits after zero
0 1 2 2 3 4 5
suppression
Data 0000 0000 0000 0A12 0123 0123 0123
Print 0000 0 00 A12 123 0123 0123

Zero(s) in a data row is replaced with a space(s) from the upper digits, according to the
designated number of digits. However, if the number of digits after zero suppression is
greater than the data row, the data row will be drawn without performing zero
suppression. Where the data row exceeds the maximum number of digits (40), the data
row will not be drawn.
When the print data including start/stop codes are sent, the start/stop codes are also
counted as a digit each.
(9) Data string to be printed
Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.”
The maximum number of digits to be printed varies according to the type of barcode.
For codes, refer to the barcode table mentioned later.

5-97
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(10) Link field No.

The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.”
After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.

[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

5-98
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) The check digit attachment, increment/decrement and zero suppression are performed
according to the following priority. If any of the conditions is improper, no drawing will
take place.
For example, the zero(s) is replaced with a space(s) as a result of zero suppression, but
the modulus 10 designated to be attached cannot be calculated.
Increment/decrement > zero suppression > attachment of check digit
(2) Up to 32 fields for which increment/decrement has been designated can be drawn. If the
total of bit map font, outline font and barcode increment/decrement fields exceeds 32,
drawing will take place without incrementing/decrementing any excessive field. The field
to be incremented or decremented is incremented or decremented until the Image Buffer
Clear Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.
[Example]
1) Format Command (Incrementing barcode No. 01 (+1))
2) Format Command (Incrementing barcode No. 02 (+2))
3) Image Buffer Clear Command
4) Data Command (Barcode No. 01 “0001”)
5) Data Command (Barcode No. 02 “0100”)
6) Issue Command (2 labels)

(0001)

(0100)

(0002)

(0102)

7) Issue Command (1 label)

(0003)

(0104)

8) Image Buffer Clear Command

9) Data Command (Barcode No. 02 “3000”)
10) Issue Command (1 label)

(3000)

5-99
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(3) More than one Barcode Format Command can be connected when transmitted.
[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(4) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the barcode number, then the
next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the barcode number which differs according to
the drawing fields should be designated.
(5) Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same barcode
number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command should be sent
alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same barcode number
are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is sent.)
(6) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same
barcode No. and reformatting data. The link field designation can be also cleared by the
Image Buffer Clear Command.
(7) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.
(8) In the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series, the reserved area is not checked.

Refer to • Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

• Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
• Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)

5-100
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples

Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

15.0
mm
55.0
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm 15.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150 = 12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 04, 07, 08, 04, 3, 0150, +0000000000, 1, 00, N [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; *ABC* [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-101
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6.7 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (Data Matrix) [ESC] XB

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn) (= ooo ------ ooo)
[LF] [NUL]

d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn)

(; pp1, pp2, pp3, ------ , pp20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of the two-dimensional code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of two-dimensional code
Q: Data Matrix
ee: ECC type
00: ECC000
01: ECC050
04: ECC050
05: ECC050
06: ECC080
07: ECC080
08: ECC080
09: ECC100
10: ECC100
11: ECC140
12: ECC140
13: ECC140
14: ECC140
20: ECC200
ff: 1-cell width
00 to 99 (in units of dots)
gg: Format ID
01: Format ID 1
02: Format ID 2
03: Format ID 3
04: Format ID 4
05: Format ID 5
06: Format ID 6
* When ECC200 is designated as ECC type, the format ID designation is ignored.
When format ID of 11 through 16 is designated, ECC200 is automatically selected (to
ensure compatibility with the old model).

5-102
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

h: Rotational angle of two-dimensional code

0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Ciiijjj: No. of cells
(Omissible. If omitted, it is automatically set.)
iii: No. of cells in the X direction 000 to 144
jjj: No. of cells in the Y direction 000 to 144
* Cell setting varies according to the ECC type.
ECC000 to ECC140 ECC200
No. of cells to be Odd numbers only Even numbers only
designated
Min./Max. No. of cells 9 × 9 to 49 × 49 10 × 10 to 144 × 144
Rectangular code None 18 × 8
32 × 8
26 × 12
36 × 12
36 × 16
48 × 16

* When this parameter is omitted, the number of cells is automatically

set. Also, when any data other than the above values are
designated for the number of cells in the X and Y directions, the
number of cells is automatically set.
Jkkllmmmnnn: Connection setting
(Omissible. If omitted, connection is not made.)
kk: Code number 01 to 16
ll: No. of divided codes 02 to 16
mmm: ID number 1 001 to 254
nnn: ID number 2 001 to 254
ooo ------ ooo: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2000 digits
pp1, pp2, pp3, ------, pp20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.
* The maximum of 2000 digits of data string to be printed and the maximum of 99 dots of the 1-cell
width are acceptable. (The maximum number of digits of the data string to be printed differs
depending on the ECC level and the contents of data.) However, note the following limits:
• The maximum of 2000-digit data string to be printed are acceptable. However, it cannot actually be
printed, since it cannot be contained within the 2-inch head width.
• If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is high, printing may become poor, or the printer
may be reset. Be careful about the print ratio.
• When a large value is set for the 1-cell width, decrease the number of digits of data to contain the
data within the head width.

5-103
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Two-dimensional code number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the two-
dimensional code number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of Label Label
coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Effective Effective
print print
length length Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
X Effective Effective coordinates
0
print width Y print width (0, 0)

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the two-dimensional code drawing
result will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

(3) Type of two-dimensional code

Q: Data Matrix

(4) ECC type

Data Matrix contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error correction
code (ECC) and restore normal data. The ECC should be chosen from several types of
ECCs according to usage. The general correction ability is as follows. However, it may
vary according to the error conditions.
ECC type Error Correction Ability Overhead by ECC
ECC000 0%
Low
ECC050 25%
ECC080 33%
ECC100 High 50%
ECC140 75%
ECC200 Approx. 30%

5-104
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(5) 1-cell width

1-cell width When 1-cell width is set to 00 for the Data
Matrix or CP code, a two-dimensional code
1-cell width = 3
is not drawn. However, the barcode printed
on the previous label is cleared.
The maximum cell width is 99 dots.
(However, the number of digits of data
should be limited so the two-dimensional
code can be printed within the 2-inch head
width.)

(6) Format ID
Data Matrix can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji. Since the
data compression rate varies according to the code, a code to be used is designated
using the format ID.
Format ID Code Details
1 Numerics 0 to 9 space
2 Letters A to Z space
3 Alphanumerics, symbols 0 to 9 A to Z space . , - /
4 Alphanumerics 0 to 9 A to Z space
5 ASCII (7 bit) 00H to 7FH
6 ISO (8 bit) 00H to FFH (Kanji)

(7) Rotational angle of two-dimensional code

Point of origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

5-105
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(8) Maximum number of digits

The maximum number of digits varies according to the ECC type or format ID.
Since a Kanji character uses 2 bytes, its maximum number of digits becomes half of the
following values:
ECC000 ECC050 ECC080 ECC100 ECC140
Format ID 1 500 457 402 300 144
Format ID 2 452 333 293 218 105
Format ID 3 394 291 256 190 91
Format ID 4 413 305 268 200 96
Format ID 5 310 228 201 150 72
Format ID 6 271 200 176 131 63

Numeric Alphanumeric 8 bit

ECC200 2000 2000 1556
For the maximum number of digits in cell units, see the next page.
(9) Connection setting
The connection setting is used when the data cannot be expressed with a two-
dimensional code. Data is comprised of more than one two-dimensional code. When
three two-dimensional codes are used to comprise data, for example, identification
information of 1/3, 2/3, and 3/3 is inserted into each two-dimensional code. The ID
number is assigned to identify the proper combination of two-dimensional codes when
plural connecting symbols are printed on one label. For example, when there are two
kinds of data containing identification information for 1/2 and 2/2 in the same label,
combination of two-dimensional codes is unclear. By adding the ID number, the
combination is made clearer.

(10) Data string to be printed

Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed is 2000. (However, the number of
digits of data should be limited so the two-dimensional code can be printed within the 2-
inch head width.)

5-106
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(11) Link field No.

The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.”
After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.

[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

5-107
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(12) Cell size and the effective data capacity

ECC000 ECC050 ECC080 ECC100 ECC140
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte
capacity capacity capacity capacity capacity
Row Col

9 9 3 2 1 – – – – – – – – – – – –
11 11 12 8 5 1 1 – – – – – – – – – –
13 13 24 16 10 10 6 4 4 3 2 1 1 – – – –
15 15 37 25 16 20 13 9 13 9 6 8 5 3 – – –
17 17 53 35 23 32 21 14 24 16 10 16 11 7 2 1 1
19 19 72 48 31 46 30 20 36 24 16 25 17 11 6 4 3
21 21 92 61 40 61 41 27 50 33 22 36 24 15 12 8 5
23 23 115 76 50 78 52 34 65 43 28 47 31 20 17 11 7
25 25 140 93 61 97 65 42 82 54 36 60 40 26 24 16 10
27 27 168 112 73 118 78 51 100 67 44 73 49 32 30 20 13
29 29 197 131 86 140 93 61 120 80 52 88 59 38 38 25 16
31 31 229 153 100 164 109 72 141 94 62 104 69 45 46 30 20
33 33 264 176 115 190 126 83 164 109 72 121 81 53 54 36 24
35 35 300 200 131 217 145 95 188 125 82 140 93 61 64 42 28
37 37 339 226 148 246 164 108 214 143 94 159 106 69 73 49 32
39 39 380 253 166 277 185 121 242 161 106 180 120 78 84 56 36
41 41 424 282 185 310 206 135 270 180 118 201 134 88 94 63 41
43 43 469 313 205 344 229 150 301 201 132 224 149 98 106 70 46
45 45 500 345 226 380 253 166 333 222 146 248 165 108 118 78 51
47 47 500 378 248 418 278 183 366 244 160 273 182 119 130 87 57
49 49 500 413 271 457 305 200 402 268 176 300 200 131 144 96 63

5-108
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

10 10 6 3 1
12 12 10 6 3
14 14 16 10 6
16 16 24 16 10
18 18 36 25 16
20 20 44 31 20
22 22 60 43 28
24 24 72 52 34
26 26 88 64 42
32 32 124 91 60
36 36 172 127 84
40 40 228 169 112
44 44 288 214 142
48 48 348 259 172
52 52 408 304 202
64 64 560 418 278
72 72 736 550 366
80 80 912 682 454
88 88 1152 862 574
96 96 1392 1042 694
104 104 1632 1222 814
120 120 2000 1573 1048
132 132 2000 1954 1302
144 144 2000 2000 1556

Rectangular code
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

8 18 10 6 3
8 32 20 13 8
12 26 32 22 14
12 36 44 31 20
16 36 64 46 30
16 48 98 72 47

5-109
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) More than one Two-dimensional Code Format Command can be connected when
transmitted.
[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(2) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the two-dimensional code
number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the two-dimensional code
number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.
(3) Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same two-
dimensional code number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command
should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same
two-dimensional code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is
sent.)
(4) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same
two-dimensional code No. and reformatting data. The link field designation can be also
cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(5) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

Refer to • Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

• Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
• Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)

5-110
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples

Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

55.0
mm

Paper feed direction

20.0 mm

83.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, Q, 20, 05, 01, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; Toshiba TEC [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-111
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6.8 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (PDF417) [ESC] XB

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiij (= jjj ------ jjj) [LF] [NUL]

d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------ , kk20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of the two-dimensional code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of two-dimensional code
P: PDF417
ee: Security level
00: Level 0
01: Level 1
02: Level 2
03: Level 3
04: Level 4
05: Level 5
06: Level 6
07: Level 7
08: Level 8
ff: 1-module width
01 to 10 (in units of dots)
gg: No. of columns/rows
01 to 30
h: Rotational angle of two-dimensional code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii: Bar height
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 2,000 digits
kk1, kk2, kk3, ------, kk20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

5-112
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Two-dimensional code number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the two-
dimensional code number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of Label Label
coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Effective Effective
print print
length length Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
X Effective Effective coordinates
0
print width Y print width (0, 0)

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the two-dimensional code drawing
result will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

(3) Type of two-dimensional code

P: PDF417

(4) Security level

The PDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error correcting
code word and restore normal data. The security level should be designated according
to usage.
No. of error correction
Security level Error Correction Ability
code words
Level 0 0
Level 1 Low 2
Level 2 6
Level 3 14
Level 4 30
Level 5 62
Level 6 126
Level 7 High 254
Level 8 510

5-113
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(5) 1-module width

The width of 2 to 6 modules is automatically calculated by designating a 1-module width.
[Example of setting]
203-dpi print head (1 dot = 1/8 mm)

1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules

Type of barcode
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
PDF417 2 4 6 8 10 12

Values to be set in ff: “1-module width” To be automatically calculated based

on the value set in ff: “1-module width”

(6) No. of columns/rows

The number of rows and the row length (No. of data strings) are variable. Therefore, the
form of the symbol can be changed in the proportion of the height and width in
accordance with the paper to be used.
The number of columns (the number of data strings) is varied between 1 and 30.
If the number of columns is set to too small though the data volume is large and the
security level is high, drawing may not be performed. This is because the number of
rows may exceed 90 when the number of columns is too small. (The number of rows of
symbols is limited in a range from 3 to 90.)

5-114
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(7) Rotational angle of two-dimensional code

Point of origin

*
5
1
2

4
* 1 2 3 4 5 *

3
3
4

2
5

1
*
*
0° 90° 180° 270°

(8) Height of two-dimensional code

Height

Height

5-115
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(9) Data string to be printed

Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed is 2000. (However, the number of
digits of data should be limited so the two-dimensional code can be printed within the 2-
inch head width.)

(10) Link field No.

The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.”
After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.

[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

5-116
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) More than one Two-dimensional Code Format Command can be connected when
transmitted.
[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(2) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the two-dimensional code
number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the two-dimensional code
number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.
(3) Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same two-
dimensional code number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command
should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same
two-dimensional code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is
sent.)
(4) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same
two-dimensional code No. and reformatting data. The link field designation can be also
cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(5) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

Refer to • Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

• Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
• Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)

5-117
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples
Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

55.0
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-118
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6.9 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MicroPDF417) [ESC] XB

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (= jjj ------ jjj) [LF] [NUL]

d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii (; kk1, kk2, kk3, ------ , kk20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of the two-dimensional code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of two-dimensional code
X: MicroPDF417
ee: Security level
00: Fixed
ff: 1-module width
01 to 10 (in units of dots)
gg: No. of columns/rows
00 to 38
h: Rotational angle of two-dimensional code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii: Bar height
0000 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)
jjj-----jjj: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 366 digits
* The maximum of 366 digits of data string to be printed are acceptable. (The maximum number of
digits of the data string to be printed differs depending on the numbers of columns, the number of
rows, and the contents of data.) However, note the following limits:
• The maximum of 366-digit data string to be printed are acceptable. However, it cannot actually be
printed, since it cannot be contained within the 2-inch head width.
• If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is high, printing may become poor, or the printer
may be reset. Be careful about the print ratio.

5-119
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Two-dimensional code number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the two-
dimensional code number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of Label Label
coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Effective Effective
print print
length length Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
X Effective Effective coordinates
0
print width Y print width (0, 0)

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the two-dimensional code drawing
result will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

(3) Type of two-dimensional code

X: MicroPDF417

(4) Security level

The MicroPDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correcting code word and restore normal data. The printer automatically sets the
security level.

5-120
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(5) 1-module width

The width of 2 to 6 modules is automatically calculated by designating a 1-module width.
[Example of setting]
203-dpi print head (1 dot = 1/8 mm)

1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules

Type of barcode
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
MicroPDF417 2 4 6 8 10 12

Values to be set in ff: “1-module width” To be automatically calculated based

on the value set in ff: “1-module width”

(6) No. of columns/rows

For the MicroPDF417, not only the number of columns (data strings) but also the number
of rows (data lines) can be designated. When these are to be designated, see the table.
Note that the max. number of digits for the set parameter (gg) varies according to the
character type. If data over the max. number of digits for the set parameter (gg) is set,
the two-dimensional code is not printed. The number of columns (data strings) is varied
in a range from 1 to 4.
Though the max. number of lines is 44, it depends on the number of columns.

5-121
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(7) Rotational angle of two-dimensional code

Point of origin

*
5
1
2

4
* 1 2 3 4 5 *

3
3
4

2
5

1
*
*
0° 90° 180° 270°

(8) Height of two-dimensional code

Height

Height

(9) Data string to be printed

Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed is 366. (However, the number of
digits of data should be limited so the two-dimensional code can be printed within the 2-
inch head width.)

5-122
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(10) Link field No.

The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.”
After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.

[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

5-123
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(11) The maximum number of columns and rows

Parameter Max. number of digits Max. number of digits for Max. number of digits
No. of columns No. of rows
(gg) for binary mode upper case letter/space mode for numeric mode

00 – – 150 250 366

01 1 – 22 38 55
02 2 – 43 72 105
03 3 – 97 162 237
04 4 – 150 250 366
05 11 3 6 8
06 14 7 12 17
07 1 17 10 18 26
08 20 13 22 32
09 24 18 30 44
10 28 22 38 55
11 8 8 14 20
12 11 14 24 35
13 14 21 36 52
14 2 17 27 46 67
15 20 33 56 82
16 23 38 64 93
17 26 43 72 105
18 6 6 10 14
19 8 10 18 26
20 10 15 26 38
21 12 20 34 49
22 3 15 27 46 67
23 20 39 66 96
24 26 54 90 132
25 32 68 114 167
26 38 82 138 202
27 44 97 162 237
28 4 8 14 20
29 6 13 22 32
30 8 20 34 49
31 10 27 46 67
32 12 34 58 85
33 4 15 45 76 111
34 20 63 106 155
35 26 85 142 208
36 32 106 178 261
37 38 128 214 313
38 44 150 250 366

“–” for parameter 00 to 04 indicates the numbers of columns/rows which are automatically set by the printer.
In this case, the pattern which has a smaller number of code words is automatically selected. When the
numbers of code words is equal, the smaller number of columns is selected.

5-124
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) More than one Two-dimensional Code Format Command can be connected when
transmitted.
[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(2) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the two-dimensional code
number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the two-dimensional code
number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.
(3) Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same two-
dimensional code number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command
should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same
two-dimensional code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is
sent.)
(4) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same
two-dimensional code No. and reformatting data. The link field designation can be also
cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(5) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

Refer to • Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

• Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
• Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)

5-125
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples
Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

55.0
mm

Paper feed direction

5.0 mm

30.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, X, 00, 02, 00, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; MicroPDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-126
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6.10 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (QR Code) [ESC] XB

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (= nnn --- nnn) [LF] [NUL]

d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm) (; oo1, oo2, oo3, ------ , oo20)
[LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of the two-dimensional code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of two-dimensional code
T: QR code
e: Designation of error correction level
L: High density level
M: Standard level
Q: Reliability level
H: High reliability level
ff: 1-cell width
00 to 52 (in units of dots)
g: Selection of mode
M: Manual mode
A: Automatic mode
h: Rotational angle of two-dimensional code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
Mi: Selection of model
(Omissible. If omitted, Model 1 is automatically selected.)
i = 1: Model 1
2: Model 2
Kj: Mask number
(Omissible. If omitted, the number is automatically set.)
j = 0 to 7: Mask number 0 to 7
8: No mask
Jkkllmm: Connection setting
(Omissible. If omitted, connection is not made.)
kk = 01 to 16: Value indicating which divided code is connected.
ll = 01 to 16: Number of divided codes
mm = 00 to FF: A value for all print data (before divided) which have
been XORed in units of bytes.

5-127
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

nnn --- nnn: Data string to be printed (Omissible)

Max. 2000 digits
oo1 --- oo20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 digits can be designated using commas.

* The maximum of 2000 digits of data string to be printed and the maximum of 52 dots of the 1-cell
width are acceptable. (The maximum number of digits of the data string to be printed differs
depending on the error correction level and the contents of data.) However, note the following limits:
• The maximum of 2000-digit data string to be printed are acceptable. However, it cannot actually be
printed, since it cannot be contained within the head width.
• If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is high, printing may become poor, or the printer
may be reset. Be careful about the print ratio.
• When a large value is set for the 1-cell width, decrease the number of digits of data to contain the
data within the head width.

5-128
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Two-dimensional code number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the two-
dimensional code number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of Label Label
coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Effective Effective
print print
length length Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
X Effective Effective coordinates
0
print width Y print width (0, 0)

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the two-dimensional code drawing
result will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

(3) Type of two-dimensional code

T: QR code

(4) Error correction level

The QR code contains functions to detect and correct an error. If one of the data
characters is damaged, the information can be restored when this code is read.
There are 4 levels that can be designated. The level should be specified according to
usage. The general correction ability is as follows.
Overhead by correcting
Level Error correction ability
an error
High density level Low 7%
Standard level 15%
Reliability level 25%
High reliability level High 30%

5-129
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series
1-cell width
(5) 1-cell width

1-cell width

When the 1-cell width is set to 0 for the QR code, a two-dimensional code is not drawn.
However, the barcode printed on the previous label is cleared.

(6) Selection of mode

All codes including alphanumerals, symbols and Kanji can be used in one QR code.
Manual mode or automatic mode can be selected to perform the operation.

(7) Rotational angle of two-dimensional code

Point of origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

(8) Selection of model

Model 1: Original specification
Model 2: Extended specification which enhances the function of position correction
and can contain a large amount of data.

(9) Mask number

It is preferable that the black and white modules are arranged in well-balanced manner so
that a QR code is read for sure. The mask number prevents the bit pattern “1011101,”
which is characteristically seen in the position detecting pattern, from appearing in the
symbol as much as possible.
The mask number is ranging from 0 to 7. The pattern of the code is determined by
placing each masking pattern for the mask number over the module pattern. When the
mask number is set to 8, masking is not performed. When the parameter is omitted, the
most appropriate mask number is automatically selected to perform masking.

5-130
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(10) Connection setting

For QR code, data can be divided into several codes. Even though the print space is
limited, divided codes can be printed there. The data can be divided into a max. of 16
codes. Parity data is obtained by XORing all input data in units of bytes before dividing.
The input data is calculated based on shift JIS for Kanji, or on JIS 8 for others.
Examples are shown below:
“0123456789 ” is divided into “0123,” “4567” and “89 .”
Code No. 1 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 85 Data “0123”
Code No. 2 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 85 Data “4567”
Code No. 3 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 85 Data “89 ”
* The parity data is the XORed value for “0123456789 ”.
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 93 FA 96 7B = 85

(11) Data string to be printed

Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed is 2000. (However, the number of
digits of data should be limited so the two-dimensional code can be printed within the 2-
inch head width.)

5-131
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(12) Link field No.

The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.”
After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.

[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RB; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

5-132
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) More than one Two-dimensional Code Format Command can be connected when
transmitted.
[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(2) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the two-dimensional code
number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the two-dimensional code
number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.
(3) Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same two-
dimensional code number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command
should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same
two-dimensional code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is
sent.)
(4) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same
two-dimensional code No. and reformatting data. The link field designation can be also
cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(5) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

Refer to • Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

• Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
• Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)

5-133
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples
Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

55.0
mm

Paper feed direction

20.0 mm

83.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, T, M, 02, A, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; QR Code [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-134
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.6.11 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MaxiCode) [ESC] XB

Format c [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d (, e) (, Jffgg) (, Zh) (= mmm ------ mmm) [LF] [NUL]

d [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d (, e) (, Jffgg) (, Zh) (; nn1, nn2, nn3, ------ , nn20) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code number

00 to 31
bbbb: X-coordinate of the print origin of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Y-coordinate of the print origin of the two-dimensional code
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of two-dimensional code
Z: MaxiCode
e: Mode selection (Omissible)
• When the MaxiCode specification is set to “TYPE1: Compatible with the
current version” in the SYSTEM mode.
Omitted: Mode 2
0: Mode 2
1: Mode 4
2: Mode 2
3: Mode 3
4: Mode 4
5: Mode 2
6: Mode 6
7: Mode 2
8: Mode 2
9: Mode 2
• When the MaxiCode specification is set to “TYPE2: Special specification” in
the SYSTEM mode.
Omitted: Mode 2 or Mode 3(*)
0: Mode 2 or Mode 3(*)
1: Mode 4
2: Mode 2
3: Mode 3
4: Mode 4
5: Mode 2 or Mode 3 (*)
6: Mode 6
7: Mode 2 or Mode 3 (*)
8: Mode 2 or Mode 3 (*)
9: Mode 2 or Mode 3 (*)
*: Mode 2 or Mode 3 should be determined depending on the country
code of the data command. When the country code is 840, Mode 2
should be selected. For other codes than 840, Mode 3 should be
selected.
Jffgg: Connection setting (Omissible. If omitted, connection is not made.)
ff: Code number 01 to 08
gg: No. of divided codes 01 to 08

5-135
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Zh: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block

(Omissible. If omitted, they are not attached.)
h= 0: No attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
1: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
2: Attachment of Zipper block
3: Attachment of Contrast block
mmm ------ mmm: Data string to be printed (Omissible)
Max. 93 digits
nn1, nn2, nn3, ------, nn20: Link field No. (Omissible)
01 to 99 (1 to 99 can also be used.)
Up to 20 fields can be designated using commas.

5-136
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Two-dimensional code number
When drawing by the Data Command ([ESC] RB), the format designated by the two-
dimensional code number is selected.
(2) Print origin of coordinates

Backing paper
Backing paper
Origin of Label Label
coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Effective Effective
print print
length length Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
X Effective Effective coordinates
0
print width Y print width (0, 0)

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Printing direction: Bottom first] [Printing direction: Top first]

The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the two-dimensional code drawing
result will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).

(3) Type of two-dimensional code

Z: MaxiCode

(4) Data string to be printed

Drawing data can be programmed by designating the number of digits after the symbol
“=.” The maximum number of digits to be printed is 93.

(5) Connection setting

For MaxiCode, data can be divided into several codes. The data can be divided into a
max. of 8 codes.

5-137
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) Link field No.

The link field No. can be programmed by designating it after the symbol “;.”
After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
Up to 20 fields can be linked.
The following shows an example of linked fields on the two continuous labels.

[Format Command]
[ESC] PC01; ........................ ; 01 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 1 is designated.
[ESC] PC02; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC03; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB01; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

[ESC] PC04; ........................ ; 02 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 2 is designated.

[ESC] PC05; ........................ ; 03 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 3 is designated.
[ESC] PC06; ........................ ; 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link field No. 4 is designated.
[ESC] XB02; ................... ; 03, 04 [LF] [NUL] : Link fields No. 3 and No. 4 are
designated.

Designating link field No.

[Data Command]
[ESC] RV; A [LF] B [LF] ABCD [LF] 001 [LF] [NUL]

Link field No. 4

Link field No. 3
Link field No. 2
Link field No. 1

A B

ABCD ABCD
001 001
*ABCD001* *ABCD001*

5-138
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) More than one Two-dimensional Code Format Command can be connected when
transmitted.
[ESC] XB01; 0100, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF]
B02; 0350, 0150, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
(2) When the drawing data is changed per label issue during printing, the field of the drawing
data for the previous label is automatically cleared using the two-dimensional code
number, then the next drawing data is printed. Therefore, the two-dimensional code
number which differs according to the drawing fields should be designated.
(3) Since the automatic field clear is not performed between the Clear Command ([ESC] C)
and Issue Command ([ESC] XS), the fixed data may be drawn using the same two-
dimensional code number. In this case, the Format Command and Data Command
should be sent alternately. (After the Issue Command is sent, the fields with the same
two-dimensional code number are automatically cleared until the Clear Command is
sent.)
(4) The link field designation is cleared by omitting the link field designation using the same
two-dimensional code No. and reformatting data. The link field designation can be also
cleared by the Image Buffer Clear Command.
(5) A print data string and link field No. cannot be programmed at the same time.

Refer to • Bit Map Font Format Command ([ESC] PC)

• Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)
• Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Data Command ([ESC] RB)

5-139
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples

Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

55.0
mm

Paper feed direction

20.0 mm

83.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, Z [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; 123456789123123MaxiCode [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-140
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO PRINT DATA

5.7.1 BIT MAP FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RC

Function Provides data for the bit map font row.

Format c [ESC] RCaaa; bbb ------- bbb [LF] [NUL]

d Link Field Data Command

[ESC] RC; ccc --- ccc [LF] ddd --- ddd [LF] ------- [LF] xxx --- xxx [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa: Character string number

000 to 199 (Two digits, 00 to 99, also acceptable.)
When 000 and 00 are designated at the same time, the data
designated later is automatically selected.
bbb ------- bbb: Data string to be printed
Max. 255 characters
(Max. 127 characters when the font type is U, V, r, s, w or 51, and max.
63 characters when it is r as a 4-byte code.)
Any excess data will be discarded.
For character codes, refer to the character code table mentioned later.
ccc ------- ccc: Data string of link field No. 1
ddd ------- ddd: Data string of link field No. 2
Ú
xxx ------- xxx: Data string of link field No. 99

5-141
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 255 characters of data strings can be linked. However, when the font type is U,
V, r, s, w or 51, up to 127 characters can be linked. When it is r as a 4-byte code, up to
63 characters can be linked.
When the number of characters exceeds the maximum number of digits, the excess data
will be discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the Link Field
Data Command.

• When the data string is omitted using the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to the
omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only remaining data
will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline font fields
and barcode fields.
• (The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command code is
designated.)

Notes

(1) For character sets from 41 to 43, a character code consisting of 1 byte is stored.
However, when the character code is read, F0H is added to the upper digit or FFH is
added to the upper digit with Chinese characters installed, and consists of 2 bytes. In this
case, up to 188 characters can be stored per character set.

Refer to • Bit Map Font Data Command ([ESC] RC)

5-142
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples

Origin (0, 0)
(1)

Effective print area

12.5 mm

Sample
55.0 mm

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, C, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-143
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(2) Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[SSC] RC; S001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-144
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(3)
Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

12.5
mm
30.0
mm

20.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC000; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, W, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, W, 01, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC000; AB [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; AB [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-145
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.7.2 OUTLINE FONT DATA COMMAND [ESC] RV

Function Provides data for the outline font row.

Format c [ESC] RVaa; bbb ------- bbb [LF] [NUL]

d Link Field Data Command

[ESC] RV; ccc --- ccc [LF] ddd --- ddd [LF] ------- [LF] xxx --- xxx [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Character string number

00 to 99
bbb ------- bbb: Data string to be printed
Max. 255 characters
Any excess data will be discarded.
For character codes, refer to the character code table mentioned later.
ccc ------- ccc: Data string of link field No. 1

ddd ------- ddd: Data string of link field No. 2

Ú
xxx ------- xxx: Data string of link field No. 99

Explanation
(1) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• Up to 255 characters of data strings can be linked. However, when the font type is C,
up to 127 characters can be linked.
When the number of characters exceeds the maximum number of digits, the excess data
will be discarded.
• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.
• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the Link Field
Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted using the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to the
omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only remaining data
will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline font fields
and barcode fields.
• (The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command code is
designated.)

Refer to Outline Font Format Command ([ESC] PV)

5-146
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples
Origin (0, 0)
(1)

Effective print area

12.5 mm

Sample
55.0 mm

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PV01; 0200, 0125, 0100, 0100, B, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV01; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RV02; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-147
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(2) Origin (0, 0)

Effective print area

30.0
mm

55.0
mm
S001

20.0 mm

65.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0300, 1, 1, C, 00, B; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0650, 0550, 0200, 0150, B, 33, B; 02 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0550, 3, 1, 02, 02, 06, 06, 02, 0, 0150; 01, 02 [LF] [NUL]
[SSC] RC; S001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-148
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.7.3 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE DATA COMMAND (Any codes other than MaxiCode)
[ESC] RB

Function Provides data for the barcode/two-dimensional code.

Format c [ESC] RBaa; bbb ------- bbb [LF] [NUL]

d Link Field Data Command

[ESC] RB; ccc --- ccc [LF] ddd --- ddd [LF] ------- [LF] xxx --- xxx [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Barcode/two-dimensional code number

00 to 31
bbb ------- bbb: Data string to be printed
The maximum number of digits varies according to the type of
barcode/two-dimensional code.
ccc ------- ccc: Data string of link field No. 1

ddd ------- ddd: Data string of link field No. 2

Ú
xxx ------- xxx: Data string of link field No. 99

5-149
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Link field data string
• After the link field No. is designated using the Format Command, the data strings are
linked by the Link Field Data Command to draw an image.
• When the barcode type is Data Matrix or PDF417, up to 2000 digits of data strings can
be linked. When it is other than Data Matrix or PDF417, up to 126 digits can be linked.
(It varies according to the type of barcode.)
When the number of digits exceeds the maximum number of digits, the excess data will
be discarded.

• Up to 99 data strings can be linked.

• Up to 2048 bytes can be used as the command length ([ESC] to [NUL]) of the Link Field
Data Command.
• When the data string is omitted using the Link Field Data Command, the following
process is performed:
c No process will be performed for the field which contains no print data due to the
omission.
d When the field partially loses print data due to the omission, the only remaining data
will be processed as print data.
• The Link Field Data Command can be used for the bit map font fields, outline font fields
and barcode fields.
• (The same result is obtained when any of the “RC,” “RV” or “RB” command code is
designated.)

(2) Data check

If the data row contains data which does not meet the type of barcode, a barcode will not
be drawn. If wrong code selection takes place in the data row of CODE128 (without auto
code selection), the barcode will not be drawn.
In case of Data Matrix, if there is data different from the one designated using the format
ID, a symbol is not drawn.

(3) No. of digits of data

When data exceeding the maximum number of digits is sent, the excess data will be
discarded. For the maximum number of digits for each barcode, see below.
Data Matrix, PDF417, QR code: 2000 digits
MicroPDF417: 366 digits
MaxiCode: 93 digits
Customer barcode: 20 digits
Highest priority customer barcode: 19 digits
POSTNET: 5, 9, 11 digits
ROYAL MAIL 4 STATE CUSTOMER CODE: 12 digits
KIX CODE: 18 digits
Barcodes other than the above 126 digits
When the number of digits does not correspond to the barcode type, the barcode is not
drawn.

5-150
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(4) The maximum number of digits for Data Matrix varies according to the settings for ECC
type, format ID, and the cell size. In the case of Kanji, the maximum number of digits
becomes half of the values described below since a Kanji character occupies 2 bytes.
Max number of digits for Data Matrix

ECC000 ECC050 ECC080 ECC100 ECC140

Format ID 1 500 457 402 300 144
Format ID 2 452 333 293 218 105
Format ID 3 394 291 256 190 91
Format ID 4 413 305 268 200 96
Format ID 5 310 228 201 150 72
Format ID 6 271 200 176 131 63

Numeric Alphanumeric 8 bit

ECC200 2000 2000 1556

Cell Size and Effective Data Capacity

ECC000 ECC050 ECC080 ECC100 ECC140

Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte capacity capacity byte
capacity capacity capacity capacity capacity
Row Col

9 9 3 2 1 – – – – – – – – – – – –
11 11 12 8 5 1 1 – – – – – – – – – –
13 13 24 16 10 10 6 4 4 3 2 1 1 – – – –
15 15 37 25 16 20 13 9 13 9 6 8 5 3 – – –
17 17 53 35 23 32 21 14 24 16 10 16 11 7 2 1 1
19 19 72 48 31 46 30 20 36 24 16 25 17 11 6 4 3
21 21 92 61 40 61 41 27 50 33 22 36 24 15 12 8 5
23 23 115 76 50 78 52 34 65 43 28 47 31 20 17 11 7
25 25 140 93 61 97 65 42 82 54 36 60 40 26 24 16 10
27 27 168 112 73 118 78 51 100 67 44 73 49 32 30 20 13
29 29 197 131 86 140 93 61 120 80 52 88 59 38 38 25 16
31 31 229 153 100 164 109 72 141 94 62 104 69 45 46 30 20
33 33 264 176 115 190 126 83 164 109 72 121 81 53 54 36 24
35 35 300 200 131 217 145 95 188 125 82 140 93 61 64 42 28
37 37 339 226 148 246 164 108 214 143 94 159 106 69 73 49 32
39 39 380 253 166 277 185 121 242 161 106 180 120 78 84 56 36
41 41 424 282 185 310 206 135 270 180 118 201 134 88 94 63 41
43 43 469 313 205 344 229 150 301 201 132 224 149 98 106 70 46
45 45 500 345 226 380 253 166 333 222 146 248 165 108 118 78 51
47 47 500 378 248 418 278 183 366 244 160 273 182 119 130 87 57
49 49 500 413 271 457 305 200 402 268 176 300 200 131 144 96 63

5-151
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

10 10 6 3 1
12 12 10 6 3
14 14 16 10 6
16 16 24 16 10
18 18 36 25 16
20 20 44 31 20
22 22 60 43 28
24 24 72 52 34
26 26 88 64 42
32 32 124 91 60
36 36 172 127 84
40 40 228 169 112
44 44 288 214 142
48 48 348 259 172
52 52 408 304 202
64 64 560 418 278
72 72 736 550 366
80 80 912 682 454
88 88 1152 862 574
96 96 1392 1042 694
104 104 1632 1222 814
120 120 2000 1573 1048
132 132 2000 1954 1302
144 144 2000 2000 1556

Rectangular code
ECC200
Numeric Alphanum 8-bit
Symbol size capacity capacity byte
capacity
Row Col

8 18 10 6 3
8 32 20 13 8
12 26 32 22 14
12 36 44 31 20
16 36 64 46 30
16 48 98 72 47

5-152
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(5) When PDF417 or MicroPDF417 is used, the number of symbol characters, called code
words, is limited to 928 or less. Moreover, the data compression rate varies according to
the data. Therefore, the maximum number of digits according to the mode is as follows.
When letters and numerics are mixed in data in EXC mode, for example, the maximum
values become smaller than the values below, since the internal mode selection code is
used.
To correct a reading error by designating the security level, the maximum value becomes
further smaller, since the error correction code words below are used.
When the number of the code words exceeds 928, or when the number of rows exceeds
90, a symbol is not drawn.
For the MicroPDF417, the numbers of rows and columns can be specified. The
maximum number of digits varies according to the setting.

PDF417
• Extended Alphanumeric Compaction (EXC) mode: 1850 digits
• Binary/ASCII Plus mode: 1108 digits
• Numeric compaction mode: 2000 digits
MicroPDF417
• Binary mode: 150 digits
• Upper case letter/space mode: 250 digits
• Numeric compaction mode: 366 digits

No. of Error Correction Code Words of PDF417

(For the MicroPDF417, the printer sets the security level automatically.)
No. of error correction
Security level Error Correction Ability
code words
Level 0 0
Level 1 Low 2
Level 2 6
Level 3 14
Level 4 30
Level 5 62
Level 6 126
Level 7 High 254
Level 8 510

5-153
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

The maximum number of columns and rows for the MicroPDF417

Parameter Max. number of digits Max. number of digits for Max. number of digits
No. of columns No. of rows
(gg) for binary mode upper case letter/space mode for numeric mode

00 – – 150 250 366

01 1 – 22 38 55
02 2 – 43 72 105
03 3 – 97 162 237
04 4 – 150 250 366
05 11 3 6 8
06 14 7 12 17
07 1 17 10 18 26
08 20 13 22 32
09 24 18 30 44
10 28 22 38 55
11 8 8 14 20
12 11 14 24 35
13 14 21 36 52
14 2 17 27 46 67
15 20 33 56 82
16 23 38 64 93
17 26 43 72 105
18 6 6 10 14
19 8 10 18 26
20 10 15 26 38
21 12 20 34 49
22 3 15 27 46 67
23 20 39 66 96
24 26 54 90 132
25 32 68 114 167
26 38 82 138 202
27 44 97 162 237
28 4 8 14 20
29 6 13 22 32
30 8 20 34 49
31 10 27 46 67
32 12 34 58 85
33 4 15 45 76 111
34 20 63 106 155
35 26 85 142 208
36 32 106 178 261
37 38 128 214 313
38 44 150 250 366

5-154
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) CODE128 code selection

In the case of CODE128 (with auto code selection), code selection is performed in the
following manner. (Conforming to USS-128 APPENDIX-G)
c Determining the start character
(a) If the data begins with four or more consecutive numerals, the start code to be
used is (CODE C).
(b) In any case other than (a) in c, if a control character appears before a small
letter (see f.) or four or more consecutive numerals, the start code is (CODE
A).
(c) In none of the above cases, the start code is (CODE B).
d If the data begins with an odd number of digits in (a), c:
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the last numeric data.
When (FNC1), if found in the number, breaks a pair of digits in the number,
insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character before the numeric data preceding
the (FNC1). Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should conform to (b) and (c)
in c.
e If four or more digits of numeric data continue in (CODE A) or (CODE B).
(a) When the numeric data is an even number of digits, insert the (CODE C)
character just before the first numeric data.
(b) When the numeric data is an odd number of digits, insert the (CODE C)
character immediately after the first numeric data.
f If a control character appears in (CODE B):
(a) In the subsequent data, when a small letter appears before the next control
character or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT) character before
the first control character.
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first control
character.
g If a small letter appears in (CODE A):
(a) In the subsequent data, when a control character appears before the next small
letter or four or more consecutive digits, insert the (SHIFT) character before the
first small letter.
(b) When not so, insert the (CODE B) character just before the first small letter.
h If any data other than the numerals appears in (CODE C):
(a) Insert the (CODE A) or (CODE B) character just before the data other than the
numerals. Selection of (CODE A) or (CODE B) should conform to (b) and (c)
in c.
* Refer to chapter 16 “CODE128 Value Code Table.”

5-155
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(7) CODE128 code selection check

Check if selection of (CODE A), (CODE B) or (CODE C) of CODE128 has been set
correctly. If an error is found, the barcode will not be drawn.
[Conditions causing an error]
c No start code is designated.
d A small letter (including { , | , } , ~, _ ) is found in (CODE A).
e A control character is found in (CODE B).
f Any data other than the numerals, (FNC1), (CODE A) and (CODE B) is found in
(CODE C).
g There are two or more consecutive (SHIFT) characters.
h The number in (CODE C) is an odd number of digits.
i (SHIFT) is followed by (CODE A), (CODE B) or (CODE C).

(8) Kanji code selection

• In the case of Data Matrix, PDF417 and QR code, Kanji codes can be printed. Shift
JIS, JIS hexadecimal, JIS 8, or the mixture of these codes can be used.

(9) When manual mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code
c Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode

Mode selection Data to be printed

d Binary mode
No. of data strings
Mode selection Data to be printed
(4 digits)

e Mixed mode

Data “,” (comma) Data “,” (comma) Data

QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji. Since the
data compression rate varies according to the code, a code to be used is designated
when the mode is selected.
Mode Code Details
N Numerics 0 to 9
A Alphanumerics, symbols A to Z 0 to 9 space
$ % * + - . / :
B Binary (8-bit) 00H to FFH
K Kanji Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal

If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.

5-156
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(10) When the automatic mode is selected using the Format Command for QR code.

Data to be printed

c How to transmit the control code data

NUL (00H) = > @ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) = > A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) = > B (3EH, 42H)

GS (1DH) = > ] (3EH, 5DH)

RS (1EH) = > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) = > _ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to transmit the special codes
> (3EH) = > 0 (3EH, 30H)

(11) Transfer code for QR code

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS • > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.

5-157
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(12) Examples of data designation

c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
AABC123
Data to be printed
Designation of mode
d Binary mode: 01h, 03h, 05h
B0006>A>C>E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
e Mixed mode
Numeric mode: 123456
Kanji mode: Kanji data
Binary mode: a i u e o
Alphanumeric mode: ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a i u e o , AABC
Data to be Data to be No. of Data to be printed Data to be
printed printed data strings printed

Designation of mode
f Automatic mode
When the data above (e) is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a i u e o ABC
Data to be printed

5-158
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples

Origin (0, 0)

12.5
mm Effective print area

55.0
mm

20.0 mm

83.0 mm

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0125, P, 04, 02, 03, 0, 0010 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB02; 0830, 0550, Q, 08, 03, 05, 3 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; PDF417 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB02; Data Matrix [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C4000 [LF] [NUL]

5-159
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.7.4 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE DATA COMMAND (MaxiCode) [ESC] RB

Function Provides data for the two-dimensional code.

Format For mode 2 or 3:

[ESC] RBaa; bbbbbbbbbcccdddeeeee --- eeeee [LF] [NUL]
For mode 4 or 6:
[ESC] RBaa; fffffffffggggg --- ggggg [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code number

“Modes 2 and 3”
bbbbbbbbb: Postal code Fixed at 9 digits
• Mode 2:
b1b2b3b4b5: Zip code Fixed at 5 digits (Numerics)
b6b7b8b9: Zip code extension Fixed at 4 digits (Numerics)
• Mode 3:
b1b2b3b4b5b6: Zip code Fixed at 6 digits (Character “A” of code set)
b7b8b9: Vacant Fixed at 3 digits (20H)
ccc: Class of service Fixed at 3 digits (Numerics)
ddd: Country code Fixed at 3 digits (Numerics)
eee --- eee: Message data strings 84 digits
“Modes 4 and 6”
fffffffff: Primary message data strings 9 digits
ggg --- ggg: Secondary message data strings 84 digits

5-160
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) When any data other than numerics is included in the data string of zip code (mode 2),
zip code extension, class of service, or country code, a MaxiCode is not drawn.
(2) If the message data is less than 84 digits when mode 2 or 3 is selected, the printer adds
one digit of CR (000000) at the end of the data, and the remaining digits will be filled with
FSs (011100). When message data exceeding 84 digits is received, the excess data will
be discarded before drawing a MaxiCode.
(3) If the message data is less than 93 digits (9 digits + 84 digits) when mode 4 or 6 is
selected, the printer adds one digit of CR (000000) at the end of the data, and the
remaining digits will be filled with FSs (011100). When message data exceeding 93
digits is received, the excess data will be discarded before drawing a MaxiCode.
(4) Mode 6 should not be used for usual operation since it is used for scanner programming.
(5) When “TYPE2: Special specification” is set for MaxiCode specification setting in the
SYSTEM mode and when Mode 2 is selected, the country code must be 840.
Otherwise, a MaxiCode will not be drawn.
(6) When “TYPE2: Special specification” is set for MaxiCode specification setting in the
SYSTEM mode and when Mode 3 is selected, the country code must be other than 840.
Otherwise, a MaxiCode will not be drawn.

5-161
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO ISSUE AND FEED

5.8.1 ISSUE COMMAND [ESC] XS

Function Issues labels according to the print conditions programmed.

Format [ESC] XS; I, aaaa, bbbcdefgh [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Number of labels to be issued

0001 to 9999
bbb: Reserved area
000 to 100
c: Type of sensor
0: No sensor
1: Reflective sensor
2: Transmissive sensor
3: Transmissive sensor (when using manual threshold value)
4: Reflective sensor (when using manual threshold value)
* In the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series,
Reserved when 3 is specified. (If specified, it is processed as “2.”)
Reserved when 4 is specified. (If specified, it is processed as “1.”)
d: Reserved area
C, D, E
e: Reserved area
1 to 9, A
f: Reserved area
0 to 2
g: Print orientation and mirror printing
0: Bottom first printing
1: Top first printing
2: Reserved
3: Reserved
* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series
(Fixed at 1.)
h: Type of status response
0: No status response
1: Status response

5-162
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Number of labels to be issued
c If increment/decrement is not specified, the same data will be printed on the
designated number of labels.
d If increment/decrement is specified, the designated number of labels will be printed
while incrementing/decrementing the designated drawing area one by one.
* The increment/decrement designation is effective until the Image Buffer Clear
Command ([ESC] C) is transmitted.

(2) Type of sensor

c No sensor:
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size Set
Command.
d Reflective sensor:
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size Set
Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag paper is
automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the paper position is finely
adjusted for every piece.
e Transmissive sensor:
Printing takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size Set
Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the
transmissive sensor and the paper position is finely adjusted for every piece.
(3) Tag rotation designation
The origin of coordinates and print direction vary according to the designation of tag
rotation.
c Bottom first printing
Black mark
Backing paper (Back side of paper)
Label Tag
Origin of Origin of
coordinates coordinates
(0, 0) (0, 0)

Label
pitch Tag
Effective Effective pitch
print length Sample print length Sample

Effective Effective
print width print width
X X
0 0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y Y
[Label] [Tag]

5-163
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

d Top first printing

Black mark
Backing paper (Back side of paper)
Label Tag

Label
pitch Tag
Effective Effective pitch
print length print length

Origin of Origin of
Effective coordinates Effective coordinates
print width (0, 0) print width (0, 0)
Y Y

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

0 0
X X

[Label] [Tag]

(4) Status response

When “Status response is returned.” is selected, a status response is returned at the end
of printing or if an error occurs.
In the batch mode, the print end status response is returned after the designated number
of labels is printed.
In the strip mode, a status response is returned after one label is printed.
* Do not change the setting of the status response parameter during printing.
Otherwise the status response may not be returned properly.

(5) Reserved area (Omissible)

The described values should be designated to d, e, and f. When any value from 0 to 3 is
designated to g, a command error does not occur. However, any value other than 1
should not be designated because it is fixed at 1.

5-164
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples

• Issue count: 4 pieces

41.0
• Paper: Tag paper
mm
(Reflective sensor is used.)
Sample 76.2 • Issue mode: Cut issue
73.2 mm • Print speed: 4”/sec.
mm
• Status response: On

15.0 mm

82.0 mm

Paper feed direction

[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] T11C40 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C4101 [LF] [NUL]

5-165
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.8.2 FEED COMMAND [ESC] T

Function Feeds the paper.

Format [ESC] Tabcde [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Type of sensor

0: No sensor
1: Reflective sensor
2: Transmissive sensor
3: Transmissive sensor (when using manual threshold value)
4: Reflective sensor (when using manual threshold value)
* In the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series,
Reserved when 3 is specified. (If specified, it is processed as “2.”)
Reserved when 4 is specified. (If specified, it is processed as “1.”)
b: Reserved area
0 to 1
c: Reserved area
C, D, E
d: Reserved area
1 to 9, A
e: Reserved area
0 to 2

Explanation
(1) Type of sensor
c No sensor:
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size Set
Command.
d Reflective sensor:
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size Set
Command. However, the black mark provided on the back side of the tag paper is
automatically sensed by the reflective sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted.
e Transmissive sensor:
Feeding takes place according to the parameter designated by the Label Size Set
Command. However, the label-to-label gap is automatically sensed by the
transmissive sensor and the stop position is finely adjusted.
(2) When any value other than the above is specified in the reserved area, an error occurs.
(When the above value is specified, this command is ignored.)

5-166
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) If the label size, type of sensor, feed amount fine adjustment or strip position fine
adjustment is changed, the Feed Command must be sent to adjust the print start position
prior to printing by feeding one label.
(2) The parameter of the Feed Command is stored in memory (retained even if the power is
turned off).
(3) When “status response is returned.” has been selected using the Issue Command, a
status response is returned after the end of feed or when an error occurs.
(4) Refer to ISSUE COMMAND for the operation to stop the label at the home position.
Examples

41.0
mm
76.2 mm
73.2 Sample
mm

15.0 mm

82.0 mm

Paper feed direction

[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] AX; +010, +000, +10 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C40 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C43001 [LF] [NUL]

5-167
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.8.3 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND [ESC] XF

Function Allocates the storage area in the flash ROM on the CPU board.

Format [ESC] XF; aa, bb, cc (, dd, ee) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Reserved

00 to 14
bb: Size of bit map writable character storage area
00 to 50 (0 KB to 3,200 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
cc: Size of BASIC file storage area
00 to 14 (0 KB to 896 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
AA: The current BASIC file storage area and contents are retained.
dd: Size of form storage area
(Omissible. If omitted, the contents are retained.)
00 to 14 (0 KB to 896 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
ee: Size of graphic storage area
(Omissible. If omitted, the contents are retained.)
00 to 03 (0 KB to 192 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
Explanation
(1) The total capacity of the storage area in flash ROM is variable from 1,024 to 3,200 KB.
* Variable with the two-byte font installed

Kanji 1,344 KB

Chinese 1,024 KB

Korean 2,112 KB

Without the two-byte font installed 3,200 KB

(2) Allocation priority is assigned as follows:

c All parameters
Writable character > BASIC > Form > Graphic > PC save

d Omissible parameters (, dd, ee) are omitted

Form > Graphic > Writable character > BASIC > PC save

e BASIC is retained (AA)

BASIC > Writable character > Form > Graphic > PC save

f BASIC is retained, or omissible parameters are omitted

Form > Graphic > BASIC > Writable character > PC save

(3) When the above command is received, the entire area in flash ROM on the CPU board is
cleared. However, omitted parameters are not cleared.

5-168
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Example of allocation]
~ In case that the size of BASIC file storage area is set in a range of “00” to “14”:
(1) The storage areas are allocated in the following order of precedence – the bit map
writable character storage area, the BASIC file storage area, the form storage area and
the graphic storage area. After these storage areas are allocated using the above
command, the remaining area is used for the PC save area.
(2) If the sum of the bit map writable character storage area, the BASIC file storage area, the
form storage area and the graphic storage area, specified using this command, is the
maximum allocable capacity, the bit map writable character storage area, the BASIC file
storage area, the form storage area and the graphic storage area are allocated as
specified, respectively. In this case, however, there is no PC save area.
(3) If the sum of the bit map writable character storage area, the BASIC file storage area, the
form storage area and the graphic storage area, specified using this command, exceeds
the maximum allocable capacity, the bit map writable character storage area is allocated
as specified with the highest priority. Then, the remaining area is allocated to the BASIC
file storage area. If there is still remaining area after the bit map writable character
storage area and the BASIC file storage area are allocated, it is used for the form storage
area. If there is still remaining area, then it is used for the graphic storage area. There
is no PC save area. However, the form storage area and the graphic storage area are
omitted, the current area is retained.
(4) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for each of the bit map writable character storage area, the
BASIC file storage area, the form storage area and the graphic storage area, the
maximum allocable capacity is used for the PC area. However, the form storage area
and the graphic storage area are omitted, the current area is retained.
(5) When the maximum allocable capacity is specified for the bit map writable character
storage area, the entire storage area is occupied by that area. However, the form
storage area and the graphic storage area are omitted, the current area is retained.
(6) Any numeric value specified in aa (Reserved) is ignored. However, 2-digit values are
possible.

Refer to • Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)

• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• 2-byte Writable Character Code Range Command ([ESC] XE)
Example The respective area is set to as follows:
Bit map writable character storage area: 512 KB
BASIC file storage area: 0 KB
Form storage area: 192 KB
Graphic storage area: 64 KB
(PC save area: 896 KB − 512 KB − 0 KB – 192 KB – 64 KB = 128 KB)
Format = [ESC] XF; 00, 08, 00, 03, 01 [LF] [NUL]
When “14 (896 KB)” is specified for any of the formats, the entire storage area is
occupied by that area.
For example, if “14” is specified for the bit map writable character storage area, the
entire storage area is used only for the bit map writable character storage area. Any
area other than the bit map writable character storage area cannot be allocated.

5-169
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO FORMAT

5.9.1 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1

Function Formats (initializes) the flash ROM on the CPU board for storage.

Format [ESC] J1; a (, b) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Formatting (initializing) range

A: PC save area of the flash memory + writable character area
B: PC save area of the flash memory
C: Writable character storage area of the flash memory
b: Reserved area (Omissible)
0 to 2

Explanation
(1) The storage area of flash memory can be roughly divided into the PC save area and the
writable character storage area. They can be formatted (initialized) either separately or
at the same time.
(2) When using a new flash memory, the area to be used must be formatted (initialized)
before the PC interface commands or writable characters are stored.
(3) After the flash memory is formatted, the remaining memory capacity is displayed on the
LCD.
(4) When the already stored data (PC interface commands, writable characters, logos) is
stored again, the memory is consumed every time data is stored, unless the Flash
Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1) is transmitted.
(5) When a label issue operation is performed after the Flash Memory Format Command is
sent, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
(6) When further storing operation is not continued for about 10 seconds after storing the
writable characters, logos and PC interface commands, the printer automatically enters
the online mode (label issue operation). In this case, the image buffer is automatically
cleared.
(7) Reserved area (Omissible)
The reserved parameters are not checked.

Notes
(1) The writable character storage area is shared between the TPCL mode and the LABEL
mode. Therefore, if flash memory is initialized, writable characters stored in the LABEL
mode are also erased.
Refer to • Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
Example [ESC] J1; A, 0 [LF] [NUL]

5-170
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO WRITABLE CHARACTERS

5.10.1 2-BYTE WRITABLE CHARACTER CODE RANGE COMMAND [ESC] XE

Function Sets the code range when a 2-byte writable character code is stored in the flash ROM
on the CPU board.

Format [ESC] XE (xx); a1a1a1a1, b1b1b1b1, a2a2a2a2, b2b2b2b2 -----, anananan, bnbnbnbn [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: First character code for each range

2020 to FFFF (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)
bbbb: No. of characters for each range
0001 to 4000 (Indicates the hex. data in ASCII code.)
xx: Character type (Omissible)
51
52 to 55 (Reserved)

Explanation
(1) For a 2-byte character code such as Kanji, the character code range may be divided into
two or more. As the control information area for the unnecessary codes can be deleted
by designating the character code range, the capacity of flash memory can be used
efficiently.
(2) The total number of characters for each range must not exceed 0 x 4,000 (16,384
characters).
(3) Up to 2700 ranges can be designated.
(4) It is not possible to store the character codes which are not conforming to the setting for
this command.
(5) The first character code for each area should be sent in the ascending order. The areas
must not overlap. If these conditions are not satisfied, the operation is not guaranteed.
(6) When any character type of 52 to 55 is specified, it is invalid. However, an error does
not occur, instead a blank is printed.

Refer to • Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)

• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)

5-171
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Example Shift JIS 8140H to 83DFH: Character data is present.

Character data is not present.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
8140
:
81F0
:
8240
:
82F0
:
8340
:
83D0

[ESC] XE; 8140, 00BD, 8240, 00B7, 8340, 00BD [LF] [NUL]

5-172
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.10.2 BIT MAP WRITABLE CHARACTER COMMAND [ESC] XD

Function Stores writable characters and logos in the flash ROM on the CPU board.

Format [ESC] XD; (Sj, ) aa, b, ccc, ddd, eee, fff, ggg, h, iii ----- iii [LF] [NUL]

Term Sj: Reserved area (Omissible)

j: 0 to 2
aa: Writable character set
01 to 40
41 16 × 16 (dots)
42 24 × 24 (dots)
43 32 x 32 (dots)
51 2-byte code character
52 to 55 Reserved
b(b): Writable character code
20H to FFH (Set in hex.)
40H to 7EH, 80H to FCH (When the writable character set is 41 to 43)
2020H to FFFFH (When the writable character set is 51)
ccc: Left offset
000 to 719 (in units of dots)
ddd: Top offset
000 to 719 (in units of dots)
eee: Character width
001 to 720 (in units of dots)
fff: Character height
001 to 720 (in units of dots)
ggg: Character-to-character spacing/proportional spacing
000 to 999 (in units of dots)
h: Type of writable character data
0: Nibble mode (4 bits/byte)
1: Hex. mode (8 bits/byte)
iii ----- iii: Writable character data to be stored
* When the writable character type is 41 to 43, left offset, top offset, character width,
character height, and character-to-character spacing/proportional spacing are fixed at
“000.” Any settings are ignored.

5-173
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) Type of writable character
Up to 43 types of writable character sets can be stored. However, the maximum number
of characters varies depending on the writable character size and number of characters
because of the limited memory capacity.
For writable character types 41 to 43, each writable character size is fixed.
If any type of writable character sets out of the range is specified, an error occurs.
When aa is set to 44, an error does not occur. However, writable characters are not
stored.
When any writable character type of 52 to 55 is specified, it is invalid. However, an error
does not occur, instead a blank is printed.
(2) Character code
Up to 224 characters can be stored per character set. The maximum number of
characters are 40 types × 224 characters = 8960 characters. It varies depending on the
writable character size and the number of characters because of the limited memory
capacity.
For character sets from 41 to 43, a character code consisting of 1 byte is stored.
However, when the character code is read, F0H is added to the upper digit is added to
the upper digit, and consists of 2 bytes. In this case, up to 188 characters can be stored
per character set.
(3) Reserved area
When Sj is set to any value other than 0 to 2, an error occurs.
(4) Each parameter

Top
offset

Char.
height

Base line

Reference Reference point

point of next char.

Left
offset Char. width

Character-to-character spacing/
proportional spacing

5-174
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(5) Writable character types: 01 to 40

Char. width 26 dots

Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 3FH 5 3CH 6 30H 7 30H 8 30H
9 3FH 10 3CH 11 37H •
•
•
•
Char. •
height •
31 dots
• 240 30H
241 3FH 242 3FH 243 3FH 244 3CH 245 30H 246 30H 247 30H 248 30H

Hex. mode
1 00H 2 0FH 3 C0H 4 00H
5 FCH 6 7FH
•
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 •
•
8 8 8 8 •
•
•
•
• 120 00H
121 FFH 122 FCH 123 00H 124 00H

[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 248). (Upper digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as data
0.
(4) The data count of writable characters to be stored must be as follows:
Data count of writable characters to be stored =
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots × 2
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in the
following order (1 → 124).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit of character width is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as data
0.
(4) The number of bytes of the writable character to be stored must be as follows:
The number of bytes of the writable character to be stored =
{(No. of char. width dots + 7)/8} × No. of char. height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

5-175
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) Writable character type: 41 (16 dots ×16 dots)

Character width 16 dots Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 30H
5 30H 6 31H 7 38H
•
Character
•
height
16 dots •
58 31H 59 38H 60 30H
61 30H 62 30H 63 30H 64 30H

4 4 4 4 Hex. mode
8 8 1 00H 2 00H 3 01H 4 80H
5 01H 6 80H 7 01H
•
•
•
26 80H 27 01H 28 80H
29 01H 30 80H 31 00H 32 00H
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 64). (Upper digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 64 bytes.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 32).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 32 bytes.
* When writable character type 41 is designated, the width and height of the character
are both 16 dots.

5-176
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(7) Writable character type: 42 (24 dots ×24 dots)

Character width 24 dots

Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 30H 5 30H 6 30H
7 30H 8 30H 9 33H
•
Character •
height •
24 dots •
• 137 30H 138 30H
139 30H 140 30H 141 30H 142 30H 143 30H 144 30H

Hex. mode
1 00H 2 00H 3 00H
4 4 4 4 4 4
4 00H 5 3CH 6 00H
•
8 8 8
•
•
•
67 00H 68 3CH 69 00H
70 00H 71 00H 72 00H
[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 144). (Upper digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 144 bytes.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 72).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 72 bytes.
* When writable character type 42 is designated, the width and height of the character
are both 24 dots.

5-177
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(8) Writable character type: 43 (32 dots ×32 dots)

Character width 32 dots

Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 30H 4 30H 5 30H 6 30H 7 30H
8 30H 9 30H 10 30H 11 30H 12 37H
•
•
•
•
Character • 248 30H 249 30H
height
250 30H 251 30H 252 30H 253 30H 254 30H 255 30H 256 30H
32 dots

Hex. mode
1 00H 2 00H 3 C0H 4 00H
5 00H 6 07H 7 C0H
•
•
•
4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 •
8 8 8 8 123 C0H 124 00H
125 00H 126 00H 127 00H 128 00H

[Nibble mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into four dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 256). (Upper digit: “3”)
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 256 bytes.

[Hex. mode]
(1) The writable character data to be stored is separated into eight dot units and sent in
above-mentioned order (1 → 128).
(2) The data of writable characters to be stored is 00H to FFH.
(3) The data count of writable characters to be stored should be 128 bytes.
* When writable character type 43 is designated, the width and height of the character
are both 32 dots.

5-178
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) No matter what character type or character code is selected, no memory will be wasted.
(2) When a new writable character is stored, the Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
must be transmitted.
(3) A character code already stored can be stored in the flash memory again by sending the
Bit Map Writable Character Store Command ([ESC] XD, but memory will be consumed
each time the code is stored. The memory can be efficiently used if the Flash Memory
Format Command ([ESC] J1) is sent in advance.
(4) Different character width and character height can be designated for the same writable
character type, according to the writable character codes. In other words, character size
can be changed by each character, thus memory can be saved.
(5) Proportional spacing and descending characters are possible depending on the
parameters of character-to-character spacing/proportional spacing, left offset, and top
offset.
(6) When top offset is 000, the reference coordinate is positioned at the upper left when
drawing because the base line is at the top. (Coordinate setting is facilitated for logos.)
(7) When the flash memory is used, and a label issue operation is performed after the Bit
Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) is sent, the image buffer is cleared
automatically.
(8) When further storing operation is not continued for about 10 seconds after storing the
writable characters and logos, the printer automatically enters the online mode (label
issue operation). In this case, when the flash memory is used, the image buffer is
automatically cleared.

Refer to • Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)

5-179
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples Writable character type: 03

Writable character code: 70H

Top
offset
22 dots

Char.
height
31 dots
Base line

Reference Reference
point point of next
char.

Left offset
Char. width 26 dots
2 dots
Character-to-character spacing/proportional
spacing: 30 dots

[ESC] J1; C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XD; 03, p, 002, 022, 026, 031, 030, 0, 000?<000?<7??800?<???<00?=?03>001?
<00?001?8007001?0007801>0003801>0003<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01<0001<01>
0001<01>0003<01>0003801?0007801?800?001?<01?001=?07>001<???<001<7??8001<0?<
0001<0000001<0000001<0000001<000000???<0000???<0000???<0000 [LF] [NUL]

* 30H = “0” 38H = “8”

31H = “1” 39H = “9”
32H = “2” 3AH = “:”
33H = “3” 3BH = “;”
34H = “4” 3CH = “<”
35H = “5” 3DH = “=”
36H = “6” 3EH = “>”
37H = “7” 3FH = “?”

5-180
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO GRAPHICS

5.11.1 GRAPHIC COMMAND [ESC] SG

Function Draws graphic data.

Format [ESC] SG; aaaa(D), bbbb(D), cccc, dddd, e, ggg --- ggg [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa(D): X-coordinate of the print origin for drawing graphic data
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
* If “D” is attached after a 4-digit value, the coordinate is specified in units of
dots.
0000D or greater
bbbb(D): Y-coordinate of the print origin for drawing graphic data
4 or 5 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
* If “D” is attached after a 4- or 5-digit value, the coordinate is specified in
dots.
0000D or greater
cccc: No. of graphic width dots
Fixed at 4 digits (in units of dots)
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected,
this designation is ignored.
(The information of the graphic width is contained in the graphic data.)
dddd: No. of graphic height dots
4 or 5 digits (in units of dots)
However, when the graphic data “2: BMP file” or “6: PCX file” is selected,
this designation is ignored.
(The information of the graphic width is contained in the graphic data.)
When “3: TOPIX compression mode” is selected for the type of graphic data:
Resolution of graphic data: *only two types
0150: 150 DPI (Draws data in double resolution.)
e: Type of graphic data
When the command starts with “[ESC] SG;”:
0: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing
1: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte) Overwrite drawing
2: BMP file mode Overwrite drawing
3: TOPIX compression mode Overwrite drawing
4: Nibble mode (4 dots/byte) OR drawing
5: Hex. mode (8 dots/byte) OR drawing
6: PCX file mode Overwrite drawing
7: TOPIX compression mode XOR drawing
ggg --- ggg: Graphic data

5-181
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation
(1) When the graphic data “0,” “1,” “2,” “3” or “6” is selected, the graphic data is drawn by
overwriting the image buffer.
(2) When the graphic data “4” or “5” is selected, the graphic data is drawn by carrying out OR
between the graphic data and the data in the image buffer.
(3) When the graphic data “7” is selected, the graphic data is drawn by carrying out
Exclusive-OR between the graphic data and the data in the image buffer.

Backing paper Backing paper

Label Label
Origin of
coordinates
(0, 0)
Print origin of
coordinates

Graphic
Effective Effective height dots
print length print length
Graphic
height dots
Print origin of
coordinates

Origin of
Graphic width Graphic width coordinates
dots dots (0, 0)

Effective Effective
print width print width
X Y
0
Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

Y X 0

[Print direction: Bottom first] [Print direction: Top first]

5-182
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Print origin of
coordinates Graphic width 19 dots
Nibble mode
1 30H 2 30H 3 33H 4 30H 5 30H 6 30H
7 30H 8 30H •
•
•
•
•
Graphic •
height •
22 dots • 126 30H
127 33H 128 3FH 129 30H 130 30H 131 30H 132 30H

Hex. mode
1 00H 2 30H 3 00H
4 00H 5 38H
•
•
•
•
4 4 4 4 4 4 •
63 00H
8 8 8 64 3FH 65 00H 66 00H

[Nibble mode]
(1) The graphic data is separated into four dot units and sent in above-mentioned order (1 →
132). (Upper digit: “3”)
(2) The graphic data is 30H to 3FH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as data
0.
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic height dots × 2
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.
[Hex. mode]
(1) The graphic data is separated into eight dot units and sent in above-mentioned order (1
→ 66).
(2) The graphic data is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit in the X direction is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as data
0.
(4) The graphic data count must be as follows:
Graphic data count = {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

5-183
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[TOPIX compression mode]

Range for length

First line Second line

Graphic data Length L1 L1

L2

L3

(1) Length: Total number of bytes of the graphic data (0001H ~ )

Ex. Length = 20 bytes: 00 14

(2) L1 parameter: Shows in which large block (512 dots/block) the changed data is contained.

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
L1
0: Not present
1: Present

512 dots 512 dots 512 dots

(3) L2 parameter: Shows in which medium block (64 dots/block) the changed data is contained
(of the L1 large block).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
L2
0: Not present
1: Present

64 dots 64 dots 64 dots

(4) L3 parameter: Shows in which small block (8 dots/block) the changed data is contained (of
the L2 medium block).

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0
L3
0: Not present
1: Present

8 dots 8 dots 8 dots

Exclusive-OR is carried out between the current image data and the
image data one line previous. Only the changed bit is set to ON (1).
The alignment of dots is MSB (left dots) and LSB (right dots).

* The graphic width for only the smaller value of either the designated value or the max. buffer
size (512 KB) is drawn.
The minimum unit of the data drawing is 8 dots (1 byte). If the graphic width is set to 3 dots, it
is reset to 8 dots (1 byte).

5-184
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) The print origin of coordinates must be set so that the result of drawing the graphic data
will be within the effective print area set by the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D).
(2) The number of graphic width dots and the number of graphic height dots must also be set
so that the result of drawing the graphic data will be within the effective print area set by
the Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D) in the same manner as the above.
(3) Both width and height are 8 dots/mm in case of the 203 dpi-print head model.
(4) The actual result of drawing may deviate within ± 0.5 mm in case of the 203 dpi-print
head model, in the X direction with respect to the designated print origin of the X-
coordinate.
To draw the received graphic data at high speed, the data is directly developed in the
image buffer without applying correction to each bit with respect to the designated X-
coordinate. Consequently, an error of up to 4 bits occurs.

5-185
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples
10.0 mm

Origin
24.0 mm
(0, 0)
Graphic width 19 dots

Graphic
height
22 dots

[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0022, 0, 003000003800003<00003>000037000033800031
<00030<00030>00030600030>00030<00031<00033800?33003??0007??000???000??
>000??>0007?<0003?0000 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0001, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

* 30H = “0” 38H = “8”

31H = “1” 39H = “9”
32H = “2” 3AH = “:”
33H = “3” 3BH = “;”
34H = “4” 3CH = “<”
35H = “5” 3DH = “=”
36H = “6” 3EH = “>”
37H = “7” 3FH = “?”

5-186
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[TOPIX compression mode]

10.0 mm

Origin
24.0 mm
(0, 0)
Graphic width 19 dots

Graphic
height
22 dots

[ESC] SG; 0100, 0240, 0019, 0300, 3, 00 5C 80 80 40 30

Length L1 L2 L3 Data (1st line)
80 80 40 08 80 80 40 04 80 80 40 02 80 80 40 09
(2nd line) (3rd line) (4th line) (5th line)
80 80 60 04 80 80 80 60 02 40 80 80 40 01 80 80 20 20
(6th line) (7th line) (8th line) (9th line)
80 80 20 80 80 80 20 80 80 80 20 20 80 80 40 01
(10th line) (11th line) (12th line) (13th line)
80 80 60 02 40 80 80 A0 0F 80 80 80 C0 30 C3 80 80 80 40
(14th line) (15th line) (16th line) (17th line)
80 80 80 80 80 80 40 10 00 80 80 C0 80 20 80 80 C0 40 C0 [LF] [NUL]
(18th line) (19th line)(20th line) (21st line) (22nd line)

5-187
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.12 COMMANDS RELATED TO PC COMMAND SAVING

5.12.1 SAVE START COMMAND [ESC] XO

Function Declares the start of saving PC interface commands.

(Places the printer in the mode where PC interface commands are written in the flash
memory.)

Format [ESC] XO; aa, (Sb, ) c [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Identification number to be used for saving in flash memory or reading
01 to 99
Sb: Reserved area (Omissible)
b: 0 to 2

c: Status response at save time

0: No status response
1: Status response is returned

Notes
(1) After sending the Save Start Command ([ESC] XO), any command other than the
following will be saved into flash memory without being analyzed.
• Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
• Saved Data Read Command ([ESC] XQ)
• Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD)
• Reset Command ([ESC] WR)
• Status Request Command ([ESC] WS, [ESC] FM, [ESC] v)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)
• Mode Information Acquire Command ([ESC] WX)
• Version Information Acquire Command ([ESC] WV)
• Bluetooth Device Address Acquire Command ([ESC] IT)
• Strip Sensor Adjust Command ([ESC] AH)
• Printer ID Set Command ([ESC] ID)
• Mode Select Command ([ESC] M)
(2) No error check is made for the commands when saving them.
(3) Up to 64 KB can be saved per a save.
(4) The status response when saving the commands is not returned when they end normally
but only when an error occurs.
Refer to • Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
• Flash Memory Format Command ([ESC] J1)

5-188
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples [ESC] J1; B [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] XO; 01, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0508, 0760, 0468 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T20C30 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0200, 0125, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC002; 0650, 0550, 2, 2, G, 33, B, +0000000001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]

5-189
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.12.2 SAVE TERMINATE COMMAND [ESC] XP

Function Declares the termination of saving PC interface commands.

Format [ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]

Note
(1) When further storing operation is not continued for about 10 seconds after storing the PC
interface commands, the printer enters the online mode (label issue operation). In this
case, the image buffer is automatically cleared.
Refer to • Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)

5-190
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.12.3 SAVED DATA READ COMMAND [ESC] XQ

Function Reads PC interface commands saved in flash memory.

Format [ESC] XQ; aa, (Sb,) c, d [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Identification number of the file to be read from flash memory
01 to 99
Sb: Reserved area (Omissible)
b: 0 to 2

c: Status response when the data is read

0: No status response
1: Status response is returned

d: Automatic read at power on time

L: Automatic read
M: No automatic read

* Reserved in the case of the compatible mode for the B-SP series (Fixed at M: No automatic
read)

Notes
(1) If the relevant save identification number is not found, an error occurs. However, if no
save identification number is found at power on time when the automatic read has been
specified, the setting of the automatic read changes to ‘No automatic read,’ causing no
error.
(2) If a command error is found in the PC interface command that was read by the Saved
Data Read Command or the automatic read at power on time, a command error occurs.
(3) After an error has occurred, the power must be turned off. When the power is turned on
again, the setting of the automatic read at power on time changes to ‘No automatic read.’
(4) The printer enters the online mode (label issue operation) when the Save Data Read
Command is sent after the Save Terminate Command.
(5) If any value out of the range is specified, a command error occurs.
(6) With the wireless LAN-equipped model or Bluetooth-equipped model, although the setting
of the automatic read at power on time is set to 'Automatic read," wireless LAN
parameters or BD addresses (by holding down the POWER key at power on) are printed,
the automatic read is not performed (V1.0D or later).

Refer to • Save Start Command ([ESC] XO)

• Save Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)
Examples [ESC] XQ; 01, 0, L [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 100 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]

5-191
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.13 COMMANDS RELATED TO CHECK

5.13.1 HEAD BROKEN DOTS CHECK COMMAND [ESC] HD

Function Checks the thermal head for broken dots.

Format [ESC] HD001 (, a) [LF] [NUL] --- All thermal elements are checked.

Term a: Check result status response (Omissible)

A: Status is returned
(If omitted, the check result status is not returned.)

Explanation
(1) The Head Broken Dots Check Command is subject to batch processing. If the Label
Issue Command to issue 100 labels is transmitted before the Head Broken Dots Check
Command, the head broken dots check will be executed after 100 labels have been
issued.
(2) In case of the all thermal elements check, all thermal elements of the thermal head will be
checked.
However, for the B-EP4DL-GHxx, although an error is detected outside the effective print
width area, a head broken elements error is not indicated because the head width is
larger than the effective print width.
(3) When the check result is found to be normal under the condition that the check result
status is not returned, the next command is processed. If the check result is found to be
abnormal, an error occurs. Whether or not the status is returned when an error occurs
depends on the Issue Command setting.
When the check result is found to be normal under condition that the check result status
is returned, a status indicating the normal end of the head broken elements check is sent.
After that, the next command is processed. If the check result is found to be abnormal, a
status indicating the head broken elements error is sent, and then the printer stops.
Status for normal end for other than TEC protocols,
[SOH] [STX] “0020000” [EXT] [EOT] [CR] [LF]
Status for normal end for TEC protocols,
[ACK]
Status for head broken elements error
[SOH] [STX] “1720000” [EXT] [EOT] [CR] [LF]
(4) The following shows the time to check all thermal elements:
B-EP2DL-GHxx Approx. 2 seconds
B-EP4DL-GHxx Approx. 5 seconds

Examples [ESC] C [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC002; 001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0002C3000 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] HD001 [LF] [NUL]

5-192
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.13.2 MESSAGE DISPLAY COMMAND [ESC] XJ

Function Displays the message on the LCD.

Format [ESC] XJ; aaa ------ aaa [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa ------ aaa: Display data (16 digits)

Explanation
(1) When the printer receives the Message Display Command, first it processes the already
received data (or completes the label issue if the Issue Command has been sent).
Then, it displays the message on the LCD, and finally it enters a pause state.
(2) When the [PAUSE] key is pressed, the pause state is cleared and the LCD displays the
normal message. After the pause state is cleared, the printer resumes processing the
data received after the Message Display Command.
Notes
(1) The number of characters to be displayed is 16. When the display data is less than 16
characters, the blanks are filled with spaces. When the display data exceeds 16
characters, the excess data will be discarded.
(2) During a pause state, a halt due to an error, or a cover open state, the Message Display
Command is not processed even if it is received. In this case, the command is
processed after the above state is cleared.
(3) The following characters can be displayed on the LCD.
If any character other than the mentioned below is received, “?” is displayed or a
command error occurs.
2 3 4 5 6 7 A B C D
0 SP 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 ” 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ’ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n →
F / ? O _ o ←
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.

5-193
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples c Load the paper.

d One piece of paper is fed.
e 4 pieces are issued.

41.0
mm
Sample 76.2
73.2 mm
mm

15.0 mm

82.0 mm

f Message, “Please set [Tag]”, is displayed.

g Change the paper.
h Press the [RESTART] key.
i One piece of paper is fed.
j 2 pieces are issued.

10.0
mm

60.0
57.0 mm
mm

20.0 mm

50.0 mm

[ESC] D0762, 0820, 0732 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] T11C40 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC001; 0150, 0410, 1, 1, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RC001; Sample [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0004, 0011C4001 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XJ; Please set [Tag] [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] D0600, 0500, 0570 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] T11C40 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] C [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB01; 0200, 0100, 3, 1, 03, 03, 08, 08, 03, 0, 0150 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] RB01; 12345 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XS; I, 0002, 0011C4001 [LF] [NUL]

5-194
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.14 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL

5.14.1 RESET COMMAND [ESC] WR

Function Returns the printer to its initial state.

Format [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

Explanation
(1) The printer is returned to the same state as when the power is turned on.
(2) When the printer receives this command during printing, it is initialized after issuing the
label which is being printed.
(3) After the Initialize Command is sent (or after printing is completed, if printing is
performed), the next command must not be sent within approximately 30 seconds on the
wireless LAN model or within approximately 5 seconds on other models, because the
printer is initialized. In IrDA: TEC Protocol, if ACK/status transmission is specified by the
Issue Command, the printer returns an ACK, which indicates the command process end,
to the EOT after the printer is initialized. In RS-232C, when the status response is
specified, the printer returns the status (34H 30H). After this status is received, the next
command may be sent. In IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, Bluetooth or Wireless
LAN, the printer does not return the status.
(4) When this command is sent through the IrDA interface, only this command should be
sent. After the command is sent, the link should be terminated. Even if the host does
not terminate the link, the printer performs the termination process. Therefore, after
initialization is completed, the host should establish the link again.
(5) When receiving this command during data transmission, the printer is initialized after
completing the transmission.

Notes
(1) If a command error or communication error occurs when receiving the Reset Command,
an error message is displayed in the online mode. However, it is not displayed in the
SYSTEM mode.
(2) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or the Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Reset Command is not processed until the printer
receives the data specifying the type of data.

Example [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

5-195
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.14.2 BATCH RESET COMMAND [ESC] Z0 (zero)

Function Resets the printer.

Format [ESC] Z0 [LF] [NUL]

Explanation
(1) This command will not be executed until the printer enters an idle state.

5-196
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.15 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS

5.15.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WS, [ESC] FM, [ESC] v

Function Sends the printer status to the host computer.

Format [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] FM [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] v

Explanation

(1) This command makes the printer send its status regardless of the setting of the status
response parameter. The status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and
indicates the latest status only. The remaining count indicates the remaining print count
of the batch currently being printed only. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be
printed is transmitted.
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]

STX Printer ID Status Remaining No. of labels CRC

02H xxH xxH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH xxH xxH

Remaining No. of labels

• 0000 to 9999

Status type
“1” (31H): Status Request Command
“2” (32H): Automatic status transmission

Printer status

5-197
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

SOH STX Status Remaining No. of labels ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Remaining No. of labels (“0000” to “9999”)

Status type
“1” (31H): Status Request Command
“2” (32H): Automatic status transmission
Detailed status is indicated in 2-byte data.
“00”: Normal state
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating
“04”: Pause state
“05”: Wait for strip
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken head dots error
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature
“19”: Ambient temperature error
“32”: Abnormal battery temperature
“33”: Battery excessive temperature
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
(“40”: Normal issue end) Response status for automatic status
transmission
(“41”: Normal feed end) Response status for automatic status
transmission
“45”: Wait for battery recovery
“46”: Wait for head temperature reduction
“47”: Wait for motor temperature reduction
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state
“55”: Writable character/PC command save mode

5-198
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Detailed status in the compatible mode for the B-SP series

“00”: Normal state
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating
(including wait for strip, pause state, wait for battery
recovery, wait for head temperature reduction, wait for
motor temperature reduction, writable character/PC
command save mode)
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken head dots error
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature
(including ambient temperature error, abnormal battery
temperature, battery excessive temperature)
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
(“40”: Normal issue end) Response status for automatic status
transmission
(“41”: Normal feed end) Response status for automatic status
transmission
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state

Notes

(1) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.
(2) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not processed until
the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.
(3) After receiving the Status Request Command, there may be a maximum of 20-msec.
delay until the printer sends a status.
(4) At least, a 20-msec. interval must be given between the transmissions of the Status
Request Command. If the next Status Request Command is transmitted within 20
msec., the printer may fail to receive it.
(5) The status "09” is valid only when the compatible mode for the B-SP series is enabled in
the SYSTEM mode. In a mode other than the compatible mode, it indicates the label
end.
Example [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

5-199
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.15.2 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WB

Function Sends information on the printer status and the free space of the receive buffer to the
host.

Format [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

Explanation

(1) This command makes the printer send information on its status and free space of the
receive buffer, regardless of the setting of the Status Response parameter.
(2) The status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and indicates the latest status
only. The remaining count indicates the remaining print count of the batch currently
being printed only. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted.
(3) Free space of the receive buffer for the interface which sent this command, is returned to
the host.
[IrDA: TEC Protocol] Data to be transmitted (fixed at 22 bytes)

STX Printer ID Status Remaining No. of labels Length

02H 3xH 3xH 33H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 32H 32H

Receiving buffer space Entire receiving buffer space CRC

3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 30H 30H 35H 31H 32H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDAIr: OBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Data to be transmitted (fixed at 23 bytes)

SOH STX Printer status Status type Remaining No. of labels Length
01H 02H 3xH 3xH 33H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 32H 33H

Receiving buffer space Entire receiving buffer space CR LF

3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 30H 30H 35H 31H 32H 0DH 0AH

5-200
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Printer status ......... Printer status is indicated in 2-byte data.

“00”: Normal state
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating
“04”: Pause state
“05”: Wait for strip
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken head dots error
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature
“19”: Ambient temperature error
“32”: Abnormal battery temperature
“33”: Battery excessive temperature
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
“45”: Wait for battery recovery
“46”: Wait for head temperature reduction
“47”: Wait for motor temperature reduction
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state
“55”: Writable character/PC command save mode

Remaining No. of labels: Indicates the remaining number of labels in four bytes.
“0000” to “9999”
Length: Indicates the number of bytes of the entire status data
IrDA: TEC Protocol: Fixed at "22."
IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232,
Bluetooth or wireless LAN: Fixed at "23."
Receive buffer free space: Indicates the free space of the receive buffer.
Entire receive buffer free space:
Indicates the entire free space of the receive buffer.
Fixed at "00512."
CRC/CR, LF: Indicates the end of the status block.

5-201
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes
(1) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.
(2) The printer returns the same status, regardless of whether or not the compatible mode for
the B-SP series is set.
(3) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not processed until
the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.
(4) After receiving the Status Request Command, there may be a maximum of 20-msec.
delay until the printer sends a status.
(5) At least, a 20-msec. interval must be given between the transmissions of the Status
Request Command. If the next Status Request Command is transmitted within 20
msec., the printer may fail to receive it.

Example [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

5-202
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.15.3 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX

Function Sends the printer mode information to the host.

Format [ESC] WX [LF] [NUL]

Explanation

(1) The status when the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on differs from the status
when the compatible mode is off.
(2) The mode information format to be sent to the host, is as follows:

• When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is off.

TPCL mode (Mode = A)
Batch issue mode
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
STX Mode information (16 bytes) CRC CRC
T P C L SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

SOH STX Mode information (16 bytes) ETX EOT CR LF
T P C L SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
01H 02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Strip issue mode

[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
STX Mode information (16 bytes) CRC CRC
T P C L SP ( S ) SP SP SP SP SP
02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 20H 28H 53H 29H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

SOH STX Mode information (16 bytes) ETX EOT CR LF
T P C L SP ( S ) SP SP SP SP SP
01H 02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 20H 28H 53H 29H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

5-203
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

TPCL1 mode (Mode = B)

Batch issue mode
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
STX Mode information (16 bytes) CRC CRC
T P C L 1 SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 2DH 4CH 45H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

SOH STX Mode information (16 bytes) ETX EOT CR LF
T P C L 1 SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
01H 02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 31H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Strip issue mode

[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
STX Mode information (16 bytes) CRC CRC
T P C L 1 ( S ) SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 31H 28H 53H 29H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

SOH STX Mode information (16 bytes) ETX EOT CR LF
T P C L 1 ( S ) SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
01H 02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 31H 28H 53H 29H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

The above is an example where the message is received in the TPCL and TPCL-LE modes as well as
when the compatible mode for the B-SP series is off. In addition, the following messages are returned.

TPCL mode TPCL

TPCL1 mode TPCL1
LABEL mode LABEL
RECEIPT mode RECEIPT
RECEIPT1 mode RECEIPT1
ESC/POS mode ESC/POS
Online reset menu USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for users
USER„SYSTEM
PAUSE + POWER keys
When the password setting is on
USER„SYSTEM
and before it is entered
SYSTEM mode for administrators When the password setting is on
FEED + POWER keys SYSTEM
and after it is entered
When the password setting is off SYSTEM
TPCL (strip issue mode) TPCL„(S)
TPCL1 (strip issue mode) TPCL1 (S)
LABEL (strip issue mode) LABEL (S)

* „ indicates a space.

5-204
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

• When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on.

TPCL mode (Mode = A)
Batch issue mode
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
STX Mode information (16 bytes) CRC CRC
T P C L - L E SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 2DH 4CH 45H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

SOH STX Mode information (16 bytes) ETX EOT CR LF
T P C L - L E SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
01H 02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 2DH 4CH 45H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

TPCL mode (Mode = B)

[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
STX Mode information (16 bytes) CRC CRC
T P C L - L E 1 SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 2DH 4CH 45H 31H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

SOH STX Mode information (16 bytes) ETX EOT CR LF
T P C L - L E 1 SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
01H 02H 54H 50H 43H 4CH 2DH 4CH 45H 31H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

The above is an example where the message is received in the TPCL and TPCL-LE modes as well as
when the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on. In addition, the following messages are returned.

TPCL mode TPCL-LE

TPCL1 mode TPCL-LE1
LABEL mode LABEL
RECEIPT mode RECEIPT
RECEIPT1 mode RECEIPT1
ESC/POS mode ESC/POS
Online reset menu USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for users
USER„SYSTEM
PAUSE + POWER keys
When the password setting is on
USER„SYSTEM
and before it is entered
SYSTEM mode for administrators When the password setting is on
FEED + POWER keys SYSTEM
and after it is entered
When the password setting is off SYSTEM

* „ indicates a space.

Example [ESC] WX [LF] [NUL]

5-205
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.15.4 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WV

Function Sends information such as the program version of the printer.

Format [ESC] WV [LF] [NUL]

Explanation
(1) The format of the program version data to be returned to the host is as follows.
[IrDA: TEC Protocol] (24-byte data in total)
STX 02H
“0” 30H
“4” 34H
“A” 41H
“P” 50H
Creation date “R” 52H Creation date of the program:
“2” 32H 9-byte data indicated in order of Day-
“0” 30H Month-Year
“0” 30H
“8” 38H
“B” 42H
“-” 2DH
“E” 45H
Model “P” 50H Model:
“2” 32H 7-byte ASCII code indicating the model
“D” 44H B-EP2DG (2-inch/203-dpi model)
“G” 47H B-EP4DG (4-inch/203-dpi model)
“V” 56H
“1” 31H
Version “.” 2EH Program version:
“0” 30H 5-byte data: Vx.xx
“A” 41H Revision

CRC xxH Version

CRC xxH

5-206
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

(24-byte data in total)
SOH 01H
STX 02H
“0” 30H
“4” 34H
“A” 41H
“P” 50H
Creation date “R” 52H Creation date of program:
“2” 32H 9 bytes of data indicated in order of Day-
“0” 30H Month-Year
“0” 30H
“8” 38H
“B” 42H
“-” 2DH
“E” 45H
Model “P” 50H Model:
“2” 32H 7-byte ASCII code indicating the model
“D” 44H B-EP2DG (2-inch/203-dpi model)
“G” 47H B-EP4DG (4-inch/203-dpi model)
“V” 56H
“1” 31H
Version “.” 2EH Program version:
“0” 30H 5 bytes of data: Vx.xx
“A” 41H Revision

ETX 03H Version

EOT 04H
CR 0DH
LF 0AH

Notes

(1) This command is processed in order of receipt. This command is not processed until the
processing of the commands sent prior to this command is completed. Therefore, if this
command is sent while the printer is in the state other than idle, the program version data
may not be returned immediately.
(2) The USB does not return a status.

5-207
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.16 COMMANDS RELATED TO BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LAN

5.16.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT

Function Reads the device address of the Bluetooth or MAC address of the wireless LAN.

Format [ESC] IT [LF] [NUL]

Explanation
(1) This command reads the device address of the Bluetooth or MAC address of the wireless
LAN. When using the IrDA: TEC Protocol, the following information field is placed in the
information frame and sent in packets.
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Bluetooth device address CRC

02H 12 bytes xxH xxH

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C,
Bluetooth, or wireless LAN is used]

SOH STX Bluetooth device address ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 12 bytes 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

The printer sends the following information:

Bluetooth device address: 0015b5aa0005
Wireless LAN MAC address: 000940387630

Bluetooth device address:

[30H] [30H] [31H] [35H] [62H] [35H] [61H] [61H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [35H]
0 0 1 5 b 5 a a 0 0 0 5
Wireless LAN MAC address:
[30H] [30H] [30H] [39H] [34H] [30H] [33H] [38H] [37H] [36H] [33H] [30H]
0 0 0 9 4 0 3 8 7 6 3 0

Example [ESC] IT [LF] [NUL]

5-208
 CHAPTER 5 TPCL-LE MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

5.16.2 BLUETOOTH RELATED PARAMETER ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WT

Function Acquires the parameters related to the Bluetooth.

Format [ESC] WT [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command reads the parameters related to the Bluetooth. When using the
IrDA: TEC Protocol, the following information field is placed in the information
frame and sent in packets to the host.
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]
STX Sec Inq Interval Window
02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Inquiry/page window
0018 to 4096

Inquiry/page interval
0018 to 4096

Inquiry timer
0 (30H): Inquiry is not possible.
1 (31H): Inquiry is possible only within 60 seconds after a printer power on
2 (32H): Inquiry is possible at anytime.

Security setting
1 (31H): No security
2 (32H): No security
3 (33H): Link level security is effective

Bluetooth device name CRC

32 bytes xxH xxH
Bluetooth device name: Fixed at 32 bytes

When the Bluetooth device name is “TOSHIBATEC BT,”

[54H] [4FH] [53H] [48H] [49H] [42H] [41H] [20H] [54H] [45H] [43H] [20H] [42H] [54H] [00H] [00H]
T O S H I B A ‘‘ T E C ‘‘ B T
[00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H]
* When the Bluetooth device name is less than 32 bytes, the remaining bytes are filled with 00H.
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, or
wireless LAN is used]
SOX STX Sec Inq Interval Window
01H 02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Bluetooth device name ETX EOT CR LF

32 bytes 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

5-209
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6. LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)

6.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes details regarding the interface commands for the LABEL mode of the issue
mode.

<<Up to V1.0C>>

There are three issue types, “Batch issue,” “Strip issue” and “Linerless issue.” When the back feed
amount fine adjustment is omitted in the Position Fine Adjust Command in batch issues, regardless of
the selected sensor type, printing is started at 5 mm of from the leading edge of the label. When the
back feed amount fine adjustment is set, printing is started at 3 mm from the leading edge of the label.
Although the back feed amount fine adjustment is set in strip issues, no back feed is performed.

<<V1.0E or later>>

There are three issue types, “Batch issue,” “Strip issue” and “Linerless issue.”

When the back feed amount fine adjustment is omitted in the Position Fine Adjust Command in batch
issues, regardless of the selected sensor type, printing is started at 5 mm of from the leading edge of
the label. When the back feed amount fine adjustment is set, printing is started at 3 mm from the
leading edge of the label.

In batch issue mode when the type of sensor is designated, whether or not to perform a back feed
under the following conditions:

Back feed restriction setting in the

SYSTEM mode or in the Setup
Command
ON OFF
Performs no back Performs a back
Label pitch of less than 20.0 mm
feed feed
Label pitch of 20.0 mm or more but less than 24.0 Performs no back Performs a back
mm and effective print length of less than 15.0 mm feed feed
Label pitch of 20.0 mm or more but less than 24.0 Performs a back Performs a back
mm and effective print length of 15.0 mm or more feed feed
Performs a back Performs a back
Label pitch of 24.0 mm or more
feed feed
Feeding by the FEED key or in the Feed Performs no back Performs no back
Command feed (*1) feed (*1)
*1 However, when the label pitch length is equal to the distance between the head and sensor (11.5
mm) or less, a back feed is performed.

In batch and linerless issue modes when the type of sensor is not designated, a back feed operation is
specified depending on the back feed restriction setting in the SYSTEM mode or in the Setup
Command.

When the back feed restriction setting is on and the label pitch or effective print length conforms to the
condition not to perform a back feed, a label located between the head and cutter at the first printing
subsequent to an issue (one or multiple labels) cannot be printed because no back feed is performed.
This waste can be prevented by switching the stop position in the SYSTEM mode from "CUT" to

6-1
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

"HEAD." However, it is necessary to press the FEED key and move a label to the cutting position to
take it out because the label is not stopped at the cutting position after printing has been completed.

In strip issue mode when the strip issue back feed setting is on and the strip position fine adjustment is
set to – (negative), a back feed is performed because the print start position is misaligned. However,
for labels whose label-to-label gap is 5 mm or more, no back feed is performed because the print start
position is not misaligned.

<<Common in all versions>>

The print position is misaligned when printing under any of the following conditions.

The assumption for the following conditions is that labels/tags of which pitch is shorter than the
distance between the print head and the sensor (approx. 11.5 mm) are used in batch issues.

(1) After labels/tags are issued with “Back feed amount fine adjustment” being set for the Position
Fine Adjust Command, another label/tag is issued without setting the back feed amount.
(2) After labels/tags are issued without setting the “Back feed amount find adjustment” for the
Position Fine Adjust Command, another label/tag is issued with Back feed amount fine
adjustment set.
(3) After issuing labels/tags in the TPCL mode, the mode is changed to the LABEL mode and the
label/tag is issued without setting the “Back feed amount fine adjustment” for the Position Fine
Adjust Command.

When any of the above conditions is met, the print position on the second label/tag is misaligned.
This is because when using the labels/tags of which pitch is shorter than the distance between the
print head and the sensor, the gap between the first and second labels/tags passes through the
sensor before printing the first label/tag, before switching to a different issue condition or the LABEL
mode. Therefore, the third and later labels/tags are printed at the proper position.

Either of the language types, Kanji, Chinese and Korean, can be implemented. Any font other than
the on-board fonts is selectable.

6-2
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.2 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS

6.2.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND

ESC Command & Data LF NUL

y The length from [ESC] to [LF] [NUL] must be as specified by each command.
y Only the following control code is used:
ESC (1BH), LF (0AH), NUL (00H)

6.2.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE

Function Describes the outline of the function of the command.

Format Shows the format of the command.

The format designation method should conform to the following rules:

z Each set of small letters (such as aa, bbbb) indicates a parameter item.
z An item enclosed in parentheses may be omitted.
z “---” indicates the repetition of an item.
z Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be transmitted
in practice.
z Other symbols must always be inserted at designated positions before being
transmitted.

Term Explains the term(s) used in the format.

* “0 to 999” described in the entry range indicates that up to 3-digit variable-length
entry is allowed. (Entry of “001” or “009” is also possible.) “000 to 999” indicates
that the entry must be fixed at 3 digits.
Explanation Explains the command in detail.

Note Supplementary explanation of the command.

Refer to Related commands

Examples Explains the command examples.

[ESC] FM [LF] [NUL]

The above corresponds to the transfer of the following:
1B 46 4D 0A 00
[ESC] F M [LF] [NUL]

6.2.3 PRECAUTIONS

The commands and parameters described in this specification must always be used. If any
command or parameter other than those covered in this specification is used, the printer’s
operation will not be guaranteed.

6-3
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.3 COMMANDS RELATED TO SETTING

6.3.1 LABEL SIZE SET COMMAND [ESC] D

Function Sets the size of a label or tag.

Format [ESC] Daaaa, bbbb, cccc [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Label/tag pitch

Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
0100 (10.0 mm) to 9999 (999.9 mm)
bbbb: Effective print width
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
0100 (10.0 mm) to 1057 (105.7 mm)
cccc: Effective print length
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
0070 (7.0 mm) to 9970 (997.0 mm)

The size depends on the type of the new portable printer.

B-EP2DL-GHxx B-EP4DL-GHxx
Label/tag pitch 10 × 999.9 mm 10 × 999.9 mm
Effective print width 48.0 mm 104.0 mm
Effective print length 997.0 mm 997.0 mm

6-4
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation (1) After the Form Store Start Command is sent, the Label Size Set Command must
be sent before each field command, the Print Density Fine Adjust Command, or the
Position Fine Adjust Command is sent.

(2) To print data in non-print area at 5 mm from the leading edge of the label, the print
start position can be changed by using the Position Fine Adjust Command.
However, it is necessary to enlarge the gap between the labels.
(3) The print origin of coordinates in the Y direction is at 6.5 mm from the center of the
gap (black mark). When the gap (black mark) is 3 mm, the print origin of
coordinates in the Y direction is at 5 mm from the leading edge of the label.
(Refer to the figure below.)
(4) In the compatible mode for the B-SP series, the effective print width is fixed at 48.0
mm.

Paper feed direction Paper feed direction

0 X 0 X

Y Y
Origin of Origin of
coordinates Effective print width coordinates Effective print width
(0, 0) (0, 0)

6.5 mm 5 mm 6.5 mm 5 mm

Effective Effective
print length Label print length Label
pitch pitch

Black mark
Backing paper (Printed on the
back of receipt)
Label

[Label] [Receipt with black marks]

Notes (1) The label pitch length is backed up in memory (retained even if the power is
turned off).

Example [ESC] D0430, 0480, 0330 [LF] [NUL]

48.0 mm 48.0 mm

5.0 mm 5.0 mm

33.0 mm 33.0 mm
43.0 mm 43.0 mm

2.0 mm 2 mm

6-5
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Programmable value range by the software

[mm]

B-EP2DL B-EP4DL
Model
203 dpi 203 dpi

Mode Batch Strip Batch Strip

Item
Thermal head dot density 8 dots/mm 8 dots/mm
Thermal head width 48.0 mm 104.0 mm
Max. 10.0 13.0 10.0 13.0
Label
Min. 999.9 67.0 999.9 67.0
Pitch
Max. 10.0 - 10.0 -
Tag
Min. 999.9 - 999.9 -
Max. 7.0 10.0 7.0 10.0
Label length
Min. 997.0 60.0 997.0 60.0
Backing Max. 16.0 50.0
paper Min. 58.0 115.0
Paper length
Max. 16.0 - 50.0 -
Tag
Min. 58.0 - 115.0 -
Max. 13.0 47.0
Label width
Min. 55.0 112.0
Max. 3.0 3.0
Label-to-label gap
Min. 7.0 7.0
Max. 3.0 3.0
Black mark length
Min. 7.0 7.0
Max. 10.0 10.0
Effective print width
Min. 48.0 104.0
Max. 7.0 10.0 7.0 10.0
Label
Effective print Min. 997.0 60.0 997.0 60.0
length Max. 7.0 - 7.0 -
Tag
Min. 997.0 - 997.0 -
Slow-up/down Slow up 1.0 1.0
interval Slow down 1.0 1.0
Label 100 µm to 120 µm
Paper thickness Tag 120 µm
Receipt 65 µm to 75 µm
Max. effective print length for on-
997.0 499.0
the-fly issuing

6-6
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.3.2 PRINTER ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID

Function Sets the ID for the printer.

Format [ESC] ID; aa(,b) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Printer ID (2-byte hex data)

0000H to FFFFH
b: Reserved area (Omissible)
Fixed at 0

Explanation (1) The printer ID is the information required to identify each printer when
communicating according to the IrDA: TEC Protocol.

(2) When setting the reserved area to other than 0, an error results.

Notes (1) The set printer ID is backed up in memory (even if the Initialize command ([ESC]
WR, [ESC] @) is executed or the power is turned off).
(2) The last 5 digits of the printer’s serial number have been set as the printer ID, at
the time of shipment from the factory.
(3) In IrDA: TEC Protocol, the printer checks the set ID against the ID in the received
command packet. If they do not match, the printer discards the command packet.
However, when the ID in the command packet is “0”, the printer accepts the
command packet without checking the set IDs.

Example To set “03H 51H” as the ID of the printer:

[ESC] ID; [03H] [51H] [LF] [NUL]
In this case, the printer ID in status printing is “00849.”

6-7
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.3.3 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M

Function Changes the print mode.

Format [ESC] M; a(,b) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Print mode designation

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Print mode (Bit 0 to Bit 6 * See Table 1.)

Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB
0: Not performed
1: Performed
* Table 1 Print mode
HEX Mode How to deal with the received data after an error is cleared
30H LABEL Discards
31H RECEIPT Discards
32H RECEIPT1 Continues printing
34H ESC/POS Continues printing
41H TPCL Continues printing
42H TPCL1 Continues printing

b: Print position detection feed (Omissible. If omitted, the print position detection
feed is not performed.)
0: When the mode change from RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS to LABEL,
TPCL or TPCL1 is requested, a print position detection feed is not performed
after the mode is changed.
1: When the mode change from RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS to LABEL,
TPCL or TPCL1 is requested, a print position detection feed is performed after
the mode is changed.

Explanation (1) There are 4 types of the print mode: “LABEL,” “RECEIPT,” “TPCL” and
“ESC/POS.”
(2) “Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB” is the function for the
specifications which do not allow the printer to spontaneously send the status
through IrDA; IrCOMM or USB. This function enables the printer to forcefully send
the status to the host, if the link between the printer and the host is established.
However, if the link between the printer and the host is not established upon the
status transmission, the printer cannot send the status. Therefore, the status is
discarded. (In the next connection to the host, the printer does not send the
status to the host.)
(3) The sensor is not used in the RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode. When
sensor detectable paper is used for receipts and labels, print position detection
feed cannot be done in the LABEL, TPCL or TPCL1 mode. By setting the print
position detection feed parameter to 1, print position detection feed is carried out
after the mode is changed to LABEL, TPCL or TPCL1.
(4) In the TPCL1 mode, it is possible to re-print the last print data by pressing the
FEED button.

6-8
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes (1) The print mode designation (the specified print mode and the automatic status
response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB) is backed up in memory (even if the power is
turned off).

(2) The factory default is “TPCL mode” and “Automatic status response in IrDA:
IrCOMM or USB is not performed.” (The IrDA protocol is “IrCOMM.”)
(3) When the print mode is changed, the type of sensor is automatically changed.
LABEL mode (0): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
TPCL mode (A): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
TPCL1 mode (B): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
RECEIPT mode (1): No sensor is designated.
RECEIPT1 mode (2): No sensor is designated.
ESC/POS mode (4): No sensor is designated.
(4) If the RECEIPT or ESC/POS mode is selected or no sensor is designated in the
LABEL or TPCL mode, an initial feed is not performed when the cover is closed
(when the print position detection feed after the cover is closed is enabled with key
operations or using the set command ([ESC] ZM03)).
(5) When the mode change is finished, the printer sends the normal end status or an
ACK to the host. However, when the mode is changed to the TPCL mode, the
printer does not send the status. In IrDA: IrCOMM or USB, only when bit 7 of the
print mode designation is set to “1,” the printer sends the status.
(6) The print mode can be changed by the printer itself. However, since the setting
for the automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB cannot be changed, the
setting remains as the same.
(7) The print position detection feed is performed according to the conditions, such as,
label pitch, fine adjustment, and sensor selection, which were set in the LABEL or
TPCL mode before the printer is operated in the RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or
ESC/POS mode. If no sensor is selected, the print position detection feed will not
be performed.
(8) After performing a print position detection feed, the printer does not send a process
end status. If an error occurs during the print position detection feed, the print
position detection feed is performed by clearing the error using the PAUSE key
(when the print position detection feed after the cover is closed is enabled with key
operations or using the set command ([ESC] ZM03)).
(9) When changing the print mode by the printer itself, the print position detection feed
parameter cannot be set.
(10) When the mode select command is designated with the print position detection
feed at the end of a print data issued in the RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode, and if
an error occurs while printing, the printing will restart after the error is cleared and
then, the print mode will be changed to the LABEL or TPCL mode and a print
position detection feed is performed. When the print position detection feed is
omitted, the mode is not changed to LABEL or TPCL. (The mode select
command is ignored.)

6-9
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(11) When the LABEL or TPCL mode is selected in the mode select command and the
print position detection feed parameter is set 0 (not performed), and if an error
occurs while the printer issues in the RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode, the print
mode is changed to the LABEL or TPCL mode after the error is cleared. (The
mode select command is executed.)
(12) Although this command is received while the command is being stored in a form,
the mode is not changed.

6-10
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.4 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT

6.4.1 PRINT START POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX

Function Adjusts the feed value so that the label will be shifted forward or backward from the
standard print start position.

Format [ESC] AX; abbb(, cddd, eff) [LF] [NUL]

[In compatible mode for the B-SP series]

[ESC] AX; abbb(, cddd, eff) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a fine adjustment is to

be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
bbb: Fine adjustment value for print position
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
c: Indicates the direction of the strip position, forward or backward.
+: Backward
-: Forward
ddd: Fine adjustment value for strip position (Omissible)
000 to 030 (in 0.1 mm units)
* Fine adjustment in - (forward) direction is made between 000 and 020.
eff: Reserved area (Omissible)
Omitted or +20 (Fixed)
* If omitted, print is started at 5 mm from the leading edge of the label.
* If set to +20, print is started at 3 mm from the leading edge of the label.

[In compatible mode for the B-SP series]

a: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a fine adjustment is to

be made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
bbb: Fine adjustment value for print position
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)

cddd: Indicates that back feed amount is finely adjusted backward. (Omissible)
+000 (Fixed)
eff: Indicates that back feed amount is finely adjusted forward. (Omissible)
+20 (Fixed)
* When the omissible parameters (,cddd and ,eff) are omitted, print is started at 5 mm
from the leading edge of the label.
When the omissible parameters (,cddd and ,eff) are set, print is started at 3 mm from
the leading edge of the label.

6-11
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation (1) The print start position is adjusted to stop backward or forward from the standard
print start position.
(2) When the back feed amount fine adjustment is enabled by this command while the
command is being stored in a form, the print start position moves backward by
2mm from the standard position, which enlarges the effective print area.
(3) If this command is stored in a form, the print position is automatically adjusted
when the form is invoked.
(4) When the back feed amount fine adjustment is enabled by this command while the
command is being stored in a form, or when the command is sent without being
stored in a form, printing starts at 5 mm from the leading edge of the label.
(5) When the power is turned on again, the backed up fine adjustment value is set.
(6) When the print position is changed, or when the gap between the labels is not 3
mm, the Position Fine Adjust Command should be used as required. (When the
gap between the labels is 3 mm, the standard print start position is 5 mm from the
leading edge of the label.)

(7) When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is off, and the reserved area (,eff)
is set to +20, printing starts at 3 mm from the leading edge of the label. When this
parameter is omitted, printing starts at 5 mm from the leading edge of the label.
Note that when the parameter is set to any value other than +20, a command error
occurs.
(8) When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on, and the omissible
parameters (,cddd and ,eff) are set to +000 and +20, respectively, printing starts at
3 mm from the leading edge of the label. When the parameters are omitted,
printing starts at 5 mm from the leading edge of the label. Note that when the
parameters are set to any value other than +000 and +20, respectively, a
command error occurs.
(9) When the fine adjustment for print position in + (backward) direction is set to any
value exceeding +10.5 mm (distance between the print head and the sensor minus
1 mm), the fine adjustment value is corrected to +10.5 mm before printing.
(10) The fine adjustment value for strip position is valid only when “the compatible mode
for the B-SP series” is turned off (disabled) in the SYSTEM mode. When the
parameter “a” is set to any value other than “+” or “-,“ a command error occurs.

6-12
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Paper feed direction

± 0 mm

Print start position

(Standard: 5 mm from the leading edge of the label)

+5 mm

Print start position

-5 mm

Print start position

Notes (1) The set fine adjustment value for print position is backed up in memory (retained
even if the power is turned off).

(2) The factory default value is 0.0 mm.

(3) The fine adjustment value for print position and strip position changed by the
Position Fine Adjust Command in the TPCL mode, is also effective in the LABEL
mode. However, the fine adjustment value for back feed changed in the LABEL
mode is not effective in the TPCL mode.
(4) When the back feed amount fine adjustment is enabled, printing starts at 3 mm
from the leading edge of the label.
(5) The back feed amount fine adjustment is enabled only while the command is being
stored in a form. It is disabled when the command is sent without being stored in
a form.
(6) When print position fine adjustment is selected in the SYSTEM mode (through key
operations on the printer), the fine adjustment value is a sum of the value in the
fine adjustment command and the system mode fine adjustment value. Note that
the maximum fine adjustment value is ±50.0 mm.
(7) The fine adjustment value for strip position up to V1.0C is valid only when the fine
adjustment value for print position is not selected (fine adjustment value = 0).
(8) When the label pitch length is 20.0 mm or more but less than 24.0 mm and the
effective print length is 15.0 mm or more or the label pitch length is 24.0 mm or
more, a back feed is performed before printing.

6-13
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.4.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY

Function Adjusts the automatically set print density.

Format [ESC] AY; abb, c (, d) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density

+: Increase (Darker)
-: Decrease (Lighter)
bb: Fine adjustment value for print density
00 to 30 (in units of 1 step)
c: Print mode
1 (Fixed): Direct thermal
d: Head output division designation
(Omissible. When omitted, settings backed up by the memory are valid.)

2-inch print head width

0: Auto (Divided by 2 or 3)
1: Reserved (When designated, automatic selection of bipartite/tripartite
division is performed.)
2: Divided by 3 (Fixed)
3: Auto1 (Not divided/Divided by 2 or 3)/Print quality oriented
4: Reserved (When designated, tripartite division is performed.)
5: Auto2 (Not divided/Divided by 2 or 3)/Print speed oriented
(supported in V1.0E or later)
4-inch print head width
0: Auto (Divided by 2, 3 or 6)
1: Reserved (When designated, automatic selection of bipartite/tripartite/
6-partite division is performed.)
2: Reserved (When designated, automatic selection of bipartite/tripartite/
6-partite division is performed.)
3: Auto1 (Not divided/Divided by 2, 3 or 6)
4: Divided by 6 (Fixed)

Explanation (1) The standard density is finely adjusted to increase or decrease.

(2) When any fine adjustment value for print density out of the above range is set, a
command error occurs.
(3) The default value of the head output division designation is “3: Auto1 (Not
divided/Divided by 2 or 3)” on the 2-inch print head and “3: Auto1 (Not
divided/Divided by 2, 3 or 6)” on the 4-inch print head.
(4) If this command is stored in a form, the print density is automatically adjusted when
the form is invoked.
(5) If this command is stored in a form, the print density is adjusted when this
command is received.

6-14
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) When “0: Auto” is designated on the 2-inch print head, “Divided by 2” or “Divided by
3” is automatically selected for every line according to the print ratio. The width of
half a dot may not be printed on the line when switching between “Divided by 2”
and “Divided by 3.” Therefore, do not designate “0: Auto” when a serial barcode is
printed.
(7) When “3: Auto1” or “5: Auto2” is designated for the 2-inch print head, “Not divided,”
“Divided by 3” or “Divided by 2” is automatically selected for every line according to
the print ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line when
switching among “Not divided,” “Divided by 2” and “Divided by 3.” Therefore, do
not designate “3: Auto1” or “5: Auto2” when a serial barcode is printed.
The difference between Auto1 and Auto2 is while Auto1 is print quality oriented,
Auto2 is print speed oriented. Auto2 is designated to increase the print speed
although the print is slightly faded.
(8) When “0: Auto” is designated on the 4-inch print head, “Divided by 2”, “Divided by
3” or “Divided by 6” is automatically selected for every line according to the print
ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line when switching
among “Divided by 2,” “Divided by 3” and “Divided by 6.” Therefore, do not
designate “0: Auto” when a serial barcode is printed.

(9) When “3: Auto1” is designated on the 4-inch print head, “Not divided,” “Divided by
2,” “Divided by 3” or “Divided by 6” is automatically selected for every line
according to the print ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line
when switching among “Not divided,” “Divided by 2,” “Divided by 3” and “Divided by
6.” Therefore, do not designate “3: Auto1” when a serial barcode is printed.

Notes (1) The set fine adjustment value for print density and the head output division
designation are backed up in memory (retained even if the power is turned off).
(2) The fine adjustment values changed by the Print Density Fine Adjust Command in
the LABEL mode, are also effective for the TPCL, RECEIPT and ESC/POS modes.

(3) When the head output division designation is omitted, the backed up value in
memory is used.
(4) When print density fine adjustment is selected in the SYSTEM mode (through key
operations on the printer), the fine adjustment value is a sum of the value in the
fine adjustment command and the system mode fine adjustment value. Note that
the maximum fine adjustment value is ±30.0 mm.

6-15
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.4.3 STRIP SENSOR THRESHOLD VALUE SET COMMAND [ESC] AZ

Function Sets the sensor threshold value to switch the mode between strip and batch.

Format [ESC] AZ; a [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Setting
0: Operation in conformance with the strip sensor
1: Operation in conformance with the strip sensor
2: Fixed at the batch mode
3: Fixed at the strip mode
4: Reserved

Notes (1) The set parameter is backed up and kept until a new value is set using this
command. When the power is turned on, the backed up value is retrieved and
set.
(2) “0: Operation in conformance with the strip sensor” has been set as the default at
the time of shipment from the factory.
(3) When either “2: Fixed at the batch mode” or “3: Fixed at the strip mode” for
parameter “a,” is selected, the printer operates in the specified mode, without
automatically switching between the batch and strip modes.
(4) When “4: Reserved” is selected, this command is ignored.

6-16
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO DRAWING FORMAT

6.5.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] LC

Function Sets the line format and draws the line.

Format [ESC] LC; aaaa, bbbb, cccc, dddd, e, f [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Start point X-coordinate

Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
bbbb: Start point Y-coordinate
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: End point X-coordinate
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: End point Y-coordinate
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
e: Type of line
0: Line (horizontal, vertical)
1: Rectangle
f: No. of line width dots
1 to 9 (in 0.1 mm units)

Explanation (1) The relation between the coordinates of the start and end points and the width of
the line, is as follows:
c Horizontal line (In the case of |Y2 - Y1| = 0)

(X1,Y1) (X2,Y2)

Line width

d Vertical line (In the case of |X2 - X1| = 0)

(X1,Y1)

(X2,Y2)
Line width

6-17
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

e Rectangle

(X1,Y1) (X2,Y2)

Line width Line width

(X2,Y2) (X1,Y1)

Line width Line width

(2) When the start and end point coordinates which make a slant line are specified, a rectangle
is drawn, even if “Line” is selected for the line type.
(3) If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing may
become poor, or the printer may be reset. When a horizontal line is to be drawn, note the
print ratio.
(4) When the coordinates, which make data over the head width, is specified, printing is not
guaranteed.

6-18
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.2 BIT MAP FONT FIELD COMMAND [ESC] PC

Function Sets the format indicating the position on the label at which the bit map font is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] PCaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, f, gg, h, ii, j, k(, Pl) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Character string No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the barcode/two-dimensional field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of character string
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of character string
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Character horizontal magnification
1: 0.5 magnification 5: 2.5 magnification
2: 1 magnification 6: 3 magnification
3: 1.5 magnification 7: 3.5 magnification
4: 2 magnification 8: 4 magnification
e: Character vertical magnification
1: 0.5 magnification 5: 2.5 magnification
2: 1 magnification 6: 3 magnification
3: 1.5 magnification 7: 3.5 magnification
4: 2 magnification 8: 4 magnification
f: Type of font
A: Standard (12 × 24 dots)
B: Bold Character (48 × 96 dots)
C: Writable Character (24 × 24 dots)
D: Price Font 1 (16 × 40 dots)
E: Price Font 2 (32 × 48 dots)
203-dpi print head
F: Times Roman (Bold) 21 points
G: Helvetica (Bold) 18 points
H: Letter Gothic (Medium) 14.3 points
I: Courier (Medium) 15 points
J: Presentation (Bold) 27 points
O: GOTHIC725 Black 6 points
P: Kanji/Writable Character (16 × 16 dots)
Q: Chinese/Writable Character (24 × 24 dots)
R: Korean/Writable Character (24 × 24 dots)
S: (Reserved)
T: (Reserved)
U: (Reserved)

6-19
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

gg: Rotational angles of a character or character string

00: 0° (chara.) 0° (chara.-string)
01: 90° (chara.) 90° (chara.-string)
02: 180° (chara.) 180° (chara.-string)
03: 270° (chara.) 270° (chara.-string)
h: Selects black character or reverse character
B (Fixed value): Black character
ii: Data length
00 to 99 NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the
data sent by the Data Print Command.
JIS 8 code: Data which is separated by [LF]
Packed BCD code: Data which is delimited by “F”
j: Data code
1: JIS 8 code (Fixed at 1 when the type of font is “C,” “Q” or “R.”)
2: Packed BCD code (only for IrDA: TEC Protocol)
k: Fixed data No.
0 (Fixed value)
Pl: Print position (Omissible. If omitted, the print position is left-aligned.)
0: Left
1: Center
2: Right

6-20
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation (1) Character string No.

The data in the Data Print Command (X) is selected and linked in the order of this
character string No. (The format of character string Nos. 00 and 01 is linked to
the first and second data, respectively. In the same order, the format is linked to
the data.) Therefore, the Nos. of the bit map font character string, the outline
font character string, and the barcode/two-dimensional code, should be
consecutive, starting from 00 (in ascending order). The same No. must not be
used in one form for the bit map font character string field, the outline font
character string field, and the barcode/two-dimensional code field.
(2) Print origin of coordinates
Paper feed direction

0 X
Backing paper
Y

Origin of
coordinates
Label
(0, 0)

Effective Sample
print length
Print origin of
coordinates

Effective print width

(3) Horizontal magnification and vertical magnification

Horizontal mag.: 1 Horizontal mag.: 2

Vertical mag.: 1 Vertical mag.: 1

Vertical
magnification

Horizontal mag.: 1 Horizontal mag.: 2

Vertical mag.: 2 Vertical mag.: 2
Horizontal
magnification

NOTE: When a large character or many characters is/are printed, the print
density may become lower. (When the print ratio per line is high, the
print density may become lower.)

6-21
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(4) Space between characters is described below.

[Standard character]

Horizontal
mag.: 2
24 dots

12 dots 12 dots 12 dots 24 dots 24 dots 24 dots

[Bold character]

96 dots

48 dots 48 dots 48 dots 48 dots 48 dots

[Price font 1 (Horizontal mag.: 1)]

40 dots

16 dots 16 dots 16 dots 16 dots

[Price font 1 (Horizontal mag.: 2)]

40 dots

32 dots 32 dots 32 dots

6-22
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(5) Rotational angles of a character and character string

Sample

Origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

(6) Data length, Data code

JIS 8 code .................... The length that one-byte data is counted as one digit
Packed BCD................. The length before packed

Data code Data Data to be sent Data length

JIS 8 12345 31H 32H 33H 34H 35H 5
Packed BCD 12345 12H 34H 50H 5

* When the same data is sent, the data length to be set is the same value in both
data codes, JIS 8 and Packed BCD.

(7) Print position

• Left (Default)

Origin

• Center

Origin

• Right

Origin

6-23
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Example
Origin of Effective print width
coordinates
(0, 0)

Sample
Effective Bit map font character
print length string No. 00
(3 mm, 12 mm)
Standard character (2×2)

Label

Backing paper

[ESC] XO; 01, 1 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] D0430, 0480, 0400 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PC00; 0030, 0120, 4, 4, A, 00, B, 00, 1, 0, P0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]

Data Print Command (not for IrDA:TEC Protocol)

[ESC] X [01H] [01H] [01H] SAMPLE [LF]

6-24
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.3 OUTLINE FONT FIELD COMMAND [ESC] PV

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the outline font is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] PVaa; bbbb, cccc, dddd, eeee, f, (,ghh), ii, j, kk, l, m, (,Pn) (,Qoooo,Rppp) [LF]
[NUL]

Term aa: Character string No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the barcode/two-dimensional code field.)

bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of character string

Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of character string
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
dddd: Character width
0020 to 0300 (in units of 0.1 mm)
eeee Character height
0020 to 0300 (in units of 0.1 mm)
f: Type of font
A: TEC Font 1 (Helvetica [Bold])
B: TEC Font 1 (Helvetica [Bold], Proportional)
F: Price Font 2
K: Reserved
C, D, E: Reserved (If specified, it is processed as “B.”)
ghh: Character-to-character space width (Omissible. If omitted, the character-to-
character space width depends on the designated font.)
g: +, -
hh: 00 to 99 (dot)
ii: Rotational angles of a character and character string
00: 0° (chara.) 0° (chara.-string)
01: 90° (chara.) 90° (chara.-string)
02: 180° (chara.) 180° (chara.-string)
03: 270° (chara.) 270° (chara.-string)
j: Selects black character or reverse character
B (Fixed value): Black character
kk: Data length
00 to 99 NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the
data sent by the Data Print Command.
JIS8 code: Data which is delimited by [LF]
Packed BCD code: Data which is delimited by “F”

l: Data code
1: JIS8 code
2: Packed BCD code (only for IrDA: TEC Protocol)
m: Fixed data No.
0 (Fixed value)

6-25
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Pn: Print position (Omissible. If omitted, the print position is left-aligned.)

P0: Left
P1: Center
P2: Right
Qoooo: Character string width (Omissible. If omitted, the width is set to 0000.)
0000 to 1600 (in units of 0.1mm)
Rpp: No. of character string digits (Omissible. If omitted, the number of digits is 00.)
00 to 99

6-26
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation (1) Character string No.

The data in the Data Print Command (X) is selected and linked in the order of this
character string No. (The format of character string Nos. 00 and 01 is linked to
the first and second data, respectively. In the same order, the format is linked to
the data.) Therefore, the Nos. of the bit map font character string, the outline
font character string, and the barcode/two-dimensional code, should be
consecutive, starting from 00 (in ascending order). The same No. must not be
used in one form for the bit map font character string field, the outline font
character string field, and the barcode/two-dimensional code field.
(2) Print origin of coordinates
Paper feed direction

0 X
Backing paper
Y

Origin of
coordinates
Label
(0, 0)

Effective Sample
print length
Print origin of
coordinates

Effective print width

(3) Character width and character height

Char.
height Char.
height
Char.
Char. height
width

Char. Char. width Char. width

width
Standard size
(256 × 256 dots)
Char.
height

NOTE: When a large character or many characters is/are printed, the print density
may become lower. (When the print ratio per line is high, the print density
may become lower.)

6-27
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(4) Rotational angles of a character and character string

Sample

Origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

(5) Print position

• Left (Default)

Origin

• Center

Origin

• Right

Origin

(6) Character string width and number of character string digits

Usually, one character size is determined by the character width and height.
When the character string width and number of character string digits are specified,
the character width will be automatically changed when printed. If the following
conditions are satisfied, however, these parameter settings become ineffective,
and the characters are printed in normal size.
• Conditions of ineffectiveness
(1) These parameters are omitted.
(2) The character string width is set to “0.”
(3) No. of print data ≥ No. of specified character string digits

Conditions that these parameters become effective are described on the following
pages.

6-28
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

c When one field width < specified character string width

(Space between characters = 0, Specified character string digits = 6)
„ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted.
1 field width (140 dots) A

A B C D One character width (35 dots)

Specified character string width (200 dots)

A=Specified character string width – 1 field width=200 dots – 140 dots=60 dots
B=A/Data length=60 dots/4=15 dots
One character width=1 character width+B=35 dots+15 dots=50 dots
„ Print image when the parameter setting is specified.

One character width (50 dots)

A B C D

Specified character string width (200 dots)

* When the number of print data is 6 digits or more, the condition of

ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied. In this case, the characters are printed in
normal width.

d When one field width < specified character string width

(Space between characters ≥ 0, Specified character string digits = 5)
„ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted.
1 field width (155 dots) A

Space between characters (5 dots)

A B C D One character width (35 dots)

Specified character string width (200 dots)

A=Specified character string width – 1 field width=200 dots – 155 dots=45 dots
B=A/Data length=45 dots/4≈11 dots
One character width=1 character width+B=35 dots+11 dots=46 dots
„ Print image when the parameter setting is specified.

One character width (46 dots) Space between characters (5 dots)

A B C D

Specified character string width (199 dots)

* When the number of print data is 5 digits or more, the condition of

ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied. In this case, the characters are printed in
normal width.

6-29
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

e When one field width < specified character string width

(Space between characters < 0, Specified character string digits = 8)
„ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted.
1 field width (125 dots) A

One character width (35 dots)

A B C D Space between characters (-5 dots)

Specified character string width (200 dots)

Corrected space between characters=((Specified character string digits – data

length(x0.5+1) x Space between characters=-15 dots
A=Specified character string width – (1 character width x Data
length+(corrected space between characters x (Data length – 1))=200 dots – 95
dots = 105 dots
B=A/Data length=105 dots/4≈26 dots (rounded down)
One character width=1 character width+B=35 dots+26 dots=61 dots
„ Print image when the parameter setting is specified.

One character width (61 dots)

Space between characters (-15 dots)

A B C D

Specified character string width (199 dots)

* When the number of print data is 8 digits or more, the condition of

ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied. In this case, the characters are printed in
normal width.

6-30
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

f When one field width ≥ specified character string width

(Space between characters ≥ 0, Specified character string digits = 6)
„ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted.

1 field width (215 dots)

One character width (50dots) Space between characters (5 dots)

A B C D

Specified character string width (120 dots) A

A=1 field width – Specified character string width=215 dots – 120 dots=95 dots
B=A/Data length=95 dots/4≈24 dots (rounded up)
One character width=1 character width – B=50 dots – 24 dots=26 dots
„ Print image when the parameter setting is specified.

Space between characters (5 dots)

A B C D One character width (26 dots)

Specified character string width (120 dots)

* When the number of print data is 6 digits or more, the condition of

ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied. In this case, the characters are printed in
normal width.

6-31
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

g When one field width ≥ specified character string width

(Space between characters < 0, Specified character string digits = 5)
„ Print image when the parameter setting is omitted.

1 field width (185 dots)

One character width (50dots)

Space between characters (-15 dots)

A B C D

Specified character string width (120 dots) A

A=1 field width – Specified character string width=185 dots – 120 dots=65 dots
B=A/Data length=65 dots/4=17 dots (rounded up)
One character width=1 character width – B=50 dots – 17 dots=33 dots
„ Print image when the parameter setting is specified.

One character width (33 dots)

A B C D Space between characters (-5 dots)

Specified character string width (117 dots)

* When the number of print data is 5 digits or more, the condition of

ineffectiveness (3) is satisfied. In this case, the characters are printed in
normal width.

Example
Origin of Effective print width
coordinates
(0, 0)

Sample
Effective Outline font character
print length string No. 00
(3 mm, 12 mm)
TEC Font 1 (80×80 mm)

Label

Backing paper

[ESC] XO; 01, 1 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] D0430, 0480, 0400 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV00; 0030, 0120, 0050, 0050, A, 00, B, 00, 1, 0, P0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]

Data print command (not for IrDA:TEC Protocol)

[ESC] X [01H] [01H] [01H] SAMPLE [LF]

6-32
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Commands to be registered

[ESC] XO; 05, 1 [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] D0780, 0480, 0750 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] AY; +00, 1, 0 [LF][NUL]
[ESC] AX; +000 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV01; 0325, 0350, 0080, 0100, F,-08, 03, B, 00, 1, 0, P2, Q0300, R07 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] PV02; 0165, 0000, 0030, 0060, F, 02, B, 00, 1, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB03; 0270, 0290, 5, 3, 02, 2, 0100, 000, 0, 00, 1, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XB04; 0270, 0170, 5, 3, 02, 2, 0100, 000, 0, 00, 1, 0 [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]

Issue command (not for IrDA:TEC Protocol)

i)
[ESC] X [05H] [01H] [01H]
$12.00 [LF]
$12.00 [LF]
214901881186 [LF]
291890001200 [LF]

ii)
[ESC] X [05H] [01H] [01H]
$80 [LF]
$80 [LF]
214901881186 [LF]
291890001200 [LF]

6-33
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.4 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND (MSI, ITF, CODE39, NW7) [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the barcode is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, gg, hh, ii, jj, k, llll, m, nn, o, p [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Barcode No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the barcode field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of barcode
1: MSI
2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
3: CODE39 (Standard)
4: NW7

e: Type of check digit

1 (Fixed value): Without attaching check digit
ff: Narrow bar width
02 to 03: 2 to 3 dots
gg: Narrow space width
02 to 03: 2 to 3 dots

hh: Wide bar width

05 to 09: 5 to 9 dots
ii: Wide space width
05 to 09: 5 to 9 dots
jj: Character-to-character space width
02 to 03: 2 to 3 dots

* Only for MSI and ITF, “00” can be set. If any value is set, the printer
automatically changes it to “00.”
k: Rotational angle of barcode
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
llll: Height of barcode
0001 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units)

m: Selection to print numerals under bars

0: Non-print
1: Print

6-34
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

nn: Data length (including start/stop codes)

00 to 32 NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to
the data sent by the Data Print Command.
JIS8 code: Data which is delimited by [LF]
Packed BCD code: Data which is delimited by “F”
o: Data code
1: JIS8 code
2: Packed BCD code (only for IrDA: TEC Protocol)
p: Fixed data No.
0 (Fixed value)

6-35
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.5 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND (JAN8/EAN8, JAN13/EAN13) [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the barcode is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh, iii, j, kk, l, m [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Barcode No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the barcode field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of barcode
0: JAN/8EAN8
5: JAN13/EAN13
e: Type of check digit
3 (Fixed value): Check digit auto attachment
ff: 1-module width
02 to 03 (in units of dots)
g: Rotational angle of barcode
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
hhhh: Height of barcode
0001 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units)
iii: Length of guard bar
000 to 050 (in 0.1 mm units)
j: Selection to print numerals under bars
0: Non-print
1: Print
kk: Data length
07: JAN8/EAN8
12: JAN13/EAN13
00: NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the
data sent by the Data Print Command.
JIS8 code: Data which is delimited by [LF]
Packed BCD code: Data which is delimited by “F”
l: Data code
1: JIS8 code
2: Packed BCD code (only for IrDA: TEC Protocol)
m: Fixed data No.
0 (Fixed value)

6-36
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.6 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND (EAN128, UCC/EAN128) [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the barcode is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh, iii, j, kk, l, m [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Barcode No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the barcode field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of barcode
N: EAN128
n: UCC/EAN128
e: Type of check digit
3 (Fixed value): Check digit auto attachment
ff: 1-module width
02 to 03 (in units of dots)
g: Rotational angle of barcode
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
hhhh: Height of barcode
0001 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units)
iii: Length of guard bar
000 (Fixed value)
j: Selection to print numerals under bars
0: Non-print
1: Print
kk: Data length
00 to 32; only even numbers (for EAN128)
00 or 19 (for UCC/EAN128)
NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the
data sent by the Data Print Command.
JIS8 code: Data which is delimited by [LF]
Packed BCD code: Data which is delimited by “F”
l: Data code
1: JIS8 code
2: Packed BCD code (only for IrDA: TEC Protocol)
m: Fixed data No.
0 (Fixed value)

6-37
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.7 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND (CODE128) [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the barcode is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh, iii, j, kkk, l, m [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Barcode No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the barcode field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of barcode
9: CODE128
e: Type of check digit
3 (Fixed value): Check digit auto attachment
ff: 1-module width
02 to 03 (in units of dots)
g: Rotational angle of barcode
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°

hhhh: Height of barcode

0001 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units)
iii: Length of guard bar
000 (Fixed value)
j: Selection to print numerals under bars
0: Non-print
1: Print
kkk: Data length
00 to 100 (Both odd and even numbers)
NOTES: 1. A two-digit value (00 to 99) is also available.
2. When “00” or “000” is designated, the length is equivalent to
the data sent by the Data Print Command.
JIS8 code: Data which is delimited by [LF]
Packed BCD code: Data which is delimited by “F”
l: Data code
1: JIS8 code
2: Packed BCD code (only for IrDA: TEC Protocol)
m: Fixed data No.
0 (Fixed value)

6-38
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples of using commands in EAN128, UCC/EAN128 and CODE128

~ Form storage

[ESC] ID; 01H23H [LF] [NUL] : ID setting

[ESC] XO; 01, 1 [LF] [NUL] : Declaration of the start of form storage
[ESC] D0360, 0480, 0330 [LF] [NUL] : Label size setting
[ESC] XB00; 0000, 0080, N, 3, 2, 0, 0090, 000, 0, 24, 2, 0 [LF] [NUL] : Format of bar coce No. 00
EAN128: 00 ~ 32
UCC/EAN128: 00 or 19
CODE128: 00 ~ 100
9: CODE128
N: EAN128
n: UCC/EAN128
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL] : Declaration of the termination of form storage

~ Drawing and issue (for IrDA: TEC Protocol)

[STX] 01H 23H 10H X 01H 00H 03H 97H 15H 01H 83H 06H 32H 13H 11H 50H 00H 50H 01H [CRC] [CRC]

Barcode data (971501830632131150005001)

(*1) Check digit of Modulus 10 is not
attached by the printer. Therefore, the
check digit should be calculated in
advance, then be sent as data.
No. of labels to be issued: 3
Transmissive sensor designated, No status response made
Form No.: 1
Packet length (10H = 16 bytes)
Printer ID (0123H)

(*1) How to calculate the Modulus 10 check digit (When barcode data is 971501830632131150005001.)
9 7 1 5 0 1 8 3 0 6 3 2 1 3 1 1 5 0 0 0 5 0 0 1
- ∆ - ∆ - ∆ - ∆ - ∆ - ∆ - ∆ - ∆ - ∆ - ∆ - ∆ - ∆

Sum up the numbers in the column of ’-‘: 33

33 x 3 (fixed number) = 99
Sum up the numbers in the column of ‘∆’: 29
29 x 1 (fixed number) = 29
Add the above two numbers: 99 + 29 = 128
Subtract the lowest digit of 128 from 10 (fixed number): 10 – 8 = 2
The obtained number ‘2’ is attached to the end of the barcode data.
9 7 1 5 0 1 8 3 0 6 3 2 1 3 1 1 5 0 0 0 5 0 0 1 2

Barcode data Check digit of Modulus 10

6-39
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.8 BARCODE FORMAT COMMAND (CUSTOMER BARCODE) [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the barcode is to be
printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, hhhh, iii, j, kk, l, m [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Barcode No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the barcode field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of barcode
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of barcode
R: Customer barcode (Postal code for Japan)
S: Highest priority customer barcode (Postal code for Japan)
e: Type of check digit
3 (Fixed value): Check digit auto attachment
ff: 1-module width
01 to 15 (in units of dots)
g: Rotational angle of barcode
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
hhhh: Height of long bars
0001 to 0350 (in 0.1 mm units)
iii: Reserved area
000 (Fixed value)
j: Reserved area
0 (Fixed value)
kk: Data length
00 to 20: Customer barcode
00 to 19: Highest priority customer barcode
NOTE: When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data sent
by the Data Print Command Data which is delimited by [LF])
l: Data code
1 (Fixed value): JIS8 code

m: Fixed data No.

0 (Fixed value)

6-40
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.9 two-dimensional CODE FORMAT COMMAND (PDF417) [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the two-dimensional code
is to be printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii, jj, k, l [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the two-dimensional code field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
d: Type of two-dimensional code
P: PDF417
ee: Security level
00: Level 0
01: Level 1
02: Level 2
03: Level 3
04: Level 4
05: Level 5
06: Level 6
07: Level 7
08: Level 8
ff: 1-module width
02 to 03 (in units of dots)
gg: No. of columns (strings)
01 to 30
h: Rotational angle of two-dimensional code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii: Bar height
0001 to 0100 (in 0.1 mm units)

6-41
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

jj: Data length

00 to 99
NOTES: 1. A two-digit value (00 to 99) is also available.
2. When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data
sent by the Data Print Command.
(JIS8 code: Data which is delimited by [LF])
Data having a max. of 2000 digits is acceptable.
3. In IrDA: TEC Protocol, when the data length value is set to
250 or more, it can be sent by using the multiple packet format
for the Data Print Command in several packets.
k: Data code
1 (Fixed value): JIS8 code
l: Fixed data No.
0 (Fixed value)

6-42
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Examples of using commands in PDF417

~ Form storage

[ESC] ID; 01H23H [LF] [NUL] : ID setting

[ESC] XO; 01, 1 [LF] [NUL] : Declaration of the start of form storage
[ESC] D0360, 0480, 0330 [LF] [NUL] : Label size setting
[ESC] XB00; 0000, 0000, P, 00, 02, 06, 0, 0010, 00, 1, 0 [LF] [NUL] : Format of two-dimensional code No. 00
[ESC] XP [LF] [NUL] : Declaration of the termination of form storage

~ Drawing and issue (for IrDA: TEC Protocol)

Command packet in the case that 300-byte issue data is designated in PDF417
(Since the data length is 250 bytes or more, the data is sent by using the command packet in the
RECEIPT mode.)

[Example]
[STX] 01H 23H deH Y 80H X 01H 00H 03H ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789

No. of labels to be issued: 3

Transmissive sensor designated,
No status response made

Form No.: 1
Flag (Middle block)
Mode (Fixed at “Y”: Indicates the RECEIPT mode.)

Packet length (deH = 222 bytes)

Printer ID (0123H)

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789 [CRC] [CRC]

[STX] 01H 23H 57H Y 01H ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789

ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ0123456789
ABCDEFGHIJKL [CRC] [CRC]

Flag (Middle block)

Packet length (57H = 87 bytes)

6-43
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.10 two-dimensional CODE FORMAT COMMAND (QR CODE) [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the two-dimensional code
is to be printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e, ff, g, h (, Mi) (, Kj) (, Jkkllmm), nn, o, p [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the two-dimensional code field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
d: Type of two-dimensional code
T: QR code
e: Designation of error correction level
L: High density level
M: Standard level
Q: Reliability level
H: High reliability level
ff: 1-cell width
01 to 09 (in units of dots)
g: Selection of mode
M: Manual mode
A: Automatic mode
h: Rotational angle of two-dimensional code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°

Mi: Selection of model

(Omissible. If this parameter is omitted, Model 1 is automatically selected.)
i = 1: Model 1
2: Model 2
Kj: Mask number
(Omissible. If this parameter is omitted, the number is automatically set.)
i = 0 to 7: Mask number 0 to 7
8: No mask
Jkkllmm: Connection setting (Omissible. No connection if this parameter is omitted.)
kk = 01 to 16: Value indicating which divided code is connected.
ll = 01 to 16: Number of divided codes
mm = 00 to FF: A value for all data to be printed, to which XOR is applied in
units of bytes (Not divided)

6-44
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

nn: Data length

00 to 99
NOTES: 1. A two-digit value (00 to 99) is also available.
2. When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data
sent by the Data Print Command. It corresponds for up to
2000 digits.
o: Data code
1 (Fixed value): JIS8 code
p: Data code
0 (Fixed value)

6-45
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.11 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (DATA MATRIX) [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the two-dimensional code
is to be printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h (, Ciiijjj) (, Jkkllmmmnnn), ooo, p, q [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the two-dimensional code field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
d: Type of two-dimensional code
Q: Data Matrix
ee: ECC type
00: ECC000
05: ECC050
08: ECC080
10: ECC100
14: ECC140
20: ECC200
ff: 1-cell width
01 to 09 (in units of dots)
gg: Format ID
01: Format ID 1
02: Format ID 2
03: Format ID 3
04: Format ID 4
05: Format ID 5
06: Format ID 6
h: Rotational angle of two-dimensional code
0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°

6-46
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Ciiijjj: No. of cells (Omissible. If this parameter is omitted, it is automatically set.)

iii: No. of cells in the X direction 000 to 144
jjj: No. of cells in the Y direction 000 to 144

NOTE: Cell setting varies according to the ECC type.

ECC000 to ECC140 ECC200

No. of cells to be Odd numbers only Even numbers only
designated
Min./Max. No. of cells 9 × 9 to 49 × 49 10 × 10 to 144 × 144
Rectangular code None 18 × 8
32 × 8
26 × 12
36 × 12
36 × 16
48 × 16

• When this parameter is omitted, the number of cells is automatically set.

Also, when data except for the above values is designated for Nos. of cells in
the X and Y directions, the number of cells is automatically set.

Jkkllmmmnnn: Connection setting

(Omissible: No connection if this parameter is omitted)
kk: Code number 01 to 16
ll: No. of divided codes 01 to 16
mmm: ID number 001 to 254
nnn: ID number 2 001 to 254

NOTE: It is effective only when ECC200 is selected.

ooo: Data length
000 to 100

NOTES: 1. A two-digit value (00 to 99) is also available.

2. When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data
sent by the Data Print Command (data which is delimited by
[LF].)
3. When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data
sent by the Data Print Command. It corresponds for up to
2000 digits.
p: Data code
1 (Fixed value): JIS8 code

q: Reserved area
0: Fixed value

6-47
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.12 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MIRCOPDF417) [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the two-dimensional code
is to be printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, ee, ff, gg, h, iiii, jjj, k, l [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the two-dimensional code field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
d: Type of two-dimensional code
X: MicroPDF417
ee: Security level
00: Fixed value
ff: 1-module width
01 to 09 (in units of dots)
gg: No. of columns/rows
01 to 38

h: Rotational angle of two-dimensional code

0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°
iiii: Bar height
0001 to 0100 (in units of 0.1 mm)
jjj: Data length
000 to 100
NOTES: 1. A two-digit value (00 to 99) is also available.
2. When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data sent
by the Data Print Command (data which is delimited by [LF].)
3. When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data sent
by the Data Print Command. It corresponds for up to 366 digits.
k: Data code
1 (Fixed value): JIS8 code
l: Reserved area
0 (Fixed value)

6-48
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.5.13 TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE FORMAT COMMAND (MAXICODE) [ESC] XB

Function Sets the format to indicate the position on the label, at which the two-dimensional code
is to be printed and how it is to be printed.

Format [ESC] XBaa; bbbb, cccc, d, e (, Jffgg) (, Zh), iii, j, k [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Two-dimensional code No.

00 to 99
(The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font field, the
outline font field, and the two-dimensional code field.)
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of the two-dimensional code
Fixed at 4 digits (in units of 0.1 mm)
d: Type of two-dimensional code
Z: Maxicode
e: Mode selection
2: Mode 2
3: Mode 3
4: Mode 4
6: Mode 6
Jffgg: Connection setting (Omissible. If omitted, no connection is made.)
ff: Code number 01 to 08
gg: No. of divided codes 01 to 08
Zh: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
(Omissible. If omitted, the Zipper block and Contrast block are not attached.)
h: 0: No attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
1: Attachment of Zipper block and Contrast block
2: Attachment of Zipper block
3: Attachment of Contrast block
iii: Data length
000 to 100
NOTES: 1. A two-digit value (00 to 99) is also available.
2. When “00” is designated, the length is equivalent to the data sent
by the Data Print Command (data which is delimited by [LF].)
j: Data code
1 (Fixed value): JIS8 code

k: Reserved area
0 (Fixed value)

6-49
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation (1) Two-dimensional code No.

The data in the Data Print Command (X) is selected and linked in the order of this
barcode/two-dimensional code No. (The formats of barcode/two-dimensional
code Nos. 00 and 01 are linked to the first and second data, respectively. In the
same order, the format is linked to the data.) Therefore, the Nos. of the bit map
font character string, the outline font character string, and the barcode/two-
dimensional code, should be consecutive, starting from 00 (in ascending order).
The same No. must not be used in one form for the bit map font character string
field, the outline font character string field, and the barcode/two-dimensional code
field.
(2) Print origin of coordinates
Paper feed direction

0 X
Backing paper
Y

Origin of
coordinates
Label
(0, 0)

Print origin of
Effective coordinates
print length

Effective print width

(3) Type of check digit

The check digit is automatically attached according to the type designation as
shown below.
Barcode
type EAN128,
NW7, CODE39, JAN8/EAN8,
UCC/EAN128,
C/D type Interleaved 2 of 5 JAN13/EAN13
CODE128
Without attaching check
1 No designation No designation
digit
Auto
Auto attachment of
3 No designation attachment of
Modulus 10
PSEUDO103

6-50
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(4) Rotational angles of a barcode

Origin
Origin

Origin

Origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

NOTE: If a barcode is rotated at 90° or 270°, the print density may become lower
in relation to the bar height. A barcode with a height of 14 mm or less
should be used. When a barcode with a height of over 14 mm is used,
the print quality is not guaranteed.

Rotational angle of a two-dimensional code

Point of origin

0° 90° 180° 270°

(5) Barcode height

Height of
barcode
Height of
4940 0458
guard bar

(6) Numerals under bars

Numerals are provided under bars depending on the parameter for numerals
under bars. Standard fonts are used.
(7) Since the start/stop codes are not automatically attached when using NW7, they
should be included in the data to be sent as required. Although no start/stop
codes are attached to data, a barcode is drawn.
When using CODE39, the first and last characters of the data are checked.
Unless the characters are not “*,” “*” is automatically attached. When the host
sends data while attaching “*” as the start/stop codes, a barcode is drawn.
(8) When Interleaved 2 of 5 is selected and the number of data length digits is odd, 0
is automatically added to the beginning of the data, to change the number of data
length digits to even.

6-51
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(9) Explanation for QR code

c Error correction level
The QR code contains functions to detect and correct an error. If one of the data
characters is damaged, the information can be restored when this code is read.
There are 4 levels that can be designated. The level should be specified according to
usage. The general correction ability is as follows.

Overhead by correcting
Level Error correction ability
an error
High density level Low 7%
Standard level 15%
Reliability level 25%
High reliability level High 30%

d 1-cell width 1-cell width

1-cell width

e Selection of mode
All codes including alphanumerics, symbols, and Kanji can be used in one QR code.
Manual mode or automatic mode can be selected to perform the operation.
When automatic mode is selected, FFH cannot be used. However, this data can be
used in manual mode.
f Selection of model
Model 1: Original specification
Model 2: Extended specification which enhances the function of position correction
and can contain a large amount of data.
g Mask number
To be sure the QR code is read, it is preferable that white and black modules are
arranged in this symbol in a balanced manner. This prevents the bit pattern
“1011101”, which is characteristically seen in the position detecting pattern, from
appearing in the symbol as much as possible.
The mask number is 0 to 7. The pattern is determined by placing each masking
pattern for the mask number upon the module pattern. When the mask number is set
to 8, masking is not performed. When the parameter is omitted, the most appropriate
mask number is automatically selected to perform masking.

6-52
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

h Connection setting
For QR code, data can be divided into several codes. Even though there is only a
narrow print space, the code can be entered in the space by dividing the code. The
data can be divided into a max. of 16 codes. Parity data is obtained by XORing all
input data in units of bytes before dividing. The input data is calculated based on
shift JIS for Kanji, or on JIS8 for others. Examples are shown below:
“0123456789 ” is divided into “0123”, “4567”, and “89 .”
Code No. 1 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 84 Data “0123”
Code No. 2 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 84 Data “4567”
Code No. 3 No. of divided codes: 3 Parity data: 84 Data “89 ”
* The parity data is the XORed value for “0123456789 .”
30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 93 FA 96 7B = 85

Note When the QR code is printed, note the setting for the coordinates positions. If the
specified coordinates are close to the maximum effective print length, the QR code may
not be included within the maximum effective print length, depending on the 1-cell width
or the data count. If the QR code is not included within the maximum effective print
width, one part of the printed QR code may be missing. Be sure to check to see if the
QR code is included within the effective print length.

(For example, when the maximum effective print length is 97 mm, if the Y-coordinate of
the QR code is set to 90 mm, one part of the printed QR code may be missing,
depending on the QR code size.

6-53
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(10) Security level

The PDF417 contains a function to correct a code reading error using an error
correcting code word and restore normal data. The security level should be
designated according to usage to perform the error correction function.

No. of error correction

Security level Error Correction Ability
code words
Level 0 0
Level 1 Low 2
Level 2 6
Level 3 14
Level 4 30
Level 5 62
Level 6 126
Level 7 High 254
Level 8 510

(11) No. of columns (strings)

The number of lines is variable in the PDF417. The line length (No. of data
strings) is also variable. Therefore, a symbol can be created in a form that can
be easily printed, by changing the proportion of the height and width.
The number of columns (data strings) is variable between 1 and 30.
If a small value for the number of columns is set when the data is large and the
security level is high, drawing may not be performed. This is because the
number of lines exceeds 90 when the number of columns becomes small. If the
number of lines exceeds 90, a label is issued without being printed.
(When the PDF417 is used, the number of lines of symbols is limited from 3 to
90.)
Example
Origin of Effective print width
coordinates
(0, 0)

Barcode No. 00
Effective (5 mm, 18 mm) NW7
print length
10 mm

Label

Backing paper

[ESC] XB00 ; 0050, 0180, 4, 1, 02, 02, 05, 05, 02, 0, 0100, 0, 07, 1, 0 [LF] [NUL]

6-54
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO ISSUE AND FEED

6.6.1 DATA PRINT COMMAND X

Function Draws or prints the data.

Format [IrDA: TEC Protocol]

Xabcddd --- eee --- nnn ---
[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]
[ESC] Xabcddd --- eee --- nnn --- [NUL]

Term a: Form No.

01H to 14H (1 to 20)
7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Form No. (Bit 0 to Bit 6) 01H to 14H (1 to 20)

Reprint key enabled or disabled (Bit 7)
Selection of the reprint key function (Firmware V1.1 or greater)
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
When the form No. is 81H to 8AH (1 to 10) and if an error occurs during
printing, the reprint key will be enabled until a label is successfully issued.
When the form No. is 8BH to 94H (11 to 20), the reprint key will be disabled
if an error occurs during printing.
b: Sensor designation and ACK (IrDA: TEC Protocol) /status transmission (IrDA:
IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth) to notify the issue end
00H: Transmissive sensor, No ACK/status transmission
01H: Transmissive sensor, ACK/status transmission
10H: Reflective sensor, No ACK/status transmission
11H: Reflective sensor, ACK/status transmission
20H: No sensor designation, No ACK/status transmission
21H: No sensor designation, ACK/status transmission
c: No. of labels to be issued
01H to FFH (1 to 255)
Even in the strip issue mode, the designated number of labels is printed.
ddd ---: Data of character/barcode/2-D code No. 00
When a delimiter is required, it
eee ---: Data of character/barcode/2-D code No. 01 should be added to the end of
nnn ---: Data of character/barcode/2-D code No. nn data. (Refer to “Explanation.”)

6-55
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation (1) When the printer receives this command, the following operations will be
performed.
c The printer clears the drawing buffer.
d The printer links the form to the data.
e The printer draws the data in the drawing buffer.
f The printer draws the data if invocation of graphics is set in the form.
g The printer sets the fine adjustment values for print density/position stored in
the form.
h The printer starts printing
(2) Data is indicated in JIS8 code or packed BCD code. The type of data code is set
by the Bit Map Font Field Command, the Outline Font Field Command, or the
Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Format Command.
(3) When the length and the data code set by the Bit Map Font Field Command, the
Outline Font Field Command, or the Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Format
Command is “00” and JIS8 code, respectively, the delimiter [LF] (0AH) should be
entered at the end of the field data. When the packed BCD is used as the data
code, the delimiter “F” (4 bits) should be entered at the end of the field data.
When the data length stored in the form is anything other than “00”, a delimiter
such as [LF] or “F” should not be attached, since the length of the data is linked.
(4) If the length of the data corresponding to one field (including a delimiter) is an odd
number of digits when the packed BCD code is used, the last 4 bits of the final data
in the field should be “0”.
(5) When there is data which does not match the type of barcode/two-dimensional
code in the data string for the barcode/two-dimensional code, the barcode/two-
dimensional code is not drawn. When the barcode/two-dimensional code digit is
fixed, and the type of barcode/two-dimensional code does not match the number of
the data digit, the barcode/two-dimensional code is not drawn.
(6) If an error occurs while printing two or more labels, the printer discards the
remaining received data and waits for a command, after the error is cleared by
pressing the PAUSE key.

(7) If the form which corresponds to the form No. designated is not stored, a syntax
error occurs.
(8) When the form No. is other than 01H to 14H, the Data Print Command is
discarded.
(9) When the number of labels to be printed is other than 01H to FFH, a syntax error
occurs.
(10) If the battery capacity becomes low while printing two or more labels, the printer
may stop after issuing every label (for Max. 7 seconds).

6-56
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(11) Automatic status transmission (IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX､RS-232C,

Bluetooth, Wireless LAN)
When the status response is designated, the printer automatically sends the printer
status and the battery status after issuing labels.
Data to be sent (Fixed at 5 bytes)

STX Printer ID Printer status Battery status

02H xxH xxH xxH xxH

Printer ID............... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)
Printer status......... Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data.
00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken thermal head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Operating
0DH: Normal end + Label end
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
0FH: Wait for strip
10H: Normal issue end
14H: Pause state
19H: Ambient temperature error
32H: Abnormal battey temperature
33H: Battery excessive temperature
37H: Charging error
38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
45H: Wait for battery recovery
46H: Wait for head temperature reduction
47H: Wait for motor temperature reduction
55H: Writable character/PC command save mode
0DH (Normal issue end + Label end) is a state when the
printer runs out of labels, after the effective print length is
printed.

6-57
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Status in the compatible mode for B-SP series

00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end (including ambient temperature error)
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken thermal head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
including abnormal battery temperature and battery
excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Printer operating
including the following statuses: wait for strip, pause
state, writable character/PC command save mode,
wait for battery recovery and wait for print head/motor
temperature reduction
0DH: Normal end + Label end
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
10H: Normal issue end
37H: Charging error
38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
Battery status ........ The battery charge status is indicated in 5 levels.
(B-EP2DL)
01H: 7.2 V or less (Print failure)
02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 1 to 30)
03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 30 to 150)
04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 150 to 300)
05H: 8.0 V to 8.4 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 300 min.)
(B-EP4DL)
01H: 14.0 V or less (Print failure)
02H: 14.1 V to 14.6 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 1 to 30)
03H: 14.7 V to 15.2 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 30 to 150)
04H: 15.3 V to 15.9 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 150 to 300)
05H: 16.0 V to 16.8 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 300 min.)
* The remaining number of printable labels may vary according to
the contents to be printed and the ambient environment.

6-58
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(13) If an error occurs when 99% of print data has been printed, pressing the FEED key
after clearing the error causes the printer to reprint, even when the restart key is
set to disabled and the form number is selected from 1 to 10.

(14) If an error occurs before printing, the printer will not reprint by pressing the FEED
key after clearing the error, when the restart key is set to disabled and the form
number is selected from 11 to 20.
(15) In case of “normal issue end + label end”, pressing the FEED key after clearing the
error causes the printer to reprint even when the restart key is set to disabled and
the form number is selected from 1 to 10.

(16) When the sensor is specified, even if a gap or a black mark is detected within less
than 90% of the effective print length specified by the Label Size Set Command, it
is ignored.
However, this is not applicable when the programmed media pitch is less than
40mm. When this media is used and a gap or a black mark is detected within less
than 90% of the effective print length, the detected gap or black mark will be
effective. As a result, printing will stop even if it is halfway.

• The definition of packed BCD code

Code Character string Barcode

Standard/ EAN8/13
Bold Price Others ITF NW7 CODE39 CODE128
Presentation
EAN128
UCC/EAN128
MIS
0000 (0)
“0” ~ “9”
~ 1001 (9)
1010 (A) Reserved “-“ “$” “£” Reserved “a” “*” “”
1011 (B) Reserved Reserved Reserved “p” Reserved “b” “-” “”
1100 (C) “.” Reserved “.” “.” Reserved “c” “.” “”
1101 (D) “” “” “” “” Reserved “d” “” “”
1110 (E) Reserved
1111 (F) Delimiter

* E (H) is reserved for expansion. F (H) is used as the delimiter for each field in the
Data Print Command (only when the data length and the data code are “00” and
“Packed BCD code”, respectively).
[Example] Barcode data = “a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 d”
[A1H] [23H] [45H] [67H] [89H] [0DH]
a1 23 45 67 89 0d

6-59
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

z When the manual mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code
• Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode

Mode selection Data to be printed

• Binary mode

No. of data strings

Mode selection Data to be printed
(4 digits)

• Mixed mode

Data “,” (comma) Data “,” (comma) Data

The QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji.
Since data compression rate varies according to codes, the code to be used is
designated when the mode is selected.

Mode Code Details

N Numerals 0 to 9
A Alphanumerics, symbols A to Z 0 to 9 space
$ % * + - . / :
B Binary (8-bit) 00H to FFH
K Kanji Shift JIS

If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.

z When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code.

Data to be printed

c How to send the control code data

NUL (00H) = > @ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) = > A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) = > B (3EH, 42H)

GS (1DH) = > ] (3EH, 5DH)

RS (1EH) = > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) = > _ (3EH, 5FH)

d How to send the special codes

> (3EH) = > 0 (3EH, 30H)

6-60
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Transfer code]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS • > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.

When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command, FFH data cannot be
used. It is available when the manual mode is selected.
Examples of data designation for QR code
c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
AABC123
Data to be printed
Designation of mode

d Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H

B0006>A>C>E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
e Mixed mode
Numeric mode : 123456
Kanji mode : Kanji data
Binary mode : a i u e o
Alphanumeric mode : ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a i u e o ,AABC
Data to be Data to be No. of Data to be printed Data to be
printed printed data strings printed

Designation of mode
f Automatic mode
When the data above (e) is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a i u e o ABC
Data to be printed

6-61
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO FORMAT

6.7.1 FLASH MEMORY STORAGE AREA FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1

Function Formats (Initializes) the form storage area in flash memory.

Format [ESC] J1; a [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Format (Initialization) designation

A: Form storage area
B: Writable character storage area
C: Graphic storage area
D: All storage areas (Form, Writable character, Graphic)

Explanation (1) When the storage area in flash ROM becomes full, the old data is automatically
deleted and only the newest data is left.
Only the form storage area in flash ROM can be forcefully cleared by this
command. However, if this command is sent, all data of the stored forms,
including the newest data, is deleted (initialized).
(2) The remaining capacity of flash memory after formatting is displayed on the LCD.

(3) Whenever already registered data (PC saving, writable character or logo) is
registered again, memory is consumed unless a format command is sent.
(4) After a format command is sent, the image buffer is cleared automatically.

Note (1) Since the writable character storage area is shared by the LABEL and TPCL
modes, writable characters registered in TPCL mode are erased.

Refer to Form Store Start Command ([ESC] XO)

6-62
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.7.2 STORAGE AREA ALLOCATE COMMAND [ESC] XF

Function Allocates the storage area in the flash ROM on the CPU board.

Format [ESC] XF; aa, bb, cc (, dd, ee) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Reserved

00 to 14
bb: Size of bit map writable character storage area
00 to 50 (0 KB to 3,200 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
cc: Size of BASIC file storage area
00 to 14 (0 KB to 896 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
AA: The current BASIC file storage area and contents are retained.
dd: Size of form storage area
(Omissible. If omitted, the contents are retained.)
00 to 14 (0 KB to 896 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
ee: Size of graphic storage area
(Omissible. If omitted, the contents are retained.)
00 to 03 (0 KB to 192 KB) (in units of 64 KB)
Explanation
(1) The total capacity of the storage area in flash ROM is variable from 1,024 to 3,200 KB.
* Variable with the two-byte font installed

Kanji 1,344 KB

Chinese 1,024 KB

Korean 2,112 KB

Without the two-byte font installed 3,200 KB

(2) Allocation priority is assigned as follows:

c All parameters
Writable character > BASIC > Form > Graphic > PC save

d Omissible parameters (, dd, ee) are omitted

Form > Graphic > Writable character > BASIC > PC save

e BASIC is retained (AA)

BASIC > Writable character > Form > Graphic > PC save

f BASIC is retained, or omissible parameters are omitted

Form > Graphic > BASIC > Writable character > PC save

(3) When the above command is received, the entire area in flash ROM on the CPU board is
cleared. However, omitted parameters are not cleared.

6-63
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Example of allocation]
~ In case that the size of BASIC file storage area is set in a range of “00” to “14”:
(1) The storage areas are allocated in the following order of precedence – the bit map
writable character storage area, the BASIC file storage area, the form storage area and
the graphic storage area. After these storage areas are allocated using the above
command, the remaining area is used for the PC save area.
(2) If the sum of the bit map writable character storage area, the BASIC file storage area, the
form storage area and the graphic storage area, specified using this command, is the
maximum allocable capacity, the bit map writable character storage area, the BASIC file
storage area, the form storage area and the graphic storage area are allocated as
specified, respectively. In this case, however, there is no PC save area.
(3) If the sum of the bit map writable character storage area, the BASIC file storage area, the
form storage area and the graphic storage area, specified using this command, exceeds
the maximum allocable capacity, the bit map writable character storage area is allocated
as specified with the highest priority. Then, the remaining area is allocated to the BASIC
file storage area. If there is still remaining area after the bit map writable character
storage area and the BASIC file storage area are allocated, it is used for the form storage
area. If there is still remaining area, then it is used for the graphic storage area. There
is no PC save area. However, the form storage area and the graphic storage area are
omitted, the current area is retained.
(4) When “00” (0 KB) is specified for each of the bit map writable character storage area, the
BASIC file storage area, the form storage area and the graphic storage area, the
maximum allocable capacity is used for the PC area. However, the form storage area
and the graphic storage area are omitted, the current area is retained.
(5) When the maximum allocable capacity is specified for the bit map writable character
storage area, the entire storage area is occupied by that area. However, the form
storage area and the graphic storage area are omitted, the current area is retained.

(6) Any numeric value specified in aa (Reserved) is ignored. However, 2-digit values are
possible.

Refer to • Writable Character data Store Command ([ESC] XD)

• Form Store Start Command ([ESC] XO)
• Flash Memory Storage Area Format Command ([ESC] J1)

Example The respective area is set to as follows:

Bit map writable character storage area: 512 KB
BASIC file storage area: 0 KB
Form storage area: 192 KB
Graphic storage area: 64 KB
PC save area: 896 KB − 512 KB − 0 KB – 192 KB – 64 KB = 128 KB
(Format = [ESC] XF; 00, 08, 00, 03, 01 [LF] [NUL])
When “14 (896 KB)” is specified for any of the formats, the entire storage area is
occupied by that area.
For example, if “14” is specified for the bit map writable character storage area, the
entire storage area is used only for the bit map writable character storage area. Any
area other than the bit map writable character storage area cannot be allocated.

6-64
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO WRITABLE CHARACTERS

6.8.1 WRITABLE CHARACTER DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] XD

Function Stores writable characters and logos into flash memory.

Format [ESC] XD; aa, bbb --- bbb [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Writable character code

FF40H to FF71H
bbb---bbb: Writable character data (Fixed at 72 bytes)

Explanation
Graphic width 24 dots

1 00H 2 60H 3 00H

4 00H 5 70H 6 00H
•
•
•
Graphic •
height
•
24 dots
•
67 EFH 68 80H 69 00H
70 3EH 71 00H 72 00H

8 dots 8 dots 8 dots

(1) The writable character data should be separated into units of 8 dots and sent in the
above order (1 to 72).

(2) The writable character data is 00H to FFH.

(3) The number of dots of a writable character width and a writable character height
are fixed at 24 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted as data 0. 72-byte data
should be sent.
(4) Max. 50 types of writable character data can be stored. The writable character
data is backed up in memory (even if the power is turned off).
(5) Writable character data is assigned from FF40H to FF71H. Therefore, to read the
code, the code (2 bytes) which was stored by this command should be designated.
(6) A new writable character can be stored in codes which have been stored in an
already existing code.

6-65
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Example
Graphic width 24 dots

Graphic
height
24 dots

8 dots 8 dots 8 dots

[ESC] XD; <FFH> <40H>,

[00H] [60H] [00H] [00H] [70H] [00H] [00H] [78H] [00H]
[00H] [7CH] [00H] [00H] [6EH] [00H] [00H] [67H] [00H]
[00H] [63H] [80H] [00H] [61H] [80H] [00H] [61H] [C0H]
[00H] [60H] [C0H] [00H] [61H] [C0H] [00H] [61H] [80H]
[00H] [63H] [80H] [00H] [67H] [C0H] [00H] [66H] [00H]
[0FH] [60H] [00H] [0EH] [60H] [00H] [3FH] [E0H] [00H]
[7FH] [FEH] [00H] [FFH] [E0H] [00H] [FFH] [C0H] [00H]
[FFH] [C0H] 00H] [EFH] [80H] [00H] [3EH] [00H] [00H]
[LF] [NUL]

6-66
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO GRAPHICS

6.9.1 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] SG

Function Stores the graphic data on the printer.

Format [ESC] SG ; a, bbbb, cccc, ddd --- ddd [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Graphic No.

1 to 2
bbbb: No. of graphic width dots to be stored
0001 to 1248 (in units of dots)

Max. No. of width dots

B-EP2DL-GHxx 384
B-EP4DL-GHxx 832

cccc: No. of graphic height dots to be stored

0001 to 9999 (in units of dots)

ddd --- ddd: Graphic data

Explanation
Graphic width 19 dots

1 00H 2 60H 3 00H

4 00H 5 70H 6 00H
•
•
•
Graphic
•
height
22 dots 67 EFH 68 80H 69 00H
70 3EH 71 00H 72 00H

8 8 8

(1) The graphic data should be separated into units of 8 dots and sent in the above
order (1 to 72).
(2) The graphic data is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit of a graphic width is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted
as data 0.

6-67
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(4) The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted must be as follows;

The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted (Max. 64 KB)
= {(No. of graphic width dots + 7)/8} × No. of graphic height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

Example
Graphic width 19 dots

Graphic
height
22 dots

[ESC] SG; 1, 0019, 0024,

[00H] [60H] [00H] [00H] [70H] [00H] [00H] [78H] [00H]
[00H] [7CH] [00H] [00H] [6EH] [00H] [00H] [67H] [00H]
[00H] [63H] [80H] [00H] [61H] [80H] [00H] [61H] [C0H]
[00H] [60H] [C0H] [00H] [61H] [C0H] [00H] [61H] [80H]
[00H] [63H] [80H] [00H] [67H] [C0H] [00H] [66H] [00H]
[0FH] [60H] [00H] [0EH] [60H] [00H] [3FH] [E0H] [00H]
[7FH] [FEH] [00H] [FFH] [E0H] [00H] [FFH] [C0H] [00H]
[FFH] [C0H] [00H] [EFH] [80H] [00H] [3EH] [00H] [00H]
[LF] [NUL]

6-68
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.9.2 GRAPHIC FIELD COMMAND [ESC] N

Function Sets how the graphic data is to be printed on the label.

Format [ESC] N; a, bbbb, cccc [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Graphic No. to be invoked and drawn

1 to 2
bbbb: Print origin of X-coordinate of graphic data
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)
cccc: Print origin of Y-coordinate of graphic data
Fixed at 4 digits (in 0.1 mm units)

Explanation (1) If the Graphic Field Command is stored in a form, like the Bit Map Font Field
Command, the Outline Font Field Command, or the Barcode/Two-dimensional
Code Format Command, the graphic data is automatically drawn, when the stored
form is invoked by the Data Print Command.
(2) When no graphic data has been stored, the printer does not print any graphics
even if a graphic data number is specified by the Graphic Field Command.

0 X

Y Paper feed direction

Origin of coordinates
(0, 0)

Print origin of
coordinates
Width of the graphic

Effective
print length

Height of
the graphic

Effective print width

6-69
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO PC COMMAND SAVING

6.10.1 FORM STORE START COMMAND [ESC] XO

Function Declares the start of form storage.

Format [ESC] XO; aa, b [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Form No.

01 to 20
b: Form version No.
0 to 9 (It is not stored when “0” is designated)

Notes (1) Max. 20 types can be stored. However, since the memory capacity is limited, the
maximum number may vary depending on the form size to be stored.
(2) The data which is stored most recently is the newest in spite of the version No.
(3) When the form number which has been stored is stored again, the new form can
be stored if the Form Store Start Command ([ESC] XO) is sent. However,
memory is used every time a form is stored again.
(4) Until the Form Store Terminate Command ([ESC] XP) is received after the Form
Store Start Command ([ESC] XO) is received, any command other than below is
not stored and is ignored.
• Label Size Set Command ([ESC] D)
• Print Density Fine Adjust Command ([ESC] AY)
• Position Fine Adjust Command ([ESC] AX)
• Bit Map Font Field Command ([ESC] PC)
• Outline Font Field Command ([ESC] PV)
• Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Format Command ([ESC] XB)
• Graphic Field Command ([ESC] N)
• Line Format Command ([ESC] LC)
(5) If the Form Store Start Command is not sent, the Label Size Set Command ([ESC]
D), the Bit Map Font Field Command ([ESC] PC), the Outline Font Field Command
([ESC] PV), the Barcode/Two-dimensional Code Format Command ([ESC] XB),
and the Graphic Field Command ([ESC] N) are ignored and discarded.
After the Form Store Start Command is sent, the Label Size Set Command should
be sent before each field command, the Print Density Fine Adjust Command, or the
Position Fine Adjust Command is sent.
(6) When there is no free space in the form storage area in flash ROM because of
storing a form, this area is automatically initialized. However, the latest version of
each form is held.
(7) Since the drawing buffer is cleared after receiving this command, reprint by the
reprint key is disabled.

Refer to Form Store Terminate Command ([ESC] XP)

Example To start storing version 3 of form No. 2.

[ESC] XO; 02, 3 [LF] [NUL]

6-70
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.10.2 FORM STORE TERMINATE COMMAND [ESC] XP

Function Declares the termination of form storage.

Format [ESC] XP [LF] [NUL]

Note (1) If the Form Store Start Command ([ESC] XO) is not previously received when this
command is received, this command is ignored.

Refer to Form Store Start Command ([ESC] XO)

6-71
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO CHECK

6.11.1 MESSAGE DISPLAY COMMAND [ESC] XJ

Function Displays the message on the LCD.

Format [ESC] XJ; aaa ------ aaa [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa ------ aaa: Display data (16 digits)

Explanation (1) When the printer receives the Message Display Command, first it processes the
already received data (or completes the label issue if the data print command has
been sent). Then, it displays the message on the LCD, and finally it enters a
pause state.

(2) When the [PAUSE] key is pressed, the pause state is cleared and the LCD
displays the normal message. After the pause state is cleared, the printer
resumes processing the data received after the Message Display Command.

Notes (1) The number of characters to be displayed is 16. When the display data is less
than 16 characters, the blanks are filled with spaces. When the display data
exceeds 16 characters, the excess data will be discarded.
(2) During a pause state, a halt due to an error, or a head open state, the Message
Display Command is not processed even if it is received. In this case, the
command is processed after the above state is cleared.

(3) The following characters can be displayed on the LCD.

If any character other than the mentioned below is received, “?” is displayed or a
command error occurs.

2 3 4 5 6 7 A B C D
0 SP 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 ” 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ’ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n →
F / ? O _ o ←
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.

6-72
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.12 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL

6.12.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] WR, [ESC] @

Function Returns the printer to its initial state.

Format [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] @

Explanation (1) The printer is returned to the same state as when the power is turned on.
(2) If the printer receives this command during printing, the printer prints the label
which is being printed, then performs initialization.
(3) After the Initialize Command is sent (or after printing is completed, if printing is
performed), the next command must not be sent within approx. 30 seconds on the
wireless LAN model or within 5 seconds on other models since the printer perform
initialization. In IrDA: TEC Protocol, if ACK/status transmission is specified by the
Issue Command, the printer returns an ACK, which indicates the command
process end, to the EOT after the printer is initialized. In RS-232C, when the
status response is specified, the printer returns the status (10H). After this status
is received, the next command may be sent. In IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX,
USB, Bluetooth, or Wireless LAN, the printer does not return the status.
(4) To use IrDA interface for sending this command to the printer, only this command
should be sent. After the command is sent, the link should be terminated. Even
if the host does not terminate the link, the printer performs the termination process.
Therefore, after initialization is completed, the host should establish the link again.
(5) When receiving this command during data transmission, the printer is initialized
after transmission is completed.

Notes (1) If a command error or communication error occurs when receiving the Reset
Command, an error message is displayed in the online mode. However, it is not
displayed in the SYSTEM mode.
(2) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or the
Graphic Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Reset Command is not processed
until the printer receives the data specifying the type of data.

6-73
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.12.2 BATCH RESET COMMAND [ESC] Z0 (ZERO)

Function Resets the printer.

Format [ESC] Z0 [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command will not be executed until the printer enters an idle state.

6-74
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.13 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS

6.13.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS, [ESC] V

Function Sends the printer status to the host computer.

Format [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] FM [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] v

Explanation (1) When receiving this command, the printer sends the printer status and battery
status to the host.
• For IrDA: TEC Protocol: Data to be sent (Fixed at 27 bytes)

STX Printer ID Version No. of each form Printer status Battery status CRC
02H xxH xxH V01 V02 ········· V20 xxH xxH xxH xxH

• For IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN:
Data to be sent (Fixed at 5 bytes)

STX Printer ID Printer status Battery status

02H xxH xxH xxH xxH

Printer ID ............... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)
Printer status ......... Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data.
00H: Normal status (Idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken thermal head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Operating
0DH: Normal end + Label end (See NOTE.)
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
0FH: Wait for strip
(10H: Normal issue end):
Response status for automatic status transmission
14H: Pause state
19H: Ambient temperature error
32H: Abnormal battery temperature
33H: Battery excessive temperature
37H: Charging error
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialiation error)
45H: Wait for battery recovery
46H: Wait for print head temperature reduction
47H: Wait for motor temperature reduction
55H: Writable character/PC command save mode

6-75
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Status in the compatible mode for B-SP series

00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken thermal head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
including ambient temperature error, abnormal battery
temperature and battery excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Printer operating
including the following statuses: wait for strip, pause
state, writable character/PC command save mode, wait
for battery recovery and wait for print head/motor
temperature reduction
0DH: Normal end + Label end (See NOTE.)
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
(10H: Normal issue end):
Response status for automatic status transmission
37H: Charging error
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)

NOTE: This is a state when the printer runs out of labels, after
the effective print length is printed.
Battery status ........ The battery charge status is indicated in 5 levels.
(B-EP2DL)
01H: 7.2 V or less (Print failure)
02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 1 to 30)
03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 30 to 150)
04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 150 to 300)
05H: 8.0 V to 8.4 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 300 min.)

6-76
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(B-EP4DL)
01H: 14.0 V or less (Print failure)
02H: 14.1 V to 14.6 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 1 to 30)
03H: 14.7 V to 15.2 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 30 to 150)
04H: 15.3 V to 15.9 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 150 to 300)
05H: 16.0 V to 16.8 V
(Remaining No. of printable labels: Approx. 300 min.)
* The remaining number of printable labels may vary according to
the contents to be printed and the ambient environment.
CRC ......................... 2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High)

6-77
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.13.2 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WB

Function Sends information on the printer status and the free space of the receive buffer to the
host.

Format [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command makes the printer send information on its status and free space of
the receive buffer, regardless of the setting of the Status Response parameter.
(2) The status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and indicates the latest
status only. The remaining count indicates the remaining print count of the batch
currently being printed only. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed
is transmitted.
(3) Free space of the receive buffer for the interface which sent this command, is
returned to the host.
[IrDA: TEC Protocol] Data to be transmitted (fixed at22 bytes)

STX Printer ID Status Remaining No. of labels Length

02H 3xH 3xH 33H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 32H 32H

Receiving buffer space Entire receiving buffer space CRC

3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 30H 30H 35H 31H 32H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Data to be transmitted (fixed at 23 bytes)

SOH STX Printer status Status type Remaining No. of labels Length
01H 02H 3xH 3xH 33H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 32H 33H

Receiving buffer space Entire receiving buffer space CR LF

3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 30H 30H 35H 31H 32H 0DH 0AH

6-78
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Printer status ......... Printer status is indicated in 2-byte data.

“00”: Normal status
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating
“04”: Pause state
“05”: Wait for strip
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken thermal print head dots
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature
“19”: Ambient temperature error
“32”: Abnormal battery temperature
“33”: Battery excessive temperature
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
“45”: Wait for battery recovery
“46”: Wait for print head temperature reduction
“47”: Wait for motor temperature reduction
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state
“55”: Writable character/PC command save mode
Remaining No. of labels ... Indicates the remaining number of labels in four bytes.
“0000” to “9999”
Length: ..................Indicates the number of bytes of the entire status data
IrDA: TEC Protocol: Fixed at “22.”
IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB,
RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN: Fixed at “23.”
Receive buffer free space: .... Indicates the free space of the receive buffer.
Entire receive buffer free space: .... Indicates the entire free space of the receive buffer.
Fixed at “00512.”
CRC/CR, LF: ......... Indicates the end of the status block.

6-79
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes (1) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.
(2) The printer returns the same status, regardless of whether or not the compatible
mode for the B-SP series is set.
(3) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not processed
until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.

(4) After receiving the Status Request Command, there may be a maximum of 20-
msec. delay until the printer sends a status.
(5) At least, a 20-msec. interval must be given between the transmissions of the
Status Request Command. If the next Status Request Command is transmitted
within 20 msec., the printer may fail to receive it.

Example [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

6-80
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.13.3 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX

Function Sends the printer mode information to the host.

Format [ESC] WX [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) The status when the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on differs from the
status when the compatible mode is off.
(2) The mode information format to be sent to the host, is as follows:

• When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is off.

LABEL mode (Mode = 0)
Batch issue mode
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
Mode information (16 bytes)
STX CRC CRC
L A B E L SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 4CH 41H 42H 45H 4CH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Mode information (16 bytes)
STX
L A B E L SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 4CH 41H 42H 45H 4CH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H

Strip issue mode

[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
Mode information (16 bytes)
STX CRC CRC
L A B E L ( S ) SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 4CH 41H 42H 45H 4CH 28H 53H 29H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Mode information (16 bytes)
STX
L A B E L ( S ) SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 4CH 41H 42H 45H 4CH 28H 53H 29H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H

6-81
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

The previous page shows examples where the message is received in LABEL mode
when the compatible mode for the B-SP series is off. In addition, the following
messages are returned.

TPCL mode TPCL

TPCL1 mode TPCL1
LABEL mode LABEL
RECEIPT mode RECEIPT
RECEIPT1 mode RECEIPT1
ESC/POS mode ESC/POS
Online reset menu USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for users
USER„SYSTEM
PAUSE + POWER keys
When the password setting is on
USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for and before it is entered
administrators When the password setting is on
SYSTEM
FEED + POWER keys and after it is entered
When the password setting is off SYSTEM
TPCL (strip issue mode) TPCL„(S)
TPCL1 (strip issue mode) TPCL1 (S)
LABEL (strip issue mode) LABEL (S)

* „ indicates a space.

6-82
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

• When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on.

LABEL mode (Mode = 0)
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
Mode information (16 bytes)
STX CRC CRC
L A B E L SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 4CH 41H 42H 45H 4CH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Mode information (16 bytes)
STX
L A B E L SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 4CH 41H 42H 45H 4CH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H

The above shows examples where the message is received in LABEL mode when the
compatible mode for the B-SP series is off. In addition, the following messages are
returned.

TPCL mode TPCL-LE

TPCL1 mode TPCL-LE1
LABEL mode LABEL
RECEIPT mode RECEIPT
RECEIPT1 mode RECEIPT1
ESC/POS mode ESC/POS
Online reset menu USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for users
USER„SYSTEM
PAUSE + POWER keys
When the password setting is on
USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for and before it is entered
administrators When the password setting is on
SYSTEM
FEED + POWER keys and after it is entered
When the password setting is off SYSTEM

* „ indicates a space.

6-83
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.13.4 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WV

Function Sends information such as the program version of the printer.

Format [ESC] WV [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) The format of the program version data to be returned to the host is as follows.
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]

STX 02H
“0” 30H
“4” 34H
“A” 41H
“P” 50H
Creation date “R” 52H Creation date of the program:
“2” 32H 9-byte data indicated in order of Day-
“0” 30H Month-Year
“0” 30H
“8” 38H
“B” 42H
“-” 2DH
“E” 45H
Model “P” 50H Model:
“2” 32H 7-byte ASCII code indicating the model
“D” 44H B-EP2DG (2-inch/203-dpi model)
“G” 47H B-EP4DG (4-inch/203-dpi model)
“V” 56H
“1” 31H
Version “.” 2EH Program version:
“0” 30H 5-byte data: Vx.xx
“A” 41H Revision

CRC xxH Version

CRC xxH

6-84
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

SOH 01H
STX 02H
“0” 30H
“4” 34H
“A” 41H
“P” 50H
Creation date “R” 52H Creation date of program:
“2” 32H 9 bytes of data indicated in order of Day-
“0” 30H Month-Year
“0” 30H
“8” 38H
“B” 42H
“-” 2DH
“E” 45H
Model “P” 50H Model:
“2” 32H 7-byte ASCII code indicating the model
“D” 44H B-EP2DG (2-inch/203-dpi model)
“G” 47H B-EP4DG (4-inch/203-dpi model)
“V” 56H
“1” 31H
Version “.” 2EH Program version:
“0” 30H 5 bytes of data: Vx.xx
“A” 41H Revision

ETX 03H Version

EOT 04H
CR 0DH
LF 0AH

Notes (1) No statuses are returned when using USB.

Example [ESC] WV [LF] [NUL]

6-85
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.14 COMMANDS RELATED TO BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LAN

6.14.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT

Function Reads the device address of the Bluetooth interface or MAC address of the wireless
LAN interface.

Format [ESC] IT [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command reads the device address of the Bluetooth or MAC address of the
Wireless LAN. When using the IrDA, the following information field is placed in
the information frame and sent.
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Bluetooth device address or Wireless LAN MAC address CRC

02H 12 bytes xxH xxH

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, RS-232C, USB,
Bluetooth, Wireless LAN is used]

STX Bluetooth device address or Wireless LAN MAC address

02H 12 bytes

The printer sends the following information:

Bluetooth device address: 0015b5aa0005
Wireless LAN MAC address: 000940387630

Bluetooth device address

[30H] [30H] [31H] [35H] [62H] [35H] [61H] [61H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [35H]
0 0 1 5 b 5 a a 0 0 0 5
Wireless LAN MAC address
[30H] [30H] [30H] [39H] [34H] [30H] [33H] [38H] [37H] [36H] [33H] [30H]
0 0 0 9 4 0 3 8 7 6 3 0

6-86
 CHAPTER 6 LABEL MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

6.14.2 BLUETOOTH RELATED PARAMETER ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WT

Function Acquires the parameter settings related to the Bluetooth.

Format [ESC] WT [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command reads the parameters related to the Bluetooth. When using the
IrDA, the following information field is placed in the information frame and sent to
the host.
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Sec Inq Interval Window

02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Inquiry/page window
0018 to 4096
Inquiry/page interval
0018 to 4096
Inquiry timer
0 (30H): Inquiry is not possible.
1 (31H): Inquiry is possible only within 60 seconds after a
printer power on
2 (32H): Inquiry is possible at anytime.
Security setting
1 (31H): No security
2 (32H): No security
3 (33H): Link level security is effective

Bluetooth device name CRC

32 bytes xxH xxH
Bluetooth device name: Fixed at 32 bytes.

When the Bluetooth device name is “TOSHIBA TEC BT.”

[54H] [4FH] [53H] [48H] [49H] [42H] [41H] [20H] [54H] [45H] [43H] [20H] [42H] [54H] [00H] [00H]
T O S H I B A ‘’ T E C ‘’ B T
[00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H]

* When the Bluetooth device name is less than 32 bytes, the remaining bytes are filled
with 00H.

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C,
Bluetooth or Wireless LAN is used]

STX Sec Inq Interval Window

02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Bluetooth device name

32 bytes

6-87
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7. RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)

7.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes details regarding the interface commands for the RECEIPT and RECEIPT1
modes of the print mode. If operations are the same between the RECEIPT mode and the
RECEIPT1 mode, only “RECEIPT mode” is described in explanations, and the RECEIPT1 mode is
included. If operations are different between them, the RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1 or 3) or the
RECEIPT1 mode (Mode = 2) is specified. In the RECEIPT mode, only batch issues are supported.

This printer has 2 modes: standard mode and page mode.

In standard mode, the printer performs a print job or feeds paper every time the line feed command
([LF]) is received. In page mode, however, all received line feed commands ([LF]) are just
expanded in the print area on the memory and the printer does not operate. Once the Page Mode
Print Command ([FF]) is executed, the printer prints all data expanded in the print area in a collective
manner.

Line feed command Page mode select

([LF]) command ([GS] C)
Printing
Standard mode Page mode

Line feed command

([LF])
Page mode print
command ([FF])
Printing

Clearing
drawing buffer
Page mode cancel
command ([CAN])

Either of the language types, Kanji, Chinese and Korean, can be implemented. Any font other than
the on-board fonts is selectable.

7-1
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.2 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS

7.2.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND

ESC Command

GS Command

ESC Command LF NUL

FF

CAN

The control codes are as follows:

y ESC (1BH)
y LF (0AH)
y NUL (00H)
y GS (1DH)
y FF (0CH)
y CAN (18H)

7.2.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE

Function Describes the outline of the function of the command.

Format Shows the format of the command

The format designation method should conform to the following rules:
• “n” indicates a parameter item.
• Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be
transmitted in practice.
• Other symbols must always be inserted at the designated positions before
being transmitted.

Term Explains the term(s) used in the format.

Initial value Indicates the initial value of the parameter (when turning the power on, or
changing the print mode to the RECEIPT mode.)

Explanation Explains the command in detail.

Refer to Related commands

7-2
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.2.3 PRECAUTIONS

(1) The host should send the print data and the Print Line Feed Command for printing.
Commands other than these should be sent as required.

(2) Character type

Only standard characters are used when printing the data.
[Ex] 12345ABCDE
[31H] [32H] [33H] [34H] [35H] [41H] [42H] [43H] [44H] [45H]
1 2 3 4 5 A B C D E
(3) While the RECEIPT mode is selected, writable character data cannot be stored. To store
writable character data, change the print mode from the RECEIPT mode to the LABEL or the
TPCL mode.
(4) [FEED] key
In the RECEIPT mode, if the [FEED] key is pressed, the receipt is not printed again. A 20-mm
feed is performed. To cut a receipt using the tear bar after issuing it, a receipt can be fed to
the position at which the receipt can be easily cut by pressing the [FEED] key.
(5) Error processing
[RECEIPT mode]
When an error occurs while the printer is issuing a receipt, the LED blinks. The printer
discards all data and commands which have been received, and enters a wait state for a
command. Therefore, if an error occurs, the print data or a command should be sent again
after clearing the error.
[RECEIPT1 mode]
After the label end error or the cover open error is cleared, the printer automatically continues
printing the data which has been received before the error occurred.
(6) Status response
In the RECEIPT mode, the printer does not automatically send a status indicating the normal
end. Therefore, the host should send the Status Request Command to check the printer
status. However, when the Mode Select Command or the Graphic Command is sent, or if an
error occurs, the printer sends the status. In IrDA: IrCOMM communications, only when the
status transmission is specified, the printer sends the status.
(7) Initial values (Default setting values of parameters designated by commands.)
When the power is turned on or when RECEIPT mode or RECEIPT1 mode is selected, the
initial values will be set. The initial values are also set when the mode is switched between
RECEIPT mode and RECEIPT1 mode, or when the mode is switched from RECEIPT mode to
RECEIPT mode, or from RECEIPT1 mode to RECEIPT1 mode.

7-3
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.3 COMMANDS RELATED TO SETTING

7.3.1 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M

Function Changes the print mode.

Format [ESC] M; a(,b) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Print mode designation

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Print mode (Bit 0 to Bit 6 * See Table 1.)

Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB
0: Not performed
1: Performed
* Table 1 Print mode

HEX Mode How to deal with the received data after an error is cleared
30H LABEL Discards
31H RECEIPT Discards
32H RECEIPT1 Continues printing
34H ESC/POS Continues printing
41H TPCL Continues printing
42H TPCL1 Continues printing

b: Print position detection feed (Omissible. If omitted, the print position detection
feed is not performed.)
0: When the mode change from RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS to LABEL,
TPCL or TPCL1 is requested, a print position detection feed is not performed
after the mode is changed.
1: When the mode change from RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS to LABEL,
TPCL or TPCL1 is requested, a print position detection feed is performed after
the mode is changed.

Explanation (1) There are 4 types of the print mode: “LABEL”, “RECEIPT,” “TPCL” and
“ESC/POS.”
(2) “Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB” is the function for the
specifications which do not allow the printer to spontaneously send the status
through IrDA; IrCOMM or USB. This function enables the printer to forcefully send
the status to the host, if the link between the printer and the host is established.
However, if the link between the printer and the host is not established upon the
status transmission, the printer cannot send the status. Therefore, the status is
discarded. (In the next connection to the host, the printer does not send the
status to the host.)

7-4
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(3) The sensor is not used in the RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode. When
sensor detectable paper is used for receipts and labels, print position detection
feed cannot be done in the LABEL, TPCL or TPCL1 mode. By setting the print
position detection feed parameter to 1, print position detection feed is carried out
after the mode is changed to LABEL, TPCL or TPCL1.
(4) In the TPCL1 mode, it is possible to re-print the last print data by pressing the
FEED button.

Notes (1) The print mode designation (the specified print mode and the automatic status
response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB) is backed up in memory (even if the power is
turned off).
(2) The factory default is “TPCL mode” and “Automatic status response in IrDA:
IrCOMM or USB is not performed.” (The IrDA protocol is “IrCOMM.”)
(3) When the print mode is changed, the type of sensor is automatically changed.
LABEL mode (0): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
TPCL mode (A): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
TPCL1 mode (B): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
RECEIPT mode (1): No sensor is designated.
RECEIPT1 mode (2): No sensor is designated.
ESC/POS mode (4): No sensor is designated.
(4) If the RECEIPT mode is selected or no sensor is designated in the LABEL or TPCL
mode, an initial feed is not performed when the cover is closed (when the print
position detection feed after the cover is closed is enabled with key operations or
using the set command ([ESC] ZM03)).
(5) When the mode change is finished, the printer sends the normal end status or an
ACK to the host. However, when the mode is changed to the TPCL mode, the
printer does not send the status. In IrDA: IrCOMM or USB, only when bit 7 of the
print mode designation is set to “1”, the printer sends the status.

(6) The print mode can be changed by the printer itself. However, since the setting
for the automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB cannot be changed, the
setting remains as the same.

(7) As the print position detection feed parameter is effective only when changing the
print mode to LABEL or TPCL, this parameter status will be ignored when changing
the mode to RECEIPT, RECEPT1 or ESC/POS.

(8) The print position detection feed is performed according to the conditions, such as,
label pitch, fine adjustment, and sensor selection, which were set in the LABEL or
TPCL mode before the printer is operated in RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS
mode. If no sensor is selected, the print position detection feed will not be
performed.
(9) After performing a print position detection feed, the printer does not send a process
end status. If an error occurs during the print position detection feed, the feed is
performed after the error is cleared by pressing the PAUSE key (when the print
position detection feed after the cover is closed is enabled with key operations or
using the set command ([ESC] ZM03)).

7-5
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(10) When changing the print mode by the printer itself, the print position detection feed
parameter cannot be set.
(11) When the mode select command is designated with the print position detection
feed at the end of a print data issued in RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode, and if an
error occurs while printing, the printing will restart after the error is cleared and
then, the print mode will be changed to the LABEL or TPCL mode and a print
position detection feed is performed. When the print position detection feed
setting is omitted, the mode is not changed to LABEL or TPCL (the mode select
command is discarded).
(12) When the LABEL or TPCL mode is selected in the mode select command and the
print position detection feed parameter is set 0 (not performed), and if an error
occurs while the printer issues in RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode, the print mode is
changed to the LABEL or TPCL mode after the error is cleared. (The mode select
command is executed.)

7-6
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.3.2 PRINTER ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID

Function Sets the ID for the printer.

Format [ESC] ID; aa [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Printer ID (2-byte hex data)

0000H to FFFFH

Explanation (1) The printer ID is the information required to identify each printer when
communicating according to the IrDA: TEC Protocol.

Notes (1) The set printer ID is backed up in memory (even if the Initialize command ([ESC]
WR, [ESC] @) is executed or the power is turned off).
(2) The last 5 digits of the printer’s serial number have been set as the printer ID, at
the time of shipment from the factory.
(3) In IrDA: TEC Protocol, the printer checks the set ID against the ID in the received
command packet. If they do not match, the printer discards the command packet.
However, when the ID in the command packet is “0”, the printer accepts the
command packet without checking the set IDs.

Example To set “03H 51H” as the ID of the printer:

[ESC] ID; [03H] [51H] [LF] [NUL]
In this case, the printer ID in status printing is “00849.”

7-7
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.4 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT

7.4.1 LINE FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] 3

Function Sets the length of the line feed (the number of dots) which is performed by the Print Line
Feed Command ([LF]).

Format [ESC] 3n

Term n: Length of line feed (1 byte)

00H to FFH (0 to 255 dots)

Initial value n: 1EH (30 dots)

Explanation (1) When the power is turned on or the printer enters the RECEIPT mode, the initial
value is 30 dots
(2) When the specified length of the line feed is larger than the character on the next
line or the height of the barcode plus 6 dots, a line feed with the specified length is
performed.
(3) When the specified length of the line feed is smaller than the character on the next
line or the height of the barcode plus 6 dots, the specified length of the line feed is
ignored, and a line feed with the height of the character or the barcode to be
printed is performed.

Paper feed direction

Initial value:
30 dots ABC ABC [LF]

DEF [LF]
DEF
When the print height is
larger than the set
value, a line feed with
the print height is [GS] k3 *87654321* [NUL] [LF]
performed. * 8 7 6 5 4 3

1234567890 1234567890 [LF]

123 ABC 123 [ESC] ! <30H> ABC [LF]

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

Refer to Print Line Feed Command ([LF])

7-8
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.4.2 PRINT POSITION ALIGN COMMAND [ESC] a

Function Aligns the print position on the left, the right, or at the center.

Format [ESC] an

Term n: Alignment
0: Left
1: Center
2: Right

Initial value n: 0 (Left)

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.

(2) This command is effective for all lines which are printed after the command is
received.
(3) For CODE128, EAN128 and UCC/EAN128, the print position should be aligned on
the left.

Paper feed direction

Alignment : Left
(Initial value) ABC ABC [LF]

DEF [LF]
DEF

Alignment : Center [ESC] a1 ABC [LF]

ABC

[GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF]

4940 0458

Alignment : Right ABC [ESC] a2 ABC [LF]

1234567890 1234567890 [LF]

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

7-9
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.4.3 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY

Function Adjusts the automatically set print density.

Format [ESC] AY; abb, c (, d) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density

+: Increase (Darker)
-: Decrease (Lighter)
bb: Fine adjustment value for print density
00 to 30 (in units of 1 step)
c: Print mode
0: Reserved
1: Direct thermal
d: Head output division designation
(Omissible. When omitted, settings backed up by the memory are valid.)
2-inch print head width
0: Auto (Divided by 2 or 3)
1: Reserved (When designated, automatic selection of bipartite/tripartite
division is performed.)
2: Divided by 3 (Fixed)
3: Auto1 (Not divided/Divided by 2 or 3)/Print quality oriented
4: Reserved (When designated, tripartite division is performed.)
5: Auto2 (Not divided/Divided by 2 or 3)/Print speed oriented
(supported in V1.0E or later)
4-inch print head width
0: Auto (Divided by 2, 3 or 6)
1: Reserved (When designated, automatic selection of bipartite/tripartite/
6-partite division is performed.)
2: Reserved (When designated, automatic selection of bipartite/tripartite/
6-partite division is performed.)
3: Auto1 (Not divided/Divided by 2, 3 or 6)
4: Divided by 6 (Fixed)

Explanation (1) The standard density is finely adjusted to increase or decrease.

(2) When any fine adjustment value for print density out of the above range is set, a
command error occurs.
(3) When designating any value other than “1: Direct thermal” the print mode is
corrected to 1.
(4) The default value of the head output division designation is “3: Auto1 (Not
divided/Divided by 2 or 3)” on the 2-inch print head and “3: Auto1 (Not
divided/Divided by 2, 3 or 6)” on the 4-inch print head.
(5) When “0: Auto” is designated on the 2-inch print head, “Divided by 2” or “Divided by
3” is automatically selected for every line according to the print ratio. The width of
half a dot may not be printed on the line when switching between “Divided by 2”
and “Divided by 3”. Therefore, do not designate “0: Auto” when a serial barcode is
printed.

7-10
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) When “3: Auto1” or “5: Auto2” is designated for the 2-inch print head, “Not divided,”
“Divided by 3” or “Divided by 2” is automatically selected for every line according to
the print ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line when
switching among “Not divided,” “Divided by 2” and “Divided by 3.” Therefore, do
not designate “3: Auto1” or “5: Auto2” when a serial barcode is printed.
The difference between Auto1 and Auto2 is while Auto1 is print quality oriented,
Auto2 is print speed oriented. Auto2 is designated to increase the print speed
although the print is slightly faded.
(7) When “0: Auto” is designated on the 4-inch print head, “Divided by 2”, “Divided by
3” or “Divided by 6” is automatically selected for every line according to the print
ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line when switching
among “Divided by 2,” “Divided by 3” and “Divided by 6.” Therefore, do not
designate “0: Auto” when a serial barcode is printed.
(8) When “3: Auto1” is designated on the 4-inch print head, “Not divided,” “Divided by
2,” “Divided by 3” or “Divided by 6” is automatically selected for every line
according to the print ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line
when switching among “Not divided,” “Divided by 2,” “Divided by 3” and “Divided by
6.” Therefore, do not designate “3: Auto1” when a serial barcode is printed.

Notes (1) The set fine adjustment value for print density and the head output division
designation are backed up in memory (retained even if the power is turned off).
(2) The fine adjustment value changed by the Print Density Fine Adjust Command in
the RECEIPT mode, is also effective for the TPCL, LABEL and ESC/POS modes.
(3) When the head output division designation is omitted, the backed up value in
memory is used.

(4) When print density fine adjustment is selected in the SYSTEM mode (through key
operations on the printer), the fine adjustment value is a sum of the value in the
fine adjustment command and the system mode fine adjustment value. Note that
the maximum fine adjustment value is ±30.0 mm

Examples To set the density to - 2:

[ESC] AY; -02, 1 [LF] [NUL]

To set the density to + 3:

[ESC] AY; +03, 1 [LF] [NUL]

7-11
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5 COMMANDS RELATED TO DRAWING FORMAT

7.5.1 LINE FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] L

Function Specifies the line format and draws it.

Format [ESC] Labbb

[ESC] Lcddeeee

Term a: Line width

1 to 9 (in units of dots)
bbb: Line length
001 to 999 (in units of dots)

c: Expansion parameter
e (Command parameter expansion designated)
dd: No. of line width dots
01 to 99 (in units of dots)
Note that any value of 9 or more is corrected to 9.
eeee: No. of line length dots
0001 to 1296 (in units of dots)

Explanation (1) The print position of the line is shown below:

Paper feed direction [Enlarged view]

100 dots

3 dots

Initial value: 000 dot ABC ABC [LF]

DEF [ESC] L3100 [LF]

Line DEF
100
Left margin: 100 dots ABC [ESC] H100 ABC [LF]

[GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF]

4940 0458

Offset: 100 dots, 100

Alignment: Center ABC [ESC] C +100 [ESC] a1 ABC [LF]

Alignment: Right 123 [ESC] a2 123 [LF]

Left margin: 0 dot,

Alignment: Left 456 [ESC] H000 [ESC] a0 456 [LF]

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

7-12
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Note (1) If the print ratio of one line (the print head width) is higher than defined, printing
may become poor, or the printer may be reset. When a horizontal line is to be
drawn, note the print ratio.
(2) When any line length exceeding the effective print width, the length is corrected to
the maximum head width that varies depending on model.

B-EP2DL-GHxx B-EP4DL-GHxx
Max. head width 48.0 mm 104.0 mm

7-13
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.2 FONT TYPE COMMAND [ESC] K

Function Specifies the font used for printing.

Format [ESC] Kn

Initial value n: A: Standard character

Term n: Font type

A: Standard Character (12 × 24 dots)
B: Bold Character (48 × 96 dots)
C: Writable Character (24 × 24 dots)
D: Price Font 1 (16 × 40 dots)
E: Price Font 2 (32 × 48 dots)
203-dpi print head
F: Times Roman (Bold) 21 points
G: Helvetica (Bold) 18 points
H: Letter Gothic (Medium) 14.3 points
I: Courier (Medium) 15 points
J: Presentation (Bold) 27 points
O: GOTHIC725 Black 6 points
Q: Chinese/Writable Character (24 × 24 dots)
R: Korean/Writable Character (24 × 24 dots)
S: (Reserved)
T: (Reserved)
U: (Reserved)

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.

7-14
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.3 OUTLINE FONT FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] KV

Function Sets the outline font.

Format [ESC] KVabbbccc

Initial value None

Term a: Font type

A: TEC Font 1 (Helvetica [Bold])
B: TEC Font 1 (Helvetica [Bold], Proportional)
K: Reserved
bbb: Character width
016 to 240 (in units of dots)
ccc: Character height
016 to 240 (in units of dots)

Explanation (1) When “a,” “bbb,” and “ccc” are set to any value other than the above, a command
error occurs.

7-15
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.4 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE PRINT COMMAND [GS] k

Function Prints the specified barcode/two-dimensional code.

Format [GS] kn <bar data> [NUL]

Term n: Type of barcode/two-dimensional code

0: JAN8/EAN8
1: MSI
2: Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
3: CODE39 (Standard)
4: NW7
5: JAN13/EAN13
6: UPC-E
7: EAN13 + 2 digits
8: EAN13 + 5 digits
9: CODE128 (with auto code selection)
A: CODE128 (with auto code selection)
B: CODE39 (Full ASCII)
C: CODE93
G: UPC-E + 2 digits
H: UPC-E + 5 digits
I: EAN8 + 2 digits
J: EAN8 + 5 digits
K: UPC-A
L: UPC-A + 2 digits
M: UPC-A + 5 digits
N: EAN128
n: UCC/EAN128
P: PDF417 (Two-dimensional code)
T: QR code (Two-dimensional code)
<bar data>: Barcode/two-dimensional code data

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.

(2) When the type of barcode is JAN8, EAN8, EAN8 + 2 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits,
JAN13, EAN13, EAN13 + 2 digits, EAN13 + 5 digits, EAN128, UCC/EAN128,
CODE128, UPC-E, UPC-E + 2 digits, UPC-E + 5 digits, UPC-A, UPC-A + 2digits or
UPC-A + 5 digits, a check digit is automatically attached.
(3) When the type of barcode is CODE39, NW7, Interleaved 2 of 5 or MSI, a check
digit is not attached. When a NW7 is used, the start/stop codes are not attached.
Therefore, the host should attach them to the data.
(4) For CODE128, EAN128 and UCC/EAN128, only barcodes aligned on the left can
be printed.

(5) For QR code, the mode, the mask number, and the connection settings are as
follows: Automatic mode, automatically-set mask number, no connection.

7-16
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Paper feed direction

ABC ABC [LF]

[GS] k3 *87654321* [NUL] [LF]

*87654321*

[GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF]

4940 0458

Effective print width (width of head)

Width of receipt

Refer to Barcode Horizontal Size Command ([GS] w)

Barcode Height Command ([GS] h)
Numerals Under Bars Command ([GS] H)
Security Level Command ([GS] s)
No. of Columns (Strings) Command ([GS] c)
Error Correction Level Set Command (for QR code) ([GS] q)
QR Code Model Set Command ([GS] r)

7-17
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.5 CHARACTER MAGNIFICATION COMMAND [ESC] !

Function Designates the magnification of the character to be printed.

Format [ESC] !n

Term n: Character magnification (1 byte)

00H: 1 magnification (horizontal) × 1 magnification (vertical)
10H: 1 magnification (horizontal) × 2 magnification (vertical)
20H: 2 magnification (horizontal) × 1 magnification (vertical)
30H: 2 magnification (horizontal) × 2 magnification (vertical)
40H: 2 magnification (horizontal) × 3 magnification (vertical)
50H: 3 magnification (horizontal) × 2 magnification (vertical)
60H: 3 magnification (horizontal) × 3 magnification (vertical)
70H: 3 magnification (horizontal) × 4 magnification (vertical)
80H: 4 magnification (horizontal) × 3 magnification (vertical)
90H: 4 magnification (horizontal) × 4 magnification (vertical)

Initial value n: 00H (1 magnification (horizontal) × 1 magnification (vertical))

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.

(2) After this command is received, it is effective until the setting is changed again by
the Character Magnification Command in spite of a line feed or printing.

Paper feed direction

AB AB AB [ESC] ! <10H> AB [ESC] ! <20H>

AB [ESC] ! <30H> AB [LF]
2×2 mag.
2×1 mag.

1×2 mag.

1×1 mag. (initial value)

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

7-18
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.6 BARCODE HORIZONTAL SIZE COMMAND [GS] w

Function Sets the horizontal size of the barcode. For QR code, the 1-cell width is set.

Format [GS] wn

Term n: Horizontal size of the barcode (1 byte)

02H to 05H

Initial value n: 02H

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.
(2) The horizontal size designated by this command is as follows.
1 dot = 1/8 mm on the 203-dpi printer.

The maximum value varies depending on model and barcode type.

Model B-EP2DL-GHxx B-EP2DL-GHxx

Range 02H to 05H 02H to 0AH
Initial value 02H 02H
JAN-system *1 Max. value 03H 06H
NW7-system *2 Max. value 05H 0AH
PDF417 Max. value 03H 06H
QR code Max. value 05H 0AH

*1 The JAN system refers to JAN8, EAN8, EAN8 + 2 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits,
JAN13, EAN13, EAN13 + 2 digits, EAN13 + 5 digits, EAN128, UCC/EAN128,
CODE128, UPC-E, UPC-E + 2 digits, UPC-E + 5 digits, UPC-A, UPC-A + 2
digits, UPC-A + 5 digits and CODE93.
*2 The NW7 system refers to NW7, CODE39, Interleaved 2 of 5 and MSI.

[JAN8, EAN8, EAN8 + 2 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits, JAN13, EAN13, EAN13 + 2 digits,
EAN13 + 5 digits, EAN128, UCC/EAN128, CODE128, UPC-E, UPC-E + 2 digits,
UPC-E + 5 digits, UPC-A, UPC-A + 2 digits, UPC-A + 5 digits, CODE93]

1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules

n
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
02H 2 4 6 8
03H 3 6 9 12
04H 4 8 12 16
05H 5 10 15 20
06H 6 12 18 24
07H 7 14 21 28
08H 8 16 24 32
09H 9 18 27 36
(Unit: dots)

7-19
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[NW7, CODE39, Interleaved 2 of 5, MSI]

Narrow Wide
n Character-to-character space
Bar Space Bar Space
02H 2 2 5 5 2
03H 2 2 6 6 2
04H 3 3 8 8 3
05H 3 3 9 9 3
06H 4 4 11 11 4
07H 4 4 12 12 4
08H 5 5 14 14 5
09H 5 5 15 15 5
0AH 6 6 17 17 6
0BH 6 6 18 18 6
0CH 7 7 20 20 7
0DH 7 7 21 21 7
0EH 8 8 23 23 8
0FH 8 8 24 24 8
(Unit: dots)
* The character-to-character space does not exist in Interleaved 2 of 5 and MSI.

[PDF417]

1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules 5 modules 6 modules

n
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
02H 2 4 6 8 10 12
03H 3 6 9 12 15 18
04H 4 8 12 16 20 24
05H 5 10 15 20 25 30
06H 6 12 18 24 30 36
07H 7 14 21 28 35 42
08H 8 16 24 32 40 48
09H 9 18 27 36 45 54
(Unit: dots)
[QR code]

n 1-cell size
02H 2
03H 3
04H 4
05H 5
06H 6
07H 7
08H 8
09H 9
(Unit: dots)

Refer to: Barcode/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command ([GS] k)

7-20
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.7 BARCODE HEIGHT COMMAND [GS] h

Function Sets the barcode height.

Format [GS] hn

Term n: Barcode height (1 byte)

01H to FFH (1 to 255 dots)

Initial value n: 68H (104 dots)

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.
* For PDF417, the bar height for one row is set by this command. Note that the height
of the whole barcode cannot be set by this command. The PDF417 can have the
maximum of 90 rows. Therefore, if 88 or more dots are specified, the PDF417 may
not be stored in the image buffer. In that case, the printer’s operation is not
guaranteed.

Paper feed direction

32 dots [GS] h <20H> [GS] k3*87654321*

[NUL] [LF]
*87654321*

64 dots
[GS] h <40H> [GS] k3*87654321*
[NUL] [LF]
*87654321*

96 dots
[GS] h <60H> [GS] k3*87654321*
[NUL] [LF]
*87654321*

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

Refer to Barcode/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command ([GS] k)

7-21
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.8 NUMERALS UNDER BARS COMMAND [GS] Hn

Function Sets numerals under bars.

Format [GS] Hn

Term n: Selection to print numerals under bars

0: Non-print
1: Print (with EAN guard bar)
2: Print (without EAN guard bar)

Initial value n: 1: Print (with EAN guard bar)

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.
(2) For NW7, CODE39, Interleaved 2 of 5 and MSI, if “n” is set to “1” or “2,” printing is
the same.
The length of the guard bar is fixed as follows:
y B-EP2DL-GHxx, B-EP4DL-GHxx: 16 dots (2 mm)

Paper feed direction

[GS] H0 [GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF]

[GS] H1 [GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF]

4940 0458

[GS] H2 [GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF]

4940 0458

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

Refer to Barcode/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command ([GS] k)

7-22
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.9 SECURITY LEVEL COMMAND [GS] s

Function Sets the security level.

Format [GS] sn

Initial value n: 00H

Term n: Security level to be set

00: Level 0
01: Level 1
02: Level 2
03: Level 3
04: Level 4
05: Level 5
06: Level 6
07: Level 7
08: Level 8

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.

(2) This command is effective for the PDF417 only. If this command is send for
printing other barcode/two-dimensional codes, the command will be ignored.

Refer to Barcode/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command ([GS] k)

7-23
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.10 NO. OF COLUMNS (STRINGS) COMMAND [GS] c

Function Sets the number of columns (strings).

Format [GS] cn

Initial value n: 06H

Term n: No. of columns (strings)

01H to 1EH (01 to 30)

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above range, a command error occurs.
(2) This command is effective for the PDF417 only. If this command is sent for
printing other barcode/two-dimensional codes, the command will be ignored.

Refer to: Barcode/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command ([GS] k)

7-24
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.11 PRINT WIDTH COMMAND [ESC] W

Function Sets the print width.

Format [ESC] Wnnn

Initial value nnn:

384 B-EP2DL-GHxx
832 B-EP4DL-GHxx

Term nnn: No. of dots for the print width matching the receipt width (Fixed at 3 digits).

≤ 384 B-EP2DL-GHxx
216 ≤ nnn
≤ 832 B-EP4DL-GHxx

Explanation (1) When “nnn” is set to any value other than the above range, a command error
occurs.
(2) The print width can be set, matching the receipt width. Using this command, the
data can be printed properly at the position where the alignment (right or center) is
specified. However, when paper width is smaller than the print head width, it is
necessary to adjust the print start position to the paper width via X-direction Fine
Adjustment through key operations, the Horizontal Print Position command or the
Horizontal Offset Position command. This should be done since the print width is
set using the center of the print head as an origin, not based on the left edge of the
print head.
(3) If the printer receives this command while receiving one part of 1-line data, the
printer prints the data which has been received before receiving this command,
then sets the print width. However, printing of the line is not guaranteed.
(4) If the data is not included in the specified print width, the excess data is not printed.

Refer to y Horizontal Print Position Command ([GS] H)

y Horizontal Offset Position Command ([GS] O)

7-25
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.12 HORIZONTAL PRINT POSITION COMMAND [ESC] H

Function Sets the left margin of the line (space from the left edge).

Format [ESC] Hnnn

Initial value nnn: 000 dot

Term nnn: No. of dots for the margin (space) from the left edge of the paper to the print start
position (Fixed at 3 digits)

to 383 B-EP2DL-GHxx
000
to 831 B-EP4DL-GHxx

Explanation (1) When “nnn” is set to any value other than the above range, a command error
occurs.
(2) This command is effective for all lines to be printed after it is received, until this
command is received again, the setting is initialized by the Mode Select Command,
or the power is turned off.

(3) When the alignment (left, right, center) is specified by the Position Align Command,
the alignment is performed within the effective range excluding the left margin set
by this command.

(4) In the case that the left margin is set for printing character strings and barcodes, if
the data is not included within one line excluding the left margin, the excess data
may be printed in the left margin on the next line. Do not send the data which is
not included within one line.
(5) When this command is received while one part of 1-line data is being received, it
becomes effective from the next line.

(6) If the print start position specified by this command is on the right of the right end of
the print width specified by the Print Width Command ([ESC] W), a command error
occurs.

7-26
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Paper feed direction

Initial value: 000 dot ABC ABC [LF]

DEF [LF]
DEF
100
Left margin: 100 dots ABC [ESC] H100 ABC [LF]

[GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF]

4940 0458

Alignment: Center ABC [ESC] a1 ABC [LF]

Alignment: Right 123 [ESC] a2 123 [LF]

Left margin: 0 dot,

Alignment: Left 456 [ESC] H000 [ESC] a0 456 [LF]

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

7-27
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.13 HORIZONTAL OFFSET POSITION COMMAND [ESC] O

Function Sets the left margin (space from the left edge) of only the line.

Format [ESC] Oabbb

[ESC] Ocadddd

Initial value abbb: +000

Term a: Indicates whether the number of offset dots is increased or decreased

+: Increased
-: Decreased
bbb: No. of offset dots from the position specified by [ESC] H (Fixed at 3 digits)

-383 to +383 B-EP2DL-GHxx

-831 to +831 B-EP4DL-GHxx

Explanation (1) When “a” or “bbb” is set to any value other than the above range, a command error
occurs.
(2) If other data is received after the horizontal offset position is specified again by this
command even though the data has already been drawn on the line, it is printed at
the position specified by this command. Therefore, it is printed over the already
drawn data.
(3) This command is effective until a line feed is performed. After a line feed is
performed, printing is performed at the print start position specified by the
Horizontal Print Position Command ([ESC] H).
(4) If the print start position specified by this command is on the right of the right end of
the print width specified by the Print Width Command ([ESC] W), a command error
occurs.
(5) If the print start position specified by this command is on the left of the print start
position specified by the Horizontal Print Position Command ([ESC] H), or the left
edge of the paper, a command error occurs.

7-28
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Paper feed direction

Initial value: 000 dot ABC ABC [LF]

DEF [LF]
DEF
100
Left margin: 100 dots ABC [ESC] H100 ABC [LF]

[GS] k04940045 [NUL] [LF]

4940 0458

Offset: 100 dots, 100

Alignment: Center ABC [ESC] C +100 [ESC] a1 ABC [LF]

Alignment: Right 123 [ESC] a2 123 [LF]

Left margin: 0 dot,

Alignment: Left 456 [ESC] H000 [ESC] a0 456 [LF]

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

7-29
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.14 CHARACTER ROTATE COMMAND [ESC] R

Function Specifies the rotational angle of characters.

Format [ESC] Rn

Initial value n: 0

Term n: Rotational angle of characters

0: 0°
1: 90°
2: 180°
3: 270°

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.
(2) The characters are rotated as shown below:

0° 90° 180° 270°

Origin

* When characters are rotated, they are not aligned to the reference line, because
each font has a different parameter for the print position. If the character
magnification is changed, they are not aligned to the reference line either.

7-30
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.15 ERROR CORRECTION LEVEL SET COMMAND [GS] q

Function Sets the error correction level.

Format [GS] qn

Term n: Error correction level to be set

L: High density level
M: Standard level
Q: Reliability level
H: High reliability level

Initial value n: M (Standard level)

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.
(2) This command is effective for the QR code only. If this command is set when
printing other barcode/two-dimensional codes, the command will be ignored.

Refer to Barcode/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command ([GS] k)

7-31
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.5.16 QR CODE MODEL SET COMMAND [GS] r

Function Sets the model of the QR code.

Format [GS] rn

Term n: Model to be set

1: Model 1
2: Model 2

Initial value n: 1 (Model 1)

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.
(2) This command is effective for the QR code only. If this command is set when
printing other barcode/two-dimensional codes, the command will be ignored.

Refer to Barcode/Two-Dimensional Code Print Command ([GS] k)

7-32
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO ISSUE AND FEED

7.6.1 PRINT LINE FEED COMMAND [LF]

Function Prints the received data and performs a line feed.

Format [LF]

Explanation (1) When the Print Line Feed Command is received without data to be printed, only the
length of the line feed which has been set is performed.
(2) In the RECEIPT mode, the printer is operated without designating the sensor.
(3) Since the printer does not perform a line feed automatically, be sure to send the
Print Line Feed Command for each data which can be included within one line. If
data which is not included within one line is received, characters cannot be printed
in the proper position.
(4) Although this command is received in page mode, it is ignored.

Paper feed direction

ABC ABC [LF]

[LF]

ABC [ESC] ! <30H> ABC [LF]

[LF]

[LF]

[GS] k3*87654321* [NUL] [LF]

*87654321*

[LF]

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

Refer to Line Feed Length Set Command ([ESC] 3)

7-33
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.6.2 BACK FEED OMISSION COMMAND [ESC] B

Function Omits a back feed before printing.

Format [ESC] B

Explanation (1) Usually, in the RECEIPT mode, the printer feeds for about 1-mm backward before
starting to print or before printing after a pause. This is intended to adjust the print
start position (line feed), however, the first back feed may be unnecessary
depending on the print layout. Also, a back feed can reduce the throughput. So,
the first back feed can be omitted by this command, if unnecessary.
(2) This command can be sent only once for one receipt prior to other receipt
commands or print data. If this command is sent in the middle of other
commands, the printer operation is not guaranteed (Necessary back feeds are not
performed, and, as a result, the print may be overlapped or the print position is
misaligned.) This command is effective in the first receipt to be printed after the
command is received. That is, this command needs to be issued for every receipt
before printing because the command is effective only one receipt.
NOTE: When printing more than one receipt continuously, the printer does not stop
at the top of each receipt because the printer does not recognize the
receipt one by one. In this case, the Back Feed Omission Command
should be issued only for the first receipt, not for every receipt. (The
printer recognizes the Back Feed Omission Command is sent in the middle
of other commands, and it may print improperly.)
(3) If a cover open error or a paper end error occurred before printing, a back feed is
performed after the error is cleared, even if this command has been issued. Also,
the printer performs a back feed when printing is restarted after clearing an error
which occurred during printing.

7-34
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.6.3 PAGE MODE SELECT COMMAND [GS] C

Function Changes to page mode.

Format [GS] C

Explanation (1) When any data remains unprinted before the Page Select command is received,
the data is printed before changing to page mode.
(2) The printer performs a line feed only without printing in page mode even if the Line
Feed command ([LF]) is received.
(3) By sending the Page Mode Print Command ([FF]), print data received in page
mode can be printed collectively.

(4) To cancel the page mode and return to usual print and line feed operations using
the Print and Line Feed Command ([LF]) for each line, or to disable issue of data
received in page mode, page mode can be canceled by sending the Page Mode
Cancel Command ([CAN]) until the Page Mode Print Command is received.
(5) When this command is received in page mode, it is ignored.
(6) Length to be printed collectively is 1000.0 mm. When data length to be printed
exceeds the above value, the subsequent data is discarded and printing is not
performed until the Page Mode Print Command ([FF]) is received.

Line feed command Page mode select

([LF]) command ([GS] C)
Printing
Standard mode Page mode

Line feed command

([LF])
Page mode print
command ([FF])
Printing

Clearing
drawing buffer
Page mode cancel
command ([CAN])

7-35
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.6.4 PAGE MODE PRINT COMMAND [FF]

Function Starts printing in page mode.

Format [FF]

Explanation (1) This command is used to print data received in page mode.
(2) After printing the data received in page mode, the printer returns to usual print and
line feed operations using the Print and Lie Feed Command ([LF]) for each line.

(3) This command is ignored when it is received while the printer is not in page mode.

7-36
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.6.5 PAGE MODE CANCEL COMMAND [CAN]

Function Cancels page mode.

Format [CAN]

Explanation (1) Data received in page mode is cleared.

(2) Values set before the Page Mode Select Command is sent, or set in page mode
are retained.

(3) This command is ignored when it is received while the printer is not in page mode.
(4) To cancel the page mode and return to usual print and line feed operations using
the Print and Line Feed Command ([LF]) for each line, or to disable issue of data
received in page mode, page mode can be canceled by sending the Page Mode
Cancel Command ([CAN]) until the Page Mode Print Command ([FF]) is received.

7-37
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO FORMAT

7.7.1 FLASH MEMORY FORMAT COMMAND [ESC] J1

Function Formats (Initializes) flash ROM on the CPU board.

Format [ESC] J1; a [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Format (Initialization) designation

A: Form storage area
B: Writable character storage area
C: Graphic storage area
D: All storage areas (Form, Writable character, Graphic)

Explanation (1) When the storage area in flash ROM becomes full, the old data is automatically
deleted and only the newest data is left.
Only the form storage area in flash ROM can be forcefully cleared by this
command. However, if this command is sent, all data of the stored forms,
including the newest data, is deleted (initialized).
(2) The remaining capacity of flash memory after formatting is displayed on the LCD.

(3) Whenever already registered data (PC saving, writable character or logo) is
registered again, memory is consumed unless a format command is sent.
(4) When label issue is performed after a format command is sent, the image buffer is
cleared automatically.

Note (1) Since the writable character storage area is shared by the LABEL and TPCL
modes, writable characters registered in the LABEL or TPCL mode are erased.

7-38
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO GRAPHICS

7.8.1 GRAPHIC DATA STORE COMMAND [ESC] SG

Function Stores the graphic data on the printer.

Format [ESC] SG; a, bbbb, cccc, ddd --- ddd [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Graphic No.

1 or 2
bbbb: No. of graphic width dots to be stored

to 0384 B-EP2DL-GHxx
0001
to 0832 B-EP4DL-GHxx

cccc: No. of graphic height dots to be stored

0001 to 9999 (in units of dots)
ddd --- ddd: Graphic data

Explanation
Graphic width 19 dots

1 00H 2 60H 3 00H

4 00H 5 70H 6 00H
•
•
•
Graphic •
height
67 EFH 68 80H 69 00H
24 dots
70 3EH 71 00H 72 00H

8 dots 8 dots 8 dots

(1) The graphic data should be separated into units of 8 dots and sent in the above
order (1 to 72).
(2) The graphic data is 00H to FFH.
(3) The minimum unit of a graphic width is 8 dots. Dots with no data are transmitted
as data 0.
(4) The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted must be as follows;
The number of bytes of the graphic to be transmitted = {(No. of graphic width dots
+ 7)/8} × No. of graphic height dots
* The value in the brackets is rounded down to the nearest whole number.

7-39
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Example
Graphic width 19 dots

Graphic
height
24 dots

[ESC] SG; 1, 0019, 0024,

[00H] [60H] [00H] [00H] [70H] [00H] [00H] [78H] [00H]
[00H] [7CH] [00H] [00H] [6EH] [00H] [00H] [67H] [00H]
[00H] [63H] [80H] [00H] [61H] [80H] [00H] [61H] [C0H]
[00H] [60H] [C0H] [00H] [61H] [C0H] [00H] [61H] [80H]
[00H] [63H] [80H] [00H] [67H] [C0H] [00H] [66H] [00H]
[0FH] [60H] [00H] [0EH] [60H] [00H] [3FH] [E0H] [00H]
[7FH] [FEH] [00H] [FFH] [E0H] [00H] [FFH] [C0H] [00H]
[FFH] [C0H] [00H] [EFH] [80H] [00H] [3EH] [00H] [00H]
[LF] [NUL]

7-40
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.8.2 GRAPHIC PRINT COMMAND [GS] /

Function Prints the graphic data which is stored on the printer.

Format [GS] /n

Term n: Graphic No.

1 or 2

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, a command error occurs.

(2) When the graphic data is not stored, this command is ignored.

Paper feed direction

Graphic
ABC DEF ABC [GS] / 1 DEF [LF]

Graphic
GHIJK ABC [GS] / 1 GHIJK [LF]

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

Refer to Graphic Data Store Command ([ESC] SG)

Mode Select Command ([ESC] M)

7-41
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL

7.9.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] @, [ESC] WR

Function Returns the printer to its initial state.

Format [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] @

Explanation (1) The printer is returned to the same state as when the power is turned on.
(2) If the printer receives this command during printing, the printer prints the label
which is being printed, then performs initialization.
(3) After the Initialize Command is sent (or after printing is completed, if printing is
performed), the next command must not be sent within approx. 30 seconds on the
wireless LAN model or within 5 seconds on other models since the printer perform
initialization. In IrDA: TEC Protocol, if ACK/status transmission is specified by the
Issue Command, the printer returns an ACK, which indicates the command
process end, to the EOT after the printer is initialized. In RS-232C, when the
status response is specified, the printer returns the status (10H). After this status
is received, the next command may be sent. In IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, RS-
232C, Bluetooth, or Wireless LAN, the printer does not return the status.
(4) To use IrDA interface for sending this command to the printer, only this command
should be sent. After the command is sent, the link should be terminated. Even
if the host does not terminate the link, the printer performs the termination process.
Therefore, after initialization is completed, the host should establish the link again.
(5) When receiving this command during data transmission, the printer is initialized
after transmission is completed.

Notes (1) If a command error or communication error occurs when receiving the Reset
Command, an error message is displayed in the online mode. However, it is not
displayed in the SYSTEM mode.
(2) After the code of the Graphic Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Reset
Command is not processed until the printer receives the data specifying the type
of data.

7-42
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS

7.10.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] v, [ [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS

Function Requests that the printer sends back the printer status and the battery status to the
host.

Format [ESC] v, [ESC] FM [LF] [NUL], or [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

Explanation When this command is received, the printer sends the printer status and battery status
to the host.
• For IrDA: TEC Protocol: Data to be sent (Fixed at 27 bytes)
STX Printer ID Version No. of each form Printer status Battery status CRC
02H xxH xxH V01 V02 ········· V20 xxH xxH xxH xxH

• For IrDA; IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, RS-232C, USB, Bluetooth or Wireless LAN:
Data to be sent (Fixed at 5 bytes)
STX Printer ID Printer status Battery status
02H xxH xxH xxH xxH

Printer ID ............... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)
Printer status ......... Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data.
00H: Normal status (while idling)
01H: Cover open status
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken thermal head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Operating
0CH: Communication error ....... For RS-232C connection only
0DH: Normal end + Label end (See NOTE.)
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
10H: Normal issue end
14H: Pause state
19H: Ambient temperature error
32H: Abnormal battery temperature
33H: Battery excessive temperature
37H: Charging error
(38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed)
Response status for automatic status transmission
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
45H: Wait for battery recovery
46H: Wait for print head temperature reduction
47H: Wait for motor temperature reduction
55H: Writable character/PC command save mode

7-43
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Status in the compatible mode for B-SP series

00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken thermal head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
including ambient temperature error, abnormal battery
temperature and battery excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Printer operating
including the following statuses: wait for strip, pause
state, writable character/PC command save mode, wait
for battery recovery and wait for print head/motor
temperature reduction
0CH: Communication error ....... For RS-232C connection only
0DH: Normal end + Label end (See NOTE.)
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
10H: Normal issue end
37H: Charging error
(38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed)
Response status for automatic status transmission
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
NOTE: 0DH (Normal issue end + Label end) is a state when
the printer runs out of labels, after a label is issued.
Battery status .......... The battery charge status is indicated in 5 levels.
(B-EP2DL)
01H: 7.2 V or less
02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V
03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V
04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V
05H: 8.0 V to 8.4 V
(B-EP4DL)
01H: 14.0 V or less
02H: 14.1 V to 14.6 V
03H: 14.7 V to 15.2 V
04H: 15.3 V to 15.9 V
05H: 16.0 V to 16.8 V
CRC ......................... 2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High)

7-44
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.10.2 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WB

Function Sends information on the printer status and the free space of the receive buffer to the
host.

Format [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command makes the printer send information on its status and free space of
the receive buffer, regardless of the setting of the Status Response parameter.
(2) The status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and indicates the latest
status only. The remaining count indicates the remaining print count of the batch
currently being printed only. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed
is transmitted.
(3) Free space of the receive buffer for the interface which sent this command, is
returned to the host.

[IrDA: TEC Protocol] Data to be transmitted (fixed at 22 bytes)

STX Printer ID Status Remaining No. of labels Length

02H 3xH 3xH 33H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 32H 32H

Receiving buffer space Entire receiving buffer space CRC

3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 30H 30H 35H 31H 32H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Data to be transmitted (fixed at 23 bytes)

SOH STX Printer status Status type Remaining No. of labels Length
01H 02H 3xH 3xH 33H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 32H 33H

Receiving buffer space Entire receiving buffer space CR LF

3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 30H 30H 35H 31H 32H 0DH 0AH

7-45
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Printer status ......... Printer status is indicated in 2-byte data.

“00”: Normal status
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating
“04”: Pause state
“05”: Wait for strip
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken thermal print head dots
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature
“19”: Ambient temperature error
“32”: Abnormal battery temperature
“33”: Battery excessive temperature
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
“45”: Wait for battery recovery
“46”: Wait for print head temperature reduction
“47”: Wait for motor temperature reduction
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state
“55”: Writable character/PC command save mode
Remaining No. of labels ...... Indicates the remaining number of labels in four bytes.
“0000” to “9999”
Length: .................. Indicates the number of bytes of the entire status data
IrDA: TEC Protocol: Fixed at “22.”
IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB,
RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN: Fixed at “23.”
Receive buffer free space: .... Indicates the free space of the receive buffer.
Entire receive buffer free space: .... Indicates the entire free space of the receive buffer.
Fixed at “00512.”
CRC/CR, LF: ......... Indicates the end of the status block.

7-46
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes (1) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.
(2) The printer returns the same status, regardless of whether or not the compatible
mode for the B-SP series is set.

(3) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Status Request Command is not processed
until the printer receives the data specified for the type of data.

(4) After receiving the Status Request Command, there may be a maximum of 20-
msec. delay until the printer sends a status.
(5) At least, a 20-msec. interval must be given between the transmissions of the
Status Request Command. If the next Status Request Command is transmitted
within 20 msec., the printer may fail to receive it.

Example [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

7-47
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.10.3 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX

Function Sends the printer mode information to the host.

Format [ESC] WX [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) The mode information format to be sent to the host, is as follows:
RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1)
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
Mode information (16 bytes)
STX CRC CRC
R E C E I P T SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 52H 45H 43H 45H 49H 50H 54H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Mode information (16 bytes)
STX
R E C E I P T SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 52H 45H 43H 45H 49H 50H 54H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H

RECEIPT1 mode (Mode = 2)

[IrDA: TEC Protocol]

Mode information (16 bytes)
STX CRC CRC
R E C E I P T 1 SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 52H 45H 43H 45H 49H 50H 54H 31H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Mode information (16 bytes)
STX
R E C E I P T 1 SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 52H 45H 43H 45H 49H 50H 54H 31H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H

The above shows examples where the message is received in the RECEIPT mode
(Mode = 1) and the RECEIPT1 mode (Mode = 2). In addition, the messages described
on the following page are returned.

7-48
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

• When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on.

TPCL mode TPCL

TPCL1 mode TPCL1
LABEL mode LABEL
RECEIPT mode RECEIPT
RECEIPT1 mode RECEIPT1
ESC/POS mode ESC/POS
Online reset menu USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for users
USER„SYSTEM
PAUSE + POWER keys
When the password setting is on
USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for and before it is entered
administrators When the password setting is on
SYSTEM
FEED + POWER keys and after it is entered
When the password setting is off SYSTEM
TPCL (strip issue mode) TPCL„(S)
TPCL1 (strip issue mode) TPCL1 (S)
LABEL (strip issue mode) LABEL (S)

* „ indicates a space.

• When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is off.

TPCL mode TPCL-LE

TPCL1 mode TPCL-LE1
LABEL mode LABEL
RECEIPT mode RECEIPT
RECEIPT1 mode RECEIPT1
ESC/POS mode ESC/POS
Online reset menu USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for users
USER„SYSTEM
PAUSE + POWER keys
When the password setting is on
USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for and before it is entered
administrators When the password setting is on
SYSTEM
FEED + POWER keys and after it is entered
When the password setting is off SYSTEM

* „ indicates a space.

7-49
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.10.4 VERSION INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WV

Function Sends information such as the program version of the printer.

Format [ESC] WV [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) The format of the program version data to be returned to the host is as follows.
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]

STX 02H
“0” 30H
“4” 34H
“A” 41H
“P” 50H
Creation date “R” 52H Creation date of the program:
“2” 32H 9-byte data indicated in order of Day-
“0” 30H Month-Year
“0” 30H
“8” 38H
“B” 42H
“-” 2DH
“E” 45H
Model “P” 50H Model:
“2” 32H 7-byte ASCII code indicating the model
“D” 44H B-EP2DG (2-inch/203-dpi model)
“G” 47H B-EP4DG (4-inch/203-dpi model)
“V” 56H
“1” 31H
Version “.” 2EH Program version:
“0” 30H 5-byte data: Vx.xx
“A” 41H Revision

CRC xxH Version

CRC xxH

7-50
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

SOH 01H
STX 02H
“0” 30H
“4” 34H
“A” 41H
“P” 50H
Creation date “R” 52H Creation date of program:
“2” 32H 9 bytes of data indicated in order of Day-
“0” 30H Month-Year
“0” 30H
“8” 38H
“B” 42H
“-” 2DH
“E” 45H
Model “P” 50H Model:
“2” 32H 7-byte ASCII code indicating the model
“D” 44H B-EP2DG (2-inch/203-dpi model)
“G” 47H B-EP4DG (4-inch/203-dpi model)
“V” 56H
“1” 31H
Version “.” 2EH Program version:
“0” 30H 5 bytes of data: Vx.xx
“A” 41H Revision

ETX 03H Version

EOT 04H
CR 0DH
LF 0AH

Notes (1) No statuses are returned when using USB.

7-51
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.11 COMMANDS RELATED TO BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LAN

7.11.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT

Function Reads the device address of the Bluetooth or MAC address of the Wireless LAN.

Format [ESC] IT [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command reads the device address of the Bluetooth or MAC addressof the
Wireless LAN. When using the IrDA, the following information field is placed in
the information frame and sent.
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Bluetooth device address or Wireless LAN MAC address CRC

02H 12 bytes xxH xxH

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C,
Bluetooth, Wireless LAN is used]

STX Bluetooth device address or Wireless LAN MAC address

02H 12 bytes

The printer sends the following information:

Bluetooth device address: 0015b5aa0005
Wireless LAN MAC address: 000940387630

Bluetooth device address

[30H] [30H] [31H] [35H] [62H] [35H] [61H] [61H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [35H]
0 0 1 5 b 5 a a 0 0 0 5

Wireless LAN MAC address

[30H] [30H] [30H] [39H] [34H] [30H] [33H] [38H] [37H] [36H] [33H] [30H]
0 0 0 9 4 0 3 8 7 6 3 0

7-52
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.11.2 BLUETOOTH RELATED PARAMETER ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WT

Function Acquires the parameter settings related to the Bluetooth.

Format [ESC] WT [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command reads the parameters related to the Bluetooth. When using the
IrDA, the following information field is placed in the information frame and sent.
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Sec Inq Interval Window

02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Inquiry/page window
0018 to 4096
Inquiry/page interval
0018 to 4096
Inquiry timer
0 (30H): Inquiry is not possible.
1 (31H): Inquiry is possible only within 60 seconds after a
printer power on
2 (32H): Inquiry is possible at anytime.
Security setting
1 (31H): No security
2 (32H): No security
3 (33H): Link level security is effective

Bluetooth device name CRC

32 bytes xxH xxH
Bluetooth device name: Fixed at 32 bytes.

When the Bluetooth device name is “TOSHIBA TEC BT.”

[54H] [4FH] [53H] [48H] [49H] [42H] [41H] [20H] [54H] [45H] [43H] [20H] [42H] [54H] [00H] [00H]
T O S H I B A ‘’ T E C ‘’ B T
[00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H]

* When the Bluetooth device name is less than 32 bytes, the remaining bytes are filled
with 00H.

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C,
Bluetooth or Wireless LAN is used]

STX Sec Inq Interval Window

02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Bluetooth device name

32 bytes

7-53
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.12 COMMANDS RELATED TO MACRO SETTING

7.12.1 MACRO DEFINITION COMMAND [GS] :

Function Defines the print position and the items to be printed at the fixed position.

Format [GS] : aaaaa###bbbbbbbbbb#####ccccccc [GS] :

Term aaaaa, bbbbbbbbbb, ccccccc: Fixed data

#####: Variable data (The character codes are specified by the Macro Execute
Command.)

Explanation (1) The macro definition can be made by entering the character code or [LF] (Print
Line Feed Command) between “[GS]:” and “[GS]:.”
(2) From the start to end of the macro definition, must be a maximum of 253 bytes.
(3) The macro definition data is kept until the power is turned off.
(4) The number of digits indicated using “#” must match that for the macro to be
actually executed.
(5) Character code designated by the Macro Definition Command is sent to the printer
for printing it on the receipt. Use of the macro function reduces the number of
data transmissions by the standard format and transmission time, and increases
the number of printable lines at one transmission.

7-54
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.12.2 MACRO EXECUTE COMMAND [GS] ^ <Data> [NUL]

Function Stores data for items for which the macro definitions are made.

Format [GS] ^ aaaaabbbbbccccc [NUL]

Term aaaaa: 1st data to be printed

bbbbb: 2nd data to be printed
ccccc: 3rd data to be printed

Explanation (1) If this command is sent without making a macro definition by the Macro Definition
Command, a syntax error occurs.
(2) The receipt is printed by transferring the character code specified by the Macro
Definition Command. The No. of times of data transfer and transfer time for
printing in a fixed format, can be saved. Also, the printable No. of lines per batch
transfer can be increased by using the macro function.

[Ex.] [GS] ^ 0023071T1 A Label 1 ¥9,000 [NUL]

The print position and items to

[GS]: NO.### (####)[LF] be printed at the fixed position
####################[LF] are defined by making a macro
definition.
Quantity #####[LF]
Price ##########[LF]
––––––––––––––––––––––[LF][GS]:

NO.### (####) To print data on two or more

lines, only the variable data
#################### specified by “#”, is sent using
Quantity ##### the Macro Execute Command.
Price ##########

[GS]^0023071T1 A Label 1 ¥9,000 [NUL]

NO.002 (3071)
T1 A Label
Quantity 1
Price ¥9,000

7-55
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

7.13 EXAMPLES

7.13.1 EXAMPLES OF USING COMMANDS

Paper feed direction

1) Setting the length of a line feed and printing

ABC characters

ABC 2) Aligning characters at the center

ABC DEF 3) Aligning characters on the left and the right

4) Line feed only

AB AB 5) Including characters which have different

magnifications together.

6) Printing a barcode
* 5 4 3 2 1

Graphic 7) Including graphics and characters together.

GHIJK

8) Printing a barcode (Aligning at the center)

4940 0458

Effective print width (Width of head)

Width of receipt

[Examples of transmitted data]

Command/Print data Result
1) [ESC] 3 [20H] Setting the length of a line feed (32 dots)
ABC [LF] Printing characters and a line feed
2) [ESC] a1ABC [LF] Alignment of the print position (Center) + Printing and a line feed
3) [ESC] a0ABC Alignment of the print position (Left)
[ESC] a2DEF [LF] Alignment of the print position (Right) + Printing and a line feed
4) [LF] Line feed
5) [ESC] a0 Alignment of the print position (Left)
AB Printing characters (1x1 magnification)
[ESC] ! [10H] AB Printing characters (1x2 magnification)
[ESC] ! [20H] AB Printing characters (2x1 magnification)
[ESC] ! [30H] AB Printing characters (2x2 magnification)
[LF] Printing and a line feed

7-56
 CHAPTER 7 RECEIPT MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Examples of transmitted data] (Continued)

6) [GS] k3*54321* [NUL] Printing CODE39
[LF] Printing and a line feed
7) [GS]/1 Printing a graphic
[ESC] ! [00H] GHIJK [LF] Printing characters (1x1 magnification) + printing and a line feed
8) [ESC] a1 Alignment of the print position (Center)
[GS] h [50H] Setting the height of the barcode (80 dots)
[GS] k04940045 [NUL] Printing EAN8
[LF] Printing and a line feed

7-57
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8. ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMAND)

8.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This printer has 2 modes: standard mode and page mode.

In standard mode, the printer performs a print job or feeds paper every time a print or feed command is
received. In page mode, however, all received print or feed commands are just expanded in the print
area on the memory and the printer does not operate. Once the Page Mode Collective Print
Command ([ESC] [FF]) or Page Mode Print Command ([FF]) is executed, the printer prints all data
expanded in the print area in a collective manner.

For instance, if printing and feeding of data “ABCDEFG” [LF] is performed, “ABCDEFG” will be printed,
and a new line will be started in standard mode. In page mode, “ABCDEFG” will be written into the
specified print area on the memory, and the memory position to write subsequent print data will be
shifted 1 line.

The printer is placed in page mode upon the receipt of the Switching to Page Mode Command
([ESC]L). Any commands received subsequently are processed for page mode. Executing the
Page Mode Collective Print Command ([ESC] [FF]) allows all received data to be printed in a collective
manner. In addition, executing the Page Mode Print Command ([FF]) allows all received data to be
printed in a collective manner, and returns the printer to standard mode. Executing the Switching to
Standard Mode Command ([ESC] S) returns the printer to standard mode without printing the print data
for page mode. Note that the print data is cleared.

Clearing drawing buffer

Switching to page Print mode forcible

mode command cancel command
([ESC] L) ([ESC] [FF])

Standard mode Page mode

Printing
Page mode collective
Switching to standard mode print command
command ([ESC] L) ([ESC] [FF])

Printing
Page mode print
command ([FF])

Either of the language types, Kanji, Chinese and Korean, can be implemented. Any font other than
the on-board fonts is selectable.

8-1
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.2 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS

8.2.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND

ESC Command

GS Command

FS Command

HT

LF

FF

CAN

Control codes are as listed below:

z ESC (1BH)
z GS (1DH)
z FS (1CH)
z HT (09H)
z LF (0AH)
z FF (0CH)
z CAN (18H)

8.2.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE

Function Describes the outline of the function of the command.

Format Shows the format of the command.

The format designation method should conform to the following rules:

z n refers to a parameter item.

z Brackets and parentheses (e.g. [ ] or < >) are used only for description, and
must not be transmitted in practice.
z Other symbols must always be inserted at designated positions before being
transmitted.

Term Explains the term(s) used in the format.

Default value Default value of a parameter (at power-on or switching to ESC/POS mode)

Explanation Explains the command in detail.

Refer to Related commands

8-2
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.2.3 PRECAUTIONS

Print density fine adjustment cannot be selected in the ESC/POS mode. The mode must be
switched to the TPCL, LABEL or RECEIPT1 mode once, to select print density fine adjustment.

8.3 FONT SPECIFICATIONS

Font type: Alphanumeric characters: 95

Extended graphics: 128 characters × 4

Chinese characters: JIS 1 level 2

Font structure: ANK Chinese character, Chinese, or Korean

Font A 12×24 24×24

8.4 EXTERNAL (CUSTOM) CHARACTERS SPECIFICATIONS

• ANK

Font A 95 characters (20h to 7Eh)

• Chinese characters

* 7721h to 777Eh for JIS, EC40h to EC9Eh (except for EC7Fh) for shift JIS, and F7A1h to F7Feh for
the EUC code

• Chinese

FF40h to FF7Eh, FF80h to FFFCh

• Korean

FF40h to FF7Eh, FF80h to FFFCh

* The specified writable characters are not backed up. (They apply unitl the printer is turned off.)

8.5 INPUT DATA BUFFER

Input data buffer (receive buffer) size: 512 Kbytes

8-3
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.6 VALUE SPECIFIED BY EACH COMMAND

The values specified by each command are commonly applied in standard and page modes.
However, as for the following commands, values must be independently specified and maintained in
standard and page modes.

• [ESC] [SP] : Setting of spacing on the right of a character

• [ESC] 2 : Setting of 30-dot feeding

• [ESC] 3 : Setting of minimum dots for line feed

• [FS] S : Setting of spacing on both sides of a chinese character

8-4
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.7 EXPANSION OF PRINT DATA IN PRINT AREA

The print data is expanded in the print area as follows.

(1) The print area is defined by the Page Mode Print Area Set command ([ESC] W). The left end of
the printer as one face must be considered as the starting point of the print area (x0,y0) at the
moment when printing or feeding before the printer receives [ESC] W is completed. The print
area is formed by a rectangle that is dx pitches wide (from the starting point in the x or horizontal
direction) and dy pitches high (from the starting point in the y or vertical direction). (If the print
area is not defined by [ESC] W, a default value will be applied.)

(2) If the printer receives print data after the print area is defined by the Page Mode Print Area Set
command ([ESC] W) and the print direction is defined by the Page Mode Print Direction Set
Command ([ESC] T), characters and downloaded bit images are expanded aligning their bottom
left point to the baseline.

(3) If the print data (including space on the right of a character) deviates from the print area before a
command that includes line feed (Line Feed Command ([LF]) or Feed Length Set Command
([ESC] J) is received, line feed will be performed automatically within the print area. The position
where print data is expanded is shifted 1 line. Also, the next expantion position is the beginning
of the line. Line feed must be performed in accordance with the line feed length specified by the
30-dot Line Feed Length Set Command ([ESC] 2) or Minimum Dots for Line Feed Length Set
Command ([ESC] 3).

(4) The default line feed length is 30 dots. Therefore, if the print data for the next line includes
double-height characters or downloaded bit image, the default line feed length may be insufficient.
As a result, the higher order dots may be superimposed on the previous print data. Therefore,
the line feed length must be increased.

(5) Printing of a barcode in horizontal orientation is not allowed due to a a large reading error.

[Position where print data is expanded]

HRI characters
Double-height character

Barcode
([GS]k)
12 Logo
([GS] *)

A
Extended
Bit image image
24 ([GS] K)
([ESC] *) HRI characters

Baseline

8-5
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.8 EXAMPLE OF RECEIPT PRINTER PRINT LAYOUT (B-EP2DL)

Receipt print position (unit: mm)

58

48

Printable range： 384 dots

Note 1
Logo printed

Note 3

Note 4
Note 2

3.75

3.75

Note 1

3±1.5
(4±1.5)

Note 1) A minimum margin of 2 mm must be reserved at the top and bottom of a receipt.

Note 2) If printing starts from a stand-by position (or motor stop position) after a logo is printed, a
blank must be inserted for a minimum of 24 pulses (3.0 mm) (or 48 pulses (6.0 mm) or
over recommended). (This is because of reserving a slow-up area. The number of
slow-up pulses varies depending on the print speed.)

Note 3) A logo must be printed within the range of 21 mm at maximum.

Note 4) After a logo is printed, a blank must be inserted for a minimum of 24 pulses (3.0 mm) (or
48 pulses (6.0 mm) recommended).

8-6
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.9 EXCEPTION HANDLING

8.9.1 UNDEFINED CODE

This applies to the codes that fall in the range between 00h and 1Fh in the character code table.
If a code that is not defined in the range is inputted as a command, 1 byte must be discarded, and
the subsequent data must be processed as normal data.

<Ex.> Data string [30H][31H][03H][32H][0AH][33H] is inputted.

[30H] [31H] [03H] [32H] [0AH] [33H]

Code defined as the [LF] command
Discarded as an undefined code
Data string actually processed

[30H] [31H] [32H] [0AH] [33H]

8.9.2 UNDEFINED COMMAND

If a code following the [ESC] (1Bh), [FS] (1Ch), or [GS] (1Dh) is not defined as a command, [ESC],
[FS], or [GS] and the following code (2 bytes in total) must be discarded.

<Ex.> Data string [30H][1BH][22H][31H][32H] is inputted.

[30H] [1BH] [22H] [31H] [32H]

Discarded as an undefined code
Data string actually processed

[30H] [31H] [32H]

8.9.3 SETTING OUT OF DEFINED RANGE

If a numeric value outside the defined range is inputted, the command must be ignored, and an
already set value must not be changed. For commands that have multiple arguments, once a
numeric value out of the defined range is inputted, command processing is aborted, and the
subsequent data is processed as normal data.

<Ex.> Data string [1BH][2DH][05H] is inputted.

[1BH] [2DH] [05H]

Out of the defined range

Defined as the Underline Set command ([ESC]-)

Data string actually processed

[05H] is out of the defined range. Therefore, the data string must be discarded. The
already set underline remains unchanged.

8-7
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10 ESC/POS COMMANDS

8.10.1 HORIZONTAL TAB COMMAND [HT]

Function Moves a print position to the next horizontal tab position.

Format ASCII: HT
Hex: 09h

Default Every 8 characters of font A (9th, 17th digit…)

Explanation (1) This command will be ignored if the next horizontal tab position is not specified.

(2) The Horizontal Tab Positions Set Command ([ESD] D) must be used to specify a
position of a horizontal tab.

[Program example]

fprintf( stdprn, "01234567890123456789012345678901234\n");

for( i=0; i<4; i++ ) {
fputc( '\t', stdprn ); /* Horizontal tab */
fputc( 'H', stdprn );
}
fputc( '\n', stdprn );

[Print example]: Default horizontal tab position

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4
H H H H

Reference Horizontal Tab Positions Set Command ([ESD]D)

8-8
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.2 LINE FEED COMMAND [LF]

Function Prints data and inserts a line feed.

Format ASCII: LF
Hex: 0Ah

Explanation (1) If print data is received with the specified number of digits per line exceeded and no
line feed ([LF]), it will be printed with a line feed inserted automatically.

(2) If this command is received without print data, a line feed of a specified length will
be just inserted.

(3) Data that contains 4,096 bytes in a single line (up to [LF]) must not be transmitted.
If the number of bytes exceeds 4,096, the correct functioning of the printer will not
be guaranteed.

[Program example]

fprintf( stdprn, "0123456789\n");

fputc( '\n', stdprn ); /* Line feed */
fprintf( stdprn, "ABCDEFGH\n");

[Print example]

0123156789
← Blank line
ABCDEFGH

Reference 30-dot Line Feed Length Set Command ([ESC] 2)

Minimum Dots for Line Feed Length Set Command ([ESC] 3)

8-9
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.3 PAGE MODE PRINT COMMAND [FF]

Function Prints the data expanded in the print area in page mode, and returns the printer to
standard mode.

Format ASCII: FF
Hex: 0Ch

Explanation (1) This command is ignored except when page mode is selected.

(2) The data that has been drawn is all erased after printing is completed.

(3) The print area specified by the Page Mode Print Area Set Command ([ESC] W) is
initialized.

(4) After this command is executed, the next print starting position is the beginning of a
line.

Reference Page Mode Collective Print Command ([ESC] [FF])

Switching to Page Mode Command ([ESC] L)

Switching to Standard Mode Command ([ESC] S)

8-10
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.4 PAGE MODE CANCEL COMMAND [CAN]

Function Clears all data in the currently specified print area for page mode.

Format ASCII: CAN

Hex: 18h

Explanation (1) This command is ignored except when page mode is selected.

(2) The data contained in the currently specified print area will be cleared even if it is
the data contained in the previously specified print area. The print starting position
in the currently specified print area is returned to the starting position defined by the
Page Mode Print Area Set Command ([ESC] W).

Reference Switching to Page Mode Command ([ESC] L)

Page Mode Print Area Set Command ([ESC] W)

8-11
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.5 PAGE MODE COLLECTIVE PRINT COMMAND [ESC] [FF]

Function Prints the data expanded in the print area in page mode altogether.

Format ASCII: ESC FF

Hex: 1Bh 0Ch

Explanation (1) This command is ignored except when page mode is selected.

(2) The values specified by the Page Mode Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T) or
the Page Mode Print Area Set Command ([ESC] W) and the position where the print
data is expanded are maintained after printing is completed.

Reference Page Mode Print Command ([FF])

Switching to Page Mode Command ([ESC] L)

Switching to Standard Mode Command ([ESC] S)

8-12
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.6 SPACING SET COMMAND [ESC] [SP]

Function Specifies spacing (or the number of dots) on the right of an ANK character.

Format [ESC] SPn

Term ASCII: ESC SP n

Hex: 1Bh 20h n

[Parameter]
n: Spacing (or the number of dots) on the right 0 ≤ n ≤ 99 (00h ≤ n ≤ 63h)

Default value n:1

Explanation (1) For a double-width character, spacing will also be doubled.

(2) The maximum permissible spacing on the right of a character is 99 dots. If a

specified value exceeds 99, the maximum value of 99 will be applied.

(3) Spacing can be independently specified in standard and page modes.

(4) The value specified by this command is not applicable to Chinese characters.
Instead, the Chinese Character Spacing Set Command ([FS] S) must be applied.

[Program example]

fprintf( stdprn, "\033 "); /* 1 dot on the right */

fputc( 1, stdprn );
fprintf( stdprn, "11111\n");
fprintf( stdprn, "\033 %c", 13 ); /* 13 dots on the right */
fprintf( stdprn, "22222\n");
fprintf( stdprn, "\033 %c", 26 ); /* 26 dots on the right */
fprintf( stdprn, "33333\n");

[Print example]

11111
22222
3 3 3 3 3

8-13
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.7 PRINT MODE ALL SET COMMAND [ESC] !

Function Performs character control (specifies print modes altogether).

Format [ESC] !n

Term ASCII: ESC ! n

Hex: 1Bh 21h n

[Parameter]
n: Specifying print mode 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

b7 b0
-- -- --

0: Font A (12 × 24) fixed

0: Canceling bold printing
1: Setting bold printing
0: Canceling double height
1: Setting double height
0: Canceling double width
1: Setting double width
0: Canceling underlining
1: Setting underlining

Default value n:0

Explanation (1) With underlining set, a portion skipped by HT or a character rotated 90 degrees
clockwise will not be underlined.

(2) An underline is 1 dot thick. However, the thickness of an underline is determined

in accordance with the thickness specified by the Underlining Set Command
([ESC]-).

(3) Bold printing can also be set or canceled by the Bold Printing Set Command
([ESC]E), but the most recently processed command is applied.

(4) An ANK character size can also be specified by the Character Size Set Command
([GS] !), but the most recently processed command is applied.

(5) Underlining can also be set or canceled by the Underlining Set Command ([ESC]-),
but the most recently processed command is applied.

(6) If both double height and double width are set at the same time, a character size will
be quadrupled (double height × double width).

8-14
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Program example]

fprintf( stdprn, "\033! "); /* Normal width */

fputc( 0, stdprn );
fprintf( stdprn, "11111\n");
fprintf( stdprn, "\033 %c", 0 × 20 ); /* Double width */
fprintf( stdprn, "22222\n");

[Print example]

11111
2 2 2 2 2

Reference Underlining Set Command ([ESC] -)

Bold Printing Set Command ([ESC] E)

Character Size Set Command ([GS] !)

8-15
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.8 DOWNLOADED CHARACTER (WRITABLE CHARACTER) SET COMMAND [ESC] %

Function Sets or cancels downloaded characters (writable characters).

Format [ESC] %n

Term ASCII: ESC % n

Hex: 1Bh 25h n

[Parameter]
n: Setting / canceling downloaded character 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

b7 b0
-- -- -- -- -- -- --

0: Canceling downloaded characters

1: Setting downloaded characters

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) n is valid only in the least significant bit.

(2) If downloaded characters (writable characters) are not registered with a specified
code, the internal ANK characters will be printed. Also, when the downloaded
characters (writable characters) are canceled, the internal ANK characters will be
selected automatically for printing.

Reference Downloaded Character (Writable Character) Define Command ([ESC] &)

Downloaded Character Erase Command ([ESC] ?)

8-16
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.9 DOWNLOADED CHARACTER (WRITABLE CHARACTER) DEFINE COMMAND [ESC] &

Function Defines downloaded characters (writable characters) of the ANK code.

Format [ESC] &ynm [xd1d2d3…dyx]n･････[xd1d2d3…dyx]m

Term ASCII: ESC &

Hex: 1Bh 26h

[Parameter]
y: No. of bytes in the vertical direction 3 (03h) Fixed
n: Setting start character code 32 ≤ n ≤ 126 (20h ≤ n ≤ 7Eh)
m: Setting end character code 32 ≤ m ≤ 126 (20h ≤ m ≤ 7Eh)
* n = m if there is only 1 character.
d: Data to be defined 00h ≤ d1, d2, … dyx ≤ FFh
x: No. of bytes in the horizontal direction 0 ≤ x ≤ 12 (00h ≤ x ≤ 0Ch)

Default value Internal ANK characters (no writable characters registered)

Explanation (1) Multiple consecutive character codes can be defined in the single execution of this
command.

(2) d refers to not only data to be defined, but also a pattern of dots from the left end in
the x (horizontal) direction. If x is below the number of dots to form a character, the
remaining dots on the right will be space filled.

(3) At a moment when an error occurs with parameter y, n, m, or x due to a factor such
as an unmatched condition, command processing will be aborted, and the data
subsequent to x will be processed as normal data.

(4) The defined downloaded characters are cleared in the event of the following
commands:
• Initialize Command ([ESC] @)
• Downloaded Bit image Define Command ([GS] *)
• Downloaded Character Erase Command ([ESC] ?)

Reference [ESC] %, [ESC] ?

8-17
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Program example]

/* Data for registration of writable characters */

unsigned char gaiji1[3] = { 0x10, 0x00, 0x00 };
unsigned char gaiji2[15] = { 0x10, 0x00, 0x00, 0x28, 0x00, 0x00, 0x44, 0x00, 0x00,
0x28, 0x00, 0x00, 0x10, 0x00, 0x00 };

fprintf( stdprn, "\033&\003AB"); /* Registration of writable characters 41H,42H code */

fputc( 1, stdprn ); /* 1 dot in the horizontal direction */
for(i=0;i<3;i++)
fputc( gaiji1[i], stdprn );
fputc( 5, stdprn ); /* 5 dots in the horizontal direction */
for(i=0;i<15;i++)
fputc( gaiji2[i], stdprn );
fprintf( stdprn, "\033%%"); /* Canceling writable characters */
fputc( 0, stdprn );
fprintf( stdprn, "ABCD\n");
fprintf( stdprn, "\033%%"); /* Setting writable characters */
fputc( 1, stdprn );
fprintf( stdprn, "ABCD\n");

[Print example]

ABCD
• CD

8-18
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Specified character] Example of font A

12 dots

d1 d4 d7 d34

B7

d2 d5 d8 d35

24 dots

d3 d6 d9 d36
B0

d1 = 0 × 0F d4 = 0 × 30 d7 = 0 × 40 …
d2 = 0 × 03 d5 = 0 × 80 d8 = 0 × 40 …
d3 = 0 × 00 d6 = 0 × C0 d9 = 0 × 20 …

8-19
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.10 BIT IMAGE MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] *

Function Selects bit image mode (or prints image data).

Format [ESC] *mnLnH (d1d2…d ((n1 + 256 × n2) × k))

Term ASCII: ESC *

Hex: 1Bh 2Ah

[Parameter]
m: Mode m = 0, 1, 32, 33 (m = 00h, 01h, 20h, 21h)
nL: No. of bytes in the horizontal direction (low order) 0 ≤ nL ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nL ≤ FFh)
nH: No. of bytes in the horizontal direction (high order) 0 ≤ nH ≤ 3 (00h ≤ nH ≤ 03h)
d: Image data 00h ≤ d1, d2, … dyx ≤ FFh
k: No. of bytes in the vertical direction k = 1 if m = 0 or 1 (m = 00h k = 01h)
k = 3 if m = 32 or 33 (m = 20h, k = 21h)

Explanation (1) Image data m is specified by the number of dots defined by nL, nH and k.

(2) The number of dots in the horizontal direction is determined by nL + 256 × nH.

(3) If the number of dots in the horizontal direction (nL + 256 × nH) exceeds the value
listed in the table below, printing will be performed while wrapping around, and
consequently corrupted.

B-EP2DL-GHxx (203 dpi) 384 mm

B-EP4DL-GHxx (203 dpi) 832 mm
(4) d refers to image data. A bit to be printed is set to 1, and the one not to be printed is set
to 0.

(5) The table below shows mode selected by m.

m (mode) No. of dots in the vertical direction Dot density

0 8 Single density
1 8 Double density
32 24 Single density
33 24 Double density
(6) Underlining, bold printing, reverse printing (white on black background), or inverted
printing (upside-down) is not applicable to this image data.

(7) A bit image in page mode is valid only when 0 (0-degree rotation) is specified by the
Page Mode Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T). If anything other than 0
degree is selected, the bit image will not be rotated.

(8) At a moment when an error occurs with parameter m, nL, or nH due to a factor such
as an unmatched condition, command processing will be aborted, and the
subsequent data subsequent to x will be processed as normal data.

(9) The most significant bit is printed on top, and the least significant at the bottom.

8-20
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Program example]

for(m=0;m<1;m++) {
fprintf( stdprn, "\033*%c\x3F%c", m, 0 );
for(i=1;i<=0x3F;i++) {
fputc( i, stdprn );
}
fputc( '\n', stdprn );
}
fprintf( stdprn, "\n\r");

8-21
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Print example]

Single density (m = 0)

8-dot single density: 8-dot double density:

1-byte data is tripled in the vertical direction, 1-byte data is tripled in the vertical
and doubled in the horizontal direction. direction.

2 dots 1 dot

b7 b7

Expanded Expanded
24 dots d1 d2 d3 24 dots d1 d2 d3

b0 b0

24-dot single density: 24-dot double density:

1-byte data is doubled in the horizontal 1-byte data is edited in sequence.
direction.
2 dots 1 dot

d1 d4 d7 d1 d4 d7
b7 b7

24 dots d2 d5 d8 24 dots d2 d5 d8

d9 d3 d6 d9

d3 d6
b0 b0

8-22
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.11 UNDERLINING SET COMMAND [ESC] -

Function Sets or cancels underlining.

Format [ESC] -n

Term ASCII: ESC -

Hex: 1Bh 2Dh

[Parameter]
n: Setting underlining 0 ≤ n ≤ 2 (00h ≤ n ≤ 02h)
or
48 ≤ n ≤ 50 (30h ≤ n ≤ 32h)
0: Canceling underlining
1: Setting underlining (1-dot wide)
2: Setting underlining (2-dot wide)

Default value n:0

Explanation (1) The character including the space on its right is underlined. However, a portion
skipped by the Horizontal Tab Command ([HT]) is not underlined.

(2) A character rotated 90 degrees clockwise or a character in reverse is not

underlined.

(3) If underlining is canceled with n = 0 or n = 48, subsequent data will not be

underlined. However, the width of the underline specified most recently is
maintained. Also, a 1-dot wide underline is selected by default.

(4) The width of the underline is consistent regardless of a character size.

(5) Underlining can also be set or canceled by the Print Mode All Set Command
([ESC] !), but the most recently processed command is applied.

(6) There is no impact upon Chinese Characters.

Reference Print Mode All Set Command ([ESC] !)

8-23
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.12 DOWNLOADED CHARACTER ERASE COMMAND [ESC] ?

Function Erases downloaded characters in a specified code.

Format [ESC] ?n

Term ASCII: ESC ?

Hex: 1Bh 3Fh

[Parameter]
n: Erasing downloaded characters 32 ≤ n ≤ 126 (20h ≤ n ≤ 7Eh)

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) n refers to a character code in which a defined pattern is erased. After
downloaded characters are erased, the same pattern as the internal characters are
printed.

(2) If a specified character code is undefined, this command will be ignored.

Reference Downloaded Character (Writable Character) Define Command ([ESC] &)

Downloaded Character (Writable Character) Set Command ([ESC] %)

8-24
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.13 30-DOT LINE FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] 2

Function Sets a line feed length to 30 dots.

203 dpi: 0.125 mm/dot

Format ASCII: ESC 2

Hex: 1Bh 32h

Explanation (1) Line feed lengths can be independently specified in standard and page modes.

Reference Minimum Dots for Line Feed Length Set Command ([ESC] 3)

8-25
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.14 MINIMUM DOTS FOR LINE FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] 3

Function Sets a line feed length to n/2 dot.

Specifies the minimum number of dots for line feed.

Format [ESC] 3n

Term ASCII: ESC 3

Hex: 1Bh 33h

[Parameter]
n: Line feed length (n/2 dot) 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

Default value n: 60 (Line feed length of 30 dots)

Explanation (1) Line feed lengths can be independently specified in standard and page modes.

(2) Fractions are rounded up.

(3) The minimum permissible value is 00h for a line feed length. However, a line feed
length is only applicable when a value of 60 (30 dots) or over is specified. If a
value less than 60 is specified, a line feed length will be changed to 30 dots.

Reference 30-dot Line Feed Length Set Command ([ESC] 2)

8-26
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.15 PRINTER SELECT/DESELECT COMMAND [ESC] =

Function Selects or deselects the printer.

While the printer is deselected, received data is discarded until it is selected by this
command again.

Format [ESC] =n

Term ASCII: ESC =

Hex: 1Bh 3Dh

[Parameter]
n: Selecting / deselecting printer 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

b7 b0
-- -- -- -- -- -- --

0: Deselecting printer
1: Selecting printer

Default value n: 1

Explanation (1) n is valid only in the least significant bit.

(2) While being deselected, the printer is waiting only for this command. So please
note that if the same code arrangement as [ESC] =1 (1Bh, 3Dh, 01h) is contained in
the data such as writable characters or images transmitted while the printer is being
deselected, the printer will be returned to the “selected” state.

8-27
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.16 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] @

Function Clears data in the currently expanded image buffer, and initializes the settings.

Format [ESC] @

Term ASCII: ESC @

Hex: 1Bh 40h

Explanation (1) The data and macro definition in the receive buffer are maintained.

(2) Please refer to the next page for further information regarding the data to be
initialized.

[Program example]

fprintf( stdprn, "\033!%c", 0x20 ); /* Double width */

fprintf( stdprn, "11111\n");
/*Other settings*/
fprintf( stdprn, "\033@" ); /* Initializing printer */
fprintf( stdprn, "22222\n");

[Print example]

11111
22222 ← All settings are reset to default values.

8-28
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Data initialized by ESC@]

Command Functions Default value

HT Horizontal tab Every 8 characters of font A (9th, 17th digit …)
ESC SP Spacing on the right of character 1 dot
ESC ! Character control 0 (No settings)
ESC % Setting / canceling specified characters 0 (No writable characters specified)
ESC & Definition of specified characters Internal ANK characters (No writable characters registered)
ESC - Setting / canceling underlining 0 (Canceling underline)
ESC 3 Minimum No. of dots for line feed length 60 (Line feed length of 30 dots)
ESC = Selecting / deselecting printer
ESC D Horizontal tab position
ESC E Setting / canceling bold printing 0 (No bold printing)
ESC G Setting / canceling double printing 0 (No double printing)
ESC T Selecting print direction and starting point 0 (Left → right)
Setting / canceling 90-degree rotation of
ESC V 0 (Canceling 90-degree rotation)
character
0,0,384,384 (B-EP2DL-GHxx)
ESC W Specifying print area
0,0,832,832 (B-EP4DL-GHxx)
ESC a Specifying print position 0 (Left justified)
ESC c5 Enabling / disabling panel switch 0 (Enabled)
ESC { Setting / canceling inverted printing 0 (Canceling inverted printing)
Specifying print modes for Chinese
FS ! 0 (No settings)
characters altogether
FS & Specifying Chinese Character mode Canceled
Setting / canceling underlining for Chinese
FS - 0 (No underlining)
characters
FS . Canceling Chinese character mode 0 (Chinese character mode canceled)
Defining writable characters of Chinese
FS 2 All space
characters
FS C Selecting Chinese character code system 0 (JIS code system)
Specifying spacing on both sides of Left: 0 dot
FS S
Chinese character Right: 2 dots
Setting / canceling quadrupled Chinese
FS W 0 (Canceled)
character (double height × double width)
GS B Setting / canceling reversed printing 0 (Reversed printing canceled)
GS a Setting / canceling auto status transmission 134(86h) (Status transmitted)
GS w Specifying width of barcode 3 (1 module 3 dots)
GS h Specifying height of barcode 162 (20.25 mm)
Specifying position of HRI character of
GS H 0 (No HRI printed)
barcode
GS f Specifying font of HRI character of barcode 0 (HRI character = font A)
384 dots (B-EP2DL-GHxx)
GS W Specifying width of print area
832 dots (B-EP4DL-GHxx)
GS L Specifying left margin 0 (No left margin)
GS ! Specifying character size 0 (Character size: × 1)

8-29
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.17 HORIZONTAL TAB POSITIONS SET COMMAND [ESC] D

Function Specifies the position of the horizontal tab.

Format [ESC] D [n1n2n3 … nk] [NUL]

Term ASCII: ESC D

Hex: 1Bh 44h

[Parameter]

n: Horizontal tab position (No. of digits) 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 (01h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

k: Maximum number of horizontal tab positions 0 ≤ k ≤ 32 (00h ≤ k ≤ 20h)

Default value Every 8 characters of font A (9th, 17th, 25th digit…)

Explanation (1) The specified position of the horizontal tab is determined by [character width × n]
from the left margin or the beginning of a line. “Character width” in this context
refers to the width of a character including space on its right. Therefore, if a
magnification is set to x 2 or more, the character width will be enlarged accordingly.

(2) The position of the horizontal tab that has been specified is cleared.

(3) With n = 8 for the position of the horizontal tab, the next print position will be shifted
to the 9th digit by executing the Horizontal Tab Command ([HT]).

(4) The maximum permissible number of horizontal tab positions is 32 (k = 32). If it is

exceeded, the subsequent data will be processed as normal data.

(5) Values are inputted to <n> for the position of the horizontal tab in ascending order,
ending with (00H). If <n> is equal to or smaller than the previous <n>, the
horizontal tab position setting will be aborted immediately, and the subsequent data
will be processed as normal data.

(6) All horizontal tab positions are cleared by [ESC] D [NUL].

(7) The specified horizontal tab position will remain unchanged even if the character
width is changed after the horizontal tab position is specified.

8-30
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Example 01234567890123456789012345678901234[0A]

[09]H[09]H[09]H[09]H[0A]
[1B]D[0A][14][1E][00[09]H[09]H[09]H[09]H[0A]

[Program example]

fprintf( stdprn, "01234567890123456789012345678901234\n");

fprintf( stdprn, "\033D%c%c%c", 10, 20, 30);
fputc( 0, stdprn );
for(i=0;i<4;i++) {
fputc( '\t', stdprn );
fputc( 'H', stdprn );
}
fputc( '\n', stdprn );

[Print example]

01234567890123456789012345678901234

H H H H ← Default position
H H HH

Reference Horizontal Tab Command ([HT])

8-31
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.18 BOLD PRINTING SET COMMAND [ESC] E

Function Sets or cancels bold printing.

Format [ESC] En

Term ASCII: ESC E

Hex: 1Bh 45h

[Parameter]
n: Bold printing 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

b7 b0
-- -- -- -- -- -- --

0: Canceling bold printing

1: Setting bold printing

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) n is valid only in the least significant bit.

(2) In bold printing, one character is shifted 1 dot horizontally and superimposed on
another. However, in the event of the Character Rotation Set Command ([ESC]V),
bold printing is performed after the rotation of the character. Therefore the
direction in which bold is applied is different.

(3) Bold printing can also be set or canceled by the Print Mode All Set Command
([ESC] G), but the most recently processed command is applied.

(4) The same print output is obtained as when the Double Printing Set Command
([ESC] G) is executed.

Reference Print Mode All Set Command ([ESC] !)

8-32
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.19 DOUBLE PRINTING SET COMMAND [ESC] G

Function Sets or cancels double printing.

Format [ESC] Gn

Term ASCII: ESC G

Hex: 1Bh 47h

[Parameter]
n: Double printing 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

b7 b0
-- -- -- -- -- -- --

0: Canceling double printing

1: Setting double printing

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) n is valid only in the least significant bit.

(2) The same print output is obtained as when the Bold Printing Set Command
([ESC]E) is executed.

Reference Bold Printing Set Command ([ESC] E)

8-33
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.20 FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] J

Function Prints data and feeds over the length of n/2 dots.

Format [ESC] Jn

Term ASCII: ESC J

Hex: 1Bh 4Ah

[Parameter]
n: Feed length 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

Explanation (1) After this command is executed, the next print starting position is the beginning of a
line.

(2) There is no impact upon the line feed length specified by the 30-dot Line Feed
Length Set Command ([ESC] 2) or Minimum Dots for Line Feed Length Set
Command ([ESC] 3).

(3) Fractions are rounded up, if any.

(4) In standard mode, dots in the vertical direction (y) are used.

(5) In page mode, the printer operation varies depending on the starting position, as
follows:

1 If “top left” or “bottom right” is selected as the starting position by the Page Mode
Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T), the print position will be shifted in the
paper feed direction (vertical direction of a character). In this case, dots in the
vertical direction (y) are used.

2 If “top right” or “bottom left” is selected as the starting position by the Page Mode
Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T), the print position will be shifted in the
direction perpendicular to the paper feed direction (vertical direction of a
character). In this case, dots in the horizontal direction (x) are used.

(6) The value in the table below must be applied if the specified feed length exceeds it.

B-EP2DL-GHxx (203 dpi) 999 mm

B-EP4DL-GHxx (203 dpi) 999 mm

(7) If the value set in the parameter of this command is smaller than the feed length of a
character, printing will be performed with one character superimposed on another.
Therefore, care must be taken to select the feed length.

8-34
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.21 SWITCHING TO PAGE MODE COMMAND [ESC] L

Function Makes transition from standard mode to page mode

Format [ESC] L

Term ASCII: ESC L

Hex: 1Bh 4Ch

Explanation (1) This command will be valid only if it is included at the beginning of a line.

(2) This command will be valid if it is included in page mode.

(3) The printer returns to standard mode after printing ends with the Page Mode Print
Command ([FF]), or with the Switching to Standard Mode Command ([ESC] S).

(4) The print data is expanded within the print area specified by the Page Mode Print
Area Set Command ([ESC] W). Also, the starting position is the position in the
print area specified by the Page Mode Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T).

(5) The following commands have different values in page and standard modes. So,
the values are switched to the ones for page mode.

1 Spacing Set [ESC] [SP], [FS] S

2 Line Feed Set [ESC] 2, [ESC] 3

(6) The parameter settings made when the following commands are received in
standard mode are applied after switching to page mode.

1 [ESC] V Setting / canceling 90-degree rotation of character

2 [ESC] a Justifying print position

3 [ESC] { Setting / canceling inverted printing

4 [GS] L Setting left margin

5 [GS] W Setting width of print area

(7) The printer returns to standard mode by the Initialize Command ([ESC] @).

Reference Page Mode Print Command ([FF])

Page Mode Cancel Command ([CAN])

Page Mode Collective Print Command ([ESC] [FF])

Switching to Standard Mode Command ([ESC] S)

Page Mode Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T)

Page Mode Print Area Set Command ([ESC] W)

Page Mode Relative Position in Vertical Direction Set Command ([GS] \)

8-35
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.22 INTERNATIONAL CHARACTER SELECT COMMAND [ESC] R

Function Selects an international character set.

The value specified by this command is invalid because the B-EP series does not
support this function.

Format [ESC] Rn

Term ASCII: ESC R

Hex: 1Bh 52h

[Parameter]
n: Selecting international character set 0 ≤ n ≤ 10 (00h ≤ n ≤ 0Ah)

n Character set
0 USA
1 France
2 Germany
3 UK
4 Denmark
5 Sweden
6 Italy
7 Spain
8 Japan
9 Norway
10 Denmark 2

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) Even if an international character set is switched between Japan and other
countries by this command, there is no impact upon the Chinese character code
system.

[Program example]

for(i=0;i<11;i++) {

fprintf( stdprn, "\033R"); /* Selecting country */

fputc( i, stdprn );

fprintf( stdprn, " # $ @ [ \\ ] ^ ` { | } ~ \n");

8-36
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Print example]

23h 24h 40h 5Bh 5Ch 5Dh 5Eh 60h 7Bh 7Ch 7Dh 7Eh

USA

France

Germany

UK

Denmark I

Sweden

Italy

Spain

Japan

Norway
Denmark II

8-37
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.23 SWITCHING TO STANDARD MODE COMMAND [ESC] S

Function Makes transition from page mode to standard mode.

Format [ESC] S

Term ASCII: ESC S

Hex: 1Bh 53h

Explanation (1) This command will be valid only if it is executed in page mode.

(2) The data expanded in page mode is erased.

(3) After this command is executed, the next print starting position is the beginning of a
line.

(4) The following commands have different values in page and standard modes. So,
the values are switched to the ones for standard mode.

1 Spacing Set [ESC] [SP], [FS] S

2 Line Feed Length Set [ESC] 2, [ESC] 3

(5) Standard mode is selected at power-on, when resetting, or when the Initialize
Command ([ESC] @) is executed.

(6) The print area defined by the Page Mode Print Area Set Command ([ESC] W) is
initialized.

Reference Page Mode Print Command ([FF])

Page Mode Collective Print Command ([ESC] [FF])

Switching to Page Mode Command ([ESC] L)

8-38
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.24 PAGE MODE PRINT DIRECTION SET COMMAND [ESC] T

Function Selects a print direction and print starting point in page mode.

Format [ESC] Tn

Term ASCII: ESC T

Hex: 1Bh 54h

[Parameter]
n: Selecting print direction and starting point 0 ≤ n ≤ 3 (00h ≤ n ≤ 03h)
48 ≤ n ≤ 51 (30h ≤ n ≤ 33h)

N Print direction

Top left (A in the

Paper feed direction →

0, 48 Left → Right
figure on the right)

Bottom left (B in the (Reference)

1, 49 Bottom → Top
figure on the right) (Print area)
Bottom right (C in

2, 50 Right → Left the figure on the

right)

Top right (D in the

3, 51 Top → Bottom
figure on the right)

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) If this command is received while the printer is in standard mode, the defined
parameter setting will be applied after switching to page mode.

(2) The position where characters are expanded is the starting position in the print area
defined by the Page Mode Print Area Set Command ([ESC] W).

Reference Switching to Standard Mode Command ([ESC] S)

Switching to Page Mode Command ([ESC] L)

Page Mode Print Area Set Command ([ESC] W)

Relative Position Set Command ([ESC] \)

Page Mode Relative Position in Vertical Direction Set Command ([GS] \)

8-39
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.25 CHARACTER ROTATION SET COMMAND [ESC] V

Function Sets or cancels the 90-degree rotation (clockwise) of a character.

Format [ESC] Vn

Term ASCII: ESC V

Hex: 1Bh 56h

[Parameter]
n: Selecting 90-degree rotation (clockwise) 0 ≤ n ≤ 1 (00h ≤ n ≤ 01h)
or
48 ≤ n ≤ 49 (30h ≤ n ≤ 31h)

N
0, 48 Canceling 90-degree of rotation (clockwise)
1, 49 Setting 90-degree of rotation (clockwise)

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) Even if underlining is set, a character rotated 90 degrees clockwise will not be
underlined.

(2) If 90-degree of rotation (clockwise) is set, a relationship between double width and
double height is the reverse of the one when 90-degree rotation is canceled.

(3) The command setting does not have any impacts upon page mode.

(4) If this command is received while the printer in page mode, the defined parameter
setting will be applied after switching to standard mode.

Reference Print Mode All Set Command ([ESC] !)

Underlining Set Command ([ESC] -)

8-40
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.26 PAGE MODE PRINT AREA SET COMMAND [ESC] W

Function Specifies a position and size of the print area in page mode.

Format [ESC] WxLxHyLyHdxLdxHdyLdyH

Term ASCII: ESC W

Hex: 1Bh 57h

[Parameter]
xL : Starting point in horizontal direction (low order) 0 ≤ xL ≤ 255 (00h ≤ xL ≤ FFh)
xH : Starting point in horizontal direction (high order) 0 ≤ xH ≤ 255 (00h ≤ xH ≤ FFh)
yL : Starting point in vertical direction (low order) 0 ≤yL ≤ 255 (00h ≤yL ≤ FFh)
yH : Starting point in vertical direction (high order) 0 ≤yH ≤ 255 (00h ≤yH ≤ FFh)
dxL : Length in horizontal direction (low order) 0 ≤dxL ≤ 255 (00h ≤dxL ≤ FFh)
dxH : Length in horizontal direction (high order) 0 ≤ dxH ≤ 255 (00h ≤dxH ≤ FFh)
dyL : Length in vertical direction (low order) 0 ≤ dyL ≤ 255 (00h ≤dyL ≤ FFh)
dyH : Length in vertical direction (high order) 0 ≤ dyH ≤ 255 (00h ≤dyH ≤ FFh)
* Starting point in horizontal direction = xL + xH × 256 dots
Starting point in vertical direction = yL + yH × 256 dots
Length in horizontal direction = dxL + dxH × 256 dots
Length in vertical direction = dyL + dyH × 256 dots

Default value B-EP2DL-GHxx: xL=xH=yL=yH=0, dxL=80h dxH=01h dyL=80h dyH=01h

B-EP4DL-GHxx: xL=xH=yL=yH=0, dxL=40h dxH=03h dyL=40h dyH=03h

Explanation (1) If this command is received while the printer in standard mode, the defined
parameter setting will be applied after switching to page mode.

(2) If the starting point in the horizontal or vertical direction is out of the print area,
command processing will be aborted, and the subsequent data will be processed as
normal data.

(3) If the length in the horizontal or vertical direction is 0, command processing will be
aborted, and the subsequent data will be processed as normal data.

(4) The position where characters are expanded is the starting position in the print area
defined by the Page Mode Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T).

8-41
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(5) At a moment when an error occurs with parameter xL to dyH due to a factor such as
an unmatched condition, command processing will be aborted, and the data
subsequent to dyH will be processed as normal data.

(6) If the following commands, which are used commonly among the B-EP series, are
received, a higher priority will be given to them. Therefore, the same range as
these commands cannot be specified.

[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] WT [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] WW [LF] [NUL]
(Example)

[ESC] W xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH

↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
S 10 0 0 160 1 160 1
The above values are specified. If inputted in hex format, they are as follows:
[1BH][57H][53H][0AH][00H][00H][A0H][01H][A0H][01H]

However the underlined portion is considered as [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL].

Therefore, a priority is given to the Status Request Command rather than the Page
Mode Print Area Set Command.

(7) The figure below illustrates a print area with the starting point in the horizontal
direction X, starting point in the vertical direction Y, length in the horizontal direction
Dx, and length in the vertical direction Dy.

(X, Y)
Dx

Dy Print area
Paper feed direction

(X + Dx - 1, Y + Dy - 1)

8-42
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.27 JUSTIFICATION COMMAND [ESC] a

Function Justifies print data.

Format [ESC] an

Term ASCII: ESC a

Hex: 1Bh 61h

[Parameter]
n: Justifying print position 0 ≤ n ≤ 2 (00h ≤ n ≤ 02h)
or
48 ≤ n ≤ 50 (30h ≤ n ≤ 32h)

0: Left-justifying
1: Centering
2: Right-justifying

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) This command will be executed only if it is received at the beginning of a line.

(2) If this command is received while the printer in page mode, the defined parameter
setting will be applied after switching to standard mode.

(3) Justification is performed within the specified print area.

(4) Justification also applies to a portion skipped by the Horizontal Tab Command
([HT]), Absolute Position Set Command ([ESC] $), or Relative Position Set
Command ([ESC] \).

8-43
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.28 PANEL KEY (FEED KEY) SET COMMAND [ESC] c5

Function Enables or disables the panel key (FEED key).

Format [ESC] c5n

Term ASCII: ESC c 5

Hex: 1Bh 63h 35h

[Parameter]
n: Selecting / deselecting printer 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

b7 b0
-- -- -- -- -- -- --

0: Enabled
1: Disabled

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) n is valid only in the least significant bit.

(2) The [FEED] key will be disabled if the parameter is set to “Disabled.”

(3) While waiting for the [FEED] key entry when a macro is executed, the [FEED] key is
enabled regardless of the parameter setting of this command. However, paper
feed is not performed.

8-44
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.29 PAPER FEED LENGTH SET COMMAND [ESC] d

Function Prints data and feeds paper over n lines. However, the specified number of lines that
paper is fed over is not stored.

Format [ESC] d

Term ASCII: ESC d

Hex: 1Bh 64h

[Parameter]
n: No. of lines that paper is fed over 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

Explanation (1) After this command is executed, the next print starting position is the beginning of a
line.

(2) There is no impact upon the line feed length defined by the feed length set
commands ([ESC] 2 or [ESC] 3).

(3) The value in the table below must be applied if n × line feed length exceeds it.

B-EP2DL-GHxx (203 dpi) 999 mm

B-EP4DL-GHxx (203 dpi) 999 mm
(4) The line feed length is 30 dots per line.

[Program example]

fprintf( stdprn, "11111\n");

fprintf( stdprn, "22222");
fprintf( stdprn, "\033d\x05"); /* 5-line feed */
fprintf( stdprn, "33333\n");

[Print example]

11111
22222 ← 5-line feed

33333

8-45
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.30 CODE PAGE NO. SELECT COMMAND [ESC] t

Function Selects a code page No.

Format [ESC] tn

Term ASCII: ESC t

Hex: 1Bh 74h

[Parameter]
n: Selecting code page No. 0 ≤ n ≤ 5 (00h ≤ n ≤ 05h)
n = 255 (n = FFh)
0: PC437 (USA: Standard Europe)
1: Japanese (Katakana)
2: PC850 (Multilingual)
3: PC860 (Portuguese)
4: PC863 (Canadian-French)
5: PC865 (Nordic)
255: Blank page

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) PC850 is the only code page that the B-EP series supports. Therefore, any values
other than 2 are invalid.

[Program example]

for(i=0;i<2;i++) {
fprintf( stdprn, "\033t"); /* Selecting code page */
fputc( i, stdprn );
for(j=0x20;j<0xff;j++) {
fputc( j, stdprn );
}
fprintf( stdprn, "\n\r" );
}

[Print example]

!”#•••• ← Page 0

:
:
••••2
← Page 1
!”#••••
:
:
••••

8-46
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.31 INVERTED PRINTING SET COMMAND [ESC] {

Function Sets or cancels inverted printing (upside-down).

Format [ESC] {n

Term ASCII: ESC {

Hex: 1Bh 7Bh

[Parameter]
n: Setting/canceling inverted printing 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

b7 b0
-- -- -- -- -- -- --

0: Canceling inverted printing

1: Setting inverted printing

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) n is valid only in the least significant bit.

(2) This command is executed only if it is received at the beginning of a line.

(3) Inverted printing means that a line is inverted 180 degrees and printed.

(4) Inverted printing is performed in the direction opposed to normal printing.

(5) If this command is received while the printer is in page mode, the defined parameter
setting will be applied after switching to standard mode.

[Program example]

fprintf( stdprn, "\033{"}; /* Canceling inverted printing */

fputc( 0, stdprn );
fprintf( stdprn, "11111\n");
fprintf( stdprn, "\033{"}; /* Setting inverted printing */
fputc( 1, stdprn );
fprintf( stdprn, "22222\n");

[Printer example]

11111

Paper width

8-47
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.32 ABSOLUTE POSITION SET COMMAND [ESC] $

Function Specifies an absolute position.

Format [ESC] $nLnH

Term ASCII: ESC $

Hex: 1Bh 24h

[Parameter]
n: No. of dots to specify absolute position (low order) 0 ≤ nL ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nL ≤ FFh)
n: No. of dots to specify absolute position (high order) 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nH ≤ FFh)

Explanation (1) An absolute position of the subsequent print starting position is specified with
reference to the left margin. The next print starting position is located (nL + nH ×
256) / dots away from the left margin.

(2) An absolute position out of the print area is ignored.

(3) Dots in the horizontal direction (x) are applied in standard mode.

(4) The printer operation varies in page mode depending on the starting position as
follows:

1 If “top left” or “bottom right” is selected as the starting point defined by the Page
Mode Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T), an absolute position in the
direction perpendicular to the paper feed direction (horizontal direction of a
character) is specified.

2 If “top right” or “bottom left” is selected as the starting point defined by the Page
Mode Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T), an absolute position in the paper
feed direction (horizontal direction of a character) is specified.

Reference Relative Position Set Command ([ESC] \)

Page Mode Absolute Position in Vertical Direction Set Command ([GS] $)
Page Mode Relative Position in Vertical Direction Set Command ([GS] \)

8-48
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.33 RELATIVE POSITION SET COMMAND [ESC] \

Function Specifies a relative position.

Format [ESC] \nLnH

Term ASCII: ESC \

Hex: 1Bh 5Ch

[Parameter]
n: No. of dots to specify relative position (low order) 0 ≤ nL ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nL ≤ FFh)
n: No. of dots to specify relative position (high order) 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nH ≤ FFh)

Default value Not defined.

Explanation (1) A relative position of the subsequent print starting position is specified with
reference to a current position. The next print starting position is located (nL + nH
× 256) away from the current position.

(2) A relative position out of the print area is ignored.

(3) If the right direction of the current position is specified, a positive number must be
defined. If the left direction of the current position is specified, a negative number
must be defined.

(4) A negative number is represented by a complement number of 65535.

Ex.) To specify N dots in the left (negative) direction

nL + nH × 256 = 65536 - N.

(5) Dots in the horizontal direction (x) are applied in standard mode.

(6) The printer operation varies in page mode depending on the starting position as
follows:

1 If “top left” or “bottom right” is selected as the starting point in the Page Mode
Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T), a relative position in the direction
perpendicular to the paper feed direction (horizontal direction of a character) is
specified.

2 If “top right” or “bottom left” is selected as the starting point in the Page Mode
Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T), a relative position in the paper feed
direction (horizontal direction of a character) is specified.

Reference Absolute Position Set Command ([ESC] $)

8-49
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.34 CHINESE CHARACTER PRINT MODE ALL SET COMMAND [FS] !

Function Specifies printing mode for Chinese characters altogether.

Format [FS] !

Term ASCII: FS!

Hex: 1Ch 21h

[Parameter]
n: Specifying character control of Chinese character 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

b7 b0
-- -- -- -- --

0: Canceling double width

1: Setting double width
0: Canceling double height
1: Setting double height

0: Canceling underlining
1: Setting underlining

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) If both double width and double height are specified, a character size will be
quadrupled (double width × double height).

(2) Chinese characters including space on both sides of them are underlined.
However, a portion skipped by the Horizontal Tab Command ([HT]) or a character
rotated 90 degrees clockwise is not underlined.

(3) The width of an underline for Chinese characters is determined in accordance with
the width defined by the Chinese Character Underlining Set Command ([FS] -).

(4) If characters with different magnifications in the vertical direction coexist in the same
line, they will be aligned to the baseline.

(5) The size of Chinese characters can also be specified by the Chinese Character
Magnification Set Command ([FS] W) or Character Size Set Command ([GS] !).
But the most recently processed command is applied.

(6) Underlining for Chinese characters can also be set or canceled by the Chinese
Character Underlining Set Command ([FS] -), but the most recently processed
command is applied.

(7) The parameter setting applies to the Chinese language settings with Chinese
language implemented for the QM model (destined overseas), or to the Korean
language setting with Korean language implemented.

8-50
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.35 CHINESE CHARACTER MODE SET COMMAND [FS] &

Function Prints Chinese characters.

Format [FS] &

Term ASCII: FS&

Hex: 1Ch 26h

Explanation (1) If this command is received with shift JIS selected for a Chinese character code
system, the defined parameter setting will be applied when the Chinese character
code system is changed to JIS. There is no impact upon printing.

(2) Chinese character mode is canceled by default.

(3) A Chinese character code is processed from the 1st to the 2nd byte.

(4) The parameter setting applies to the Chinese language settings with Chinese
language implemented for the QM model (destined overseas), or to the Korean
language setting with Korean language implemented.

Reference Chinese Character Mode Cancel Command ([FS] .)

Chinese Character Code System Set Command ([FS] C)

8-51
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.36 CHINESE CHARACTER UNDERLINING SET COMMAND [FS] -

Function Sets or cancels underlining for ANK characters.

Format [FS]-n

Term ASCII: FS-

Hex: 1Ch 2Dh

[Parameter]
n: Setting underlining for Chinese character 0 ≤ n ≤ 2 (00h ≤ n ≤ 02h)
or
48 ≤ n ≤ 50 (30h ≤ n ≤ 32h)
0: Canceling underlining
1: Setting underlining (1-dot wide)
2: Setting underlining (2-dot wide)

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) Chinese characters including space on both sides of them are underlined.
However, a portion skipped by the Horizontal Tab Command ([HT]) or a character
rotated 90 degrees clockwise is not underlined.

(2) If underlining Chinese characters is canceled with n = 0, the subsequent Chinese

characters will not be underlined. However, the width of the underline immediately
before canceling the underline is maintained. Also, a 1-dot wide underline is
selected by default.

(3) The width of an underline for Chinese characters is consistent regardless of a

character size.

(4) Underlining Chinese characters can also be set or canceled by the Chinese
Character Print Mode All Set Command ([FS] !), but the most recently processed
command is applied.

(5) The parameter setting applies to the Chinese language settings with Chinese
language implemented for the QM model (destined overseas), or to the Korean
language setting with Korean language implemented.

Reference Chinese Character Print Mode All Set Command ([FS] !)

8-52
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.37 CHINESE CHARACTER MODE CANCEL COMMAND [FS] .

Function Cancels Chinese character mode.

Format [FS] .

Term ASCII: FS.

Hex: 1Ch 2Eh

Explanation (1) If this command is received with shift JIS selected for a Chinese character code
system, the defined parameter setting will be applied when the Chinese character
code system is changed to JIS. There is no impact upon printing.

(2) Chinese character mode is canceled by default.

Reference Chinese Character Mode Set Command ([FS] &)

Chinese Character Code System Set Command ([FS] C)

8-53
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.38 WRITABLE CHARACTER OF CHINESE CHARACTER DEFINE COMMAND [FS] 2

Function Specifies writable characters of Chinese characters.

Format [FS] 2a1a2 [d1d2d3…dk]

Term ASCII: FS2

Hex: 1Ch 32h

[Parameter]
a1: Writable character code (high order)
a2: Writable character code (low order)
JIS code: a1 = 77h, 21h ≤ a2 ≤ 7Eh
Shift JIS: a1 = ECh, 40h ≤ a2 ≤ 9Eh (except for 7Fh)
EUC code: a1 = F7h, A1h ≤ a2 ≤ FEh
Chinese/Korean: a1 = FFh, 40h ≤ a2 ≤ 7Eh, 80h ≤ a2 ≤ FCh
d: Data to be defined 0 ≤ d ≤ 255
Data consists of 72 bytes (k = 72) (3 bytes (high) × 24 dots)

Default value All space

Explanation (1) a1 and a2 refer to a Chinese character code to define writable characters. a1
refers to the 1st byte, and a2 the 2nd byte.

(2) d refers to data to be defined. A bit corresponding to a dot to be printed is 1, and

the one corresponding to a dot not to be printed is 0.

(3) Font A accepts 94 characters.

(4) At a moment when an error occurs with parameter a1 or a2 due to a factor such as
an unmatched condition, command processing will be aborted, and the data
subsequent to a2 will be processed as normal data.

(5) The defined writable characters apply until resetting or until the printer is turned off.

Reference Chinese Character Code System Set Command ([FS] C)

8-54
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Defined character] Example of font A

24 dots
Example:
d1 d4 d70
24 dots

b7

d2 d5 d71

24 dots

d3 d6 D72
b0

[Character]

d1=0x00 d4=0x03 d7=0x0F d10=0x0D d13=0x0C d16=0x0D …

d2=0x00 d5=0xC0 d8=0XC0 d11=0x80 d14=0x03 d17=0x83 …
d3=0x00 d6=0x00 d9=0x00 d12=0x00 d15=0x00 d18=0x80 …

8-55
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.39 CHINESE CHARACTER CODE SYSTEM SET COMMAND [FS] C

Function Selects a Chinese character code system.

Format [FS] Cn

Term ASCII: FS C
Hex: 1Ch 43h

[Parameter]
n: Selecting Chinese character code system n = 0, 1 (n = 00h, 01h)

b7 b0
-- -- -- -- -- -- --

0: JIS code system

1: Shift JIS code system

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) For JIS code, valid Chinese character codes are 21 to 7Eh for both the 1st and 2nd
bytes.

(2) For shift JIS code, valid Chinese character codes are as follows:

1st byte: 81h to 9Fh, or E0h to EFh

2nd byte: 40h to 7Eh, or 80h to FCh

(3) There is no impact upon the setting with Chinese or Korean language implemented.

[Program example]

fprintf( stdprn, "\034C\x01"); /* SHIFT-JIS selected */

fprintf( stdprn, "\x44\x7b\n");
fprintf( stdprn, "\034C%c",0x00); /* JIS selected */
fprintf( stdprn, "\034&"); /* Beginning of Chinese character */
fprintf( stdprn, "\x44\x7b\n");
fprintf( stdprn, "\034."); /* End of Chinese character */
fprintf( stdprn, "\x44\x7b\n");

[Print example]

D{

D{

8-56
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Example]

[1C][43][01][1C][26][31][32][33][41][42][43][82][A0][82][A2][82][A4][1C][2E][B1][B2][B3]
2

[1C][2E][31][32][33][41][42][43][1C][43][00][1C][26][24][22][24][24][24][26][1C][2E][B1][B2][B3]
3

[1C][2E][31][32][33][41][42][43][1C][43][01][1C][26][82][A0][82][A2][82][A4][1C][2E][B1][B2][B3]
4

[1C][43][01][1C][26][31][32][33][41][42][43][82][A0][82][A2][82][A4][B1][B2][B3]
5

[1C][2E][31][32][33][41][42][43][1C][43][01][1C][26][82][A0][82][A2][82][A4][B1][B2][B3]
6

[1C][2E][31][32][33][41][42][43][1C][43][00][1C][26][24][22][24][24][24][26][B1][B2][B3]

Reference Chapter 12 Character Code Table

Chapter 13 Chinese Character Code Table

8-57
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.40 CHINESE CHARACTER SPACING SET COMMAND [FS] S

Function Specifies spacing (or the number of dots) on both sides of a Chinese character.

Format [FS] Sn1n2

Term ASCII: FS S
Hex: 1Ch 53h

[Parameter]
n1: Spacing on the left of Chinese character 0 ≤ n1 ≤ 99 (00h ≤ n1 ≤ 63h)
n2: Spacing on the right of Chinese character 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 99 (00h ≤ n2 ≤ 63h)

Default value n1: 0, n2: 0

Explanation (1) Spacing defined this command is the one when a character size is standard. If a
character with a magnification of x 2 or over in the horizontal direction is expanded,
spacing will be determined by the specified spacing × magnification in the horizontal
direction.

(2) A sum of spacing on both sides of a character must never exceed 99. If so, it will
be changed to 99.

(3) Spacing can be independently specified in page and standard modes.

(4) If a double-width character is specified, spacing will also be doubled.

(5) For the B-EP series, spacing on the left of a Chinese character is added to spacing
on its right. Therefore, there is no space found on the left of the Chinese character
in the print output.

8-58
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Program example]

fprintf( stdprn, "\034S%c\x02",0x00); /* 2 dots on the right of character */

fprintf( stdprn, "\x82\x50\x82\x50\x82\x50\x82\x50\n");
fprintf( stdprn, "\034S%c\x1c",0x00); /* 28 dots on the right of character */
fprintf( stdprn, "\x82\x51\x82\x51\x82\x51\x82\x51\n");

[Print example]

1111
2222

8-59
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.41 CHINESE CHARACTER MAGNIFICATION SET COMMAND [FS] W

Function Sets or cancels the quadrupling of Chinese character (double height × double width).

Format [FS] Wn

Term ASCII: FS W
Hex: 1Ch 57h

[Parameter]
n: Setting quadrupling of Chinese character (double height × double width)
0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

b7 b0
-- -- -- -- -- -- --

0: Canceling quadrupling
1: Setting quadrupling

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) n is valid only in the least significant bit.

(2) If the quadrupling of a Chinese character (double height × double width) is canceled
by this command, the subsequent Chinese character is printed in standard size (x
1).

(3) A Chinese character size can also be specified by the Character Size Set
Command ([GS] !) or Chinese Character Print Mode All Set Command ([FS] !), but
the most recently processed command is applied.

Reference Chinese Character Print Mode All Set Command ([FS] !)

Character Size Set Command ([GS] !)

8-60
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.42 PAGE MODE ABSOLUTE POSITION SET COMMAND [GS] $

Function Specifies an absolute position in the vertical direction in page mode.

Format [GS] $nLnH

Term ASCII: GS $
Hex: 1Dh 24h

[Parameter]
nL: Specifying absolute position in the vertical direction in page mode (low order)
0 ≤ nL ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nL ≤ FFh)

nH: Specifying absolute position in the vertical direction in page mode (high order)
0 ≤ nH ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nH ≤ FFh)

Default value

Explanation (1) An absolute position of the data expansion starting position in the vertical direction
in page mode is specified with reference to the starting position. The next data
expansion starting position is shifted (nL + nH × 256) dots away from the current
position in the vertical direction.

(2) This command is ignored except when page mode is selected.

(3) An absolute position in the vertical direction out of the specified print area is
ignored.

(4) A starting position, which is a reference to an absolute position, is specified in the

Page Mode Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T).

Reference Absolute Position Set Command ([ESC] $)

Page Mode Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T)
Page Mode Print Area Set Command ([ESC] W)
Relative Position Set Command ([ESC] \)
Page Mode Relative Position in Vertical Direction Set Command ([GS] \)

8-61
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.43 REVERSE CHARACTER SET COMMAND [GS] B

Function Sets or cancels reverse characters (white text on black)

Format [FS] Bn

Term ASCII: GS B
Hex: 1Dh 42h

[Parameter]
n: Setting reverse characters 0 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

b7 b0
-- -- -- -- -- -- --

0: Canceling reverse character

1: Setting reverse character

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) n is valid only in the least significant bit.

(2) Reversed printing applies to the internal and downloaded characters.

(3) Reversed printing also applies to spacing on the right of a character defined by the
Spacing Set Command ([ESC] [SP]).

(4) There is no impact upon bit images, downloaded bit images, barcodes, or HRI
characters, or a portion skipped by the Horizontal Tab Command ([HT]) or Relative
Position Set Command ([ESC] \).

(5) There is no impact upon spacing between lines.

(6) A higher priority is given to reversed printing than underlining. Therefore, even if
underlining is specified, reverse characters will not be underlined. However, the
underlining settings will remain unchanged.

8-62
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.44 ID TRANSMISSION COMMAND [GS] I

Function Transmits the following ID specified by n.

Format [GS] In

Term ASCII: GS I
Hex: 1Dh 49h

[Parameter]
n: Selecting ID to transmit 1 ≤ n ≤ 3 (01h ≤ n ≤ 03h)
or
49 ≤ n ≤ 51 (31h ≤ n ≤ 33h)

n ID type ID to transmit
1 Model ID 0CH (12)
2 Type ID See (1) below for further information.
3 Firmware version See (2) below for further information.

b7 b0
0 0 1 0 0 0 0 1

2-byte code supported

1, fixed (supported)

0, fixed

0, fixed
1 station

0, fixed (single)
Thermal printer
1, fixed (thermal)

Default value n:

Explanation (1) Type ID is fixed at 21H for this printer.

(2) The firmware version is updated as below every time firmware is upgraded or
revised:

A(41H) → B(42H) → C(43H) →････→ Z(5AH) → a(61H) → b(62H) → …

8-63
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.45 PAGE MODE RELATIVE POSITION IN VERTICAL DIRECTION SET COMMAND [GS] \

Function Specifies a relative position in the vertical direction in page mode.

Format [GS] \nLnH

Term ASCII: GS \
Hex: 1Dh 5Ch

[Parameter]
nL: Specifying relative position in the vertical direction in page mode (low order)
0 ≤ nL ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nL ≤ FFh)
nH: Specifying relative position in the vertical direction in page mode (high order)
0 ≤ nH ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nH ≤ FFh)

Default value

Explanation (1) A relative position of the data expansion starting position in the vertical direction in
page mode is specified with reference to a current position. The next data
expansion starting position is shifted (nL + nH × 256) dots away from the current
position in the vertical direction.

(2) This command is ignored except when page mode is selected.

(3) In JIS standard characters, “¥” is equivalent to “\”.

(4) A relative position in the vertical direction out of the specified print area is ignored.

(5) A positive number must be specified for the downward direction, and a negative
number for the upward direction.

(6) The number of dots is determined by nH × 256 + nL.

(7) N dots in the upward (negative) direction are specified by a complement number of
N.

- N dots = 65536 - N

Reference Absolute Position Set Command ([ESC] $)

Page Mode Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T)
Page Mode Print Area Set Command ([ESC] W)
Relative Position Set Command ([ESC] \)
Page Mode Absolute Position in Vertical Direction Set Command ([GS] $)

8-64
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.47 BARCODE PRINT COMMAND [GS] k

Function Selects a barcode system and prints barcodes.

Format 1 [GS] km [d1d2d3…dk] [NUL]

2 [GS] kmn [d1d2d3…dn]

Term ASCII: GS k
Hex: 1Dh 6Bh

[Parameter]
m: Barcode type
1: 0 ≤ m ≤ 6 (00h ≤ m ≤ 06h)
The ranges of k and d vary depending on the selected barcode system.
2: 65 ≤ m ≤ 73 (41h ≤ m ≤ 49h)
The ranges of n and d vary depending on the selected barcode system.
1
m Barcode type Range of k Range of d (ASCII)
0 UPC-A 11 ≤ k ≤ 12 0 to 9
1 UPC-E 11 ≤ k ≤ 12 0 to 9
2 JAN13 (EAN) 12 ≤k ≤ 13 0 to 9
3 JAN8 (EAN) 7≤k≤8 0 to 9
4 CODE39 1≤k SP,$,%,+,-,.,/,0 to 9,A to Z
1≤k
5 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 0 to 9
(even number only)
6 NW-7 1≤k $,+,-,.,/,:,0 to 9,A to D

2
m Barcode type Range of n Range of d (ASCII)
65 UPC-A 11 ≤ n ≤ 12 0 to 9
66 UPC-E 11 ≤ n ≤ 12 0 to 9
67 JAN13 (EAN) 12 ≤ n ≤ 13 0 to 9
68 JAN8 (EAN) 7 ≤ n≤ 8 0 to 9
69 CODE39 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 SP,$,%,+,-,.,/,0 to 9,A to Z
1 ≤ n ≤ 255
70 Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) 0 to 9
(even number only)
71 NW-7 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 $,+,-,.,/,:,0 to 9,A to D
72 CODE93 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 0x00 to 0x7F
73 CODE128 2 ≤ n ≤ 255 0x00 to 0x7F

8-65
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation 1

(1) This command ends with the [NUL] code.

(2) For UPC-A and UPC-E, upon the input of 12-byte barcode data, a barcode is
printed. The data subsequent to it is processed as normal data.

(3) For JAN13, upon the input of 13-byte barcode data, a barcode is printed. The data
subsequent to it is processed as normal data.

(4) For JAN8, upon the input of 8-byte barcode data, a barcode is printed. The data
subsequent to it is processed as normal data.

(5) The number of data items of ITF barcode must be an even number. If it is an odd
number, the final data will be ignored.
2
(1) n refers to the number of data items. n bytes from the subsequent data are
processed as barcode data.

(2) If n is out of the defined range, command processing will be aborted, and the
subsequent data will be processed as normal data.

[In standard mode]

(1) If d is out of the defined range, only paper feed will be performed, and the
subsequent data will be processed as normal data.

(2) If the width of a barcode exceeds the print area per line, it will not be guaranteed
that the barcode is printed properly.

(3) Paper will be fed over the length equivalent to the height of a barcode (including
HRI characters if HRI character printing is specified), regardless of a line feed
length defined by the 30-dot Line Feed Length Set Command ([ESC] 2) or Minimum
Dots for Line Feed Length Set Command ([ESC] 3).

(4) This command will be valid only if no data is present in the print buffer. If data is
present in the print buffer, the data subsequent to m will be processed as normal data.

(5) After a barcode is printed, the next print position is the beginning of a line.

(6) There is no impact upon print modes (bold printing, double printing, underlining, and
character size) except for inverted printing.

[In page mode]

(1) A barcode is expanded, but not printed. After the expansion of the barcode, the
dot subsequent to the final barcode data is the data expansion starting position.

(2) If d is out of the defined range, command processing will be aborted, and the
subsequent data will be processed as normal data. Note that the data expansion
starting position remains unchanged.

(3) If the width of a barcode exceeds the print area per line, it will not be guaranteed
that the barcode is printed properly.

8-66
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation [CODE128]

(1) Please refer to “APPENDIX: BARCODE” for the overview of CODE 128.

(2) When this printer is used to print a CODE128 barcode, care must be taken
regarding the following points when transmitting barcode data:

1 The beginning of the barcode data must always be a code set (CODE A, CODE
B, or CODE C), based on which the first code set is selected.

2 Special characters are specified by two characters: ‘{’ followed by 1 character.

Also, an ASCII character ‘{’ is specified by transmitting 2 ‘{’ characters in a row.
Data to be transmitted
Special character
ASCII Hex
SHIFT {S 7B 53
CODE A {A 7B 41
CODE B {B 7B 42
CODE C {C 7B 43
FNC1 {1 7B 31
FNC2 {2 7B 32
FNC3 {3 7B 33
FNC4 {4 7B 34
‘{’ {{ 7B 7B

[Example] Data to be transmitted to print “No.123456”

In this example, first, code set B is used to print “No.” After that, the code set is
changed to code set C, and the 6-digit number is printed.

[GS] k [49] [0A] [7B] [42] [4E] [6F] [2E] [7B] [43] [0C] [22] [38]

123456
Changed to code set C
No.
Start code B
Length
Command
(3) If the beginning of the barcode data string is not a code set, command processing
will be aborted immediately, and the subsequent data will be processed as normal
data.

(4) If the combination of ‘{’ and the following character does not match any special
characters, command processing will be aborted immediately, and the subsequent
data will be processed as normal data.

(5) If a character that cannot be used with a selected code set is received, command
processing will be aborted immediately, and the subsequent data will be processed
as normal data.

8-67
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) An HRI (Human Readable Interpretation) character corresponding to a shift

character and code set character is not printed.

(7) An HRI character for a function character is space.

(8) An HRI character for a control character (00H to 1FH and 7FH) is space.

[CODE93]

The B-EP series does not support the following functions:

(1) An HRI character for a start character (†) is printed at the beginning of the HRI
character string.

(2) An HRI character for a stop character (†) is printed at the end of the HRI character
string.

(3) An HRI character for a control character (00H to 1FH and 7FH) is printed with „ and
an alphabet combined.

Control character HRI Control character HRI

ASCII Hex character ASCII Hex character
NUL 00 ■U DLE 10 ■P
SOH 01 ■A DC1 11 ■Q
STX 02 ■B DC2 12 ■R
ETX 03 ■C DC3 13 ■S
EOT 04 ■D DC4 14 ■T
ENQ 05 ■E NAK 15 ■U
ACK 06 ■F SYN 16 ■V
BEL 07 ■G ETB 17 ■W
BS 08 ■H CAN 18 ■X
HT 09 ■I EM 19 ■Y
LF 0A ■J SUB 1A ■Z
VT 0B ■K ESC 1B ■A
FF 0C ■L FS 1C ■B
CR 0D ■M GS 1D ■C
SO 0E ■N RS 1E ■D
SI 0F ■O US 1F ■E
DEL 7F ■T

Reference HRI Character Print Position Set Command ([GS] H)

Barcode Height Set Command ([GS] h)
Barcode Width Set Command ([GS] w)

8-68
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.48 APPENDIX: BARCODE

8.10.48.1 CODE128

Code set A: ASCII characters ranging between 00H and 5FH can be represented.
Code set B: ASCII characters ranging between 20H and 7FH can be represented.
Code set C: Two digits can be represented using 1 character.

In addition to the above characters, CODE128 has the following special characters:

• Shift character (SHIFT)

In code set A, a character immediately after SHIFT is treated as a character of code set B. In
code set B, a character immediately after SHIFT is treated as a character of code set A. Note
that SHIFT cannot be used in code set C.

• Code set character (CODEA, CODEB, CODEC)

The code set subsequent to a code set character is changed to A, B, or C.

• Function character (FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, FNC4)

Uses of the function character vary depending on the application. Note that only FNC1 can be
used in code set C.

[Characters printable with code set A]

Data to be Data to be Data to be Data to be Data to be

Char Char Char Char Char
transmitted transmitted transmitted transmitted transmitted
NUL 00 CAN 18 0 30 H 48 FNC1 7B 31
SOH 01 EM 19 1 31 I 49 FNC2 7B 32
STX 02 SUB 1A 2 32 J 4A FNC3 7B 33
ETX 03 ESC 1B 3 33 K 4B FNC4 7B 34
EOT 04 FS 1C 4 34 L 4C SHIFT 7B 35
ENQ 05 GS 1D 5 35 M 4D CODEB 7B 42
ACK 06 RS 1E 6 36 N 4E CODEC 7B 43
BEL 07 US 1F 7 37 O 4F
BS 08 SP 20 8 38 P 50
HT 09 ! 21 9 39 Q 51
LF 0A “ 22 : 3A R 52
VT 0B # 23 ; 3B S 53
FF 0C $ 24 < 3C T 54
CR 0D % 25 = 3D U 55
SO 0E & 26 > 3E V 56
SI 0F ‘ 27 ? 3F W 57
DLE 10 ( 28 @ 40 X 58
DC1 11 ) 29 A 41 Y 59
DC2 12 * 2A B 42 Z 5A
DC3 13 + 2B C 43 [ 5B
DC4 14 , 2C D 44 \ 5C
NAK 15 - 2D E 45 ] 5D
SYN 16 . 2E F 46 ~ 5E
ETB 17 / 2F G 47 _ 5F

8-69
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Characters printable with code set B]

Data to be Data to be Data to be Data to be Data to be

Char Char Char Char Char
transmitted transmitted transmitted transmitted transmitted
SP 20 8 38 P 50 h 68 FNC1 7B 31
! 21 9 39 Q 51 i 69 FNC2 7B 32
“ 22 : 3A R 52 j 6A FNC3 7B 33
# 23 ; 3B S 53 k 6B FNC4 7B 34
$ 24 < 3C T 54 l 6C SHIFT 7B 53
% 25 = 3D U 55 m 6D CODEA 7B 41
& 26 > 3E V 56 n 6E CODEC 7B 43
‘ 27 ? 3F W 57 o 6F
( 28 @ 40 X 58 p 70
) 29 A 41 Y 59 q 71
* 2A B 42 Z 5A r 72
+ 2B C 43 [ 5B s 73
, 2C D 44 \ 5C t 74
- 2D E 45 ] 5D u 75
. 2E F 46 ~ 5E v 76
/ 2F G 47 _ 5F w 77
0 30 H 48 ` 60 x 78
1 31 I 49 a 61 y 79
2 32 J 4A b 62 z 7A
3 33 K 4B c 63 { 7B
4 34 L 4C d 64 | 7C
5 35 M 4D e 65 } 7D
6 36 N 4E f 66 ~ 7E
7 37 O 4F g 67 DEL 7F

[Characters printable with code set C]

Data to be Data to be Data to be Data to be Data to be

Char Char Char Char Char
transmitted transmitted transmitted transmitted transmitted
00 00 24 18 48 30 72 48 96 60
01 01 25 19 49 31 73 49 97 61
02 02 26 1A 50 32 74 4A 98 62
03 03 27 1B 51 33 75 4B 99 63
04 04 28 1C 52 34 76 4C FNC1 7B 31
05 05 29 1D 53 35 77 4D CODEA 7B 41
06 06 30 1E 54 36 78 4E CODEB 7B 42
07 07 31 1F 55 37 79 4F
08 08 32 20 56 38 80 50
09 09 33 21 57 39 81 51
10 0A 34 22 58 3A 82 52
11 0B 35 23 59 3B 83 53
12 0C 36 24 60 3C 84 54
13 0D 37 25 61 3D 85 55
14 0E 38 26 62 3E 86 56
15 0F 39 27 63 3F 87 57
16 10 40 28 64 40 88 58
17 11 41 29 65 41 89 59
18 12 42 2A 66 42 90 5A
19 13 43 2B 67 43 91 5B
20 14 44 2C 68 44 92 5C
21 15 45 2D 69 45 93 5D
22 16 46 2E 70 46 94 5E
23 17 47 2F 71 47 95 5F

8-70
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.48.2 UPC-E

Conversion to UPC-E is performed as shown by the tables below.

UPC-E (7 digit) version UPC-A (12 digit) version

P1 P2 P3 P4 P5 P6 P7 P8 A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 A7 A8 A9 A10 A11 A12

0 X1 X2 Y1 Y2 Y3 0 CD ← 0 X1 X2 0 0 0 0 0 Y1 Y2 Y3 CD
c
0 X1 X2 Y1 Y2 Y3 1 CD ← 0 X1 X2 1 0 0 0 0 Y1 Y2 Y3 CD

0 X1 X2 Y1 Y2 Y3 2 CD ← 0 X1 X2 2 0 0 0 0 Y1 Y2 Y3 CD

0 X1 X2 X3 Y1 Y2 3 CD ← 0 X1 X2 X3 0 0 0 0 0 Y1 Y2 CD d

0 X1 X2 X3 X4 Y1 4 CD ← 0 X1 X2 X3 X4 0 0 0 0 0 Y1 CD
e
0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 Y1 CD ← 0 X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 0 0 0 0 Y1 CD f
• Data check is performed for the “0” portion (shaded in the right table) to categorize the data into
4 patterns from c to f. If the data does not match the 4 patterns, command processing will
be aborted.
• The data categorized into the 4 patterns from c to f is converted, as shown by the left table.
• A4 data in pattern c accepts only 0, 1, or 2. However, the printer does not perform any data
integrity check. Therefore, a barcode will be printed even if any value other than 0 to 2 is
specified for A4 (P7) data.

8-71
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.49 BARCODE HORIZONTAL SIZE COMMAND [GS] w

Function Sets the horizontal size of the barcode.

Format [GS] wn

Term ASCII: GS w
Hex: 1Dh 77h

[Parameter]
n: Horizontal size of the barcode
2 ≤ n ≤ 15 (02h ≤ n ≤ 0Fh)

Default value n: 3

Explanation The maximum value varies depending on model and barcode type.

Model B-EP2DL-GHxx B-EP4DL-GHxx

Range 02H to 05H 02H to 0AH
Initial value 03H 03H
UPC-A, UPC-E,
Maximum
JAN13, JAN8, 03H 06H
value
CODE128
CODE39
Maximum
Interleaved 2 of 5, 05H 0AH
value
NW-7

[UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN13, JAN8, or CODE128]

1 module 2 modules 3 modules 4 modules

n
Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space Bar Space
02H 2 4 6 8
03H 3 6 9 12
04H 4 8 12 16
05H 5 10 15 20
06H 6 12 18 24
07H 7 14 21 28
08H 8 16 24 32
09H 9 18 27 36
(Unit: dot)

8-72
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[CODE39, Interleaved 2 of 5, or NW-7]

Narrow Wide Character-to-char

n
Bar Space Bar Space acter space
02H 2 2 5 5 2
03H 2 2 6 6 2
04H 3 3 8 8 3
05H 3 3 9 9 3
06H 4 4 11 11 4
07H 4 4 12 12 4
08H 5 5 14 14 5
09H 5 5 15 15 5
0AH 6 6 17 17 6
0BH 6 6 18 18 6
0CH 7 7 20 20 7
0DH 7 7 21 21 7
0EH 8 8 23 23 8
0FH 8 8 24 24 8
(Unit: dot)

* The character-to-character space does not exist in Interleaved 2 of 5.

(1) A multilevel barcode refers to the following barcode system:

UPC-A, UPC-E, JAN13, JAN8, CODE93, and CODE128

(2) A 2-level barcode refers to the following barcode system:

CODE39, ITF, and NW-7

(3) If “n” is out of range, this command will be ignored.

Reference Barcode Print Command ([GS] k)

8-73
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.50 BARCODE HEIGHT COMMAND [GS] h

Function Sets the barcode height.

Format [GS] hn

Term ASCII: GS h
Hex: 1Dh 68h

[Parameter]
n: No. of dots for the barcode height
1 ≤ n ≤ 255 (01h ≤ n ≤ FFh)

Default value n: 162

Explanation (1) When “n” is set to any value other than the above, this command will be ignored.

Reference Barcode Print Command ([GS] k)

8-74
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.51 NUMERALS UNDER BARS COMMAND [GS] H

Function Specifies a print position of an HRI character when a barcode is printed.

Format [GS] Hn

Term ASCII: GS H
Hex: 1Dh 48h

[Parameter]
n: Print position of HRI character 0 ≤ n ≤ 3 (00h ≤ n ≤ 03h)
or
48 ≤ n ≤ 50 (30h ≤ n ≤ 33h)
0: Not printing
1: Above barcode
2: Below barcode
3: Above and below barcode

Default value n: 0

Explanation (1) HRI stands for Human Readable Interpretation.

Reference Barcode Print Command ([GS] k)

8-75
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.52 PRINT AREA WIDTH SET COMMAND [GS] W

Function Specifies the width of the print area defined by nL and nH.

The width of the print area is determined by [(nL + nH × 256) dots].

Format [GS] WnLnH

Term ASCII: GS W
Hex: 1Dh 57h

[Parameter]
nL: Width of print area 0 ≤ nL ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nL ≤ FFh)
nH: Width of print area 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nH ≤ FFh)

Printable area

Left margin Width of print area

Default value 384 dots (nL = 128, nH = 1) (B-EP2DL-GHxx)

832 dots (nL = 64, nH = 3) (B-EP4DL-GHxx)

Explanation (1) This command will be executed only if received at the beginning of a line.

(2) If this command is received while the printer is in page mode, the defined parameter
setting will be applied after switching to standard mode.

(3) The command settings do not have any impacts upon page mode.

(4) If a value beyond the printable area per line is inputted, all area except for the left
margin will be specified as a print area.

(5) If a value specified for the width of the print area is smaller than the width of a
character to be printed, printing will only be performed by up to the specified width
of the print area.

(6) If the width of the print area is set to 0 ([GS] W [00] [00]), printing will start from the
left edge of the printable area.

Reference Left Margin Set Command ([GS] L)

8-76
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.53 DOWNLOADED BIT IMAGE DEFINE COMMAND [GS] *

Function Defines a downloaded bit image that contains the number of dots specified by n1 and n2.

Format [GS] *n1n2 [d1d2d3…d(n1×n2×8)]

Term ASCII: GS *
Hex: 1Dh 2Ah

[Parameter]
n1: No. of dots in the horizontal direction (n1 × 8) 1 ≤ n1 ≤ 255 (01h ≤ n1 ≤ FFh)
n2: No. of dots in the vertical direction (n2 × 8) 1 ≤ n2 ≤ 48 (01h ≤ n2 ≤ 30h)
* n1 × n2 ≤ 1,536
d: Image data 1 ≤ d ≤ 255 (01h ≤ d ≤ FFh)
* 1 refers to a bit to be printed, and 0 to the one not to be printed.

Default value

Explanation (1) If n1 × n2 is out of the defined range, this command will be ignored.

(2) d refers to bit image data. A bit corresponding to a dot to be printed is set to 1, and
the one corresponding to a dot not to be printed is set to 0.

(3) The defined downloaded bit image is cleared in the event of:

Initialize Command ([ESC] @)

Downloaded Character (Writable Character) Define Command ([ESC] &)

Resetting or turning the printer off

(4) A downloaded bit image is defined.

(5) A specified logo is valid until resetting or the printer is turned off. However, in the
event of a parameter error (e.g. a value out of range), the most recently stored logo
is not guaranteed.

(6) At a moment when an error occurs with parameter n1 or n2 due to a factor such as
an unmatched condition, command processing will be aborted, and the data
subsequent to n2 will be processed as normal data.

(7) This command is valid in page mode only when the parameter of the Page Mode
Print Direction Set Command ([ESC] T) is set to 0 (0-degree rotation). The bit
image will not be rotated if any value other than 0 is specified.

(8) The figure on the next page illustrates a relationship between data and printed dots.

8-77
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

b7
n1*8 dots

d1 dn2
+1

d2
b0

n2*8 dots

dn2 dn1*
n2*8

Reference Downloaded Bit image Print Mode Set Command ([GS] /)

8-78
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.54 DOWNLOADED BIT IMAGE PRINT MODE SET COMMAND [GS] /

Function Prints a logo (image data) specified by n in mode specified by k

Format [GS] /m

Term ASCII: GS /
Hex: 1Dh 2Fh

[Parameter]
m: Downloaded bit image data print mode 0 ≤ m ≤ 3 (00h ≤ m ≤ 03h)
or
48 ≤ m ≤ 51 (30h ≤ m ≤ 33h)
0,48 Normal mode
1,49 Double-width mode
2,50 Double-height mode
3,51 Quadruple mode

Explanation (1) Unless downloaded bit image data is defined, this command will be ignored.

(2) When standard mode is selected, the command will be valid only if no data is
present in the print buffer.

(3) Inverted printing, bold printing, double printing, underlining, character size, or
reversed printing will become invalid even if specified.

(4) If there is a line where the print area specified by the Left Margin Set Command
([GS] L) or Print Area Width Set Command ([GS] W) does not reach the minimum
width in bit image mode (1 dot in normal or double-height mode, or 2 dots in
double-width or quadruple mode), the print area will be extended to the right until it
reaches the minimum width in bit image mode to the extent that the printable area is
not exceeded. This only applies to such a line.

Reference Downloaded Bit image Define Command ([GS] *)

8-79
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.55 MACRO DEFINITION START/END COMMAND [GS] :

Function Specifies the start or end of a macro.

Format [GS] :

Term ASCII: GS :
Hex: 1Dh 3Ah

Explanation (1) If this command is included under normal operation, the start of a macro definition
will be specified. If this command is included while a macro is being defined, the
end of the macro definition will be specified.

(2) If the Macro Execute Command ([GS] ^) is included while the macro is being
defined, the macro definition will be aborted, and cleared.

(3) A macro is “undefined” initially.

(4) Undefined items are not cleared by the Initialize Command ([ESC] @).

(5) If [GS] : is included immediately after the receipt of this command, a micro will
become “undefined.”

(6) The maximum permissible number of bytes for a macro definition will be limited to
2,048, even if it exceeds 2,048.

Reference Macro Execute Command ([GS] ^)

8-80
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.56 MACRO EXECUTE COMMAND [GS] ^

Function Executes a defined macro.

Format [GS] ^n1n2n3

Term ASCII: GS ^
Hex: 1Dh 5Eh

[Parameter]
n1: No. of times macro is executed 0 ≤ n1 ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n1 ≤ FFh)
n2: Waiting time when macro is executed 0 ≤ n2 ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n2 ≤ FFh)
Waiting time of n2 × 100 msec every time a macro is executed
n3: Mode to execute a macro 0 ≤ n3 ≤ 1 (00h ≤ n3 ≤ 01h)
0: A macro is executed n1 times at interval of time specified by n2.
1: After a lapse of time specified by n2, the STATUS LED (green) blinks and waits
for the [FEED] key to be pressed. Once the [FEED] key is pressed, a macro
is executed once. This is repeated n1 times.

Explanation (1) If this command is included while the macro is being defined, the macro definition
will be aborted, and cleared.

(2) Nothing will be done with no macro defined or with n1 = 0.

(3) The [FEED] key is inoperable during the specified waiting time when a macro is
executed.

Reference Macro Definition Start/End Command ([GS] :)

8-81
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.58 LEFT MARGIN SET COMMAND [GS] L

Function Sets the left margin as specified by nL and nH.

The left margin is determined by [(nL + nH × 256) × dots].

Format [GS] LnLnH

Term ASCII: GS L
Hex: 1Dh 4Ch

[Parameter]
nL: Width of print area 0 ≤ nL ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nL ≤ FFh)
nH: Width of print area 0 ≤ nH ≤ 255 (00h ≤ nH ≤ FFh)

Printable area

Left margin Width of print area

Default value nL = 0, nH = 0

Explanation (1) This command will be valid only if received at the beginning of a line.

(2) If this command is received while the printer is in page mode, the defined parameter
setting will be applied after switching to standard mode.

(3) The command settings do not have any impacts upon page mode.

(4) The maximum permissible left margin is equal to the width of the printable area. If
a specified value exceeds the maximum value, it will be rounded to the maximum
value.

Reference Print Area Width Set Command ([GS] W)

8-82
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.10.59 CHARACTER SIZE SET COMMAND [GS] !

Function Specifies a character size (magnification in the vertical / horizontal direction).

Format [GS] !n

Term ASCII: GS !
Hex: 1Dh 21h

[Parameter]
n: Specifying a character size 1 ≤ n ≤ 255 (00h ≤ n ≤ FFh)
* 1 ≤ Magnification in vertical direction ≤ 8, 1 ≤ Magnification in horizontal direction ≤ 8
b7 b0

Magnification in vertical direction

(See Table 2.)
Magnification in horizontal direction (See Table 1.)
Table 1 [Magnification in horizontal direction] Table 2 [Magnification in vertical direction]
1-byte data (hex) Magnification 1-byte data (hex) Magnification
00 x 1 (standard) 00 x 1 (standard)
10 x 2 (double width) 01 x 2 (double height)
20 x3 02 x3
30 x4 03 x4
40 x5 04 x5
50 x6 05 x6
60 x7 06 x7
70 x8 07 x8
Default value n: 0

Example A magnification in the horizontal direction is x 3, and a magnification in the vertical

direction is x 6.

The command is [GS] ! [25].

Explanation (1) This parameter setting applies to all characters (ANK and Chinese characters)
except for HRI characters.

(2) If either a specified magnification in the vertical or horizontal direction is out of the
defined range, this command will be ignored.

(3) In standard mode, “vertical direction” refers to the paper feed direction, and
“horizontal direction” to the direction perpendicular to the paper feed direction.
Therefore, if 90-degree rotation is specified, this relationship will be reversed.

(4) In page mode, “vertical direction” refers to the vertical direction of a character, and
the horizontal direction to the width.

(5) Double width and double height can be set or canceled by the Print Mode All Set
Command ([ESC] !). But the most recently processed command is applied.

Reference Print Mode All Set Command ([ESC] !)

8-83
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.11 TEC ORIGINAL COMMANDS

8.11.1 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M

Function Changes the print mode.

Format [ESC] M; a (,b) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Print mode designation

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Print mode (Bit 0 to Bit 6 * See Table 1.)

Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB

0: Not performed
1: Performed
* Table 1 Print mode

HEX Mode How to deal with the received data after an error is cleared

30H LABEL Discards

31H RECEIPT Discards
32H RECEIPT1 Continues printing
34H ESC/POS Continues printing
41H TPCL Continues printing
42H TPCL1 Continues printing
b: Print position detection feed (Omissible. If omitted, the print position detection
feed is not performed.)

0: When the mode change from RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS to LABEL,

TPCL or TPCL1 is requested, a print position detection feed is not performed
after the mode is changed.
1: When the mode change from RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS to LABEL,
TPCL or TPCL1 is requested, a print position detection feed is performed after
the mode is changed.

8-84
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation

(1) There are 4 types of the print mode: “LABEL,” “RECEIPT,” “TPCL” and “ESC/POS.”

(2) “Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM” or USB is the function for the specifications
which do not allow the printer to spontaneously send the status through IrDA; IrCOMM or
USB. This function enables the printer to forcefully send the status to the host, if the link
between the printer and the host is established. However, if the link between the printer
and the host is not established upon the status transmission, the printer cannot send the
status. Therefore, the status is discarded. (In the next connection to the host, the
printer does not send the status to the host.)

(3) The sensor is not used in the RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode. When sensor
detectable paper is used for receipts and labels, print position detection feed cannot be
done in the LABEL, TPCL or TPCL1 mode. By setting the print position detection feed
parameter to 1, print position detection feed is carried out after the mode is changed to
LABEL, TPCL or TPCL1.

(4) In the TPCL1 mode, it is possible to re-print the last print data by pressing the FEED
button.

Notes

(1) The print mode designation (the specified print mode and the automatic status response in
IrDA: IrCOMM or USB) is backed up in memory (retained even if the power is turned off).

(2) The factory default is “TPCL mode” and “Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or
USB is not performed.” (The IrDA protocol is “IrCOMM.”)

(3) When the print mode is changed, the type of sensor is automatically changed.

LABEL mode (0): The previously backed up sensor is designated.

TPCL mode (A): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
TPCL1 mode (B): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
RECEIPT mode (1): No sensor is designated.
RECEIPT1 mode (2): No sensor is designated.
ESC/POS mode (4): No sensor is designated.
(4) If the RECEIPT or ESC/POS mode is selected or no sensor is designated in the LABEL or
TPCL mode, an initial feed is not performed when the cover is closed (when the key
operation or Set Command ([ESC] ZM03) is used to enable the print position detection
feed setting after closing the cover.)

(5) When the mode change is finished, the printer sends the normal end status or an ACK to
the host. However, when the mode is changed to the TPCL mode, the printer does not
send the status. In IrDA: IrCOMM or USB, only when bit 7 of the print mode designation
is set to “1,” the printer sends the status.

8-85
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) The print mode can be changed by the printer itself. However, since the setting for the
automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB cannot be changed, the setting
remains as the same.

(7) As the print position detection feed parameter is effective only when changing the print
mode to LABEL or TPCL, this parameter status will be ignored when changing the mode to
RECEIPT, RECEPT1 or ESC/POS.

(8) The print position detection feed is performed according to the conditions, such as, label
pitch, fine adjustment, and sensor selection, which were set in the LABEL or TPCL mode
before the printer is operated in the RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode. If no
sensor is selected, the print position detection feed will not be performed.

(9) After performing a print position detection feed, the printer does not send a process end
status. If an error occurs during the print position detection feed, the print position
detection feed is performed after the error is cleared by using the PAUSE key (when the
key operation or Set Command ([ESC] ZM03) is used to enable the print position detection
feed setting after closing the cover.)

(10) When changing the print mode by the printer itself, the print position detection feed
parameter cannot be set.

(11) When the mode select command is designated with the print position detection feed at the
end of a print data issued in the RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode, and if an error occurs
while printing, the printing will restart after the error is cleared and then, the print mode will
be changed to the LABEL or TPCL mode and a print position detection feed is performed.
When the print position detection feed is omitted, the print mode will not be changed to the
LABEL or TPCL mode. (The mode select command is discarded.)

(12) When the LABEL or TPCL mode is selected in the mode select command and the print
position detection feed parameter is set 0 (not performed), and if an error occurs while the
printer issues in the RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode, the print mode is changed to the
LABEL or TPCL mode after the error is cleared. (The mode select command is
executed.)

8-86
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.11.2 RESET COMMAND [ESC] WR

Function Returns the printer to its initial state.

Format [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

Explanation

(1) The printer is returned to the same state as when the power is turned on.

(2) When the printer receives this command during printing, it is initialized after issuing the
label which is being printed.

(3) After the Reset Command is sent (or after printing is completed, if printing is performed
when the Reset Command is sent), the next command must not be sent within 30 seconds
by the wireless LAN model or within 5 seconds by other models, because the printer is
initialized. In IrDA: TEC Protocol, if ACK/status transmission is specified by the Issue
Command, the printer returns an ACK, which indicates the command process end, to the
EOT after the printer is initialized. In RS-232C, when the status response is specified, the
printer returns the status (34H 30H). After this status is received, the next command may
be sent. In IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, Bluetooth or Wireless LAN, the printer
does not return the status.

(4) When this command is sent through the IrDA interface, only this command should be sent.
After the command is sent, the link should be terminated. Even if the host does not
terminate the link, the printer performs the termination process. Therefore, after
initialization is completed, the host should establish the link again.

(5) When receiving this command during data transmission, the printer is initialized after
completing the transmission.

Notes

(1) If a command error or communication error occurs when receiving the Reset Command,
an error message is displayed in the online mode. However, it is not displayed in the
SYSTEM mode.

Example [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

8-87
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.11.3 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] v, [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS

Function Requests that the printer sends back the printer status and the battery status to the host.

Format [ESC] v
[ESC] FM [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) When this command is received, the printer sends the printer status and battery
status to the host.

• For IrDA: TEC Protocol: Data to be sent (Fixed at 27 bytes)

STX Printer ID Version No. of each form Printer status Battery status CRC

02H xxH xxH V01 V02 ········· V20 xxH xxH xxH xxH

• For IrDA; IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, RS-232C, USB, Bluetooth or Wireless LAN:
Data to be sent (Fixed at 5 bytes)

STX Printer ID Printer status Battery status

02H xxH xxH xxH xxH

Printer ID 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)

Printer status Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data.

00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Operating
0CH: Communication error * For RS-232C connection only
0DH: Normal end + Label end (See NOTE.)
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
10H: Normal issue end
14H: Pause state
19H: Ambient temperature error
32H: Abnormal battery temperature
33H: Battery excessive temperature
37H: Charging error
(38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed) Response status for automatic status
transmission
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
45H: Wait for battery recovery
46H: Wait for head temperature reduction
47H: Wait for motor temperature reduction
55H: Writable character/PC command save mode

8-88
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Status in the compatible mode for the B-SP series

00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
(including ambient temperature error, abnormal battery temperature, battery
excessive temperature)
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Operating
(including wait for strip, pause state, bit map writable character/PC command
mode, wait for battery recovery, wait for head temperature reduction, wait for
motor temperature reduction)
0CH: Communication error * For RS-232C connection only
0DH: Normal end + Label end (See NOTE.)
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
10H: Normal issue end
37H: Charging error
(38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed) Response status for automatic status
transmission
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
NOTE: 0DH (Normal issue end + Label end) is a state when the printer runs out of
labels, after a label is issued.

Battery status The battery charge status is indicated in 5 levels.

(B-EP2DL)

01H: 7.2V or less

02H: 7.3V to 7.4V
03H: 7.5V to 7.7V
04H: 7.8V to 7.9V
05H: 8.0V to 8.4V

(B-EP4DL)

01H: 14.0V or less

02H: 14.1V to 14.6V
03H: 14.7V to 15.2V
04H: 15.3V to 15.9V
05H: 16.0V to 16.8V

CRC: 2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High)

8-89
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.11.4 RECEIVE BUFFER FREE SPACE STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] WB

Function Sends information on the printer status and the free space of the receive buffer to the
host.

Format [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command makes the printer send information on its status and free space of
the receive buffer, regardless of the setting of the Status Response parameter.

(2) The status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and indicates the latest
status only. The remaining count indicates the remaining print count of the batch
currently being printed only. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed
is transmitted.

(3) Free space of the receive buffer for the interface which sent this command, is
returned to the host.

[IrDA: TEC Protocol] Data to be transmitted (fixed at 22 bytes)

STX Printer ID Status Remaining No. of labels Length

02H 3xH 3xH 33H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 32H 32H

Receiving buffer space Entire receiving buffer space CRC

3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 30H 30H 35H 31H 32H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDAIr: OBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Data to be transmitted (fixed at 23 bytes)

SOH STX Printer status Status type Remaining No. of labels Length
01H 02H 3xH 3xH 33H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 32H 33H

Receiving buffer space Entire receiving buffer space CR LF

3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 30H 30H 35H 31H 32H 0DH 0AH

8-90
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Printer status Printer status is indicated in 2-byte data.

“00”: Normal state
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating
“04”: Pause state
“05”: Wait for strip
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken head dots error
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature
“19”: Ambient temperature error
“32”: Abnormal battery temperature
“33”: Battery excessive temperature
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
“45”: Wait for battery recovery
“46”: Wait for head temperature reduction
“47”: Wait for motor temperature reduction
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state
“55”: Writable character/PC command save mode

Remaining No. of labels: Indicates the remaining number of labels in four bytes.
“0000” to “9999”
Length: Indicates the number of bytes of the entire status data
IrDA: TEC Protocol: Fixed at "22."
IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232,
Bluetooth or wireless LAN: Fixed at "23."
Receive buffer free space: Indicates the free space of the receive buffer.
Entire receive buffer free space:
Indicates the entire free space of the receive buffer.
Fixed at "00512."
CRC/CR, LF: Indicates the end of the status block.

8-91
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes (1) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.

(2) The printer returns the same status, regardless of whether or not the compatible
mode for the B-SP series is set.

(3) After receiving the Status Request Command, there may be a maximum of
20-msec. delay until the printer sends a status.

(4) At least, a 20-msec. interval must be given between the transmissions of the Status
Request Command. If the next Status Request Command is transmitted within 20
msec., the printer may fail to receive it.

Example [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL]

8-92
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.11.5 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX

Function Sends the printer mode information to the host.

Format [ESC] WX [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) The status when the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on differs from the
status when the compatible mode is off.

(2) The mode information format to be sent to the host, is as follows:

8-93
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

ESC/POS mode (Mode = 4)

[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
STX Mode information (16 bytes) CRC CRC

E S C / P O S SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

02H 45H 53H 43H 2FH 50H 4FH 53H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, or wireless LAN]

STX Mode information (16 bytes)

E S C / P O S SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP

02H 45H 53H 43H 2FH 50H 4FH 53H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H

The above is an example where the message is received in the ESC/POS mode (Mode = 4). In
addition, the following messages are returned.

• When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is off

TPCL mode TPCL
TPCL1 mode TPCL1
LABEL mode LABEL
RECEIPT mode RECEIPT
RECEIPT1 mode RECEIPT1
ESC/POS mode ESC/POS
Online reset menu USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for users
USER„SYSTEM
PAUSE + POWER keys
When the password setting is on
USER„SYSTEM
and before it is entered
SYSTEM mode for administrators
When the password setting is on
FEED + POWER keys SYSTEM
and after it is entered
When the password setting is off SYSTEM
TPCL (strip issue mode) TPCL„(S)
TPCL1 (strip issue mode) TPCL1 (S)
LABEL (strip issue mode) LABEL (S)

* „ indicates a space.

8-94
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

• When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on

TPCL mode TPCL-LE
TPCL1 mode TPCL-LE1
LABEL mode LABEL
RECEIPT mode RECEIPT
RECEIPT1 mode RECEIPT1
ESC/POS mode ESC/POS
Online reset menu USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for users
USER„SYSTEM
PAUSE + POWER keys
When the password setting is on
USER„SYSTEM
and before it is entered
SYSTEM mode for administrators
When the password setting is on
FEED + POWER keys SYSTEM
and after it is entered
When the password setting is off SYSTEM

* „ indicates a space.

Example [ESC] WX [LF] [NUL]

8-95
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.11.6 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT

Function Reads the device address of the Bluetooth or MAC address of the wireless LAN.

Format [ESC] IT [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command reads the device address of the Bluetooth or MAC address of the
wireless LAN. When using the IrDA: TEC Protocol, the following information field
is placed in the information frame and sent in packets.

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Bluetooth device address or wireless LAN MAC address CRC CRC
02H 12 bytes xxH xxH

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C,
Bluetooth, or wireless LAN is used]

STX Bluetooth device address or wireless LAN MAC address

02H 12 bytes

The printer sends the following information:

Bluetooth device address: 0015b5aa0005

Wireless LAN MAC address: 000940387630

Bluetooth device address:

[30H][30H][31H] [35H] [62H] [35H] [61H] [61H] [30H] [30H] [30H] [35H]
0 0 1 5 b 5 a a 0 0 0 5

Wireless LAN MAC address:

[30H][30H][30H] [39H] [34H] [30H] [33H] [38H] [37H] [36H] [33H] [30H]
0 0 0 9 4 0 3 8 7 6 3 0

8-96
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

8.11.7 BLUETOOTH RELATED PARAMETER ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WT

Function Acquires the parameters related to the Bluetooth.

Format [ESC] WT [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command reads the parameters related to the Bluetooth. When using the
IrDA: TEC Protocol, the following information field is placed in the information frame
and sent in packets to the host.

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Sec Inq Interval Window

02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Inquiry/page window
0018 to 4096

Inquiry/page interval
0018 to 4096

Inquiry timer
0 (30H): Inquiry is not possible.
1 (31H): Inquiry is possible only within 60 seconds after a printer power on
2 (32H): Inquiry is possible at anytime.

Security setting
1 (31H): No security
2 (32H): No security
3 (33H): Link level security is effective

Bluetooth device name CRC

32 bytes xxH xxH
Bluetooth device name: Fixed at 32 bytes

When the Bluetooth device name is “TOSHIBATEC BT,”

[54H] [4FH] [53H] [48H] [49H] [42H] [41H] [20H] [54H] [45H] [43H] [20H] [42H] [54H] [00H] [00H]
T O S H I B A ‘‘ T E C ‘‘ B T
[00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H]

* When the Bluetooth device name is less than 32 bytes, the remaining bytes are filled with 00H.

8-97
 CHAPTER 8 ESC/POS MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, or
wireless LAN is used]

STX Sec Inq Interval Window

02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Bluetooth device name

32 bytes

8-98
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

9. ERROR PROCESSING

9.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes details regarding the errors of the printer.
If the printer detects an error, it indicates an error message (on the LCD or LED), returns a status
response and stops its operation.

9-1
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

9.2 COMMUNICATION ERRORS

9.2.1 COMMAND SYNTAX ERROR
c An error will occur if a command length error or parameter designation error is found while
analyzing the command. If the form corresponding to the form number designated by the
Data Print Command is not stored, or if the form length designated by the Data Print
Command does not match the stored form length, an error will occur.
d If the block number is not numbered consecutively, starting with “0” in the ascending order,
an error will occur.
e If a block number error is found through the IrDA (TEC Protocol) interface, an error will
occur.
9.2.2 HARDWARE ERROR
A hardware error will occur if a framing error or parity error is found while receiving data
through the serial interface (RS-232C).
* At the moment when a command syntax error or hardware error occurs, the printer
shows the error message and returns a status response before it stops. Any commands
except for the Status Request Command and Reset Command are not processed.

9-2
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

9.3 ERRORS IN ISSUING OR FEEDING

9.3.1 PAPER JAM / LABEL END / NORMAL END + LABEL END
B-EP (It does not matter whether the compatibility setting for the B-SP series is on or off.)
Paper jam Label end Normal end + label end
While passing over the media sensor, When (or before) the motor is driven While printing is being performed on
the label is fed over the distance 1.5 for feeding or printing, the media the label with the transmissive sensor
times as long as the label pitch (label sensor (transmissive sensor or designated, the media sensor
length + gap length) specified by the reflective sensor) detects the label (transmissive sensor or reflective
command, but the media sensor (or end state. sensor) detects the label end state for
transmissive sensor) cannot detect a 1 mm continuously after the effective
gap between the labels. print length of the current label is
printed.
The tag paper is fed over the distance While printing is being performed on While printing is being performed on
1.5 times as long as the tag pitch the label with the transmissive sensor the tag paper with the reflective
(length of the white portion + black designated, the media sensor sensor designated, the media sensor
mark length) specified by the (transmissive sensor or reflective (transmissive sensor or reflective
command, but the media sensor (or sensor) detects the label end state for sensor) detects the label end state for
reflective sensor) cannot detect a 1 mm continuously before the 1 mm continuously after the effective
black mark. effective print length of the current print length of the current label is
label is printed. printed.
While a gap between labels is While printing is being performed on While printing is being performed on
passing over the media sensor, the the tag paper with the reflective the receipt with no sensor designated,
label is fed over the distance 1.5 sensor designated, the media sensor the media sensor (transmissive
times as long as the label pitch (label (transmissive sensor or reflective sensor or reflective sensor) detects
length + gap length) specified by the sensor) detects the label end state for the label end state for 1 mm
command, but the label cannot be 1 mm continuously before the continuously after the effective print
detected. effective print length of the current length of the current label is printed.
label is printed.
While a black mark is passing over While printing is being performed on While printing is being performed on
the media sensor, the tag paper is fed the label with the transmissive sensor the label with the transmissive sensor
TPCL / LABEL

over the distance 1.5 times as long as designated, the media sensor designated, the media sensor
the tag pitch (length of the white (transmissive sensor) detects the (transmissive sensor) detects the
portion + black mark length) specified backing paper for xx mm continuously backing paper for xx mm continuously
by the command, but the white before the effective print length of the after the effective print length of the
portion cannot be detected. current label is printed. current label is printed.
With the automatic label print “xx mm” varies depending on the gap “xx mm” varies depending on the gap
positioning enabled, and the length: length:
transmissive sensor designated, the
label is loaded, and the cover is 21 mm for a 3-mm gap 21 mm for a 3-mm gap
opened and closed. 22 mm for a 4-mm gap 22 mm for a 4-mm gap
If the label pitch is 170 mm or less, 23 mm for a 5-mm gap 23 mm for a 5-mm gap
the backing paper is fed over the 24 mm for a 6-mm gap 24 mm for a 6-mm gap
distance of 170 mm, but the label 25 mm for a 7-mm gap 25 mm for a 7-mm gap
cannot be detected.
If the label pitch is longer than 170 While printing is being performed on While printing is being performed on
mm, the label is fed over the distance the tag paper with the reflective the tag paper with the reflective
1.5 times as long as the label pitch sensor designated, the media sensor sensor designated, the media sensor
(label length + gap length) specified (reflective sensor) detects the black (reflective sensor) detects the black
by the command, but the label cannot mark over for xx mm continuously mark for xx mm continuously after the
be detected. before the effective print length of the effective print length of the current
current label is printed. label is printed.
With the automatic label print “xx mm” varies depending on the “xx mm” varies depending on the
positioning enabled, and the reflective length of the black mark: length of the black mark:
sensor designated, the tag paper is
loaded, and the cover is opened and 21 mm for a 3-mm black mark 21 mm for a 3-mm black mark
closed. 22 mm for a 4-mm black mark 22 mm for a 4-mm black mark
If the tag pitch is 170 mm or less, the 23 mm for a 5-mm black mark 23 mm for a 5-mm black mark
black mark is fed over the distance of 24 mm for a 6-mm black mark 24 mm for a 6-mm black mark
170 mm, but the white portion cannot 25 mm for a 7-mm black mark 25 mm for a 7-mm black mark
be detected.

9-3
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

If the label pitch is longer than 170 While printing is being performed on
mm, the tag paper is fed over the the receipt with no sensor designated,
distance 1.5 times as long as the tag the media sensor (transmissive
pitch (length of the white portion + sensor or reflective sensor) detects
black mark length) specified by the the label end state for 1 mm
command, but a black mark cannot continuously before the effective print
be detected. length of the current receipt is printed.
While the label is being fed with the
transmissive sensor designated, the
media sensor (transmissive sensor or
reflective sensor) detects the label
end state for 1 mm continuously.
While the tag paper is being fed with
the reflective sensor designated, the
media sensor (transmissive sensor or
reflective sensor) detects the label
end state for 1 mm continuously.
While the receipt is being fed with no
sensor designated, the media sensor
(transmissive sensor or reflective
sensor) detects the label end state for
1 mm continuously.

B-EP (It does not matter whether the compatibility setting for the B-SP series is on or off.)
Paper jam Label end Normal end + label end
When (or before) the motor is driven The media sensor (transmissive
for feeding or printing, the media sensor or reflective sensor) detects
sensor (transmissive sensor or the label end state before a print
reflective sensor) detects the label image that is printable in a single print
end state. job is printed completely. After that,
while the media sensor is detecting
the label end state for 1 mm
continuously, printing is completed.
RECEIPT

While printing is performed on the

receipt with no sensor designated, the
media sensor (transmissive sensor or
reflective sensor) detects the label
end state for 1 mm continuously
before the effective print length of the
current label is printed.
While the receipt is being fed with the
reflective sensor designated, the
media sensor (transmissive sensor or
reflective sensor) detects the label
end state for 1 mm continuously.
When (or before) the motor is driven
for feeding or printing, the media
sensor (transmissive sensor or
reflective sensor) detects the label
end state.
RECEIPT/ESC/POS

The media sensor (transmissive

sensor or reflective sensor) detects
the label end state for 10 mm
continuously before printing is
completed.
While the media sensor (transmissive
sensor or reflective sensor) is
detecting the label end state for 10
mm continuously, the “no print data”
state is detected for 1.5 mm
continuously.

9-4
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

9.3.2 BROKEN HEAD DOTS ERROR

c If broken head dots are detected in the broken head dots check when turning the power on
or closing the cover, an error will occur.
d If the thermal head driver fails, an error will occur.

9.3.3 THERMAL HEAD EXCESSIVE TEMPERATURE

c If the thermistor detects an excessively high temperature of 71 °C or higher, an error will
occur.

9.3.4 COVER OPEN ERROR

c If the cover open state is detected for 5 mm continuously while printing or feeding, an error will
occur.
d When printing is attempted with the cover opened, an error will occur.
* At the moment an error occurs, the printer displays an error message, and returns a status
response before it stops. Any commands except for the Status Request Command and the
Reset Command are not processed. The [PAUSE] key can be used for resetting except in
case where a thermal head excessive temperature error occurs. (The printer resumes printing
the label at which the error had occurred.)

9-5
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

9.4 BATTERY ERROR

9.4.1 LOW BATTERY
The LED lights up in red, if printing is cannot be performed any more because the battery level is
low.

9.4.2 ABNORMAL HIGH VOLTAGE

If it is detected that the battery voltage exceeds 9.5V for B-EP2DL or 17.5V for B-EP4DL, an error
will occur.

9.4.3 ABNORMAL BATTERY TEMPERATURE

If it is detected that the battery temperature exceeds 61 °C or is below -20 °C, an error will occur.

9.5 CHARGING ERROR

A charging error will occur if the following operations are performed while the AC adapter is
connected.
c If the power of the printer is turned on while it is off (with no battery attached)
d If the battery is removed while the power of the printer is on

9.6 BLUETOOTH SETTING ERROR

The printer recognizes an error when the Bluetooth related parameter setting fails.

9.7 ERRORS IN WRITABLE CHARACTER AND PC COMMAND SAVE MODES

9.7.1 WRITE ERROR
• An error has occurred in writing data in the storage memory.

9.7.2 FORMAT ERROR

• An erase error has occurred in formatting the storage memory.
9.7.3 MEMORY FULL
• Further data cannot be stored any more because of insufficient space in the storage
memory.
* At the moment when an error occurs, the printer displays an error message, and returns a
status response before it stops. Any commands except for the Status Request Command and
the Reset Command are not processed. Restoration by the [RESTART] key is not allowed.

9-6
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

9.8 SYSTEM ERRORS

9.8.1 ADDRESS ERROR
• A command has been fetched from an odd address.
• Word data has been accessed from a place other than the boundary of the word data.
• Long word data has been accessed from a place other than the boundary of the long word
data.
9.8.2 GENERAL INVALID COMMAND EXCEPTION
• An undefined command in a place other than the delay slot has been decoded.

9.8.3 SLOT INVALID EXCEPTION

• An undefined command in the delay slot has been decoded.
• A command which rewrites the data in the delay slot has been decoded.

9.8.4 PCB IDENTIFICATION ERROR

• The B-EP4DL Drive PCB is connected to the B-EP2DL Main PCB, or the firmware for the B-
EP4DL model is downloaded to the B-EP2DL.
• The B-EP2DL Drive PCB is connected to the B-EP4DL Main PCB, or the firmware for the B-
EP2DL model is downloaded to the B-EP4DL.

9.8.5 THERMAL HEAD IDENTIFICATION ERROR

• The thermal head for the B-EP4DL is connected to the B-EP2DL Main PCB.
• The thermal head for the B-EP2DL is connected to the B-EP4DL Main PCB.
* As soon as the error occurs, the printer displays an error message, and stops.
(No commands or key operations ([FEED] key / [PAUSE] key) are processed except for the
[POWER] key.)

9-7
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

9.9 OPERATIONS WHEN AN ERROR OCCURS

If the printer detects an error, the LED will blink (at intervals of 0.1 seconds), the printer stops the
operation, and reverts to a wait state for a command from the host.

9.10 OPERATIONS AFTER AN ERROR IS CLEARED

9.10.1 LABEL MODE
If the [FEED] key is pressed, the remaining number of labels is not issued. Since the printer
issues only the same label as one which is being printed when the error occurs, issue the
required number of labels by pressing the [FEED] key.

9.10.2 RECEIPT MODE

If the [FEED] key is pressed, the printer performs a 20-mm feed.

9.10.3 RECEIPT1 MODE OR ESC/POS MODE

After the label end error or the cover open error is cleared, the printer automatically continues
printing the data which has been received before the error occurred. After paper is replaced, the
error is cleared by pressing the [PAUSE] key. Then, the printer automatically continues printing.
When the cover is closed, if the printer has run out of the paper, the printer neither clears the
error nor continues printing. It remains in the error state. In any state other than the above, the
printer performs a 20-mm feed by pressing the [FEED] key.

* If the cover is opened due to the pressing of the key during printing, the head will separate from
the platen. Therefore, printing does not necessarily continue.

9.10.4 TPCL MODE

After the label end error or the cover open error is cleared, the printer automatically continues
printing the data which has been received before the error occurred. After paper is replaced, the
error is cleared by pressing the [PAUSE] key. Then, the printer automatically continues printing.
If the sensor is designated, the printer feeds the paper to the print start position, then continues
printing. When the cover is closed, if the printer has run out of the paper, the printer neither
clears the error nor continues printing. It remains in the error state. In any state other than the
above, if the sensor is designated, when the [FEED] key is pressed, the printer performs the
specified label pitch length of the feed. If no sensor is designated, the printer performs a 20-mm
feed.

9-8
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

9.11 STATUS VALUES

[The compatible mode for the B-SP series is off.]
* The values in the upper cell are provided for the LABEL/RECEIPT mode (1 byte).
The values in the lower cell are provided for the TPCL mode (3 bytes).
Status when the
Status by the
Auto status command is Condition of
Status Request
State LED transmission received during an clearing error
Command
indication error state
IrDA: TEC Protocol IrDA: IrCOMM IrDA: TEC Protocol RS-232C
IrDA: IrCOMM RS-232C IrDA: IrCOMM IrDA
RS-232C Bluetooth RS-232C Bluetooth
Bluetooth Wireless LAN Bluetooth Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Power is turned on. Blink in green — — — —
Normal state ON in green 00H — — —
(Idling) (or orange) 30H, 30H, 31H
Cover open state ON in green 01H — 01H —
(or orange) 30H, 31H, 31H 30H, 31H, 32H
Command syntax Blink in red 02H 02H 02H Reset by the
error 30H, 36H, 31H 30H, 36H, 32H 30H, 36H, 32H [PAUSE] key.
Paper jam Blink in red 03H 03H 03H Restart by the
31H, 31H, 31H 31H, 31H, 32H 31H, 31H, 32H [PAUSE] key.
Label end Blink in red 04H 04H 04H Restart by the
31H, 33H, 31H 31H, 33H, 32H 31H, 33H, 32H [PAUSE] key
after loading
paper.
Cover open error Blink in red 05H 05H 05H Close the cover.
31H, 35H, 31H 31H, 35H, 32H 31H, 35H, 32H
Broken head dots Blink in red 06H 06H 06H Turn the power
error 31H, 37H, 31H 31H, 37H, 32H 31H, 37H, 32H off or restart by
the [PAUSE] key.
Replace the
thermal head.
Thermal head Blink in red 07H 07H 07H Turn the power
excessive 31H, 38H, 31H 31H, 38H, 32H 31H, 38H, 32H off.
temperature
Flash ROM write error Blink in red 08H 08H 08H Turn the power
35H, 30H, 31H 35H, 30H, 32H 35H, 30H, 32H off.
Flash ROM erase Blink in red 09H 09H 09H Turn the power
error 35H, 31H, 31H 35H, 31H, 32H 35H, 31H, 32H off.
Low battery ON in red 0AH 0AH 0AH Turn the power
(Printing cannot be 33H, 36H, 31H 33H, 36H, 32H 33H, 36H, 32H off.
performed.)
Operating ON in green 0BH — — —
(Communicating) 30H, 32H, 31H
Communication error Blink in red 0CH 0CH 0CH Reset by the
* RECEIPT/232C only — — — [PAUSE] key.
Normal end + Blink in red 0DH 0DH 0DH Restart by the
Label end 30H, 39H, 31H 30H, 39H, 32H 30H, 39H, 32H [PAUSE] key.
Load paper.
Flash ROM storage Blink in red 0EH 0EH 0EH Turn the power
area full state 35H, 34H, 31H 35H, 34H, 32H 35H, 34H, 32H off.
Wait for strip ON in green 0FH
30H, 35H, 31H
Abnormal battery Blink in red 32H 32H 32H Turn the power
temperature 33H, 32H, 31H 33H, 32H, 32H 33H, 32H, 32H off.
Battery excessive Blink in red 33H 33H 33H Turn the power
temperature 33H, 33H, 31H 33H, 33H, 32H 33H, 33H, 32H off.

9-9
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

Status when the

Status by the
Auto status command is Condition of
Status Request
State LED transmission received during an clearing error
Command
indication error state
IrDA: TEC Protocol IrDA: IrCOMM IrDA: TEC Protocol RS-232C
IrDA: IrCOMM RS-232C IrDA: IrCOMM IrDA
RS-232C Bluetooth RS-232C Bluetooth
Bluetooth Wireless LAN Bluetooth Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Charging error Blink in red 37H 37H 37H Turn the power
33H, 37H, 31H 33H, 37H, 32H 33H, 37H, 32H off.
Bluetooth initialization Blink in red 39H 39H 39H Turn the power
error 33H, 39H, 31H 33H, 39H, 32H 33H, 39H, 32H off.
Bluetooth setup error Blink in red 39H 39H 39H Turn the power
33H, 39H, 31H 33H, 39H, 32H 33H, 39H, 32H off.
Wait for battery ON in green 45H
recovery 34H, 35H, 31H
Wait for head ON in green 46H
temperature reduction 34H, 36H, 31H

Wait for motor ON in green 47H

temperature reduction 34H, 37H, 31H

Pause state OFF 14H Press the

30H, 34H, 31H [PAUSE] key.
Bit map writable ON in green 55H
character/PC 35H, 35H, 31H
command mode
Sleep ON in green — — — —
Ir packet error Blink in red 02H 02H 02H Reset by the
30H, 36H, 31H 30H, 36H, 32H 30H, 36H, 32H [PAUSE] key

9-10
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

[The compatible mode for the B-SP series is on.]

* The values in the upper cell are provided for the LABEL/RECEIPT mode (1 byte).
The values in the lower cell are provided for the TPCL mode (3 bytes).
Status when the
Status by the
Auto status command is Condition of
Status Request
State LED transmission received during an clearing error
Command
indication error state
IrDA: TEC Protocol IrDA: IrCOMM IrDA: TEC Protocol RS-232C
IrDA: IrCOMM RS-232C IrDA: IrCOMM IrDA
RS-232C Bluetooth RS-232C Bluetooth
Bluetooth Wireless LAN Bluetooth Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Power is turned on. Blink in green — — — —
Normal state ON in green 00H — — —
(Idling) (or orange) 30H, 30H, 31H
Cover open state ON in green 01H — 01H —
(or orange) 30H, 31H, 31H 30H, 31H, 32H
Command syntax Blink in red 02H 02H 02H Reset by the
error 30H, 36H, 31H 30H, 36H, 32H 30H, 36H, 32H [PAUSE] key.
Paper jam Blink in red 03H 03H 03H Restart by the
31H, 31H, 31H 31H, 31H, 32H 31H, 31H, 32H [PAUSE] key.
Label end Blink in red 04H 04H 04H Restart by the
31H, 33H, 31H 31H, 33H, 32H 31H, 33H, 32H [PAUSE] key
after loading
paper.
Cover open error Blink in red 05H 05H 05H Close the cover.
31H, 35H, 31H 31H, 35H, 32H 31H, 35H, 32H
Broken head dots Blink in red 06H 06H 06H Turn the power
error 31H, 37H, 31H 31H, 37H, 32H 31H, 37H, 32H off or restart by
the [PAUSE] key.
Replace the
thermal head.
Thermal head Blink in red 07H 07H 07H Turn the power
excessive 31H, 38H, 31H 31H, 38H, 32H 31H, 38H, 32H off.
temperature
Flash ROM write error Blink in red 08H 08H 08H Turn the power
35H, 30H, 31H 35H, 30H, 32H 35H, 30H, 32H off.
Flash ROM erase Blink in red 09H 09H 09H Turn the power
error 35H, 31H, 31H 35H, 31H, 32H 35H, 31H, 32H off.
Low battery ON in red 0AH 0AH 0AH Turn the power
(Printing cannot be 33H, 36H, 31H 33H, 36H, 32H 33H, 36H, 32H off.
performed.)
Operating ON in green 0BH — — —
(Communicating) 30H, 32H, 31H
Communication error Blink in red 0CH 0CH 0CH Reset by the
* RECEIPT/232C only — — — [PAUSE] key.
Normal end + Blink in red 0DH 0DH 0DH Restart by the
Label end 30H, 39H, 31H 30H, 39H, 32H 30H, 39H, 32H [PAUSE] key.
Load paper.
Flash ROM storage Blink in red 0EH 0EH 0EH Turn the power
area full 35H, 34H, 31H 35H, 34H, 32H 35H, 34H, 32H off.
Wait for strip ON in green 0FH
30H, 32H, 31H
Abnormal battery Blink in red 07H 07H 07H Turn the power
temperature 31H, 38H, 31H 31H, 38H, 32H 31H, 38H, 32H off.
Battery excessive Blink in red 07H 07H 07H Turn the power
temperature 31H, 38H, 31H 31H, 38H, 32H 31H, 38H, 32H off.

9-11
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

Status when the

Status by the
Auto status command is Condition of
Status Request
State LED transmission received during an clearing error
Command
indication error state
IrDA: TEC Protocol IrDA: IrCOMM IrDA: TEC Protocol RS-232C
IrDA: IrCOMM RS-232C IrDA: IrCOMM IrDA
RS-232C Bluetooth RS-232C Bluetooth
Bluetooth Wireless LAN Bluetooth Wireless LAN
Wireless LAN Wireless LAN
Charging error Blink in red 37H 37H 37H Turn the power
33H, 37H, 31H 33H, 37H, 32H 33H, 37H, 32H off.
Bluetooth initialization Blink in red 39H 39H 39H Turn the power
error 33H, 39H, 31H 33H, 39H, 32H 33H, 39H, 32H off.
Bluetooth setup error Blink in red 39H 39H 39H Turn the power
33H, 39H, 31H 33H, 39H, 32H 33H, 39H, 32H off.
Wait for battery ON in green 0BH
recovery 30H, 32H, 31H
Wait for head ON in green 0BH
temperature reduction 30H, 32H, 31H

Wait for motor ON in green 0BH

temperature reduction 30H, 32H, 31H

Pause state OFF 0BH Press the

30H, 32H, 31H [PAUSE] key.
Bit map writable ON in green 0BH
character/PC 30H, 32H, 31H
command mode
Sleep ON in green — — — —
Ir packet error Blink in red 02H 02H 02H Reset by the
30H, 36H, 31H 30H, 36H, 32H 30H, 36H, 32H [PAUSE] key

9-12
 CHAPTER 9 ERROR PROCESSING
B-EP Series

* The LED goes OFF when:

• The auto power-off function is performed. (This is the same state when the printer is turned
OFF.)
• The error LED turns off in 5 minutes if the auto power-off time is set to 6 minutes or more.

9-13
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10. SYSTEM MODE

10.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes details regarding the interface commands for the SYSTEM mode. For
specification regarding keys, refer to the Key Operation Specification, and command specification for
setup tools, refer to the Setup Command Specification.

10.2 STARTING THE PRINTER IN SYSTEM MODE

Unlike the TPCL, TPCL1, LABEL, RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 and ESC/POS modes, the SYSTEM mode
cannot be accessed by the Mode Select Command. The SYSTEM mode can be accessed by turning
on the power of the printer while holding down the FEED or PAUSE key..

10.3 COMMUNICATIONS CONDITIONS

Communication is carried out using valued currently set for the printer.
Communication is enabled via all interfaces except for Wireless LAN.
Once communication has started, interface does not automatically change to another. To change the
interface, it is required to press the FEED key or PAUSE key, or turning the printer power off then on.
For communication statuses of each interface, refer to “I/F SETTING” in the SYSTEM mode.
* For details, refer to the Key Operation Specification.

10.4 LIMITATIONS IN SYSTEM MODE

When the SYSTEM mode is selected, the printer does not enter into the power save mode.
When the SYSTEM mode is selected, the auto power-off function is not performed.
The settings specified by any Set Commands are stored into flash ROM, when the printer is turned
OFF or is initialized by the Initialize Command. They take effect when the printer is turned ON, or
after initialization is completed. Do not remove the battery during storing the settings, or the data
cannot be written into flash ROM.

10-1
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.5 OUTLINE OF COMMANDS

10.5.1 FORMAT OF INTERFACE COMMAND

ESC Command & Data LF NUL

z The length from [ESC] to [LF] [NUL] must be as specified by each command.
z There is the following control code:
c ESC (1BH), LF (0AH), NUL (00H)
d{ (7BH), | (7CH), } (7DH)

10.5.2 HOW TO USE REFERENCE

Function Describes the outline of the function of the command.

Format Shows the format of the command.

The format designation method should conform to the following rules:
z Each set of small letters (such as aa, bbbb) indicates a parameter item.
z An item enclosed in parentheses may be omitted.
z “---” indicates the repetition of an item.
z Brackets and parentheses are used only in coding, and must not be transmitted
in practice.
z Other symbols must always be inserted at designated positions before being
transmitted.

Term Explains the term(s) used in the format.

* “0 to 999” described in the entry range indicates that up to 3-digit variable-length
entry is allowed. (Entry of “001” or “009” is also possible.) “000 to 999” indicates
that the entry must be fixed to 3 digits.
Explanation Explains the command in detail.

Note Supplementary explanation of the command.

Refer to Related commands

Examples Explains the command examples.

[ESC] FM [LF] [NUL]

The above corresponds to the transfer of the following:
1B 46 4D 0A 00
[ESC] F M [LF] [NUL]

10.5.3 PRECAUTIONS

The commands and parameters described in this specification must always be used. If any
command or parameter other than those covered in this specification are used, the printer’s
operation will not be guaranteed.

10-2
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.6 COMMANDS RELATED TO SETTING

10.6.1 ID SET COMMAND [ESC] ID
Function Sets the ID for the printer.

Format [ESC] ID; aa(, b) [LF] [NUL]

Term aa: Printer ID (2-byte hex data)

0000H to FFFFH

b: Wireless LAN IP Address Invalid Setting

(Omissible. If omitted, IP address setting is effective.)
0: IP Address setting is invalid.

Explanation (1) The printer ID is the information required for the host, such as a handy terminal, to
identify each printer.

Notes (1) The set printer ID is backed up in memory (even if the power is turned off).
(2) The last 5 digits of the printer’s serial number have been set as the printer ID, at
the time of shipment from the factory.
(3) In IrDA: TEC Protocol, the printer checks the set ID against the ID in the received
command packet. If they do not match, the printer discards the command packet.
However, when the ID in the command packet is “0”, the printer accepts the
command packet without checking the set IDs.

(4) In case of the wireless LAN model, the printer’s ID will be set as the lower 2-byte
number of the IP address unless “0” is set to the Wireless LAN IP Address Invalid
Setting parameter. The upper 2 bytes are fixed to “192.168.” At this time, the
subnet mask will be set to “255.255.0.0.”

Example To set “03H 51H” as the ID of the printer:

[ESC] ID; [03H] [51H] [LF] [NUL]
In this case, the printer ID in status printing is “00849.”
In case of the wireless LAN model, the IP address is “192.168.3.81.”

10-3
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.6.2 MODE SELECT COMMAND [ESC] M

Function Changes the print mode.

Format [ESC] M; a(, b) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Print mode designation

7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0

Print mode (Bit 0 to Bit 6 * See Table 1.)

Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB
0: Not performed
1: Performed
* Table 1 Print mode
HEX Mode How to deal with the received data after an error is cleared
30H LABEL Discards
31H RECEIPT Discards
32H RECEIPT1 Continues printing
34H ESC/POS Continues printing
41H TPCL Continues printing
42H TPCL1 Continues printing

b: Print position detection feed

(Omissible. If omitted, the print position detection feed is not performed.)
0: When the mode change from RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS to LABEL,
TPCL or TPCL1 is requested, a print position detection feed is not performed
after the mode is changed.
1: When the mode change from RECEIPT, RECEIPT1, ESC/POS to LABEL,
TPCL or TPCL1 is requested, a print position detection feed is performed after
the mode is changed.

Explanation (1) There are 4 types of the print mode: “LABEL,” “RECEIPT,” “TPCL,” and
“ESC/POS.”
(2) “Automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB is the function for the
specifications which do not allow the printer to spontaneously send the status
through IrDA; IrCOMM or USB. This function enables the printer to forcefully
send the status to the host, if the link between the printer and the host is
established. However, if the link between the printer and the host is not
established upon the status transmission, the printer cannot send the status.
Therefore, the status is discarded. (In the next connection to the host, the printer
does not send the status to the host.)
(3) The sensor is not used in the RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode. When
sensor detectable paper is used for receipts and labels, print position detection
feed cannot be done in the LABEL, TPCL or TPCL1 mode. By setting the print
position detection feed parameter to 1, print position detection feed is carried out
after the mode is changed to LABEL, TPCL or TPCL1.

(4) In the TPCL1 mode, it is possible to re-print the last print data by pressing the
FEED button.

10-4
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes (1) The print mode designation (the specified print mode and the automatic status
response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB) is backed up in memory (even if the power is
turned off).

(2) The factory default is “30H: TPCL mode” and “Automatic status response in IrDA:
IrCOMM or USB is not performed”. (The IrDA protocol is “IrCOMM.”)
(3) When the print mode is changed, the type of sensor is automatically changed.
LABEL mode (0): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
TPCL mode (A): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
TPCL1 mode (B): The previously backed up sensor is designated.
RECEIPT mode (1): No sensor is designated.
RECEIPT1 mode (2): No sensor is designated.
ESC/POS mode (4): No sensor is designated.
(4) If the RECEIPT or ESC/POS mode is selected or no sensor is designated in the
LABEL or TPCL mode, an initial feed is not performed when the cover is closed.
(when the print position detection feed after the cover is closed is enabled with key
operations).
(5) When the mode change is finished, the printer sends the normal end status or an
ACK to the host. However, when the mode is changed to the TPCL mode, the
printer does not send the status. In IrDA: IrCOMM or USB, only when bit 7 of the
print mode designation is set to “1,” the printer sends the status.
(6) The print mode can be changed by the printer itself. However, since the setting
for the automatic status response in IrDA: IrCOMM or USB cannot be changed, the
setting remains as the same.
(7) The print position detection feed is performed according to the conditions, such as,
label pitch, fine adjustment, and sensor selection, which were set in the LABEL or
TPCL mode before the printer is operated in the RECEIPT, RECEIPT1 or
ESC/POS mode. If no sensor is selected, the print position detection feed will not
be performed.
(8) After performing a print position detection feed, the printer does not send a process
end status. If an error occurs during the print position detection feed, the feed is
performed after the error is cleared by pressing the PAUSE key (when the print
position detection feed after the cover is closed is enabled with key operations).
(9) The print position detection feed is ignored when it is specified in the SYSTEM
mode.
(10) When changing the print mode by the printer itself, the print position detection feed
parameter cannot be set.
(11) When the mode select command is designated with the print position detection
feed at the end of a print data issued in RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode, and if an
error occurs while printing, the printing will restart after the error is cleared and
then, the print mode will be changed to the LABEL or TPCL mode and a print
position detection feed is performed. When the print position detection feed
setting is omitted, the mode is not changed to LABEL or TPCL (the mode select
command is discarded).

10-5
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(12) When the LABEL or TPCL mode is selected in the mode select command and the
print position detection feed parameter is set 0 (not performed), and if an error
occurs while the printer issues in RECEIPT1 or ESC/POS mode, the print mode is
changed to the LABEL or TPCL mode after the error is cleared. (The mode select
command is executed.)

10-6
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.7 COMMANDS RELATED TO FINE ADJUSTMENT

10.7.1 PRINT START POSITION FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AX
Function Adjusts the feed value so that the label will be shifted forward or backward from the
print start position automatically determined.

Format [ESC] AX; abbb, cddd, eff(, g) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a fine adjustment is to be

made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
bbb: Fine adjustment value for print position
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
c: Indicates the direction of the strip position, forward or backward.
+: Backward
-: Forward
ddd: Fine adjustment value for strip position
000 to 030
* In - (Forward) a fine adjustment is to be made between 000 and 020.
e: Reserved area
Fixed at +.
ff: Reserved area
Fixed at 00.
g: Reserved area (Omissible)
hhh: Reserved area (Omissible)

[In compatible mode for the B-SP series]

a: Indicates the direction, forward or backward, in which a fine adjustment is to be
made.
+: Backward
-: Forward
bbb: Fine adjustment value for print position
000 to 500 (in 0.1 mm units)
c: Reserved area
Fixed at +.
ddd: Reserved area
Fixed at 000.
e: Reserved area
Fixed at +.
ff: Reserved area
Fixed at 00.
g: Reserved area (Omissible)
hhh: Reserved area (Omissible)

10-7
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Explanation (1) When any value other than + or – is designated for the backward/forward print
position fine adjustment, a command error results.
(2) When any fine adjustment value for print position which is out of the above range,
is set, an error results.
(3) A range check is not carried out for the reserved areas. However, only numerals
can be used.
(4) The fine adjustment value is a sum of the value set using this command and the
value set in the SYSTEM mode (through printer key operations). However, the
maximum value is ±50.0 mm. When the sum exceeds ±50.0 mm, the value is
corrected to ±50.0 mm when printing is performed.
(5) The fine adjustment value for strip position is valid only when “the compatible mode
for the B-SP series” is turned off in the SYSTEM mode. When the parameter “a”
is set to any value other than “+” or “-,“ a command error occurs. When the
“compatible mode for the B-SP series” is turned on, the value is ignored.

[Print position (feed amount) fine adjustment] (to shift the label backward or forward)

0.0mm

Label
Print start position

+3.0mm

Label
Print start position

-3.0mm

Label
Paper feed direction
Print start position

10-8
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[Strip position fine adjustment]

When the label-to-label gap is 3 mm,

± 0.0 mm
▼

+ 3.0 mm

- 2.0 mm
▼

When the label-to-label gap is 7 mm,

± 0.0 mm
▼

+ 3.0 mm
▼

- 2.0 mm
▼

2.35 mm y In strip issue mode, printing stops at the position where the
distance between the leading edge of the strip plate and the
trailing edge of the label is 2.35 mm, regardless of gap
length. Note that this applies unless the fine adjustment
▼ 3 mm to 7 value for print position is set.
mm
y When the print stop position is not appropriate, the stop
position must be changed using strip position fine
adjustment.

10-9
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Notes (1) Each fine adjustment value is backed up in memory (even if the power is turned
off).
(2) Each parameter is set to 0.0 mm at the time of shipment from the factory.
(3) The fine adjustment value for print position and strip position changed by the
Position Fine Adjust Command in the TPCL mode, is also effective in the LABEL
mode.
(4) When print position fine adjustment or strip position fine adjustment is set in the
SYSTEM mode (through printer key operations), each fine adjustment value is a
sum of the value set by this command and the value set in the SYSTEM mode.
However, the maximum fine adjustment value is as follows:
Print position fine adjustment: ±50.0 mm
Strip position fine adjustment: -2.0 mm to +3.0 mm
When the sum of the fine adjustment value for print position exceeds ±50.0 mm,
the fine adjustment value is corrected to ±50.0 mm during printing.
When the sum of the fine adjustment value for strip position exceeds +3.0 mm in
the + (backward) direction or -2.0 mm in the – (forward) direction, the fine
adjustment value is corrected to +3.0 mm or -2.0 mm, respectively, during printing.
(5) Strip position fine adjustment is effective only in strip issue mode.

(6) The fine adjustment value for strip position up to V1.0C is valid only when the fine
adjustment value for print position is not selected (fine adjustment value = 0).

(7) The fine adjustment value for strip position is selected in the negative direction, a
label is stopped backward against the print start position. However, the print start
position is misaligned by the set value because no back feed is performed in strip
issue mode. (When the label-to-label gap is less than 5 mm) * Refer to the
arrows for – 2.0 mm when the label-to-label gap is 3 mm in P.5-15.

(8) When the label pitch length is 20.0 mm or more but less than 24.0 mm and the
effective print length is 15.0 mm or more or the label pitch length is 24.0 mm or
more, a back feed is performed before printing.

10-10
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.7.2 PRINT DENSITY FINE ADJUST COMMAND [ESC] AY

Function Adjusts the automatically set print density.

Format [ESC] AY; abb, c(, d) [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Indicates whether to increase or decrease the density

+: Increase (Darker)
-: Decrease (Lighter)
bb: Fine adjustment value for print density
00 to 30 (in units of 1 step)
c: Print mode
0: Reserved
1: Direct thermal
d: Head output division designation
(Omissible. When omitted, settings backed up by the memory are valid.)
2-inch print head width
0: Auto (Divided by 2 or 3)
1: Reserved (When designated, automatic selection of bipartite/tripartite
division is performed.)
2: Divided by 3 (Fixed)
3: Auto1 (Not divided/Divided by 2 or 3)/Print quality oriented
4: Reserved (When designated, tripartite division is performed.)
5: Auto2 (Not divided/Divided by 2 or 3)/Print speed oriented
(supported in V1.0E or later)

4-inch print head width

0: Auto (Divided by 2, 3 or 6)
1: Reserved (When designated, automatic selection of bipartite/tripartite/
6-partite division is performed.)
2: Reserved (When designated, automatic selection of bipartite/tripartite/
6-partite division is performed.)
3: Auto1 (Not divided/Divided by 2, 3 or 6)
4: Divided by 6 (Fixed)
Explanation (1) The standard density is finely adjusted to increase or decrease.
(2) When any fine adjustment value for print density out of the above range is set, a
command error will occur.
(3) If the print mode is set to any value other than “1: Direct thermal”, it should be
changed to “1.”
(4) The default value of the head output division designation is “3: Auto1 (Not
divided/Divided by 2 or 3))” on the 2-inch print head and “3: Auto1 (Not
divided/Divided by 2, 3 or 6)” on the 4-inch print head.
(5) When “0: Auto” is designated on the 2-inch print head, “Divided by 2” or “Divided
by 3” is automatically selected for every line according to the print ratio. The width
of half a dot may not be printed on the line when switching between “Divided by 2”
and “Divided by 3.” Therefore, do not designate “0: Auto” when a serial barcode
is printed.

10-11
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(6) When “3: Auto1” or “5: Auto2” is designated for the 2-inch print head, “Not divided,”
“Divided by 3” or “Divided by 2” is automatically selected for every line according to
the print ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line when
switching among “Not divided,” “Divided by 2” and “Divided by 3.” Therefore, do
not designate “3: Auto1” or “5: Auto2” when a serial barcode is printed.
The difference between Auto1 and Auto2 is while Auto1 is print quality oriented,
Auto2 is print speed oriented. Auto2 is designated to increase the print speed
although the print is slightly faded.
(7) When “0: Auto” is designated on the 4-inch print head, “Divided by 2”, “Divided by
3” or “Divided by 6” is automatically selected for every line according to the print
ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line when switching
among “Divided by 2,” “Divided by 3” and “Divided by 6.” Therefore, do not
designate “0: Auto” when a serial barcode is printed.
(8) When “3: Auto1” is designated on the 4-inch print head, “Not divided,” “Divided by
2,” “Divided by 3” or “Divided by 6” is automatically selected for every line
according to the print ratio. The width of half a dot may not be printed on the line
when switching among “Not divided,” “Divided by 2,” “Divided by 3” and “Divided by
6.” Therefore, do not designate “3: Auto1” when a serial barcode is printed.

10-12
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.7.3 STRIP SENSOR THRESHOLD VALUE SET COMMAND [ESC] AH, [ESC] AZ
Function Sets the sensor threshold value to switch the mode between strip and batch.

Format [ESC] AH; a [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] AZ; a [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Setting
0: Operation in conformance with the strip sensor
1: Operation in conformance with the strip sensor
2: Fixed to the batch mode
3: Fixed to the strip mode
4: Reserved

Notes (1) The set parameter value is backed up and kept until a new value is set using this
command. When the power is turned on, the backed up value is retrieved and set
(2) “0: Operation in conformance with the strip sensor” has been set as the default at
the time of shipment from the factory.
(3) When either “2: Fixed to the batch mode” or “3: Fixed to the strip mode” for
parameter “a” is selected, the printer operates in the specified mode, without
automatically switching between the batch and strip modes.
(4) Designation of “4: Reserved” is ignored.

10-13
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.8 COMMANDS RELATED TO CONTROL

10.8.1 INITIALIZE COMMAND [ESC] WR, [ESC] @
Function Returns the printer to its initial state.

Format [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] @

Explanation (1) The printer is returned to the same state as when the power is turned on.
(2) If the printer receives this command during printing, the printer prints the label
which is being printed, then performs initialization.
(3) After the Initialize Command is sent (or after printing is completed, if printing is
performed), the next command must not be sent within approximately 30 seconds
on the wireless LAN model or within approximately 5 seconds on other models,
because the printer is initialized. In IrDA: TEC Protocol, if ACK/status
transmission is specified by the Issue Command, the printer returns an ACK, which
indicates the command process end, to the EOT after the printer is initialized. In
RS-232C, when the status response is specified, the printer returns the status
(34H 30H). After this status is received, the next command may be sent. In
IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, Bluetooth or Wireless LAN, the printer does
not return the status.
(4) To use IrDA interface for sending this command to the printer, only this command
should be sent. After the command is sent, the link should be terminated. Even
if the host does not terminate the link, the printer performs the termination process.
Therefore, after initialization is completed, the host should establish the link again.
(5) When receiving this command during data transmission, the printer is initialized
after transmission is completed.
(6) Communication is disabled during self-test printing or slant line printing.

Notes
(1) If a command error or communication error occurs when receiving the Reset Command,
an error message is displayed in the online mode. However, it is not displayed in the
SYSTEM mode.
(2) After the code of the Bit Map Writable Character Command ([ESC] XD) or the Graphic
Command ([ESC] SG) is received, the Reset Command is not processed until the printer
receives the data specifying the type of data.

Examples [ESC] WR [LF] [NUL]

10-14
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.9 COMMANDS RELATED TO STATUS

10.9.1 STATUS REQUEST COMMAND [ESC] FM, [ESC] WS, [ESC] v
Function Sends the printer status to the host computer.

Format [ESC] FM [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]
[ESC] v

Explanation
[LABEL/RECEIPT modes]
When receiving this command, the printer sends the printer status and battery status to
the host.
• For IrDA: TEC Protocol: Data to be sent (Fixed at 27 bytes)

STX Printer ID Version No. of each form Printer status Battery status CRC
02H xxH xxH V01 V02 ········· V20 xxH xxH xxH xxH

• For IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN:
Data to be sent (Fixed at 5 bytes)

STX Printer ID Printer status Battery status

02H xxH xxH xxH xxH

Printer ID ............... 2-byte hex data (in order from High to Low)

10-15
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Printer status ......... Printer status is indicated in 1-byte data.

00H: Normal status (Idling)
01H: Cover open status
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken thermal head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Printer operating
0CH: Communication error
......... * For RECEIPT mode/RS-232C connection only
0DH: Normal end + Label end (See NOTE.)
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
0FH: Wait for strip ....... * Only in the LABEL mode
(10H: Normal issue end)
Response status for automatic status transmission
14H: Pause state
19H: Ambient temperature error
32H: Abnormal battery temperature
33H: Battery excessive temperature
37H: Charging error
38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
45H: Wait for battery recovery
46H: Wait for head temperature reduction
47H: Wait for motor temperature reduction
55H: Writable character/PC command save mode
NOTE: In the LABEL mode, “0DH: Normal end + Label end” is
a state when the printer runs out of labels, after the
effective print length is printed. In the RECEIPT mode,
this status is returned to the host when the printer runs
out of labels after a receipt is issued.

10-16
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Status in the compatible mode for B-SP series

00H: Normal state (idling)
01H: Cover open state
02H: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
03H: Paper jam
04H: Label end
05H: Cover open error
06H: Broken thermal head dots error
07H: Thermal head excessive temperature
including ambient temperature error, abnormal battery
temperature and battery excessive temperature
08H: Flash ROM write error
09H: Flash ROM erase error
0AH: Low battery (Print failure)
0BH: Printer operating
including the following statuses: wait for strip, pause
state, writable character/PC command save mode, wait
for battery recovery, wait for print head/motor
temperature reduction
0CH: Communication error
......... * For RECEIPT mode/RS-232C connection only
0DH: Normal end + Label end
0EH: Flash ROM storage area full state
(10H: Normal issue end)
Response status for automatic status transmission
37H: Charging error
38H: Bluetooth setting successfully completed
39H: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
Battery status .......... The battery charge status is indicated in 5 levels.
(B-EP2DL)
01H: 7.2 V or less (Print failure)
02H: 7.3 V to 7.4 V
03H: 7.5 V to 7.7 V
04H: 7.8 V to 7.9 V
05H: 8.0 V or more
(B-EP4DL)
01H: 14.0 V or less (Print failure)
02H: 14.1 V to 14.6 V
03H: 14.7 V to 15.2 V
04H: 15.3 V to 15.9 V
05H: 16.0 V to 16.8 V
* The remaining number of printable labels may vary according to
the contents to be printed and the ambient environment.
CRC ......................... 2-byte hex data (in order from Low to High)

10-17
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

[TPCL mode]
This command makes the printer send its status regardless of the status response setting.
The status to be transmitted is the current printer status, and indicates the latest status
only. The remaining count indicates the remaining count of the batch currently being
printed. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted.

[IrDA: TEC Protocol]

STX ID ID Status Remaining No. of labels CRC

02H xxH xxH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH xxH XXH

Remaining No. of labels

0000 to 9999

Status type
“1” (31H): Status Request Command
“2” (32H): Automatic status transmission

Printer status

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

SOH STX Status Remaining No. of labels ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Remaining No. of labels

0000 to 9999
Status type
“1” (31H): Status Request Command
“2” (32H): Automatic status transmission

Printer status

10-18
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Printer status
“00”: Normal state
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating
“04”: Pause state
“05”: Wait for strip
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken thermal head dots error
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature
“19”: Ambient temperature error
“32”: Abnormal battery temperature
“33”: Battery excessive temperature
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
“38”: Bluetooth setting successfully completed
(Not returned when the Status Request Command is used)
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
(“40”: Normal issue end)
Response status for automatic status transmission
(“41”: Normal feed end)
Response status for automatic status transmission
“45”: Wait for battery recovery
“46”: Wait for print head temperature reduction
“47”: Wait for motor temperature reduction
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state
“55”: Writable character/PC command save mode

10-19
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

Printer status for the compatible mode for the B-SP series
“00”: Normal state
“01”: Cover open state
“02”: Operating
including the following statuses: wait for strip, pause
state, wait for battery recovery, wait for print head/motor
temperature reduction and writable character/PC
command save mode
“06”: Command syntax error (including Ir packet error)
“09”: Normal issue end + Label end
“11”: Paper jam
“13”: Label end
“15”: Cover open error
“17”: Broken head dots error
“18”: Thermal head excessive temperature
including ambient temperature error, abnormal battery
temperature, and battery excessive temperature
“36”: Low battery
“37”: Charging error
“38”: Bluetooth setting successfully completed
(Not returned when the Status Request Command is used)
“39”: Bluetooth setup error (including initialization error)
(“40”: Normal issue end)
Response status for automatic status transmission
(“41”: Normal feed end)
Response status for automatic status transmission
“50”: Flash ROM write error
“51”: Flash ROM erase error
“54”: Flash ROM storage area full state

Notes (1) The status is returned only to the interface which sent this command.
(2) A max. delay of 20 msec may occur until the printer sends the status after
receiving the Status Request Command.
(3) The interval from when the Status Request Command is sent to when the next
Status Request Command is sent should be 20 msec or more. If the interval is
less than 20 msec, the printer may fail to receive the Status Request Command.

(4) Status “09” is effective only when the compatible mode for the B-SP series is
enabled in the SYSTEM mode. In other modes, this status indicates label end.

Example [ESC] WS [LF] [NUL]

10-20
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.9.2 MODE INFORMATION ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WX

Function Sends the printer mode information to the host.

Format [ESC] WX [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) Statuses are different between when the compatible mode for the B-SP series is
on and when it is off.
(2) The mode information format to be sent to the host, is as follows:

[LABEL, RECEIPT, ESC/POS modes]

[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
Mode information (16 bytes)
STX CRC CRC
S Y S T E M SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 53H 59H 53H 54H 45H 4DH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Mode information (16 bytes)
STX
S Y S T E M SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 53H 59H 53H 54H 45H 4DH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H

[TPCL mode]
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
Mode information (16 bytes)
STX CRC CRC
S Y S T E M SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
02H 53H 59H 53H 54H 45H 4DH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H xxH xxH

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, Wireless LAN]

Mode information (16 bytes)
SOH STX ETX EOT CR LF
S Y S T E M SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP SP
01H 02H 53H 59H 53H 54H 45H 4DH 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 20H 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

The above shows examples where the message is received in the SYSTEM mode for
administrators (after a password is entered, when password setting is on). In addition, the
messages described on the following page are returned.

10-21
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

• When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is on.

TPCL mode TPCL

TPCL1 mode TPCL1
LABEL mode LABEL
RECEIPT mode RECEIPT
RECEIPT1 mode RECEIPT1
ESC/POS mode ESC/POS
Online reset menu USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for users
USER„SYSTEM
PAUSE + POWER keys
When the password setting is on
USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for and before it is entered
administrators When the password setting is on
SYSTEM
FEED + POWER keys and after it is entered
When the password setting is off SYSTEM
TPCL (strip issue mode) TPCL„(S)
TPCL1 (strip issue mode) TPCL1 (S)
LABEL (strip issue mode) LABEL (S)

* „ indicates a space.

• When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is off.

TPCL mode TPCL-LE

TPCL1 mode TPCL-LE1
LABEL mode LABEL
RECEIPT mode RECEIPT
RECEIPT1 mode RECEIPT1
ESC/POS mode ESC/POS
Online reset menu USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for users
USER„SYSTEM
PAUSE + POWER keys
When the password setting is on
USER„SYSTEM
SYSTEM mode for and before it is entered
administrators When the password setting is on
SYSTEM
FEED + POWER keys and after it is entered
When the password setting is off SYSTEM

* „ indicates a space.

10-22
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.10 COMMANDS RELATED TO BLUETOOTH AND WIRELESS LAN

10.10.1 DEVICE ADDRESS ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] IT
Function Reads the device address of the Bluetooth or MAC address of the wireless LAN.

Format [ESC] IT [LF] [NUL]

Explanation (1) This command reads the device address of the Bluetooth or MAC address of the
wireless LAN. When using the IrDA, the following information field is placed in the
information frame and sent to the Bluetooth or wireless LAN.
[LABEL, RECEIPT, ESC/POS modes]
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Bluetooth device address CRC

02H 12 bytes xxH xxH

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C,
Bluetooth or wireless LAN is used]

STX Bluetooth device address

02H 12 bytes

[TPCL mode]
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Bluetooth device address CRC

02H 12 bytes xxH xxH

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C,
Bluetooth, or wireless LAN is used]

SOH STX Bluetooth device address ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 12 bytes 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

The printer sends the following information:

Bluetooth device address: 0001ccf0042b

Bluetooth device address:

[30H] [30H] [30H] [31H] [63H] [63H] [66H] [30H] [30H] [34H] [32H] [62H]
0 0 0 1 c c f 0 0 4 2 b

Example [ESC] IT [LF] [NUL]

10-23
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.10.2 BLUETOOTH DEVICE NICKNAME SETTING [ESC] BN

Function Sets Bluetooth device nickname.

Format [ESC] BN; aaa…aaa [LF] [NUL]

Term aaa…aaa: Device nickname Up to 32 bytes using characters of 20H to 7FH

Factory default: “TOSHIBATEC BT”

Explanation (1) Printer device nickname to be notified to the host is set.

(2) The device nickname set by this command becomes effective when the printer is
restarted after a proper power off of the printer.

(3) In the LABEL mode (Mode = 0), RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1) or RECEIPT1 mode
(Mode = 2), the printer returns “38H” (setting completed) when the processing is
completed successfully, and returns “39H” (setting error) when the processing is
not successfully completed. In the TPCL mode (Mode = A) or TPCL1 mode
(Mode = B), the printer returns “38” (setting completed) when the procesing is
completed, and returns “39” (setting error) when the processing is not successfully
completed.
(4) Characters of 20H to 7FH can be used for a device nickname.

Example To set “PRINTER” for a device nickname.

[ESC] BN; PRINTER [LF] [NUL]

10-24
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.10.3 INQUIRY RESPONSE TIME SETTING COMMAND [ESC] BZ

Function Sets the time for the printer to respond to an inquiry of the Bluetooth.

Format [ESC] BZ; a [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Inquiry response time

0: Inquiry is not possible.
1: Inquiry is possible only within 60 seconds after a power on.
2: Inquiry is possible ay anytime. (Factory default setting)

Explanation (1) Time of printer’s response to an inquiry from the host is set.
0: The printer does not respond to an inquiry from the host.
1: The printer responds to an inquiry from the host only within 60 seconds after the
power is turned on.
2: The printer responds to an inquiry from the host at anytime while the power is
on.
(2) The response time set by this command becomes effective when the printer is
restarted after a proper power off of the printer.
(3) When the Bluetooth installed in the printer is replaced, start the printer in the
SYSTEM mode, and then, turn the power off. Doing this makes the parameter
effective.
(4) This command can be sent from either the Bluetooth interface or the IrDA
interface. When the printer power is not turned off then on after sending the
command via either interface, and command transmission is performed via a
different interface, the command may be invalid.
(5) In the LABEL mode (Mode = 0), RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1) or RECEIPT1 mode
(Mode = 2), the printer returns “38H” (setting completed) when the processing is
completed successfully, and returns “39H” (setting error) when the processing is
not successfully completed. In the TPCL mode (Mode = A) or TPCL1 mode
(Mode = B), the printer returns “38” (setting completed) when the procesing is
completed, and returns “39” (setting error) when the processing is not successfully
completed.

Example To set the response time to “within 60 seconds after a power on”.
[ESC] BZ; 1 [LF] [NUL]

10-25
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.10.4 INTERVAL/WINDOW SETTING AT THE INQUIRY/PAGE [ESC] BQ

Function Sets an interval and window of inquiry/page for the Bluetooth interface.

Format [ESC] BQ; aaaa, bbbb [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaa: Interval of an inquiry/page (Fixed at 4 digits)

0018 to 4096 (0.625 msec./unit)
Factory default setting (inquiry/page): 2048 ⇒ 1.28 sec
bbbb: Window of an inquiry/page (Fixed at 4 digits)
0018 to 4096 (0.625 msec./unit)
Factory default setting (inquiry/page): 0036 ⇒ 22.5 msec

Explanation (1) An interval and window related to the time for the printer to respond to an inquiry or
page from the host are set. When the printer is used in the environment where a
connection with the host takes time, the connectivity will be improved by making
the value of the interval smaller and the window larger.

(2) When the value of the interval is set smaller and the window larger for improving
the connectivity, the printer’s power consumption will be increased. Also,
compared with the printer which is used with the factory default setting, the standby
time and the number of issues will be decreased.

(3) This setting becomes effective when the printer is restarted after the parameter is
set and the printer power is turned off properly.

(4) In the LABEL mode (Mode = 0), RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1) or RECEIPT1 mode
(Mode = 2), the printer returns “38H” (setting completed) when the processing is
completed successfully, and returns “39H” (setting error) when the processing is
not successfully completed. In the TPCL mode (Mode = A) or TPCL1 mode
(Mode = B), the printer returns “38” (setting completed) when the procesing is
completed, and returns “39” (setting error) when the processing is not successfully
completed.

(5) When the value of the interval is smaller than the value of the window, the printer
returns “39” (setting error).

Example To set the interval to 640 msec. and the window to 45.0 msec.
[ESC] BQ; 1024, 0072 [LF] [NUL]

10-26
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.10.5 BONDING SETTING COMMAND [ESC] BP

Function Sets the destination and the PIN code (bonding setting) of the Bluetooth.

Format [ESC]BP; aaaaaaaaaaaa, b, cccccccccccccccccccccccccccccccc [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaaaaaaaaaa: Bluetooth device address (BD address) of the destination

(1) 12-digit ASCII characters (hex. code) “0” to “9” and “A” to “F”
(in the case of BD address of specific destination)
(2) 12 digits of “∗”
(in the case of BD address of unspecified destination)
b: Size of PIN code
0: 1 byte
1: 2 bytes
2: 3 bytes
:
D: 14 bytes
E: 15 bytes
F: 16 bytes
c: PIN code
Byte string corresponding to the PIN code size is set in ASCII.

Explanation (1) In the LABEL mode (Mode = 0), RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1) or RECEIPT1 mode
(Mode = 2), the printer returns “38H” (setting completed) when the processing is
completed successfully, and returns “39H” (setting error) when the processing is
not successfully completed. In the TPCL mode (Mode = A) or TPCL1 mode
(Mode = B), the printer returns “38” (setting completed) when the procesing is
completed, and returns “39” (setting error) when the processing is not successfully
completed.
(2) Up to 10 BD addresses can be set by this command. If 11th BD address is set,
the first one is automatically deleted.
(3) If the PIN code is changed without changing BD address, the previously registered
PIN code is voided, and the latest one becomes effective.
(4) When a 12-digit “∗” is set to a specific destination, the previously set BD address of
that destination becomes invalid.
(5) To set a BD address for a specific designation after an address for unspecified
destination has been set, it is required to delete all bonding table by a Bonding
Table Deletion Command.
(6) The PIN code of the unspecified destination can be changed without deleting all
the bonding table.
(7) This command is effective only when the power is turned on in the SYSTEM mode.
It is invalid when the SYSTEM mode is entered by using the System Mode Shift
Command.
(8) This command can be sent from either the Bluetooth interface or the IrDA
interface. When the printer power is not turned off then on after sending the
command via either interface, and command transmission is performed via a
different interface, the command may be invalid.

10-27
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

(9) Both uppercase and lowercase letters are effective as ASCII codes for “A” to “F” in
the BD adderss of the destination.
(10) Alphanumeric characters of “0” to “9,” “A” to “Z,” and “a” to “z” can be used for a
PIN code.

Example To set the BD address of destination to “00043e0101ef” and PIN code to “3A” with PIN
code size to 1 (2 bytes):
As the PIN code “3A” corresponds to 0x33,0x41 in ASCII, the command will be:
[ESC] BP; 00043e0101ef, 1, 3341 [LF] [NUL]

10-28
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.10.6 BONDING TABLE DELETION COMMAND [ESC] BE

Function Deletes the bonding table of the Bluetooth.

Format [ESC] BE; aaaaaaaaaaaa [LF] [NUL]

[ESC] BE; b [LF] [NUL]

Term aaaaaaaaaaaa: Bluetooth device address (BD address)

12-byte ASCII (hex. code) “0” to “9,” “A” to “F”
b: Delete all (all registered bonding tables)
1-byte “∗” (fixed)

Explanation (1) This command deletes not only the bonding table of designated BD address but
the link between the bonding table and the BD address.
(2) In the LABEL mode (Mode = 0), RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1) or RECEIPT1 mode
(Mode = 2), the printer returns “38H” (setting completed) when the processing is
completed successfully, and returns “39H” (setting error) when the processing is
not successfully completed. In the TPCL mode (Mode = A) or TPCL1 mode
(Mode = B), the printer returns “38” (setting completed) when the procesing is
completed, and returns “39” (setting error) when the processing is not successfully
completed.
(3) An error status is returned when the designated BD address does not exist in the
bonding table, as well as a deletion of the table from the flash ROM cannot be
performed properly.
(4) When “Delete all (“∗”) is designated, the registered BD addresses are all deleted.
When the BD address of unspecified destination was set in the bonding setting,
they can be deleted only by designating “Delete all.”
To set BD address of specific destination again, it is required to execute a “Delete
all” by this command.
(5) This command is effective only when the power is turned on in the SYSTEM mode.
It is invalid when the SYSTEM mode is entered by using the System Mode Shift
Command.
(6) This command can be sent from either the Bluetooth interface or the IrDA
interface. When the printer power is not turned off then on after sending the
command via either interface, and command transmission is performed via a
different interface, the command may be invalid.
(7) Both uppercase and lowercase letters are effective as ASCII codes for “A” to “F” in
the BD adderss of the destination.

10-29
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.10.7 SECURITY SETTING COMMAND [ESC] BS

Function Performs the security setting for the Bluetooth.

Format [ESC] BS; a [LF] [NUL]

Term a: Security setting

1: No security (Factory defalut setting)
2: Reserved.
3: Link level security

Explanation (1) In the LABEL mode (Mode = 0), RECEIPT mode (Mode = 1) or RECEIPT1 mode
(Mode = 2), the printer returns “38H” (setting completed) when the processing is
completed successfully, and returns “39H” (setting error) when the processing is
not successfully completed. In the TPCL mode (Mode = A) or TPCL1 mode
(Mode = B), the printer returns “38” (setting completed) when the procesing is
completed, and returns “39” (setting error) when the processing is not successfully
completed.
(2) In the SYSTEM mode, “No security” is designated regardless of this security
setting.
(3) This setting becomes effective when the printer is restarted after the parameter is
set and the printer power is turned off properly.
(4) When “2: Reserved” is specified, the functions without security.
(5) When “3: Link level security” is specified, be sure to set the the destination and the
PIN code in the bonding table.

Bonding setting Security setting Operation

Unregistered None Functions without a PIN code.
Unregistered Link level security Not connectable.
Registered None Functions without a PIN code.
Registered Link level security Functions with a PIN code.

Example To set the security to the link level.

[ESC] BS; 3 [LF] [NUL]

10-30
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.10.8 BLUETOOTH RELATED PARAMETER ACQUIRE COMMAND [ESC] WT

Function Acquires the parameter settings related to the Bluetooth.

Format [ESC] WT [LF] [NUL]

Explanation This command reads the parameters related to the Bluetooth. When using the IrDA,
the following information field is placed in the information frame and sent to the host.
„ LABEL, RECEIPT, ESC/POS modes
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Sec Inq Interval Window

02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Inquiry/page window
0018 to 4096
Inquiry/page interval
0018 to 4096
Inquiry timer
0 (30H): Inquiry is not possible.
1 (31H): Inquiry is possible only within 60 seconds after a
printer power on
2 (32H): Inquiry is possible at anytime.
Security setting
1 (31H): No security
2 (32H): No security
3 (33H): Link level security is effective

Bluetooth device name CRC CRC

32 bytes xxH xxH
Bluetooth device name: Fixed at 32 bytes.

When the Bluetooth device name is “TOSHIBA TEC BT.”

[54H] [4FH] [53H] [48H] [49H] [42H] [41H] [20H] [54H] [45H] [43H] [20H] [42H] [54H] [00H] [00H]
T O S H I B A ‘’ T E C ‘’ B T
[00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H]

* When the Bluetooth device name is less than 32 bytes, the remaining bytes are filled
with 00H.

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C,
Bluetooth or Wireless LAN is used]

STX Sec Inq Interval Window

02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Bluetooth device name

32 bytes

10-31
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

„ TPCL mode
[Information field to be sent when IrDA: TEC Protocol is used]

STX Sec Inq Interval Window

02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Inquiry/page window
0018 to 4096
Inquiry/page interval
0018 to 4096
Inquiry timer
0 (30H): Inquiry is not possible.
1 (31H): Inquiry is possible only within 60 seconds after a
printer power on
2 (32H): Inquiry is possible at anytime.
Security setting
1 (31H): No security
2 (32H): No security
3 (33H): Link level security is effective

Bluetooth device name CRC CRC

32 bytes xxH xxH
Bluetooth device name: Fixed at 32 bytes.

When the Bluetooth device name is “TOSHIBA TEC BT.”

[54H] [4FH] [53H] [48H] [49H] [42H] [41H] [20H] [54H] [45H] [43H] [20H] [42H] [54H] [00H] [00H]
T O S H I B A ‘’ T E C ‘’ B T
[00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H] [00H]

* When the Bluetooth device name is less than 32 bytes, the remaining bytes are filled
with 00H.

[Information field to be sent when IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C,
Bluetooth or Wireless LAN is used]

SOH STX Sec Inq Interval Window

01H 02H 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH 3xH

Bluetooth device name ETX EOT CR LF

32 bytes 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

10-32
 CHAPTER 10 SYSTEM MODE (INTERFACE COMMANDS)
B-EP Series

10.11 SETUP MODE

10.11.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION
The settings can be changed not only by commands but also by the key operations from the
printer. This section describes how to change the settings by the key operations from the
printer.

10.11.2 HOW TO ENTER INTO SETUP MODE

The [POWER] key is pressed while holding down the [FEED] or [PAUSE] key.

10.11.3 AUTO POWER-OFF FUNCTION DURING SETTING

Not performed.

10.11.4 HOW TO CHECK EACH SETUP MODE

Setup mode check is conducted by printing self-test results.
* For details, refer to the Key Operation Specification.

10.11.5 OTHER
The printer does not enter into the power save mode during the setup mode.
If the setting is the same as before, it is not written into flash ROM.
Settings made take effect, after the printer is turned OFF then ON by pressing the [POWER] key
in the SYSTEM mode, or when the printer is restarted by the Reset Command.

10-33
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

11. OTHER FUNCTIONS

11.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter describes details regarding the individual functions of the printer.

11-1
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

11.2 REPRINT FUNCTION

11.2.1 LABEL MODE
When the batch issue mode is selected, the same label as the last one issued is printed out by
pressing the [FEED] key. When the [FEED] key is pressed if no label has been printed, the
specified label pitch length of one label is fed. (If no sensor is designated, a 20-mm feed is
performed.)
In the strip issue mode, the specified number of labels is issued regardless of whether the
compatible mode for the B-SP series is enabled or not.
If an error occurs, the drawing buffer data is kept until the next Data Print Command is received.
Therefore, after the error is cleared, if the reprint key is enabled in the Data Print Command, one
label can be issued every time the [FEED] key is pressed.

11.2.2 RECEIPT OR ESC/POS MODE

A label is not issued again. A 20-mm feed is performed every time the [FEED] key is pressed.

11.2.3 TPCL MODE

A label is not issued again. The specified label pitch length of a feed is performed every time
the [FEED] key is pressed. (If no sensor is designated, a 20-mm feed is performed.)

11.2.4 TPCL1 MODE

When the batch issue mode is selected, the same label as the last one issued is printed out by
pressing the [FEED] key. When the [FEED] key is pressed if no label has been printed, the
specified label pitch length of one label is fed. (If no sensor is designated, a 20-mm feed is
performed.)
If an error occurs, key entries are ignored. However, the drawing buffer data is kept until the
next Data Print Command is received. Therefore, after the error is cleared, one label can be
issued every time the [FEED] key is pressed.

11.3 POWER SAVE MODE

This printer will enter the power save mode after the printer has been in an idle state for the
specified ‘time to the power save mode’ to save the power consumption. When the printer enters
the power save mode, all data in the receive buffer is cleared. During an error state (including a
low battery state), the printer does not enter the power save mode, but turns off according to the
auto power off time setting. If the auto power off time is set to 5 minutes or longer, however, the
printer will turn off in 5 minutes.
The power save mode is cleared when:
• The IrDA link is established. (TEC Protocol, IrCOMM)
• A USB cable is connected, and USB communications are started.
• RS-232C communications are started.
• Bluetooth communications are started.
• Wireless LAN communications are started.
• The cover is closed.
• The [FEED] key is pressed.
• The [POWER] key is pressed.

11-2
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

* A time period until the printer enters the power save mode varies depending on the setting (1 to
30 seconds.)

11.4 AUTOMATIC LABEL PRINT POSITIONING

11.4.1 LABEL MODE, TPCL MODE
When the cover is closed, the label is automatically fed to the first print position. However, if no
sensor is designated, a feed is not performed.

11.4.2 RECEIPT MODE

Even if the cover is closed, the label is not automatically fed to the first print position.

11.5 CONTINUOUS PRINTING FUNCTION

11.5.1 LABEL MODE, RECEIPT MODE (Mode = 1)
The continuous printing function is not supported. When an error occurs, the receive buffer is
entirely cleared.

11.5.2 RECEIPT1 MODE (Mode = 2), TPCL MODE (Mode = A), TPCL1 MODE (Mode = B), ESC/POS
MODE (Mode = 4)
After the label end error or the cover open error is cleared, the printer automatically continues
printing the data which has been received before the error occurred. After paper is replaced, the
error is cleared by pressing the [PAUSE] key. Then, the printer automatically continues printing.
If the sensor is designated, the printer performs a feed to position the label at the first print
position, then continues printing. When the cover is closed, if the printer has run out of the paper,
the printer neither clears the error nor continues printing. It remains in the error state.

11.6 AUTOMATIC LABEL PRINT POSITIONING AT POWER ON TIME

11.6.1 DESTINED FOR JAPAN
Not applicable.

11.6.2 DESTINED OVERSEAS

If the sensor is designated, and if the transmissive sensor detects the backing paper of the label,
the printer performs a feed to position the label at the first print position. Note that this is not
done without the sensor adjustment.
In addition, even if the paper is not loaded, the printer will recognize that as the backing paper,
and this will result in the label end error.

11.7 BD ADDRESS PRINTING FUNCTION

When the printer which supports Bluetooth interface is turned ON by holding down the [POWER]
key, the barcode below is printed, regardless of the print mode. However, if the barcode is not
properly printed due to an error caused by the label end or paper jam, the printer does not reprint it.
Clear the error, and then try to reprint it by performing the procedure from the beginning (the power
off state).

11-3
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

[Barcode sample of Bluetooth device address]

11.8 WIRELESS LAN PARAMETER SETTINGS PRINTING FUNCTION

When the printer which supports the wireless LAN is turned ON by holding down the [POWER] key
while the power is off, the printer prints a wireless LAN parameter settings label regardless of the
issue mode. If the label is not printed successfully due to an error like no paper or feed jam, it is
required to load the media correctly, turn off the power, and then retry from the beginning. This is
because the printer will not reprint the label even if the error is cleared.
[Sample of the wireless LAN parameter setting printout (B-EP2DL)]

RF-LAN PARAMS TYPE[JPN]

IP [192.168.254.254] LPD [ON ]
GW [000.000.000.000] DHCP[ON ]
SUB[255.255.000.000] CON [INF]
SOCK[ON ][08000]
HOST [ ]
[ ]
ESSID [TOSHIBATEC ]
[ ]
MAC:00-0e-10-10-3c-4d
WLAN Ver1.0.1

11.9 STRIP ISSUE MODE

(1) In TPCL mode (mode =A), TPCL1 mode (mode = B), or LABEL mode (mode = 0), the specified
number of labels are printed. Note that a next print job is not performed until the printed label is
removed from the strip shaft.
* If the [FEED] key is pressed in the “strip wait” status, stripping will be performed forcibly. (In
other words, this is the same state as the media is removed.)
(2) Please refer to the following commands related to the strip issue mode:
• Mode Select Command
• Position Fine Adjustment Command
• Strip Sensor Threshold Value Set Command (TPCL mode)
• Strip Sensor Adjust Command (LABEL mode)
• Issue Command
• Mode Information Acquire Command

11-4
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

11.11 STATUS
11.11.1 FUNCTIONS
The printer has the status response functions as listed below:
(1) Status transmission at the end of a normal issue or in the event of the occurrence of an error
(automatic status transmission)
This function is available for IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: TEC Protocol, USB, RS-232C and Bluetooth
interfaces, or socket communications (during connection).
If the option “status response is returned.” has been selected (and if the automatic status
transmission is enabled for the IrDA: IrCOMM or USB interface), the printer sends the status to
the host computer when the printer completes an issue normally. (For the batch/cut mode: after
the designated number of labels has been printed. For the strip mode: after one label has
been printed.)
When an error occurs, the status is sent to the host computer.
The remaining count included in the status response indicates the remaining print count of the
batch currently in progress only. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is
transmitted.
(2) Status transmission in response to a status request (Status Request Command)
This function is available for IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: TEC Protocol, IrDA: IrOBEX, RS-232C, USB
and Bluetooth interfaces, or socket communications.
Upon receipt of the Status Request Command, the printer sends the latest status indicating its
current state to the host computer, regardless of the status response parameter setting (and
regardless of whether the automatic status transmission is enabled for the IrDA: IrCOMM or
USB interface). The remaining count indicates the remaining print count of the batch currently
in progress only. No remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted. This
command is not stored in the receive buffer, but executed immediately after received.
(3) Receive buffer free space status transmission in response to a status request
(Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command)
This function is available for IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: TEC Protocol, IrDA: IrOBEX, RS-232C, USB
and Bluetooth interfaces, or socket communications.
Upon receipt of the Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command, the printer sends the
latest status indicating its current state and free space of the receive buffer to the host
computer, regardless of the status response parameter setting (and regardless of whether the
automatic status transmission is enabled for the IrDA: IrCOMM or USB interface). The
remaining count indicates the remaining print count of the batch currently in progress only. No
remaining count of the batch waiting to be printed is transmitted. This command is not stored
in the receive buffer, but executed immediately after received.

11-5
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

• Strip wait status

If the Status Request Command is sent while printing is being attempted using the [FEED] key
and a label is on the strip shaft (for example, while idling, after feeding a label, or after printing
all specified number of labels), the printer returns the strip wait status to the host. If the Status
Request Command is sent while a label is being printed or issued, the strip wait status is
returned.

• Status in ESC/POS mode

Similarly, a response is returned to the Status Request command commonly used by the B-EP
series in ESC/POS mode.
However, any status transmission will not be performed after the completion of printing as
described in (1) above and when an error occurs.

11-6
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

11.11.2 STATUS FORMAT

• TPCL Mode
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]

STX ID ID Status Remaining count CRC CRC

01H XXH XXH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH XXH XXH

Remaining count
• 0000 to 9999
(Fixed at 0000 in the save mode)
Type of status
• “1” (31H) (In response to a Status Request Command)

• “2” (32H) (Automatic status transmission)

Detail status

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, or wireless LAN interface]

SOH STX Status Remaining count ETX EOT CR LF

01H 02H 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 3XH 03H 04H 0DH 0AH

Remaining count
• 0000 to 9999
(Fixed at 0000 in the save mode)
Type of status
• “1” (31H) (In response to a Status Request Command)

• 2” (32H) (Automatic status transmission)

Detail status

● LABEL, RECEIPT, or ESC/POS Mode

[IrDA: TEC Protocol] Data to be transmitted (fixed at 27 bytes)

STX Printer ID Version No. of each form Printer status Battery status CRC
02H xxH xxH V01 V02 ･････････ V20 xxH xxH xxH xxH

[IrDA :IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, or wireless LAN interface]
Data to be transmitted (fixed at 5 bytes)

STX Printer ID Printer status Battery status

02H xxH xxH xxH xxH

Printer ID : 2-byte hex data (from High to Low)

Printer status : 1-byte data representing the printer status
Battery status : A battery charging condition is represented in 5 levels.
CRC : 2-byte hex data(from Low to High)

11-7
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

Status to be returned in response to the Receive Buffer Free Space Status Request Command
Commonly used in all modes (TPCL, TPCL1, LABEL, RECEIPT, RECEIPT1, or ESC/POS)
[IrDA: TEC Protocol]
Status after [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] (22 bytes)

STX 02H Header of the status block

3XH Printer status
Status
3XH * Details are described later.
This indicates a status with free space of the
Status type 33H
receive buffer included
3XH
Remaining 3XH Remaining print count
count 3XH “0000” (0 label/tag) to “9999”(9999 labels/tags)
3XH
32H Total number of bytes of this status block
Length
32H "22" (22 bytes)
3XH
Free space of the receive buffer
Free space 3XH
“00000” (0K byte) to “00512” (512K bytes)
of receive 3XH
However, the maximum value should be equal to
buffer 3XH
the receive buffer capacity.
3XH
30H
Receive 30H Receive buffer capacity
buffer 35H “00512”(512K bytes)
capacity 31H
32H
CRC XXH
Footer of the status block
CRC XXH

11-8
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

[IrDA: IrCOMM, IrDA: IrOBEX, USB, RS-232C, Bluetooth, or wireless LAN interface]
Status after [ESC] WB [LF] [NUL] (23 bytes)

SOH 01H
Header of the status block
STX 02H
3XH Printer status
Status
3XH * Details are described later.
Status type 33H This indicates a status with free space of the receive buffer
included.
3XH
3XH Remaining print count
Remaining count
3XH “0000” (0 label/tag) to “9999”(9999 labels/tags)
3XH
32H Total number of bytes of this status block
Length
33H "23" (23 bytes)
3XH
Free space of the receive buffer
3XH
Free space of “00000” (0K byte) to “00512” (512K bytes)
3XH
receive buffer However, the maximum value should be equal to the receive
3XH
buffer capacity.
3XH
30H
30H
Receive buffer Receive buffer capacity
35H
capacity “00512”(512K bytes)
31H
32H
CR 0DH
Footer of the status block
LF 0AH

11-9
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

11.11.3 DETAIL STATUS

[The compatible mode for the B-SP series is off.]
* The values in the upper cell are provided for LABEL/RECEIPT mode (1 byte HEX).
The values in the lower cell are provided for TPCL mode (2 bytes ASCII).

LCD Message of the Detail Status

No. Upper Line Printer Status Auto Status Status Request
(English) Transmission Command

ON LINE The printer is in the online mode. 00H

“00”
ON LINE The printer is in the online mode (or 0BH
communicating). “02”
LBL PRESENT **** A label is waiting to be stripped. 0FH
“05”
ON LINE A label issue has been completed normally. 10H *1
1
“40”
ON LINE A feed has been completed normally.
“41”
ON LINE A head broken dots check has been completed
normally. 00
ON LINE Initialization has been completed normally. 10H

COVER OPEN The front cover was opened in the online mode. 01H
2
“01”
PAUSE **** The printer is in a pause state. 14H
3
“04”
COMMS ERROR A parity error, overrun error, or framing error has 0CH 0CH
4 occurred during communication through the RS-
232C interface.
PAPER JAM **** A paper jam has occurred during a paper feed. 03H 03H
5
“11” “11”
NO PAPER **** The paper has run out. 04H 04H
6
“13” “13”
NO PAPER A label has been completed normally, and then the 0DH 0DH
7
paper has run out. “09” “09”
COVER OPEN **** An attempt was made to feed or issue with the 05H 05H
8
cover opened (except the [PAUSE] key). “15” “15”
HEAD ERROR A broken element has been found on the thermal 06H 06H
9
head. “17” “17”
EXCESS HEAD TEMP The print head temperature has exceeded 71 °C. 07H 07H
10
“18” “18”
SAVING #### &&&& The printer is in writable character or PC command 55H
11
save mode. “55”
FORMAT ERROR An erase error has occurred in formatting the flash 09H 09H
12
memory. “51” “51”
FLASH WRITE ERR. An error has occurred in writing data into the flash 08H 08H
13
memory. “50” “50”

11-10
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

LCD Message of the Detail Status

No. Upper Line Printer Status Auto Status Status Request
(English) Transmission Command

FLASH MEM FULL Saving failed because of insufficient space in the 0EH 0EH
14
flash memory. “54” “54”
EEPROM ERROR A back-up EEPROM cannot be read/written
15
properly.
LOW BATTERY The battery voltage has dropped to 7.2V or less for 0AH 0AH
16
B-EP2DL, or 14V or less for B-EP4DL. “36” “36”
AMBIENT TEMP ERR An ambient temperature has dropped to -20 °C or 19H 19H
17
lower, or exceeded 60 °C. “19” “19”
BATT. TEMP ERROR The battery may be heated and hurt operators. 32H 32H
18
Please be careful not to get burned. “32” “32”
HIGH VOLT. ERROR The battery may be heated and hurt operators. 33H 33H
19
“33” “33”
SYSTEM ERROR -- System error
(a) A command has been fetched from an odd
address.
(b) Word data has been accessed from a place
other than the boundary of the word data.
(c) Long word data has been accessed from a
place other than the boundary of the long word
data.
20
(d) The logical area ranging from 80000000H to
FFFFFFFFH has been accessed in user mode.
(e) An undefined command in a place other than
the delay slot has been decoded.
(f) An undefined command in the delay slot has
been decoded.
(g) A command which rewrites the data in the
delay slot has been decoded.
WAITING (BATT.) The battery protection function is active. 45H
21
“45”
WAITING (HEAD) The print head protection function is active. 46H
22
“46”
WAITING (MOTOR) The motor protection function is active. 47H
23
“47”
BT INIT ERROR The initialization of Bluetooth failed. 39H
24
“39”
BT SETTING ERROR There is an error in the Bluetooth setting. 39H
25
“39”
CHARGE ERROR $ An error occurred while the battery was recharged. 37H 37H
26
“37” “37”
Ir PACKET ERROR A block number error occurred in the TEC protocol. 02H 02H
27
"06" "06"
Display of error A command error has been found in analyzing the 02H 02H
28 command command.
“06” “06”
(See NOTE 1.)
* 1 LABEL mode only (when connected through the RS-232C, IrCOMM or Bluetooth interface)

11-11
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

[The compatible mode for the B-SP series is on.]

* The values in the upper cell are provided for LABEL/RECEIPT mode (1 byte HEX).
The values in the lower cell are provided for TPCL mode (2 bytes ASCII).

LCD Message of the Detail Status

No. Upper Line Printer Status Auto Status Status Request
(English) Transmission Command

ON LINE The printer is in the online mode. 00H

“00”
ON LINE The printer is in the online mode (or 0BH
communicating). “02”
LBL PRESENT **** A label is waiting to be stripped. 0BH
“02”
ON LINE A label issue has been completed normally. 10H *1
1
“40”
ON LINE A feed has been completed normally.
“41”
ON LINE A head broken dots check has been completed
normally. 00
ON LINE Initialization has been completed normally. 10H

COVER OPEN The front cover was opened in the online mode. 01H
2
“01”
PAUSE **** The printer is in a pause state. 0BH
3
“02”
COMMS ERROR A parity error, overrun error, or framing error has 0CH 0CH
4 occurred during communication through the RS-
232C interface.
PAPER JAM **** A paper jam has occurred during a paper feed. 03H 03H
5
“11” “11”
NO PAPER **** The paper has run out. 04H 04H
6
“13” “13”
NO PAPER A label has been completed normally, and then the 0DH 0DH
7
paper has run out. “09” “09”
COVER OPEN An attempt was made to feed or issue with the 05H 05H
8
cover opened (except the [PAUSE] key). “15” “15”
HEAD ERROR A broken element has been found on the thermal 06H 06H
9
head. “17” “17”
EXCESS HEAD TEMP The print head temperature has exceeded 71 °C. 07H 07H
10
“18” “18”
ON LINE The printer is in writable character or PC command 0BH
11
save mode “02”
FORMAT ERROR An erase error has occurred in formatting the flash 09H 09H
12
memory. “51” “51”
FLASH WRITE ERR. An error has occurred in writing data into the flash 08H 08H
13
memory. “50” “50”

11-12
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

LCD Message of the Detail Status

No. Upper Line Printer Status Auto Status Status Request
(English) Transmission Command

FLASH MEM FULL Saving failed because of insufficient space in the 0EH 0EH
14
flash memory. “54” “54”
EEPROM ERROR A back-up EEPROM cannot be read/written
15
properly.
LOW BATTERY The battery voltage has dropped to 7.2V or less for 0AH 0AH
16
B-EP2DL, or 14V or less for B-EP4DL. “36” “36”
AMBIENT TEMP ERR An ambient temperature has dropped to -20 °C or 07H 07H
17
lower, or exceeded 60 °C. “18” “18”
BATT. TEMP ERROR The battery may be heated and hurt operators. 07H 07H
18
Please be careful not to get burned. “18” “18”
HIGH VOLT. ERROR The battery may be heated and hurt operators. 07H 07H
19
“18” “18”
SYSTEM ERROR -- System error
(a) A command has been fetched from an odd
address.
(b) Word data has been accessed from a place
other than the boundary of the word data.
(c) Long word data has been accessed from a
place other than the boundary of the long word
data.
20
(d) The logical area ranging from 80000000H to
FFFFFFFFH has been accessed in user mode.
(e) An undefined command in a place other than
the delay slot has been decoded.
(f) An undefined command in the delay slot has
been decoded.
(g) A command which rewrites the data in the
delay slot has been decoded.
WAITING (BATT.) The battery protection function is active. 0BH
21
“02”
WAITING (HEAD) The print head protection function is active. 0BH
22
“02”
WAITING (MOTOR) The motor protection function is active. 0BH
23
“02”
BT INIT ERROR The initialization of Bluetooth failed. 39H
24
“39”
BT SETTING ERROR There is an error in the Bluetooth setting. 39H
25
“39”
CHARGE ERROR $ An error occurred while the battery was recharged. 37H 37H
26
“37” “37”
Ir PACKET ERROR A block number error occurred in the TEC protocol. 02H 02H
27
"06" "06"
Display of error A command error has been found in analyzing the 02H 02H
28 command command.
“06” “06”
(See NOTE 1.)
* 1 LABEL mode only (when connected through the RS-232C, IrCOMM or Bluetooth interface)

11-13
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

11.12 LCD MESSAGES AND LED INDICATIONS

The model and the firmware version are displayed on the character-oriented LCD.
LED Restoration Acceptance
LCD Messages of Indication
by the of Status
[PAUSE] Request and
No. Upper line Printer Status key Reset
(English) STATUS Yes/No Commands
Yes/No

1 ON LINE { In the online mode - Yes

ON LINE { In the online mode - Yes
(Communicating)
LBL PRESENT ****  A label is waiting to be stripped. - Yes
2 COVER OPEN { The front cover was opened in the - Yes
online mode.
3 PAUSE **** z In a pause state Yes Yes
4 COMMS ERROR ‘ A parity error, overrun error or Yes Yes
framing error has occurred during
communication through the RS-232C
interface.
5 PAPER JAM **** ‘ A paper jam has occurred during Yes Yes
paper feed.
6 NO PAPER **** ‘ The paper has run out. Yes Yes
7 NO PAPER ‘ A label has been completed normally, Yes Yes
and then the paper has run out.
8 COVER OPEN ‘ A feed or an issue was attempted Yes Yes
with the print head opened (except
the [PAUSE] key).
9 HEAD ERROR ‘ A broken element has been found on Yes Yes
the thermal head.
10 EXCESS HEAD TEMP ‘ The print head temperature has No Yes
exceeded 71 °C.
11 SAVING #### &&&& { In writable character or PC command - Yes
save mode
12 FORMAT ERROR ‘ An erase error has occurred in No Yes
formatting the flash ROM on the CPU
board.
13 FLASH WRITE ERR. ‘ An error has occurred in writing data No Yes
into the flash memory.
14 FLASH MEM FULL ‘ Saving failed because of insufficient No Yes
space in the flash memory.
15 EEPROM ERROR ‘ A back-up EEPROM cannot be No No
read/written properly.
16 LOW BATTERY … The battery voltage has dropped to No Yes
7.2V or less for B-EP2DL, or 14V or
less for B-EP4DL.
17 AMBIENT TEMP ERR ‘ An ambient temperature has dropped Yes Yes
to -20 °C or lower, or exceeded 60
°C.
18 BATT. TEMP ERROR ‘ The battery may be heated and hurt No Yes
operators.
Please be careful not to get burned.
19 HIGH VOLT. ERROR ‘ The battery may be heated and hurt No Yes
operators.

11-14
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

LED Restoration Acceptance

LCD Messages of Indication
by the of Status
[PAUSE] Request and
No. Upper line Printer Status key Reset
(English) STATUS Yes/No Commands
Yes/No

20 SYSTEM ERROR -- ‘ System error No No

(a) A command has been fetched
from an odd address.
(b) Word data has been accessed
from a place other than the
boundary of the word data.
(c) Long word data has been
accessed from a place other
than the boundary of the long
word data.
(d) The logical area ranging from
80000000H to FFFFFFFFH has
been accessed in user mode.
(e) An undefined command in a
place other than the delay slot
has been decoded.
(f) An undefined command in the
delay slot has been decoded.
(g) A command which rewrites the
data in the delay slot has been
decoded.
21 WAITING (BATT.) { The battery protection function is - Yes
active.
22 WAITING (HEAD) { The print head protection function is - Yes
active.
23 WAITING (MOTOR) { The motor protection function is - Yes
active.
24 BT INIT ERROR { The initialization of Bluetooth failed. No Yes
25 BT SETTING ERROR { There is an error in the Bluetooth No Yes
setting.
26 CHARGE ERROR $ ‘ An error occurred while the battery No Yes
was recharged.
Ir PACKET ERROR ‘ A block number error occurred in
27 Yes Yes
the TEC protocol.
28 Display of error ‘ A command error has been found in Yes Yes
command analyzing the command.
(See NOTE 1.)
* When the compatible mode for the B-SP series is enabled, No.11 SAVING #### &&&& displays
"ON LINE."

11-15
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

NOTE 1: When a command error has been found in the sent command, 16-byte command code of the
erroneous command is displayed on the LCD. (However, [LF] and [NUL] are not displayed.)
[Example 1] [ESC] PC001; 0A00, 0300, 2, 2, A, 00, B [LF] [NUL]
Command error
LCD display PC001;0A00,0300,

[Example 2] [ESC] T02A G30 [LF] [NUL]

Command error
LCD display T20A30

[Example 3] [ESC] XR; 0200, 0300, 0450, 1200, 1 [LF] [NUL]

Command error
LCD display XR;0200,0300,045

NOTE 2: When the command error is displayed, “? (3FH)” is displayed for codes other than 20H to 7FH
and A0H to DFH.
NOTE 3: ‘: Blinking (red)
…: ON (red)
{: ON (green or orange)
: Blinking (green)
z: Dimmed
****: Remaining number of labels to be printed 0001 to 9999 (in units of 1 label/tag)
####: Remaining memory capacity of PC save area in the flash memory:
0 to 3,200 (in K bytes)
&&&&: Remaining memory capacity of writable character / basic files / forms / graphics storage area
in the flash memory
0 to 3,200 (in K bytes)
- -: System error No.: 00 to 21
* Please refer to the next section for further information regarding system error No.
$: Charging error No.: 1 to 5

11.13 LIST OF CHARING ERROR NO. AND DETAILS

No. Description Cause
Battery ID error It is detected that no battery is loaded or that an
1
inappropriate battery is loaded.
Abnormal battery temperature 8.7V or over for B-EP2DL
2
17.4 V or over for B-EP4DL
Abnormal current (during 1.2A or over for B-EP2DL
3
trickle charging) 2.0A or over for B-EP4DL
Trickle charging timeout Transition to normal charging does not take place after trickle
4
charging for 90 minutes.
Abnormal current (during 1.2A or over for B-EP2DL
5
normal charging) 2.0A or over for B-EP4DL

11-16
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

11.14 LCD MESSAGES IN DIFFERENT LANGUAGES

No. ENGLISH No. GERMAN No. FRENCH
1 ON LINE 1 ON LINE 1 PRETE
2 COVER OPEN 2 DECKEL OFFEN 2 ERR. CAPOT
3 PAUSE **** 3 PAUSE **** 3 PAUSE ****
4 COMMS ERROR 4 UEBERTR.-FEHLER 4 ERR. COMMUNICAT.
5 PAPER JAM **** 5 PAPIERSTAU **** 5 PB. PAPIER ****
6 NO PAPER **** 6 PAPIERENDE **** 6 FIN PAPIER ****
7 NO PAPER 7 PAPIERENDE 7 FIN PAPIER
8 COVER OPEN **** 8 DECKEL OFFEN**** 8 ERR. CAPOT ****
9 HEAD ERROR 9 KOPF DEFEKT 9 ERREUR TETE
10 EXCESS HEAD TEMP 10 KOPF UEBERHITZT 10 TETE TROP CHAUDE
11 SAVING #### &&&& 11 SP.-MOD#### &&&& 11 MEM LIB#### &&&&
12 FORMAT ERROR 12 FORMATFEHLER 12 ERREUR DE FORMAT
13 FLASH WRITE ERR. 13 FLASH FEHLER 13 ERREUR MEM FLASH
14 FLASH MEM FULL 14 FLASH ZU KLEIN 14 MEM INSUFFISANTE
15 EEPROM ERROR 15 EEPROM FEHLER 15 ERREUR EEPROM
16 LOW BATTERY 16 BATTERY SCHWACH 16 BATTERIE FAIBLE
17 AMBIENT TEMP ERR 17 TEMP. FEHLER 17 ERR.TEMP.EXTER.
18 BATT. TEMP ERROR 18 BATT.TEMP.FEHLER 18 ERR.TEMP.BATT.
19 HIGH VOLT. ERROR 19 HIGH VOLT.FEHLER 19 HIGH VOLT. ERROR
20 SYSTEM ERROR -- 20 SYSTEM FEHLER -- 20 ERR. SYSTEME --
21 WAITING (BATT.) 21 WAITING (BATT.) 21 ATTENTE (BATT.)
22 WAITING (HEAD) 22 WAITING (HEAD) 22 ATTENTE (TETE)
23 WAITING (MOTOR) 23 WAITING (MOTOR) 23 ATTENTE (MOT.)
24 BT INIT ERROR 24 BT INIT ERROR 24 ERR. INIT BT
25 BT SETTING ERROR 25 BT SETTING ERROR 25 ERR. CONF BT
26 CHARGE ERROR $ 26 BATT.LADEFEHLER$ 26 ERREUR CHARGE $
27 Ir PACKET ERROR 27 Ir PACKET ERROR 27 Ir PACKET ERROR
28 LBL PRESENT **** 28 LBL ABNEHMEN**** 28 MEDIA DISPO ****

11-17
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

No. DUTCH No. SPANISH No. ITALIAN

1 IN LIJN 1 ON LINE 1 PRONTA
2 DEKSEL OPEN 2 TAPA ABIERTA 2 TESTA APERTA
3 PAUZE **** 3 PAUSA **** 3 PAUSA ****
4 COMM. FOUT 4 ERROR COMUNICACI 4 ERR. COMUNICAZ.
5 PAPIER VAST **** 5 ATASCO PAPEL**** 5 CARTA INCEP.****
6 PAPIER OP **** 6 SIN PAPEL **** 6 NO CARTA ****
7 PAPIER OP 7 SIN PAPEL 7 NO CARTA
8 DEKSEL OPEN **** 8 TAPA ABIERTA**** 8 APERTA TESTA****
9 PRINTKOP DEFECT 9 ERROR DE CABEZAL 9 ERRORE TESTINA
10 TEMP. FOUT 10 TEMP.CABEZA ALTA 10 TEMP TESTA ALTA
11 MEM #### &&&& 11 SALVAR #### &&&& 11 SALVA #### &&&&
12 FORMAAT FOUT 12 ERROR DE FORMATO 12 ERR. FORMATTAZ
13 FLASH MEM FOUT 13 ERROR ESCRITURA 13 ERR.SCRITT.CARD
14 GEHEUGEN VOL 14 MEMORIA INSUFICI 14 MEM. CARD PIENA
15 EEPROM ERROR 15 EEPROM ERROR 15 EEPROM ERROR
16 LAGE BATTERIJ 16 BATERIA BAJA 16 LOW BATTERY
17 OMGEVNG TMP FOUT 17 TEMP.AMBIEN.ALTA 17 AMBIENT TEMP ERR
18 FOUT BATT. TEMP 18 ERR.TEMP.BATERIA 18 BATT. TEMP ERROR
19 HIGH VOLT. ERROR 19 ERR.VOLT.BATERIA 19 ERRORE VOLT BATT
20 SYSTEEM FOUT -- 20 ERR DE SISTEMA-- 20 ERR. SISTEMA --
21 Wachten (BATT.) 21 ESPERA: BATERIA 21 ATTESA (BATT.)
22 Wachten (HEAD) 22 ESPERA: CABEZAL 22 ATT. TESTA CALDA
23 Wachten (MOTOR) 23 ESPERA: MOTOR 23 ATT.MOTORE CALDO
24 BT INIT ERROR 24 ERR.INICIALIZ.BT 24 ERR. INIZ. B.T.
25 BT SETTING ERROR 25 ERROR CONFIG. BT 25 ERR.CONFIG. B.T.
26 OPLAADFOUT $ 26 ERROR DE CARGA $ 26 ERR.CARICANTO $
27 Ir PACKET ERROR 27 Ir PACKET ERROR 27 Ir PACKET ERROR
28 ETIKET KLAAR**** 28 ETQT PRESENT**** 28 ETICH.PRONTA****

11-18
 CHAPTER 11 OTHER FUNCTIONS
B-EP Series

No. JAPANESE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
* The Japanese messages are omitted here.

11-19
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12. CHARACTER CODE TABLE

12.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter provides the character code tables.

12.2 CHARACTER CODE

The printable characters are slightly different according to the character type, because the fonts,
which have been installed on the printer, are not described in the table.
12.2.1 UTF-8 CHARACTER CODE

Characters to be printed are shown below when UTF-8 is selected as a character code and its code
is entered.
* In the following code list, the high bytes are plotted along the vertical coordinate while the low
bytes are plotted along the horizontal coordinate.
When the horizontal coordinate requires 1, 3 and 5 digits, characters are represented in one, two
and three bytes respectively.
e.g. In the following list, the character for 0xE282A1 represents “A” based on 4 of the vertical
coordinate and 1 of the horizontal coordinate.
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
E2809 ! “ # $ % & ‘ ( ) * + , - . /
E281B 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
E282A @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
E2889 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _

12-1
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.3 TIMES ROMAN, HELVETICA, LETTER GOTHIC, PRESTIGE ELITE, COURIER,

GOTHIC725 Black (Bit map font type: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, J, K, L, N, O, P, Q, R, o, q)

(1) PC-850

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C ð Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í Ð ß ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô =
3 # 3 C S c s â Ô ú Ë Ò ¾
4 $ 4 D T d t ä Ö ñ È õ ¶
5 % 5 E U e u à Ò Ñ Á x Õ §
6 & 6 F V f v å Û x  ã Í µ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù x À Ã Î þ ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ © Ï Þ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û •
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ý ³
D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ Ý ²
¯
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « ¥ Ì g
F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ¤ ´
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C α ≡
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í β ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó Γ ≥
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú π ≤
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ Σ 
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ σ 
6 & 6 F V f v å û x µ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù x τ ≈
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ Φ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö x Θ •
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Ω •
B + ; K [ k { ï ¢ ½ δ √
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ∞ n

D – = M ] m } ì ¥ ¡ ∅ 2

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä Pt « ε g
F / ? O _ o Å ƒ » ∩
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-2
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü í Ð ß
2 ” 2 B R b r é ó Ô
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u Á §
6 & 6 F V f v Â Í ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç Î ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö Ú ¨
A * : J Z j z Ü ¬ •
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | î ý
D – = M ] m } Ý
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä × « g
F / ? O _ o » ¤
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(4) PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C º Ó -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í ª ß ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó Ê Ô
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú Ë Ò ¾
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ È õ ¶
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ Á Õ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û Â ã Í µ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù À Ã Î ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ¿ © Ï × °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ® Ú ¨
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Û •
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½ Ù ¹
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ì ³
D – = M ] m } Ø ¡ ¢ ¦ ÿ ²
¯
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « ¥ Ì g
F / ? O _ o Å » ¤ ´
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-3
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(5) PC-851

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é
3 # 3 C S c s â ô
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u à §
6 & 6 F V f v û
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù ¸
8 ( 8 H X h x ê °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö ¨
A * : J Z j z è Ü
B + ; K [ k { Ï ½
C , < L \ l | î £
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « g
F / ? O _ o »
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(6) PC-855

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D – = M ] m } §
E . > N ^ n ~ « g
F / ? O _ o » ¤
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-4
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(7) PC-1250

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ± Á á
2 ” 2 B R b r  â
3 # 3 C S c s Ó ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Ö ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ¨ ¸
9 ) 9 I Y i y © É é
A * : J Z j z Ú ú
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë ë
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ü ü
D – = M ] m } Í Ý í ý
E . > N ^ n ~ ® Î î
F / ? O _ o ß
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(8) PC-1251

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y ©
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~ ®
F / ? O _ o
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-5
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(9) PC-1252

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C À Ð à ð
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } ½ Í Ý í ý
E . > N ^ n ~ ® ¾ Î Þ î þ
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(10) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 " 2 B R b r ²
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x ¨
9 ) 9 I Y i y ©
A * : J Z j z ª
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬
D – = M ] m } ½
E . > N ^ n ~ ®
F / ? O _ o
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-6
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(11) PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C À à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ ¨ ¸ È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ì Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } ½ Í í ¹
E . > N ^ n ~ ® ¾ Î î
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(12) PC-1257

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ±
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ²
3 # 3 C S c s £ ³ Ó ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ ´ Ä ä
5 % 5 E U e u µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¦ ¶ Ö ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · × ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x Ø ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É é
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ü
D – = M ] m } ¨ - ½
E . > N ^ n ~ ® ¾
F / ? O _ o ¸ Æ æ ß
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-7
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(13) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C À Ð à ð
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ ± Á Ñ á ñ
2 ” 2 B R b r ¢ ² Â Ò â ò
3 # 3 C S c s £ ³ Ã Ó ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t C Ä Ô ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å Õ å õ
6 & 6 F V f v ¶ Æ Ö æ ö
7 ’ 7 G W g w § · Ç × ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x È Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y © ¹ É Ù é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º Ê Ú ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » Ë Û ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ì Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } Í Ý í ý
E . > N ^ n ~ ® Î Þ î þ
F / ? O _ o ¿ Ï ß ï ÿ
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(14) Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-8
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(15) UTF-8
(15.1) Bit map font type: A, B, D, F, K, O, Q or R
* For the font type O, ¦, ©, ¬, ®, ², ³, µ, ¶, ¹, ¾, Pt and ⌐ are not printed.

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 ! “ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
C28
C29
a
C2A ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ © « ¬ - ® ¯
o
C2B ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ • ¸ ¹ » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
C38 À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
C39 Ð Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Ý Þ ß
C3A à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
C3B ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ
C48
C49 Ð
C4A
C4B ı
C68 Ð
C69 ƒ
C6A Σ
C6B
C98
C99
C9A
C9B φ
CA8
CA9
CAA
CAB ´

12-9
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
CB8 ^ ´
CB9 . ° ¸ ~
CBA
CBB
CC8 ´ ~ ¯ ¯ . ¨ °
CC9
CCA ¸
CCB
CE8
CE9 Γ Θ
CEA Σ Φ Ω
CEB α β δ ε µ
CF8 π σ τ φ
CF9
CFA
CFB
E2809 =
E281B η
E282A Pt
E2889 • √ ∞
E288A ∩
E2898 ≈
E289A ≡ ≤ ≥
E28C9
E28CA ⌠ ⌡
E296A ■
E5808

12-10
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(15.2) Bit map font type: C, E, G, H, I, J, L, N, P, o or q

* For the font types G, N and P, ¦, ©, ¬, ®, ², ³, µ, ¶, ¹, ¾, ÷, ∑ and φ are not printed.
* For the font types H, I, J and L, ∑ and φ are not be printed.
* For the font types o and q, , ∑ and φ are not be printed but 0xCEB2(β) is printed.

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 ! “ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
C28
C29
a
C2A ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ ¦ § ¨ © « ¬ - ® ¯
o
C2B ° ± ² ³ ´ µ ¶ • ¸ ¹ » ¼ ½ ¾ ¿
C38 À Á Â Ã Ä Å Æ Ç È É Ê Ë Ì Í Î Ï
C39 Ð Ñ Ò Ó Ô Õ Ö × Ø Ù Ú Û Ü Ý Þ ß
C3A à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
C3B ð ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ý þ ÿ
C48
C49 Ð
C4A
C4B ı
C68 Ð
C69 ƒ
C6A Σ
C6B
C98
C99
C9A
C9B φ

12-11
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
CA8
CA9
CAA
CAB ´
CB8 ^ ´
CB9 . ° ¸ ~
CBA
CBB
CC8 ´ ~ ¯ ¯ . ¨ °
CC9
CCA ¸
CCB
CE8
CE9
CEA
CEB µ
E2809 =
E281B
E282A
E2889
E28CA
E296A ■
E5808

12-12
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.4 PRESENTATION (Bit map font type: M)

(1) PC-850, PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C -
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y

A * : J Z J Z

B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~ ¥
F / ? O _ O

When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y

A * : J Z J Z

B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M } ¥
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O

When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSETM mode.

12-13
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C -
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y

A * : J Z J Z

B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O

When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U

6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y

A * : J Z J Z

B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O █
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-14
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(5) PC-1252, PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U ¥
6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X ^ ˜
9 ) 9 I Y I Y

A * : J Z J Z

B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O █
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(6) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C -
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T

5 % 5 E U E U ¥
6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y

A * : J Z J Z

B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O █
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-15
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(7) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` P C
1 ! 1 A Q A Q

2 " 2 B R B R

3 # 3 C S C S

4 $ 4 D T D T C
5 % 5 E U E U ¥
6 & 6 F V F V

7 ' 7 G W G W

8 ( 8 H X H X

9 ) 9 I Y I Y

A * : J Z J Z

B + ; K [ K {
C , < L \ L |
D – = M ] M }
E . > N ^ N ~
F / ? O _ O █

(8) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 ! “ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
C28
C29
C2A ¢ ¥ -
C2B
CB8 ^
CB9 ~
CBA
CBB
CC8 ~
CC9
CCA
CCB
E2809
E281B
E282A
E2889

12-16
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.5 OCR-A (Bit map font type: S)

(1) PC-850, PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N ¥
F / O
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M ¥
E . > N
F / O
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

12-17
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

12-18
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(5) PC-1252, PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U ¥
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X ^ ˜
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

(6) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P -
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U ¥
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

12-19
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(7) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 " 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 5 E U ¥
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

(8) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 “ $ + - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < >
4 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
6
7
C28
C29
C2A ¥ -
C2B

12-20
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.6 OCR-B (Bit map font type: T)

(1) PC-850, PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0 -
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N ¥
F / O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

(2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M ¥
E . > N
F / O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

12-21
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0 -
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

(4) PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251, PC-1257, Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

12-22
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(5) PC-1252, PC-1254, LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5 ¥
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8 ˜
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

(6) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 P 0
1 1 A Q 1
2 " 2 B R 2
3 3 C S 3
4 $ 4 D T 4
5 5 E U 5 ¥
6 6 F V 6
7 7 G W 7
8 8 H X 8
9 9 I Y 9
A J Z
B + K
C < L
D - M
E . > N
F / O
The size of the numerals of codes 80h ~ 89h are reduced to 80%.
When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode, code 5CH indicates “¥.”

12-23
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(7) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 “ $ + - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 < >
4 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z
6
7
C28
C29
C2A ¥ -
C2B

12-24
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.7 STANDARD CHARACTER (in Japan)/KANJI (16 x 16) (in Japan)/

KANJI (24 x 24)(in Japan) (Bit map font type: A, U, V)

(1) Other than UTF-8 (PC-850, PC-852, PC-857, PC-8, PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251,
PC-1252, PC-1253, PC-1254, PC-1257, LATIN9, Arabic, PC-866)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L ¥ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o

* The shaded parts are Japanese.

They are omitted here.

12-25
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
UTF-8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 ! “ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
C28
C29
C2A ¥ -
C2B
C38
C39 Ñ
C3A
C3B ñ
C48
C49 Ð
C4A
C4B ı
CB8 ^
CB9 ~
CBA
CBB
CC8 ~
CC9
CCA
CCB
E2809
E281B
E282A
E2889
EFBDA
EFBDB
EFBE8
EFBE9
* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here.

12-26
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.8 STANDARD CHARACTER (outside Japan) (Bit map font type: a)

(1) Other than UTF-8 (PC-850, PC-852, PC-857, PC-8, PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251,
PC-1252, PC-1253, PC-1254, PC-1257, LATIN9, Arabic, PC-866)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o ¥

* The shaded parts are Japanese.

They are omitted here.
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-27
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
UTF-8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 ! “ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
C28
C29
C2A ¥ -
C2B
C38
C39 Ñ
C3A
C3B ñ
C48
C49 Ð
C4A
C4B ı
CB8 ^
CB9 ~
CBA
CBB
CC8 ~
CC9
CCA
CCB
E2809
E281B
E282A
E2889
EFBDA
EFBDB
EFBE8
EFBE9
* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here.

12-28
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.9 CHINESE CHARACTER (24 x 24) (outside Japan) (Bit map font type: r)

(1) Other than UTF-8 (PC-850, PC-852, PC-857, PC-8, PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251,
PC-1252, PC-1253, PC-1254, PC-1257, LATIN9, Arabic, PC-866)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o ¥

12-29
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
UTF-8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 ! “ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
C28
C29
C2A ¥ -
C2B
C38
C39 Ñ
C3A
C3B ñ
C48
C49 Ð
C4A
C4B ı
CB8 ^
CB9 ~
CBA
CBB
CC8 ~
CC9
CCA
CCB
E2809
E281B
E282A
E2889
EFBDA
EFBDB
EFBE8
EFBE9
* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here.

12-30
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.10 KOREAN CHARACTER (24 x 24) (outside Japan) (Bit map font type: s)

(1) Other than UTF-8 (PC-850, PC-852, PC-857, PC-8, PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251,
PC-1252, PC-1253, PC-1254, PC-1257, LATIN9, Arabic, PC-866)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o ¥

12-31
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
UTF-8
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 ! “ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~
C28
C29
C2A ¥ -
C2B
C38
C39 Ñ
C3A
C3B ñ
C48
C49 Ð
C4A
C4B ı
CB8 ^
CB9 ~
CBA
CBB
CC8 ~
CC9
CCA
CCB
E2809
E281B
E282A
E2889
EFBDA
EFBDB
EFBE8
EFBE9
* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here.

12-32
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.11 BOLD CHARACTER (Bit map font type: b)

(1) Other than UTF-8 (PC-850, PC-852, PC-857, PC-8, PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251,
PC-1252, PC-1253, PC-1254, PC-1257, LATIN9, Arabic, PC-866)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 -
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A
B
C
D -
E
F

(2) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 -
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4
5
6
7
C28
C29
C2A -
C2B

12-33
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.12 PRICE CHARACTER 1/PRICE CHARACTER 2 (Bit map font type: d, e)

(1) Other than UTF-8 (PC-850, PC-852, PC-857, PC-8, PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251,
PC-1252, PC-1253, PC-1254, PC-1257, LATIN9, Arabic, PC-866)

2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 -
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 $ 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A
B
C , ¥
D -
E . ¥
F
* Code 5CH for “¥” indicates “ “ in the international setting.

(2) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 $ , - .
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4
5
6
7
C28
C29
C2A ¥ -
C2B
E5868 円

12-34
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.13 TEC OUTLINE FONT 1 (Outline font type: A, B, K)

(1) When any Japanese message is selected in the SYSTEM mode:

(1.1) PC-850, PC-8, PC-852, PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 ” 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ’ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L ¥ l |
D - = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o ∆
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.

(2) When any message other than Japanese is selected in the SYSTEM mode:
(2.1) PC-850

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í C ß ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ õ
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª ã µ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù º
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ •
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼
D – = M ] m } ì Ø ¡ ¢ ²
E . > N ˆ n ~ Ä « ¥ g
F / ? O _ o ∆ Å ƒ » ¤
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-35
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2.2) PC-8

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C α ≡
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í C β ±
2 " 2 B R b r é Æ ó Γ ≥
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú π ≤
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ Σ 
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ σ 
6 & 6 F V f v å û ª µ ÷
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù º τ ≈
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ÿ ¿ Φ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö Θ •
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ Ω •
B + ; K [ k { ï ¢ ½ δ √
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ∞ x
D – = M ] m } ì ¥ ¡ ∅ 2

E . > N ^ n ~ Ä Pt « ε g
F / ? O _ o ∆ Å ƒ » ∩
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(2.3) PC-852

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü í C ß
2 ” 2 B R b r é ó
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u §
6 & 6 F V f v ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç
8 ( 8 H X h x °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z Ü ¬ •
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l | î
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ˆ n ~ Ä « g
F / ? O _ o ∆ » ¤
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-36
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2.4) PC-857

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç É á C º -
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü æ í C ª ß ±
2 ” 2 B R b r é Æ ó
3 # 3 C S c s â ô ú
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö ñ õ
5 % 5 E U e u à ò Ñ §
6 & 6 F V f v å û ã µ ÷
7 ’ 7 G W g w ç ù
8 ( 8 H X h x ê ¿ °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z è Ü ¬ •
B + ; K [ k { ï ø ½
C , < L \ l | î £ ¼ ì
D – = M ] m } Ø ¡ ¢ ÿ ²
E . > N ˆ n ~ Ä « ¥ g
F / ? O _ o Å » ¤
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(2.5) PC-851

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p Ç C
1 ! 1 A Q a q ü C ±
2 " 2 B R b r é
3 # 3 C S c s â ô
4 $ 4 D T d t ä ö
5 % 5 E U e u à §
6 & 6 F V f v û
7 ' 7 G W g w ç ù
8 ( 8 H X h x ê °
9 ) 9 I Y i y ë Ö
A * : J Z j z è Ü
B + ; K [ k { Ï ½
C , < L \ l | î £
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~ Ä « g
F / ? O _ o ∆ »
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-37
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2.6) PC-855

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D – = M ] m } §
E . > N ^ n ~ « g
F / ? O _ o ∆ » ¤
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(2.7) PC-1250

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C á
2 " 2 B R b r â
3 # 3 C S c s ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v Ö ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é
A * : J Z j z ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ü ü
D – = M ] m } Í
E . > N ^ n ~ Î
F / ? O _ o ∆ ß
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-38
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2.8) PC-1251

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u µ
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o ∆
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(2.9) PC-1252

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ C Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y é ù
A * : J Z j z ª ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } ½ í
E . > N ^ n ~ î
F / ? O _ o ∆ ¿ ß ï ÿ
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-39
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2.10) PC-1253

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r ²
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w § ·
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z ª
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬
D – = M ] m } ½
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o ∆
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(2.11) PC-1254

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ C Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² â ò
3 # 3 C S c s ƒ £ ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x ^ ˜ Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } ½ í
E . > N ^ n ~ î
F / ? O _ o ¿ ß Ï ÿ
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-40
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2.12) PC-1257

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ²
3 # 3 C S c s £ ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä
5 % 5 E U e u µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Ö ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x Ø ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k { « »
C , < L \ l | ¬ ¼ Ü ü
D – = M ] m } ½
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o ∆ Æ æ ß
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

(2.13) LATIN9

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C à
1 ! 1 A Q a q ¡ C Ñ á ñ
2 " 2 B R b r ¢ ² â ò
3 # 3 C S c s £ ã ó
4 $ 4 D T d t ¤ Ä ä ô
5 % 5 E U e u ¥ µ Å å õ
6 & 6 F V f v Æ Ö æ ö
7 ' 7 G W g w § · Ç ç ÷
8 ( 8 H X h x Ø è ø
9 ) 9 I Y i y É é ù
A * : J Z j z ª º ê ú
B + ; K [ k { « » ë û
C , < L \ l | ¬ Ü ì ü
D – = M ] m } í
E . > N ^ n ~ î
F / ? O _ o ¿ ß Ï ÿ
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-41
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(2.14) Arabic

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 @ P ` p C
1 ! 1 A Q a q C
2 " 2 B R b r
3 # 3 C S c s
4 $ 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ' 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K [ k {
C , < L \ l |
D – = M ] m }
E . > N ^ n ~
F / ? O _ o ∆
The Euro code (B0H) can be changed in the parameter setting in the SYSTEM mode.

12-42
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

(3) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 ! “ # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 : ; < = > ?
4 @ A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O
5 P Q R S T U V W X Y Z [ \ ] ^ _
6 ‘ a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o
7 p q r s t u v w x y z { | } ~ ∆
C280
C290
a
C2A0 ¡ ¢ £ ¤ ¥ § « ¬ -
o
C2B0 ° ± ² µ • » ¼ ½ ¿
C380 Ä Å Æ Ç É
C390 Ñ Ö Ø Ü ß
C3A0 à á â ã ä å æ ç è é ê ë ì í î ï
C3B0 ñ ò ó ô õ ö ÷ ø ù ú û ü ÿ
C680
C690 ƒ
C6A0 Σ
C6B0
C980
C990
C9A0
C9B0 φ
CB80 ˆ
CB90 ˙ • ˜
CBA0
CBB0
CC80 ̃ ˙ •
CC90
CCA0
CCB0

12-43
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
CE80
CE90 Γ Θ
CEA0 Σ Φ Ω
CEB0 α β δ ε µ
CF80 π σ τ φ
CF90
CFA0
CFB0
E2809
n
E281B
E282A Pt
■
E2889 √ ∞
E288A ∩
E2898 ≈
E289A ≡ ≤ ≥
E28C9
E28CA ⌠ ⌡
E296A ■
E5868
EFBDA
EFBDB
EFBE8
EFBE9
* The shaded parts are Japanese. They are omitted here.

12-44
 CHAPTER 12 CHARACTER CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

12.14 PRICE FONT 1, 2, 3 (Outline font type: E, F, G)

(1) Other than UTF-8 (PC-850, PC-852, PC-857, PC-8, PC-851, PC-855, PC-1250, PC-1251,
PC-1252, PC-1253, PC-1254, PC-1257, LATIN9, Arabic, PC-866)

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 0 -
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 $ 4
5 % 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A
B
C , ¥
D –
E . ~
F /

(2) UTF-8

10 11 12 13 14 15
0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0
1
2 $ % , - . /
3 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9
4
5 ¥
6
7 ~
E5868

12-45
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16. BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE

16.1 GENERAL DESCRIPTION

This chapter provides the barcode/two-dimensional code tables. Note that some barcodes/two-
dimensional codes are not supported depending on the print mode.

16-1
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.2 JAN8/EAN8, JAN13/EAN13, UPC-E, UPC-A, UCC/EAN128, EAN128, Interleaved

2 of 5 (ITF), MSI, Industrial 2 of 5, RSS-14, RSS-14 Stacked, RSS-14 Stacked
Omni-directional, RSS Limited, EAN13 + 2 digits, EAN13 + 5 digits, UPC-E + 2
digits, UPC-E + 5 digits, EAN8 + 2 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits, UPC-A + 2 digits,
UPC-A + 5 digits

WPC (JAN, EAN, UPC)

ITF/MSI/UCC, EAN128

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A
B
C
D
E
F

16-2
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.3 CUSTOMER BARCODE

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A J Z
B K
C L
D – M
E N
F O

16-3
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.4 POSTNET

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0
1 1
2 2
3 3
4 4
5 5
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A
B
C
D
E
F

16.5 RM4SCC

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 4 D T
5 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 ( 8 H X
9 ) 9 I Y
A J Z
B K
C L
D M
E N
F O

16-4
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.6 KIX CODE

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 0 P p
1 1 A Q a q
2 2 B R b r
3 3 C S c s
4 4 D T d t
5 5 E U e u
6 6 F V f v
7 7 G W g w
8 8 H X h x
9 9 I Y i y
A J Z j z
B K k
C L l
D M m
E N n
F O o

NOTE: “(“,”)” in the above table is used only as the start/stop codes. It should not be included in
the middle of data. In this case, a barcode is not drawn.

16-5
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.7 CODE39 (Standard)

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0 P
1 1 A Q
2 2 B R
3 3 C S
4 $ 4 D T
5 % 5 E U
6 6 F V
7 7 G W
8 8 H X
9 9 I Y
A * J Z
B + K
C L
D – M
E . N
F / O

16-6
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.8 CODE39 (Full ASCII)

[Transfer code] [Drawing code]

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0 @ P ` p 0 SP 0 %V P %W +P
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1 /A 1 A Q +A +Q
2 “ 2 B R b r 2 /B 2 B R +B +R
3 # 3 C S c s 3 /C 3 C S +C +S
4 $ 4 D T d t 4 /D 4 D T +D +T
5 % 5 E U e u 5 /E 5 E U +E +U
6 & 6 F V f v 6 /F 6 F V +F +V
7 ' 7 G W g w 7 /G 7 G W +G +W
8 ( 8 H X h x 8 /H 8 H X +H +X
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9 /I 9 I Y +I +Y
A * : J Z j z A /J /Z J Z +J +Z
B + ; K [ k { B /K %F K %K +K %P
C , < L ¥ l | C /L %G L %L +L %Q
D – = M ] m } D – %H M %M +M %R
E . > N ^ n ~ E . %I N %N +N %S
F / ? O _ o ∆ F /O %J O %O +O %T

16-7
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.9 NW-7

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0 `
1 1 A a
2 2 B b
3 3 C c
4 $ 4 D d t
5 5 e
6 6
7 7
8 8
9 9
A * :
B +
C
D –
E . n
F /

16-8
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.10 CODE93

[Transfer code] [Drawing code]

2 3 4 5 6 7 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0 @ P ` p 0 SP 0 %V P %W +P
1 ! 1 A Q a q 1 /A 1 A Q +A +Q
2 “ 2 B R b r 2 /B 2 B R +B +R
3 # 3 C S c s 3 /C 3 C S +C +S
4 $ 4 D T d t 4 /D 4 D T +D +T
5 % 5 E U e u 5 /E 5 E U +E +U
6 & 6 F V f v 6 /F 6 F V +F +V
7 ' 7 G W g w 7 /G 7 G W +G +W
8 ( 8 H X h x 8 /H 8 H X +H +X
9 ) 9 I Y i y 9 /I 9 I Y +I +Y
A * : J Z j z A /J /Z J Z +J +Z
B + ; K [ k { B + %F K %K +K %P
C , < L ¥ l | C /L %G L %L +L %Q
D – = M ] m } D – %H M %M +M %R
E . > N ^ n ~ E . %I N %N +N %S
F / ? O _ o ∆ F / %J O %O +O %T

16-9
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.11 CODE128

16.11.1 TRANSFER CODE

– – 2 3 4 5 6 7
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 " 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v [Drawing code]
7 BEL ETB ' 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x Value Code Table
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o ∆

16.11.2 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE CONTROL CODE DATA

NUL (00H) → > @ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → > A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → > B (3EH, 42H)
Ú
GS (1DH) → > ] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → > _ (3EH, 5FH)

16.11.3 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE SPECIAL CODES

Value
30 (Character >) → >0
95 → >1
96 → >2
97 → >3
98 → >4
99 → >5
100 → >6
101 → >7
102 → >8

16.11.4 DESIGNATION OF START CODE

START (CODE A) → >7
START (CODE B) → >6
START (CODE C) → >5

16-10
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.11.5 VALUE CODE TABLE

VALUE CODE CODE CODE VALUE CODE CODE CODE VALUE CODE CODE CODE
A B C A B C A B C
0 SP SP 00 36 D D 36 72 BS h 72
1 ! ! 01 37 E E 37 73 HT i 73
2 " " 02 38 F F 38 74 LF j 74
3 # # 03 39 G G 39 75 VT k 75
4 $ $ 04 40 H H 40 76 FF l 76
5 % % 05 41 I I 41 77 CR m 77
6 & & 06 42 J J 42 78 SO n 78
7 ' ' 07 43 K K 43 79 SI o 79
8 ( ( 08 44 L L 44 80 DLE p 80
9 ) ) 09 45 M M 45 81 DC1 q 81
10 * * 10 46 N N 46 82 DC2 r 82
11 + + 11 47 O O 47 83 DC3 s 83
12 , , 12 48 P P 48 84 DC4 t 84
13 – – 13 49 Q Q 49 85 NAK u 85
14 . . 14 50 R R 50 86 SYN v 86
15 / / 15 51 S S 51 87 ETB w 87
16 0 0 16 52 T T 52 88 CAN x 88
17 1 1 17 53 U U 53 89 EM y 89
18 2 2 18 54 V V 54 90 SUB z 90
19 3 3 19 55 W W 55 91 ESC { 91
20 4 4 20 56 X X 56 92 FS | 92
21 5 5 21 57 Y Y 57 93 GS } 93
22 6 6 22 58 Z Z 58 94 RS ~ 94
23 7 7 23 59 [ [ 59 95 US DEL 95
24 8 8 24 60 \ \ 60 96 FNC3 FNC3 96
25 9 9 25 61 ] ] 61 97 FNC2 FNC2 97
26 : : 26 62 ^ ^ 62 98 SHIFT SHIFT 98
27 ; ; 27 63 _ _ 63 99 CODE C CODE C 99
28 < < 28 64 NUL ` 64 100 CODE B FNC4 CODE B
29 = = 29 65 SOH a 65 101 FNC4 CODE A CODE A
30 > > 30 66 STX b 66 102 FNC1 FNC1 FNC1
31 ? ? 31 67 ETX c 67
32 @ @ 32 68 EOT d 68 103 START CODE A
33 A A 33 69 ENQ e 69 104 START CODE B
34 B B 34 70 ACK f 70 105 START CODE C
35 C C 35 71 BEL g 71

16-11
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.11.6 RSS EXPANDED, RSS EXPANDED STACKED

[Transfer code]

2 3 4 5 6 7
0 SP 0 P p
1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 “ 2 B R b r
3 FNC1 3 C S c s
4 4 D T d t
5 % 5 E U e u
6 & 6 F V f v
7 ‘ 7 G W g w
8 ( 8 H X h x
9 ) 9 I Y i y
A * : J Z j z
B + ; K k
C , < L l
D – = M m
E . > N n
F / ? O _ o

16-12
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.12 DATA MATRIX

16.12.1 FORMAT ID
The code to be used is designated using the format ID.

Format ID Code Details

1 Numerics 0 to 9 space
2 Letters A to Z space
3 Alphanumerics, symbols 0 to 9 A to Z space . , - /
4 Alphanumerics 0 to 9 A to Z space
5 ASCII (7-bit) 00H to 7FH
6 ISO (8-bit) 00H to FFH (Kanji)

16.12.2 TRANSFER CODE

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o

16.12.3 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE CONTROL CODE DATA

NUL (00H) → > @ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → > A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → > B (3EH, 42H)
Ú
GS (1DH) → > ] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → > _ (3EH, 5FH)

16.12.4 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE SPECIAL CODES

> (3EH) → > 0 (3EH, 30H)

16.12.5 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE KANJI CODES

• Shift JIS
• JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Barcode Data Command.)

16-13
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.13 PDF417, MicroPDF417

16.13.1 MODE/CODE
The following modes are automatically selected according to the code used.
[PDF417]

Mode Code Details

EXC mode Alphanumerics, 0 to 9 A to Z a to z space ! ”
symbols # $ % & ’ ( ) * + , - .
/ : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ] ^
_ ` { | } ~ ∆ CR HT
Binary/ASCII Plus Binary International 00H to FFH (Kanji)
mode Character Set
Numeric Compaction Numerics 0 to 9
mode

[MicroPDF417]

Mode Details
Upper case letters, space A to Z space
Binary international character set 00H to FFH (Kanji)
Numerics 0 to 9

16-14
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.13.2 TRANSFER CODE

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS – = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o ∆

16.13.3 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE CONTROL CODE DATA

NUL (00H) → > @ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) → > A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → > B (3EH, 42H)
Ú
GS (1DH) → > ] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → > _ (3EH, 5FH)

16.13.4 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE SPECIAL CODES

> (3EH) → > 0 (3EH, 30H)

16.13.5 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE KANJI CODES

• Shift JIS
• JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Barcode Data Command.)

16-15
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.14 QR CODE

16.14.1 MODE SELECTION

When manual mode is selected in the Format Command
y Numeric mode, alphanumeric and symbol mode, Kanji mode

Mode selection Data to be printed

y Binary mode

No. of data strings

Mode selection Data to be printed
(4 digits)

y Mixed mode

Data “,” (comma) Data “,” (comma) Data

QR code can handle all codes including alphanumerics, symbols and Kanji. Since the data
compression rate varies according to the code, a code to be used is designated when the mode
is selected.

Mode Code Details

N Numerics 0 to 9
A Alphanumerics, A to Z 0 to 9 space
symbols $ % * + - . / :
B Binary (8-bit) 00H to FFH
K Kanji Shift JIS, JIS hexadecimal

If mixed mode is selected, up to 200 modes can be selected in a QR code.

When the automatic mode is selected in the Format Command for a QR code:

Data to be printed

16-16
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.14.2 TRANSFER CODE

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL
* The shaded parts are Japanese.
They are omitted here.

16-17
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.14.3 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE CONTROL CODE DATA

NUL (00H) = > @ (3EH, 40H)
SOH (01H) = > A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) = > B (3EH, 42H)
Ú
GS (1DH) = > ] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) = > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) = > _ (3EH, 5FH)

16.14.4 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE SPECIAL CODES

> (3EH) → > 0 (3EH, 30H)

16.14.5 HOW TO TRANSMIT THE KANJI CODES

• Shift JIS
• JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Barcode Data Command.)
Examples of data designation for QR code
c Alphanumeric mode: ABC123
AABC123
Data to be printed
Designation of mode
d Binary mode: 01H, 03H, 05H
B0006>A>C>E
Data to be printed
No. of data strings
Designation of mode
e Mixed mode
Numeric mode: 123456
Kanji mode: Kanji data
Binary mode: a i u e o
Alphanumeric mode: ABC
N 1 2 3 4 5 6, K Kanji data, B 0 0 1 0 a i u e o , AABC
Data to be Data to be No. of Data to be printed Data to be
printed printed data strings printed

Designation of mode
f Automatic mode
When the data above (e) is designated in automatic mode:
1 2 3 4 5 6 Kanji data a i u e o ABC
Data to be printed

16-18
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.15 MAXICODE

Symbol Character Code Set A Code Set B Code Set C Code Set D Code Set E
Value
Decimal Binary Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal Character Decimal
0 000000 CR 13 ‘ 96 À 192 à 224 NUL 0
1 000001 A 65 a 97 Á 193 á 225 SOH 1
2 000010 B 66 b 98 Â 194 â 226 STX 2
3 000011 C 67 c 99 Ã 195 ã 227 ETX 3
4 000100 D 68 d 100 Ä 196 ä 228 EOT 4
5 000101 E 69 e 101 Å 197 å 229 ENQ 5
6 000110 F 70 f 102 Æ 198 æ 230 ACK 6
7 000111 G 71 g 103 Ç 199 ç 231 BEL 7
8 001000 H 72 h 104 È 200 è 232 BS 8
9 001001 I 73 i 105 É 201 é 233 HT 9
10 001010 J 74 j 106 Ê 202 ê 234 LF 10
11 001011 K 75 k 107 Ë 203 ë 235 VT 11
12 001100 L 76 l 108 Ì 204 ì 236 FF 12
13 001101 M 77 m 109 Í 205 í 237 CR 13
14 001110 N 78 n 110 Î 206 î 238 SO 14
15 001111 O 79 o 111 Ï 207 ï 239 SI 15
16 010000 P 80 p 112 Ð 208 ð 240 DLE 16
17 010001 Q 81 q 113 Ñ 209 ñ 241 DC1 17
18 010010 R 82 r 114 Ò 210 ò 242 DC2 18
19 010011 S 83 s 115 Ó 211 ó 243 DC3 19
20 010100 T 84 t 116 Ô 212 ô 244 DC4 20
21 010101 U 85 u 117 Õ 213 õ 245 NAK 21
22 010110 V 86 v 118 Ö 214 ö 246 SYN 22
23 010111 W 87 w 119 × 215 ÷ 247 ETB 23
24 011000 X 88 x 120 Ø 216 ø 248 CAN 24
25 011001 Y 89 y 121 Ù 217 ù 249 EM 25
26 011010 Z 90 z 122 Ú 218 ú 250 SUB 26
27 011011 [EC] [EC] [EC] [EC] [EC]
28 011100 FS 28 FS 28 FS 28 FS 28 [Pad]
29 011101 GS 29 GS 29 GS 29 GS 29 [Pad]
30 011110 RS 30 RS 30 RS 30 RS 30 ESC 27
31 011111 [NS] [NS] [NS] [NS] [NS]
32 100000 Space 32 ( 123 Û 219 û 251 FS 28
33 100001 [Pad] [Pad] Ü 220 ü 252 GS 29
34 100010 “ 34 ) 125 Ý 221 ý 253 RS 30
35 100011 # 35 ~ 126 Þ 222 þ 254 US 31
36 100100 $ 36 DEL 127 ß 223 ÿ 255 {C159} 159
37 100101 % 37 ; 59 ª 170 ¡ 161 NBSP 160
38 100110 & 38 < 60 ¬ 172 ¨ 168 ¢ 162
39 100111 ‘ 39 = 61 ± 177 « 171 £ 163
40 101000 ( 40 > 62 ² 178 ¯ 175 ¤ 164
41 101001 ) 41 ? 63 ³ 179 ° 176 ¥ 165
42 101010 ” 42 [ 91 181 ' 180 166
43 101011 + 43 \ 92 ¹ 185 · 183 § 167
44 101100 , 44 ] 93 º 186 184 © 169
45 101101 - 45 ^ 94 ¼ 188 » 187 SHY 173
46 101110 . 46 _ 95 ½ 189 ¿ 191 ® 174
47 101111 / 47 Space 32 ¾ 190 {C138} 138 ¶ 182
48 110000 0 48 , 44 {C128} 128 {C139} 139 {C149} 149
49 110001 1 49 . 46 {C129} 129 {C140} 140 {C150} 150
50 110010 2 50 / 47 {C130} 130 {C141} 141 {C151} 151
51 110011 3 51 : 58 {C131} 131 {C142} 142 {C152} 152
52 110100 4 52 @ 64 {C132} 132 {C143} 143 {C153} 153
53 110101 5 53 ! 33 {C133} 133 {C144} 144 {C154} 154
54 110110 6 54 | 124 {C134} 134 {C145} 145 {C155} 155
55 110111 7 55 [Pad] {C135} 135 {C146} 146 {C156} 156
56 111000 8 56 [2 Shift A] {C136} 136 {C147} 147 {C157} 157
57 111001 9 57 [3 Shift A] {C137} 137 {C148} 148 {C158} 158
58 111010 : 58 [Pad] [Latch A] [Latch A] [Latch A]
59 111011 [Shift B] [Shift A] Space 32 Space 32 Space 32
60 111100 [Shift C] [Shift C] [Lock In C] [Shift C] [Shift C]
61 111101 [Shift D] [Shift D] [Shift D] [Lock In D] [Shift D]
62 111110 [Shift E] [Shift E] [Shift E] [Shift E] [Lock In E]
63 111111 [Latch B] [Latch A] [Latch B] [Latch B] [Latch B]

16-19
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.15.1 When the MaxiCode specification is set to “TYPE1: Compatible with the current version”
in the system mode:
c How to transmit the control code data
SOH (01H) → > A (3EH, 41H)
STX (02H) → > B (3EH, 42H)
Ú
GS (1DH) → > ] (3EH, 5DH)
RS (1EH) → > ^ (3EH, 5EH)
US (1FH) → > _ (3EH, 5FH)
d How to transmit the special codes
> (3EH) → > 0 (3EH, 30H)

e How to transmit the Kanji codes

• Shift JIS
• JIS hexadecimal
(For details, refer to the section for the Barcode Data Command.)

NOTE: “NUL” code in the table cannot be used; however, it can be designated. If it is designated,
data following “NUL” code is not printed.

16-20
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.15.2 When the MaxiCode specification is set to “TYPE2: Special specification” in the system
mode:
[Transfer Code for MaxiCode]

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F
0 NUL DLE SP 0 @ P ` p
1 SOH DC1 ! 1 A Q a q
2 STX DC2 ” 2 B R b r
3 ETX DC3 # 3 C S c s
4 EOT DC4 $ 4 D T d t
5 ENQ NAK % 5 E U e u
6 ACK SYN & 6 F V f v
7 BEL ETB ’ 7 G W g w
8 BS CAN ( 8 H X h x
9 HT EM ) 9 I Y i y
A LF SUB * : J Z j z
(
Note1)

B VT ESC + ; K [ k {
C FF FS , < L \ l |
D CR GS - = M ] m }
E SO RS . > N ^ n ~
F SI US / ? O _ o DEL (Note2)

The all codes (00H to FFH) can be used. In the following cases, however, the codes will
become special codes. For the transfer method, refer to the following:
Note 1: In case of LF (0AH) data:
LF (0AH) → J (FFH, 4AH)
Note 2: In case of (FFH) data:
(FFH) → (FFH, FFH)
ESC (1BH) and NUL (00H) can be used as they are.

16-21
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.16. DRAWING OF BARCODE DATA

: Field to be incremented/decremented
(The absence of a solid line invalidates incrementing/decrementing.)
: Field subject to printing numerals under bars.

Type of Barcode: JAN8, EAN8

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data
8 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data

Other than 8 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data
8 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8
Data

Other than 8 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data

7 digits
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

Other than 7 digits Not to be drawn

16-22
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: JAN13, EAN13

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

12 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11

Data

11 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11

Data

11 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

16-23
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: UPC-A

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

11 digits
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

10 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

10 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

16-24
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: UPC-E

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data
7 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data

Other than 7 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data
7 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7
Data

Other than 7 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 Calculate and reflect modulus 10 in the barcode.
Data
6 digits

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 C/D
Data

Other than 6 digits Not to be drawn

16-25
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: JAN8 + 2 digits, EAN8 + 2 digits

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data
10 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data
10 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

Other than 10 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

9 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D D8 D9
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 9 digits Not to be drawn

16-26
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: JAN8 + 5 digits, EAN8 + 5 digits

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Data

12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 C/D D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

16-27
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: JAN13 + 2 digits, EAN13 + 2 digits

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data
15 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data

Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data
15 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15

Data

Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data

14 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D D13 D14
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 14 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

13 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data

13 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

16-28
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: JAN13 + 5 digits, EAN13 + 5 digits

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data
18 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data

Other than 18 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data
18 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data

Other than 18 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data

17 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D D13 D14 D15 D16 D17
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 17 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16

Data

16 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 P/CD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 16 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16

Data

16 digits
D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 16 digits Not to be drawn

16-29
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: UPC-A + 2 digits

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data
14 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data

Other than 14 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data
14 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14

Data

Other than 14 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13
Data

13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 13 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Data

12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12
Data

12 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

16-30
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: UPC-A + 5 digits

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data
17 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data

Other than 17 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data
17 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17

Data

Other than 17 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Data

16 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D D12 D13 D14 D15 D16
Drawing
Data
Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Other than 16 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 4 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Data

15 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 P/CD D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 4 digits.
Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10 + Price C/D 5 digits

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Data

15 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 P/CD D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 C/D D11 D12 D13 D14 D15
Drawing
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix price C/D 5 digits.
Other than 15 digits Not to be drawn

16-31
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: UPC-E + 2 digits

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
9 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Other than 9 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
9 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Other than 9 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 Calculate and reflect modulus 10 C/D in

Data the barcode.

8 digits
Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 C/D D7 D8
Data

Other than 8 digits Not to be drawn

16-32
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: UPC-E + 5 digits

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data
12 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12

Data

Other than 12 digits Not to be drawn

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input Calculate and reflect modulus

D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data 10 C/D in the barcode.

11 digits
Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 C/D D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

Other than 11 digits Not to be drawn

16-33
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: MSI

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
Max. 15 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

16 digits or more Not to be drawn

IBM modulus 10 check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Min. 2 digits Data
Max. 15 digits To be checked as IBM modulus 10
(including C/D)
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
16 digits or more

Auto affix of IBM modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 14 digits
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix IBM modulus 10.

15 digits or more Not to be drawn

IBM modulus 10 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2
Drawing
Data Affix IBM modulus 10.
Affix IBM modulus 10.
14 digits or more Not to be drawn

IBM modulus 11 + Auto affix of IBM modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 13 digits
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D1 C/D2
Drawing
Data Affix IBM modulus 10.
Affix IBM modulus 11.
14 digits or more Not to be drawn

16-34
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: Interleaved 2 of 5

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
Max. 126 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

127 digits or more Not to be drawn

Modulus 10 check
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Min. 2 digits Data
Max. 126 digits To be checked as modulus 10 C/D
(including C/D)
Drawing 0 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
127 digits or more

Auto affix of modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 125 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix a modulus 10 C/D.

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

Auto affix of DBP modulus 10

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 125 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix a DBP modulus 10 C/D.

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

16-35
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: Industrial 2 of 5

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
Max. 126 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

127 digits or more Not to be drawn

Modulus check character check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Min. 2 digits Data
Max. 126 digits To be checked as a modulus check character
(including C/D)
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
127 digits or more

Auto affix of modulus check character

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 125 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix a modulus check character.

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

16-36
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: CODE39 (Standard)

No affix
No. of Input Digits

ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Input
Data Start code Stop code
Max. 123 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Drawing
Data
124 digits or more Not to be drawn

Modulus 43 check
No. of Input Digits

Input ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Data
Min. 2 digits Start code Stop code
Max. 123 digits To be checked as modulus 43 C/D
(including C/D)
Drawing ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
124 digits or more

Auto affix of modulus 43

No. of Input Digits

Input ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Data
Start code Stop code
Max. 122 digits
Drawing ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D SP
Data

Affix a modulus 43 C/D.

123 digits or more Not to be drawn

16-37
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: CODE39 (Full ASCII)

No affix
No. of Input Digits

ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Input
Data Start code Stop code
Max. 60 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Drawing
Data
61 digits or more Not to be drawn

Modulus 43 check
No. of Input Digits

Input ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Data
Min. 2 digits Start code Stop code
Max. 60 digits To be checked as modulus 43 C/D
(including C/D)
Drawing ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
61 digits or more

Auto affix of modulus 43

No. of Input Digits

Input ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Data
Start code Stop code
Max. 60 digits
Drawing ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D SP
Data

Affix a modulus 43 C/D.

61 digits or more Not to be drawn

NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the
codes received are drawn.

Type of Barcode: NW7

No affix, C/D check, Auto affix
No. of Input Digits

Input ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Data
Max. 125 digits Start code Stop code

Drawing ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 SP
Data

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

16-38
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: No auto selection of CODE128 (Character “>” to be also counted as a digit)
No affix, PSEUDO103 check, Auto affix of PSEUDO103
No. of Input Digits

Input
Min. 3 digits ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data
Max. 125 digits
(including start
code) Drawing ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D SP
Data
Affix PSEUDO103 C/D.
2 digits or less
Not to be drawn
126 digits or more

NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C

Type of Barcode: Auto selection of CODE128

No affix, C/D check, Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

Max. 60 digits
Drawing ST D1 D2 D3 D4 AD D5 D6 D7 AD D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D SP
Data Stop code
Start code Selection code Affix
PSEUDO103
C/D.
61 digits or more Not to be drawn

NOTE: The following characters are not drawn as numerals under bars.
NUL (00H) to US (1FH), FNC1, FNC2, FNC3, SHIFT, CODE A, CODE B, CODE C

Type of Barcode: CODE93

No affix, C/D check, Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 60 digits
ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D1 C/D2 SP
Drawing
Data Stop code
Affix a modulus 47 “K” C/D.
Start code Affix a modulus 47 “C” C/D.
61 digits or more Not to be drawn

NOTE: Numerals under bars are not characters corresponding to the bars but the characters of the
codes received are drawn.

16-39
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: UCC/EAN128

No affix, C/D check, Auto affix of C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19
Data

19 digits ST FNC1 D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 --- D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 C/D1 C/D2 SP

Drawing
Data
Start code Affix a modulus 10 C/D.
Affix a modulus 11 C/D.
Stop code
Other than 19 digits Not to be drawn

Type of Barcode: POSTNET

Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5
Data

5 digits
Drawing ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D SP
Data Start code Stop code
Dedicated check digit

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

9 digits
Drawing ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 C/D SP
Data Start code Stop code
Dedicated check digit

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11
Data

11 digits
ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 C/D SP FR D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 C/D FR
Drawing Start code Frame Frame
Data
Stop code
Dedicated check digit
Other than 5, 9 and
Not to be drawn
11 digits

16-40
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: RM4SCC

Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input (ST) D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 (SP)

Data
Start code Stop code
12 digits
ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 C/D SP
Drawing
Data Start code Stop code
Dedicated check digit
13 digits or more Not to be drawn

Type of Barcode: KIX CODE

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data
18 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18
Data

19 digits or more Not to be drawn

Type of Barcode: Customer barcode

Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20
Data

20 digits
ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 D20 C/D SP
Drawing
Data Start code Dedicated check digit
Stop code
21 digits or more Data of up to 20 digits is drawn. Data of 21 digits or more is discarded.

Type of Barcode: Highest priority customer barcode

Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19
Data

19 digits ST D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 D14 D15 D16 D17 D18 D19 CC7 C/D SP

Drawing Start code CC7

Data
Dedicated check digit
Stop code
20 digits or more Data of up to 19 digits is drawn. Data of 20 digits or more is discarded.

16-41
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: RSS-14, RSS-14 Stacked, RSS-14 Stacked Omni-directional, RSS Limited
Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
13 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 C/D

Data
Dedicated check digit
14 digits or more Not to be drawn

Type of Barcode: RSS Expanded

Auto affix of dedicated C/D
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13

Data
70 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9 D10 D11 D12 D13 C/D

Data
Dedicated check digit
71 digits or more Not to be drawn
NOTE: Some data cannot be drawn even if the number of input digits is less than 70.

16-42
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Type of Barcode: MATRIX 2 of 5 for NEC

No affix
No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data
Max. 126 digits Not recognized as a check digit.

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

127 digits or more Not to be drawn

Modulus check character check

No. of Input Digits

Input D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Min. 2 digits Data
Max. 126 digits To be checked as a modulus check character
(including C/D)
Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

1 digit
Not to be drawn
127 digits or more

Auto affix of modulus check character

No. of Input Digits

Input
D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D8 D9
Data

Max. 125 digits

Drawing D1 D2 D3 D4 D5 D6 D7 D6 D9 C/D
Data Affix a modulus check character.

126 digits or more Not to be drawn

16-43
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

16.17. AUTOMATIC ADDITION OF START/STOP CODES

Designation of
Type of Barcode Start/Stop Codes
Input Data Drawing Data
12345ABC Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
*12345ABC Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
*12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
Omit Full ASCII *12345ABC*
(No designation) 12345*ABC Standard *12345*ABC*
Full ASCII *12345/JABC*
**12345ABC Standard **12345ABC*
Full ASCII */J12345ABC*
*12345ABC** Standard *12345ABC**
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard *12345*ABC*
Full ASCII *12345/JABC*
12345ABC Standard *12345ABC
Full ASCII *12345ABC
*12345ABC Standard **12345ABC
Full ASCII */J12345ABC
12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
*12345ABC* Standard **12345ABC*
CODE 39 Add start code Full ASCII */J12345ABC*
12345*ABC Standard *12345*ABC
Full ASCII *12345/JABC
**12345ABC Standard ***12345ABC
Full ASCII */J/J12345ABC
*12345ABC** Standard **12345ABC**
Full ASCII */J12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard **12345*ABC*
Full ASCII */J12345/JABC*
12345ABC Standard 12345ABC*
Full ASCII 12345ABC*
*12345ABC Standard *12345ABC*
Full ASCII *12345ABC*
12345ABC* Standard 12345ABC**
Full ASCII 12345ABC/J*
Add stop code *12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC**
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J*
12345*ABC Standard 12345*ABC*
Full ASCII 12345/JABC*
**12345ABC Standard **12345ABC*
Full ASCII */J12345ABC*
*12345ABC** Standard *12345ABC***
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard *12345*ABC**
Full ASCII *12345/JABC/J*

16-44
 CHAPTER 16 BARCODE/TWO-DIMENSIONAL CODE TABLE
B-EP Series

Designation of
Type of Barcode Start/Stop Codes Input Data Drawing Data
12345ABC Standard 12345ABC
Full ASCII 12345ABC
*12345ABC Standard *12345ABC
Full ASCII *12345ABC
12345ABC* Standard 12345ABC*
Full ASCII 12345ABC*
*12345ABC* Standard *12345ABC*
CODE 39 Start/stop code Full ASCII *12345ABC*
not added 12345*ABC Standard 12345*ABC
Full ASCII 12345/JABC
**12345ABC Standard **12345ABC
Full ASCII */J12345ABC
*12345ABC** Standard *12345ABC**
Full ASCII *12345ABC/J*
*12345*ABC* Standard *12345*ABC*
Full ASCII *12345/JABC*

Designation of
Type of Barcode Start/Stop Codes Input Data Drawing Data
12345678 a12345678a
a12345678 a12345678
12345678c 12345678c
Omit b12345678d b12345678d
(No designation) 12345a678 a12345a678a
ab12345678 ab12345678
a12345678bc a12345678bc
d12345b678c d12345b678c
12345678 a12345678
a12345678 aa12345678
12345678c a12345678c
Add start code b12345678d ab12345678d
12345a678 a12345a678
ab12345678 aab12345678
a12345678bc aa12345678bc
d12345b678c ad12345b678c
NW7 12345678 12345678a
a12345678 a12345678a
12345678c 12345678ca
b12345678d b12345678da
Add stop code 12345a678 12345a678a
ab12345678 ab12345678a
a12345678bc a12345678bca
d12345b678c d12345b678ca
12345678 12345678
a12345678 a12345678
12345678c 12345678c
Start/stop code b12345678d b12345678d
not added 12345a678 12345a678
ab12345678 ab12345678
a12345678bc a12345678bc
d12345b678c d12345b678c

16-45